... -- 'º','º.
"...s. 2.--º'-'.223;x -:34:
|
|
L
º
"
D
D
º
º
C
º
[]
º
º
[.
D
º
º
t
:
[]
[.
ſº
ſº
[]
{
T
ſ
[]
[]
º
º
|
U
L
[.
ſº
[]
º
d
º
º
[]
|
#
--------e.ºr-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: *****...*.



/. # 2% .'
. . . - Ø2 e_2-2+2-8-
\, ->
G A L E 's
C, ABI,VIET OF KJVO/WILEDGE:
OR;
MISCELLANEOUS RECREATIONS:
conta INING
MORAL AND PHILOSOPHICAL ESSAYS, PROPOSITIONS,
N.4 TURAL AND MET 4 PHYSICAL AIA-XIMIS,
A N ID
Observations on Select Subjects of general Utili(y:
{with a Series of Easy, Entertaining, and Interesting
Mechanical, Magnetical, and Magical Experiments;
I N CLU DING
TIIE MOST CELEBRATED CARD DECEPTIONS ;
Together with about Seven Hundred
Serious, Comic, and Humorous Queries, Paradoxes, &c.
witH PERTINENT AND INGENIOUS ANSWERS;
CO J1 PRIZI N G
The Essence of the Lady's, Gentleman's, and Carnan's Diaries : Ozanam and
IIooper's Recreations ; Martin’s Philosophical Magazines, &c.
ILLUSTRATED WITH COPPER-PLATE ENGRAVINGS.
TO W III CPI AR E A D DED, .
A GREAT NUMBER OF ORIGINALS.
I, I K E W H S R
AN APPENDIN :
containing various Propositions tendiug to prove
LIG IIT AND 11 E-1T TIVO DISTINCT BEINGS :
WITH
SOME CURIOUS DEFINITIONS IN OPTICS.
wºre
**** *}raw
THE FOURTH EDITION,
}} | T H M . J A P J T. L. Ü ºf R I, E .4 D DIT I O N S.
I, O N i) O N :
PRINTED Fort cut HELL AND MART IN : L'Acki NGToN, ALLEN, AND co. ;
$CATCHERD AND LETTERMAN ; C Rost; Y AND Co. ; AND w s B.AYN Ks.
-º ºre
1808.
THE PREF.A.C.E.
-->Gººsexº-
THE Title-page setting forth so fully
the substance of this book, it is presumed
that little need be said in respect to its
contents ; yet, as a preface is usually
ºt!**~.Si-
expected, I cannot well avoid saying
something relative to its utility.
The following sheets will be found
to contain such a collection of choice,
al
ii - THE PRE FA CE.
useful, and entertaining matter as never
before appeared in print; and such as
must prove a spring of invention to the
ingenious reader ; furnishing him with
such hints, contrivances, and discoveries,
as are serviceable to the necessity, COIl-
venience, and pleasure of human life.
Of all the methods capable of being
practiced with success for cultivating the
understanding, there are none that pro-
cure more sure and lasting effects than
curiosity.
The desire of wisdom and knowledge
to us is as natural as reason, it exerts
itself with force and vivacity through
every stage of life; but never with more
efficacy than in youth, when the mind
being unfurnished with knowledge, seizes
with a peculiar eagerness on every object
THE ARE FA CE. iii
that is presented to it ; resigns itself
to the charms of novelty, and easily
contracts the habit of reflection and at-
tentiveness.
We might receive all the benefit this
happy disposition is able to produce, did
we employ our time upon subjects equally
fit to engage the mind by pleasure, and
fill it with clear and instructive ideas.
It is by this book that I propose to
lay open to every eye such entertaining
extracts as must tend to make young
persons sensible of what treasures they
possess unenjoyed; and to present to their
observation those things which inat-
tention, want of time and opportunity
might have concealed from them.
a 2
iv THE PR a FACE,.
But as it is not sufficient to give the
mind a propensity to be curious, by en-
tertaining it with agreeable subjects,
unless we likewise teach it to be mo-
derate and cautious in its curiosity, my
intention has been not so much to collect
all the deep learning that may be ad-
vanced under each particular, but to offer
that which seems, in my judgement, most
easily to present itself to the first efforts
of reason; and to be most adapted to the
taste and occasions of those readers whom
I had principally in view.
As to the mode of the work, I have
endeavoured to exclude from it whatever
might seem disagreeable; and instead of
a methodical discourse, or chain of dis-
sertations, that frequently satiate and
T H E PRE FACE. Y
disgust, I have chosen the stile most
natural and proper to engage all sorts of
readers.
The works to which I have had re-
course for my own information, and to
justify my remarks, are such, I have no
doubt, as will meet the good opinion and
approbation of my readers; suffice it to
say, that they are scarce, and not to be
found in every library.
The alterations I have made to the mat-
ter extracted are of two kinds, some only
relate to a few expressions that seemed
too negligently touched, while others
regard the substance of things, which in
some places it was necessary to illustrate,
and in others to entirely reform ; and
ſº.
WI THE PREFACEs.
upon the whole no pains have been spared
to render this work valuable, and worthy
of attention.
J. GAL.E.

I N D E X.
THE FIRST PART.
Page
TRUTH'S moral Euclid - - * gº º l
True moral Maxims sº - - * º as: Q
Propositions - - - º - tº- tº- - 3
Moral Propositions, Rules, &c. - º -> Ö
Moral Observations * tº- (-1 i- * jº: 9
Of Time - - * 4- * - - º º I 2
The Theory of Motion of the Celestial Bodies in our System 17
Of apparent, real and absolute Motion Yº-
Of the Cause and Mamier of Eclipses
* * } S
- - - 10
viii, IND EX,
Dimensions of the Earth and Moon's council Shadows º
Eclipses - - - sº - - - 20
Nature of Eclipses - - - - - * – 21
The Doctrine and Application of Morality - - - 23
Of the Vicissitudes of States and Kingdoms - - 25
The Notions of Spinoza and Atheism confuted - - 29
The Origin of Popes and Popery • - -. - 33
Of the Jewish Year - - -º: - - - 36
The Reasons for the Commencement of the Date of the Year in
January; and Correction of the British Calendar 39
Chronology of Christ's Crucifixion - - - 40
Controversy of Phlegon's Eclipse at Christ's suffering
- decided sº º- - * * tº- – 44
Of primitive and reformed Christianity sº - - 47
The Temple of Folly - - - - - - 4s
The Philosophy of Manners, with the Doctrine and Appli-
cation thereof to Human Conduct - º 53
Of the Supreme Being and Creator of the Universe - 58
Effects of Bad Company - * * - - 61
Miscellaneous and Moral Observations * - - 63
On the Advantages to be gained from any Company - 67
Change of Acquaintance - sºs * - - 69
Rules found in the Study of a periodical Author - 70
Address to British Youth at School - *m wº – 7 J
The Duty of Man inferred from the Works of Creation 7
} N DEX. ix.
THE SECOND PART.
Page
The Card of Divination sº - gº - 76
Four confederate Cards † = tº * 77
Numerical Card sº sº ºr gºs 77
i)ivination Sword gº tº tº fºr tº 78
The Card thought of per force * -º * ,- 78
Transmutable Cards $º tº- º tº 78
Three magical parties wº * ºr *º 79
The inverted Cards * tºº tº gº 79
Card discovered by Touch or Smell se - 80
Incomprehensible Transposition $º - 80
—Card in the Pocket Book . . ge - S1
To tell the Card that a Person has only touched with his
Finger * sº gº tº-f - S1
To name several Cards that two Persons have drawn from the
Pack tº- gº zºº, gº gº SQ
The two convertible Aces tº * > sº dº S2
To shuffle Cards in such a manner, as always to keep one
certain Card at the bottom $º - S3
call for any Card in the Pack gº º - S3
How to make a Card jump out of the Pack sº - 84.
to tell what Card any one thinks of * - S4
—to let twenty Persons draw twenty Cards, and to make
one Card every one's Card tºº sº sº
S
5
—to change a Pack of Cards into all manner of Pictures S5
To make the Constable catch the Knave ... - - 85
b
X. ! N \) tº X.
Fº
3.
£
e
S
6
How to make a Card jump out of an Egg - -5
On a Person's choosing a Card, liow to strike them all out
of the Person's Hand, cacept the very Card which
7
º, as taken * * - - º
S
7.
To tell what Card a Person thinks of - - -:
How to deliver four Aces, and convert them to four Knaves S7
To tell what Card a Person pitches on, without seeing the
Card * * *- * - SS
To discover the Number of Points on three Cards - 80
The ten Duplicates gº - - - - 80
º To name the Number of Cards that a Person shall take out
of the Pack - * - * - Q0
A Century of different Names being written on the Cards, to
tell the particular Name which any Person has
thought of º * - - – 90
Of the Combinations of the Cards - - - 04.
To make Cards give an Answer to a Question sº I (){}
Twenty-four Letters being writted upon so many Cards, to
shuffle then, and then shew them in proper order 101
Several Letters being written promiscuously upon thirty-two
Cards, to find in a part of them a Question and
Answer * - ſº I () 2
To write thirty-two Letters on so many Cards, then shuffle
and deal them to two persons in such a manner
that the Cards of one shall contain a Question, and
the other an Answer wº J ().3
Th five lºcauſies - * º * I (). [.
f N D EX. xi.
i.
Page
The Cards of the Game of Piquet, being mixed together
after shuffling them, to bring, by cutting them, all
the Cards of each suit together * º 105
To divide the Pack in two unequal parts, and name the
number of points in each ** * 100
The inconceivable Repique g º tº 107
Metamorphosed Cards * * zº I 1 ()
Repique with Carte Blanche - *-5 - 1 12
To name Cards on which several Persons shall fix tº- 1 22
name the Rank of the Card that a Person has drawn
from a piquet Pack º sº sº | 23
tell the Amount of the Numbers of two Cards that a
Person may draw gº tº- º 123
tell the Amount of the Numbers of three Cards 124
communicate Intelligence by a Pack of Piquet Cards 126
The Card discovered under the Handkerchief * 127
To change the Cards that several Persons have drawn | 2S
The four inseparable Kings * * º 12S
To tell the number of Cards by their weight tºº I QS
discover the Card that is drawn by the Throw of
a Die sº - * tº wº 129
To separate the two Colours of a Pack of Cards by one
cut sº e- * * - 1 CŞ
The metamorphosed Cards dº tºº sº 130
—Cards in the Opera Glass *s x- º I 3 i
—Cards in Tea Caddeys , - sº- *-*. IS 1
To guess the Thoughts of any Person wº * J 32
xii. I N DEX,
Page
The Magic Ring sº tºº † -º :* 132
- Card in the Mirror — * .gs I 33
Divinating Perspective Glass * rº, 1 34.
Dancing Card *= * +- * 1 35
Card nailed to the Wall with a Pistol Shot 136
Burnt Card shut up in a Watch & sº 137
Cards named, discovered with the Eyes blinded 138
Card springing up into the Air without being touched 138
Burnt Writing restored - iº º 139
—Opaque Box rendered transparent sº 140
Penetrative Guinea º tº sº 1 40
Artificial Memory * > * ſº | 4 |
Artificial Bird, singing at the Company's Command 144
Piece of Money shut up in a Box, from whence it
escapes without its being touched gºs } 45
4 ſº
• Writing concealed in a Snuff Box º 146
Three Pen Khives being put into a Cup, one of which jumps
out at command º * lºº 147
The Dance of the Egg gº's & * 147
—Bird's Death and Resurrection tº gº 148
——Golden Head on three Rings * tº * 149
Rings passed on a double Riband . 140
—— Sympathetic Lamp * tº- $3 I 50
— Little Huntsman sº 㺠** 1 50
Ball thrown into the little three doored House | 5 ||
Theophrastus Paracelsus * sº * I jº
IND EX, xiii.
Page
The Magic Nosegay tº §º ſº 153
Ring in a Pistol ſº sº * tº tº | 53
Coffer that opens at pleasure tºº * * 1 54
Watch pounded in a Mortar sº gº 1 54
Pistol discharged at a Person, who receives the Ball
on the point of a Knife - $º tºº 155
—Mystical Dial &=s ºr , - fº 155
Corresponding Spaces * º dº 156
Musical Cypher * tº tº º * º- 157
A Person making choice of Numbers, another shall name the
Number by which the Sum of those Numbers is
divisible * ſº º ſº 158
To find the Difference between two Numbers, the greatest
of which is unknown ise * º 158
tell by the Dial of a Watch at what Hour any Person
intends to rise sº º 3 ºn sº 1.59
Two Tricks relating to Numbers tº gº 160
The Magical Century iº sº * iº 161
confederate Counters A- mºs * * 162
To find the Number of Points that arise from throwing
Dice, after some operations dºe tº º 163
Two Dice being thrown, to find the upper Points of each
Die without seeing them sº ſº 164
Upon the Throw of three Dice, to find the upper Points of
each Die without seeing them gº tº 165
To find a Number thought of by another º 106
xiv. I ND EX.
Page
A curious and agreeable Wager, which you are sure of winning 166
Method of melting Steel, and to see it liquify 167
To pull off a Person's Shirt without undressing him 167
How to dispose two little Figures, so that one shall light a
Candle, and the other put it out * 16S
Optical Augmentation sº * * 169
Optical Subtraction sº * - 169
The Camera Obscura, or dark Chamber sº 170
To shew the Spots on the Sun's Disk * * 172
magnify small Objects by means of the Sun's Rays let
into a dark Chamber sº sº 17.2
The Magic Lantern sº gº gº 17.2
Method of painting the Glasses for the Lantern 174
How to rub out twenty Chalks at five times rubbing out,
every time an odd one tº º 4-º 175
To cut a Looking Glass tº º sº 176
change the Colour of a Rose sº <--> 177
Blind Abbess and her Nuns sº sº tº 177
To find the Number remaining, after some Operations,
without asking any Questions ...sº 178
find the Number thought of by any one 170
To find out two Numbers thought of - sº 1 SO
Strange Tricks performed by Electricity - 180
Magnetism sº & * sº sº 1 S3
Aphorisms * . * wº iºr dº 1 St.
Mcthod of making Artificial Magnets 1 SS
I N D EX. XV,
Page
The Magnetic Perspective Glass .* sº I 00
Magnetic Table *s * º 10 I
Communicative Crown - -ºs * 191
Magician's Mirror * - * * j92
Polemoscopes te i.e. * * 194
Artificial Rainbow & & & tº 194
By the means of two plain Looking Glasses, to make a Face
appear under different forms . e 195
By the means of Water to make a Counter appear that, while
the Vesseſ was empty of Water, was hid from the Eye 106
To know which of two different Liquors is lightest without
any Scales e e & iº 196
contrive a Cask to hold three different sorts of Liquor 197
know if a suspicious Piece of Money be good or bad 197
—find the Burden of a Ship at Sea, or in the River I 08
When two Vessels are like one another, and of equal weight,
being filled with different Metals, to distinguish the
S
one from the other . º & J QS
To measure the Depth of the Sea wº e I () ()
make a Deaf Man hearthc Sound of a Musical Instrument 200
make an Egg enter a Phial without breaking Q00
— hold a Glass full of Water with the Miouth down, so
that the Water shall not run out tº Q00
The Mysterious Watch & * tº 201
Magnetic Dial ſº tº * 201
Intelligent Fly ſº & $ * G3
xvi. INDEX.
Page
To break a Pole, the extremes of which shall be laid upon
two Glasses, without hurting the said Glasses Q04.
The real Apparition * ë º 204,
A Solar Sonata * te g & Q06
An Automatous Harpsichord • * & 2O7
The Nocturnal Reveilleur * & º 208
To make Water in a Glass seem to boil and sparkle 209
THE THIRD PART.
Queries, Paradoxes, &c. e ſº tº & º 1 ()
APPENDIX.
Optical Definitions sº & g gº 340
Light and Heat distinct beings wº * > tº 344
An Essay on the Aurora Borealis . * g 3.48
Remarkable Properties of Numbers * dº 3.53
The following is an improved Answer to a Query inserted in
Page 255 of this Work.
Query.
Great Britain was discovered to be an Island in the Year
70—Who was the Discoverer 7
Answer. .
Julius Agricola, who governed Britain in the reigns of
Vespasian, Titus, and Domitian, who also was the person
that finally subdued the Britons, and traversing the whole
Island, introduced the Roman laws and civility, and incor-
borated them into the empire of their conquerors.

(G,A1][,]E'S
CABINET OF KNOWLEDGE;
OR,
4tligtellaneous Betreationſ;.
PART I.
TRUTH'S MORAL EUCLID.
RUTH in general is, what is ; and what is, is but in res-
pect of being consciously perceived by some Being; for if
there was no Being to perceive what is, nothing could exist, since
absolute inperception implies absolute Non-existence. Hence all
truth is relative, or refers to other truth, ad infinitum, till we
stop at some original; which proves the necessary and absolute
existence of a God; an adorable Great Being ; to which all
other things, or Beings necessarily refer; whose own absolute
perfections refer to his own absolute immensity, in which all
things are relatively subsisting and have their being. But how,
or in what manner this infinite and astonishing Chain of existence
depends, our capacities are ignorant, except in some very few
particulars, consistent with the nature of our present Being.
And though the Ways of this Great Being are unsearchable,
and his wonders will be ever past finding out, all intelligent Be-
ings can discern so much of his perfections, by referring to their
6wn conscious perception (the next truth lying open) as at once
- R t
f ... •
GALE's RECREATIONs.
command their profound adoration! and men, and all beings,
may be justly looked upon as a part connected with the great
whole, which though inconsiderable in respect of that immensity,
yet for wise causes cannot be destroyed; whatever changes all
beings (animate or inanimate) are appointed to undergo. And
as the Law of God is written in every man's heart, or conscious-
ness (which he cannot recede from, or find plea to evade), he
is relatively accountable for what he does in respect of his great
original, and the beings with which he is immediately connected;
and therefore this standard of consciousness in man, beyond dis-
pute, is the truth, to which all his actions must refer; and even
his volition, or will, according as he is conscious of his intention
of good or evil, and no farther. And for any man to assert that
he is not free, (notwithstanding his connection with other parts of
the universe by which he may be relatively influenced) is the same
in truth, as if he were to assert that he did not exist, when his
consciousness is a proof of it to himself, and his very denial of his
existence, a proof of it to the consciousness of others. So like-
wise he that denies the existence of a God, denies his own exist-
ence. If truth could be set aside or baffled, as easy as it is denied
by sceptics (who sometimes disallow the Freedom of Human
Actions), Human Laws would be in vain and the judge who
should at last ask the Prisoner, guilty or not guilty, in order to
prove the truth, would himself be found guilty of a false maa-
im! When men deny the conscience and sense of things, all ar-
gument drops, and there is an end to enquiry after truth, by re-
lation or connection of propositions. -
Having cieared the way to truth (which variously refers) we
would establish some general maxims (referring to the standard
of conscietitious right and wrong) as rules for Happiness in tº
conduct of Human Life. And herein we are obliged to the
learned, wise and just maxims of the ancients.
|True Moral Maxims.
1. The end of man's existence is proposed for happiness.
2. General happiness should be proposed in the private, and
in respect of Society. - - - º
3. Men should not do unto others what they would not be
done unto, in respect of conscientious right and wrong.
4. Virtues and vices in men's power, make rewards and pu-
inishments necessary, in respect of society.
GALE's RECREATIONs. 3
5. In some cases, mercy is better than justice, in respect of
society.
6. God is seen in-all his works.
7. God is adorable for his perfections, &c.
PROPOSITIONS.
1 Virtue promotes happiness, private and public.
2. Vice is destructive of happiness, private and public.
3. Honour is the reward of virtue.
4. Fawn not on a prince, nor trample a beggar under foot, &c.
by which it will be seen how far morality is capable of demon-
stration, according to the opinion of Mr. Lock, in his Essay on
Human Undersögriding, that is ; by an induction of moral pro-
positions or precepts in the solution of any moral difficulty, or "
problem.
PROPOSITION I.
Virtue promotes happiness, private and public.
DEFINITION and DEMONSTRATION.
As in our introduction concerning truth, we have proved, that
every thing known by the human mind, is but by its reference to,
or comparison with other things, according to conscious percep-
tion; and that nothing is absolute but God; so virtue refers to
human action, or disposition of mind, and the comparison of
each with one another. *
VIRTUE is the name of such moral actions, and disposition of
mind, wherein the benefit of human society, in general, is con-
sciously intended. If the benefit is restrained to particular
persons, at the expence of injury to others, it is not moral pub-
lic good; which likewise regards the end of society linked in
government. What promotes moral public good among
the whole, and in each particular, promotes happiness, private
and public; which is virtue. * • *-* * * *
Corollary.
HENCE, to act according to virtue is to act consistently with
the harmony and benefit of the whole, and of each particular
member of society; which is the same as to act according to
reason, judgment, and morality. -- *.
$ 2
G A LE's RECREATIONs.
PROPOSITION II.
Pice is destructive of happiness, private and publie.
DEFINITION and DEMONSTRATION.
V1 E being the contrast, or opposite to virtue, refers likewise
to action, and disposition of mind, wherein selfish gratification
gud private ends are considered, or consciously intended to the
hurt of particular persons, against the benefit of society. If the
ends intended by action, and disposition of mind, were for moral
public good, they would not come under the denomination of
vice ; but those ends are sometimes perverted, and intended for
public mischief, in the gratification of private ambition, spleen,
or resentment, which is vice of the deepest dye: As witness re-
bellions in Heaven and on earth. Yet they always tend to des-
troy the peace and welfare of particulars, and therein are de-
structive of that harmony, which should subsist in the whole;
consequently are destructive of happiness, private and public.
Q. E. D.
Corollary.
IIENCE, to act according to vice, is to act inconsistently with
the harmony of the whole, and of each particular member of so-
ciety; which is to actaccording to madness, folly and immorality.
Scholium.
THE degrees of virtue and vice are according to the degrees
of the good and ill intention with which they are practised.
ILL consequences may ensue from good design, and good
effects from ill purposes, as matters of slight or little consequence
may proceed from either; which alter not the merit or demerit
of the motive they proceed from. So likewise consciousness of
right and wrong, each person's director, is the measure of inno-
cence, where neither good nor ill is intended; as it is the mea-
sure of every duty and omission in human life.
As men are linked in society, under the particular forms of
government, and each member's time part of the public treasure,
they are bound by their obligations to God for their Being, and
the whole community for protection, to bear and forbear with
one another as much as possible, consistent with their respec-
tive happiness, and the public emolument; according to
GALE’s RECREATIONS. 5
the maxim of Epictetus. But discovering men of treacherous
dispositions, we may safely be allowed to break off farther soci-
ety with them; as with the fewest acquaintance there is the least
hazard of disagreement. And men of the aforesaid dispositions
may be looked upon as pernicious members of society, by what-
soever veil they appear with fair characters. As it is incumbent
on every member of society, by nature and reason, to promote
his neighbour's welfare and happiness, so far as it is consistent
with his own, and the happiness of the whole; so is it against
nature and reason for the whole, or any particular number of
members thereof, more or less, to diminish the welfare or hap-
piness of any particular, or particulars, belonging to that soci-
ety; the obligations betwixt each and the whole being mutual
and reciprocal. Yet, where men wilfully counterplot each
other's happiness, for private lucre, and ambitious views to them-
selves, the satirist is at liberty, with a moral view, to use me-
thods for reclaiming them, and for restoring the benevolence of
society. There are many other unworthy members of society,
whose vices are all proper objects of the satirist's ridicule.
The preceding propositions proved true, being the two prin-
cipal ones in the doctrine of morality, serving like 47 E. 1, and
4 E. 6. in geometry, the demonstration of many other propo-
sitions may be deduced therefrom, and the axioms of the con-
scientious right and wrong, and of doing as we would be done
by ; which axioms are often forgot, or neglected.
--~~~<xº~–
PROPOSIT ON III.
Honour is the reward of virtue.
T H E D E M ONSTRATION
ls very plain from the foregoing inductions : for virtue being
benevolent to all, ºust needs be applauded and rewarded by
many; bringing reputation and honor. Q. E. D.
--~~~$3׺xº~~
PROPOSIT ON IV.
Fawn not on a prince, nor trampie & beggar under foot.
HD E MO N STIR AT IO N.
To ſawn, is to suffer one's self to be trod under foot, by
courting the insolence of mankind ; by which servility many
() G ALE'S RECREATIONS.
*
have paved their way with difficulties who might have gone
smooth and easy; which was therefore acting not right. And
to treat a beggar as we would not be treated ourselves, by tread-
ing him under foot, is acting against conscience, and therefore
wrong. Q. E. D.
We now proceed to lay down such moral propositions and
rules of happiness in the conduct of human life, as occur to our
present perception; leaving the demonstration thereof to be ex-
amined hereafter, as we shall find occasion, in solving moral
problems relating to right and wrong practices of mankind ;
wherein we propose to make discoveries in the crooked and by-
ways of human action, shewing, by investigation, how to square
and rectify the same.
MORAL PROPOSITIONS, RULEs, &c.
I. To avoid ill thoughts, is to be habituated and employed
in good ones.
2. Conversation with wise men delights and inspires us with
'noble sentinents.
3. Evil communication corrupts good manners ; or, ill or
foolish company communicate their contagion.
4. ALEXANDER the Great learned his drunkenness by asso-
ciating with Leonides ; and NERO his cruelty of his barber.
5. Idle jests, in conversation, are the squibs of wit; and vain
compliments, verbal idolatry.
6. Make no figure among cyphers.
7. In the reputation of being witty, is commonly lost the re-
putation of being wise.
S. To study mature, is to read the volumes of the universe,
lying open to all, but regarded by few.
9. Chuse your books as you do your friends.
10. Antisthenes used to say, that learning was good company.
11. Shum ill manners, wherever you meet them.
12. By much familiarity esteem is lost. -
13. If any slanders you, observe to him, that he knows not
your other faults, because if he had, he would have mentioned
them.
14. Always reprove the vice, but not reproach the person.
15. Virtue procures and secures friends.
16. Be thou bonorum marimus & magnorum optimus.
17. As all men desire happiness, each member of society
should promote the happiness of his fellow being, but
GA Lº's RECREATIONS., 7
f
always consistently with justice to himself, and the public com-
munity, i. e. for uſ! men to do as they would be done by.
18. Self-lore, which is implanted in us to serve ourselves,
should teach us, by our own wants, to serve others.
19. Benefits received lay us under proportionable obligations
to our benefactors.
20. Injuries done to private persons sometimes are better re-
sented with forgiveness than justice, in respect of the forgiver's
happiness consequent thereto.
21. To forgive private injuries and affronts, or to return
them with kindliess and civilities, shames the offender, and may
work better effect than exacting justice.
22. General satire and hio'erate justice restore the benevo-
lence of society, while personal reflection and persecution stir
up endless hatred and malice.
23. If man is not a free agent, as some sceptics assert, he has
no cause to complain of injuries received, or of what others can
bring upon him.
24. If man is a free age nt, as his consciousness suggests to
liim, he is worthy of rewards or punishments, or of the favour
or disesteem of others, according as he promotes or destroys the
happiness of his fellow beings, with whom he is linked a mem-
ber of society, by the nature of government.
25. The only proof of the freedom and power of ille human
\\ I LL is man's consciousness of them.
26. The greatest virtue that can be acquired is the habit of
doing good.
27. The greatest vice that can be attained is the habit of
doing evil. -
2S. Neglecting to do good, when we have it in our power,
without doing injury to ourselves, or others, is a prostitution of
our abilities.
29. To destroy public happiness is the grand quality of the
Devil.
30. To promote public happiness is a kingly virtue.
31. The passions, which are the principal motives of action,
serve to exercise eur reason, which, by comparing consequences,
regulates our conduct.
32. The passions and reason are rightly proportioned; though
the former become predominant by habit.
33. Religious faith agreeing with morality, refines the af-
fections, and fills the mind with serenity and composure.
8 ! GALE'S RECREATIONs.
34, Hope, by religious faith, if grounded on morality, exalts
the mind to greater happiness than acts of virtue can do with-
out faith: because men may be strictly moral, but wanting re-
ligion, can build no hopes on the reward of their virtue from
the SUPREME BEING. *
35. The rational customs of religious worship, void of super-
stition, exalt our thoughts to magnanimity and virtue.
36. Religion, morality, and happiness, consequent thereto,
are promoted by frequent attention to those two subjects.
37. Irreligion, immorality, and misery, are increased by a
º with the monstrous productions of hell in human
Snape. - -
38. Offences and injuries received should be treated with
charity, or justice; but not with malice or revenge.
39. He that is guilty of lying or deceit, is incapable of friend-
ship with all honest men; because he cannot be depended upon.
40. He that advances a wilful falsehood of another in public,
by making a false quotation, or translation (as Lauder did of
Milton), is as great a criminal as a false evidence at the bar of a
court of justice, where matter of property is concerned; because
he is equaily audacious, and guilty of ill design.
41. Criticism is no crime, except attended with evil intention,
and wilful misrepresentation.
42. He that accuses another of evil, and evil designs, and
cannot prove his assertions, deserves the punishment due to that
evil he would make another guilty of.
43. Avarice of fame is attended with numerous evils.
44. The surest way to fame of any kind is by indifference
about it, while the pursuit is some public good.
Vice is a monster of so frightful mien,
As to be hated, needs but to be seen ;
But seen too oft, familiar with her face,
We first endure, then pity, then embrace, -
- - POPE's Ethics.
Corollary. -
Hence religion (not founded on superstition) and morality,
are found mutual friends to each other. Religion cannot sub-
sist without morality; and morality without religion is like a tra-
velier passing by himself over a desert country, and losing his
way. -
&; ALE’s R F.CR E ATIONS. 9
}
}
From prop. 33, 34, 35, 36 (all proved true by a short in-
duction), appears the great use of setting one day apart in seven
for divine contemplation and worship, according to the custom
of all wise nations, adoring their creator on the sabbath. By
which religious application, Mr. Pope's master-passion, and
train of lesser serpents, lamented in Ethic Epist. II. V. 101.
to W. 150, can be only subdued. -
Schołium.
To those who may ask, what is the importance of the many
trifling actions of mankind to an INFINITE BEING, during
their continuance upon this earthly spot, Mr Addison observes,
that the happiness of a future life is the natural result of good
habits acquired in this, and not of any merit in us for such a
state, except by those habits. Man first lost his happiness by
an act of disobedience to his maker, if original tradition may be
credited ; and if he continues to follow the corruptions of his
nature from his evil choice, mercy, though infinite, is supposed
to avail him nothing. Though man is so limited in his bodily
capacity, as to appear of little more consideration than a mite in
the universal eye, surveying all nature, yet by his intellectual
consciousness, foresight, and boundless contemplation, partak-
ing of the divine nature, his emulation for the highest achieve-
ments, and his desire of immortality, he seems to be designed
by his maker for no less honour than an Abidel, Raphael, or
Michael, described by Milton in his Paradise Lost.
M OR AL O BSERVATIONS.
1. “Men who will not take warning will not take advice.”
2. Spleen, impudence, and ill-manners, are immorally used,
and too often mistaken for wit.
3. If you seek peace, avoid the immoral and vain.
4. “Ill company is like a dog, who fouls those most whom he
loves best.”
5. Trust not treachery a second time.
6. “A nice man is a man of nasty ideas.”
7. Formality is no token of friendship.
8. Many people take more care to hide their wisdom than
their folly,
\, ,
w
I () - G ALE’s RECREATIONs.
9. Affectation is the ape of sense and polite breeding; i.e.
the ape of dignity. -
10. The inquisitive man is a dangerous acquaintance.
11. Popular pageantry is the fop's happiness. -
12. Health, peace, and sufficiency, constitute the happiness
of a wise man. -
13. Marriages will be more happy, when the married are
more discreet. - -
14, Drunkenness, gaming, riot, and excess, are the fashion-
able arts of this age. -
15. Science and literary improvements are as much neg-
lected, as they were in the declining state of the Roman empire.
16. With all our religion, we fall greatly short of the Roman
Virtues. - . -
17. If religion is hypocrisy, virtue is turned out of doors.
18. Oh! the vast fountains of happiness that are shut up and
restrained. - *...
19. If each qualified person endeavoured to promote the
happiness and welfare of individuals (like the late Duke of Rich-
mond, of glorious memory) what blessings would soon flow over
this land. - - *
20. Shall any neighbouring nation pretend to, rival Britain
in wisdom, prowess, virtue, learning, and beneficence?
21. If some had the power to promote pºtblic good, as they
wish it, how happy would this nation be
22. Exemplary practices among the great have the Incs: ;-
fluencing effect upon the human mind, whether good or bad.
If good, the scheme proposed by the late celebrated Dean Swift,
for the advancement of religion and virtue, is certainly the best
that can be thought of. . . - -
23. How would it redound to the glory of this nation, and
the good of posterity, to see it recorded in history, that in such a
century, by the united force of men in power, vice, and immo-
rality in England received a deadly blow, and the British dia-
dem a jewel of inestimable value ! f -
24. All controversial argument convinces so much the more,
the more it is moral, and free from ill manners. *
25. Abºise in argument to prove truth, is just like Swearing
in conversation to prove courage. - !
26. Moral ridicule or raillery, in public argument, serves to
rouse the attention of the respondent and hearers, also to lash
public infany, with the satirical justice due to it; but in per-
* := GALE’s RECREATIONS. 11
sonal disputes about knowledge, and the fame of it, ridicule and
raillery, confined to decency, serve to assert understanding, and
silence and abash the obstinate in error.
27. The passions (more strong in some than others) are apt to
be inflamed on any real or fancied injury received, and the force
of reason can hardly restrain them; yet the will, as president,
and the rational powers being summoned to council, the passions
thereon become obedient, and submit to order.
28. While there is evil in the world, men will still be in-
fringing upon each other; the evil first brought in, and still
subsisting among mankind, being the cause of all the misfortune
and misery attending their being.
29. Evil is so habitually planted in some natures, it is not in
the power of friends to promote some men's happiness, while
(like common prostitutes) they are still seeking misfortune, and
bringing it down upon their own heads !
30. Abandoned huckney writers complain of their cruel treat-
ment from booksellers, to whom their ill morals have justly ren-
dered them a prey: like prostitutes for pay, that will oblige and
p—r their benefactors at the same time. - - .
31. “ The serpent loseth not his sting, though benumbed
with the frost: the tooth of the viper is not broken, though
the cold closeth his mouth ; take pity on his state, and he
will shew thee his spirit; warm him in thy bosom, and he wil
requite thee with death.”
32. Genius may be admired in any, but ill morals must be
hated in all. -
33. It is no charity to assist a prostitute lost to all shame, and
abandoned to misery of his or fier own seeking.
34. He that chooseth a beast able to bear his burthen s
find rest ; but he that carries a Pułture upon his shoulders s]
be pulled to pieces, and die, as he lives, miserable.
35. Dirt thrown at a clear character will not stick. -
36. The heart of the hypocrite is hidden in his bosom, and his
business is to deceive. *
37. He works in the dark like a mole, and fancies himself
safe; but blunders into day-light, and is betrayed and exposed,
with his dirt in his hand. -
38. His days are a perpetual constraint upon him, and his
tongue and his heart are for ever at variance.
{
&
{{
4.
&
{
T
§
.*
Rºll
mali
13 GALE’s RECREATIONs.
OF TI./JTE,
T IME, by it's nature, proceeds with a constant and equable
flux, and therein differs from duration, which is perma-
ment and stable. The measure of Time must therefore be re-
ferred to motion of some kind or other: that of the heavenly
bodies has, by the universal consent of all ages, been made
choice of for this purpose; especially the sun and moon, which
seem to have been attended, besides their other uses, for per-
petual chronometers by the divine architect himself; namely, to
distinguish, and mark out, seasons, days, and years.
Relative rest we observe daily in the masses of lifeless matter
about us; but absolute rest in any thing in infinite space, is as
hard to be assigned, as the place of an absolute vacuum, or space
void of all substance whatsoever.
Though the earth's motion from west to east, contrary to the
sun's apparent one from E. to W. is doubtless the truth; yet
some have questioned, whether the sun has only a diurnal rotary
motion in the same space, or may be relatively moving contrary
to the earth, and other planets, at the same time, by which the
direct, retrograde, and stationary appearances of the neighbour-
ing globes, may without the usual principles be accounted for
(to the greater wisdom and glory of the divine architect) with
all the shining host of innumerable worlds attending ; not sup-
Tºosing the sun to move at so vast a distance, as we now suppose,
in completing the annual period.
Astronomers observe that days, hours, and minutes are res-
pectively unequal, occasioned by the earth slackening her pace,
and sometimes quickening it again, in her orbit. This they infer
from the sun's different apparent motion. Therefore to mea-
sure time, or refer it to a standard of uniform motion, they have
fixed the length of the tropical or solar year (or that time where-
in the sun and earth finish all their positions in respect of each
other) to the exact period of 365d 5h 48m 67s 39th &c. which
however, is no more certain, than the mean length of a day;
since, in this computation, they divide the distance of time
betwixt any two distant AEquinoxes observed, by the number
of revolutions happening between, for the length of this sup-
posed permanent solar-period. And I have observed, that Sir
Isaac Newton went no farther back than 20 years betwixt
the two obsefvations, which could not bring the measure of
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 13
the year to so great an exactness, as if he had gone as far back
as the farthest true observation that has been made of the Sun's
arrival at any point of the ecliptic, and so dividing the whole
time elapsed by the remotest observation, whether of Ptolemy,
or before. The mean tropical year this way determined would
have rendered it near the truth, if there had been an error of an
hour or more in the first observation ; because the error would
have been divided into so many parts by the number of revolu-
tions as to become of insignificant value in one single revolution,
or year.
Hence 365d Q42.334027 dec : 365d: 12s : 1 1s. 09203814, &c.
− 1 1s. 290 45m 40s 7th, &c. the mean distance moved over by
the sun in a common year: according to which the mean di-
urnal motion in the ecliptic – 59m 8s, &c. whereas the appa-
rent or real motion amounts to 61 m sometimes, but at other
times scarce to 575. And the mean and true times are ever
proportional to the mean and true motions.
But considering the annual motion of the equinoctial points
in antecedentia, reckoned at the mean rate of 50s by some (but
differently by others) the variation of the ecliptic's obliquity, the
different distances of observed Equinoxes, for determining the
length of the solar-period, an uncertain length of the year must
thence arise; whence it follows, that all astronomical tables,
built on this or that particular length of years, must vary more
or less from truth in computing by them, according as the pre-
cession admitted, length of the year, eccentricity of the earth's
orbit, ecliptic's obliquity, and the mean and true motion there-
from, variously measured. Computations by each of these tables
will agree with observations nearest the time when the tables
were made, except when errors of one kind compensate for those
of another. Mr. Street's Astronomia Carolina Tables, once in
great repute for their exact use in computing the places of the
celestials, are since exceeded by Mr. Flamsteed's solar numbers,
as Mr. Flamsteed's will very likely be exceeded by Dr. Halley's,
and as Dr. Halley's tables will, very likely, be exceeded by others
of a still newer improvement. Astronomical instruments, ex-
acter than those used by Mr. Flamsteed in Sir Isaac Newton's
time, or Dr. Halley's since, are now most commended, and there
is no fault now in the eye of an observer. And the set of motions
which have been deduced from a set of observations (foreign
and domestic) must yield to the next more fashionable. Sir
Isaac Newton's theory of the moon, at first so much applauded,
C
14 GA1. E'S RECREATIONS.
has since, by infallible observation, been discovered to be ini-
perfect;-which is also evinced by the reformers of gravity
among the Celestial bodies, like the Corpuscularians in the
practice of physic.
Another gentleman (more indefatigable than any of his
predecessors) has discovered the aberration of the fixed stars from
the motion of light and of the earth in its orbit; and has made
a curious and unexpected discovery (in a letter to the Right
Honourable the Earl of Macclesfield) of a new motion among
the fixed stars. And worlds, or distant systems, may probably
have a relative motion among one another, at the same time that
they are relatively moving on in the infinite space. The notion
of a plurality of worlds has prevailed ever since the time of the
Pythagoreans, who maintained, as we now do, the probability of
the planets being inhabited, and kept in their orbits by natural
gravity; each moving like a stone whirled round in a sling, by
centripetal and centrifugal forces. Lucretius, taught by Epicurus
and Democritus, supposed worlds without number possessing in-
finite space, and counterpoising each other by some general law
of gravitation; and that if bodies were bounded, those within
the limit would, by the attraction of one another, in time unite
in the middle space. And herein it is observable, that limits of
space appear as impossible to conception as limits of time, or
of existence; since there is no thought can imagine when time
and existence were not ; nor can imagination represent a possibi-
ity when time and existence shall be no more; therefore an
eternal existence is necessary and absolute. But the infinite suc-
cession of time, and those points of it from whence all new ex-
istence of substantial forms, or a change of things existing im-
mediately spring, and receive their astonishing modes of alter-
ation, who but an infinitely great, omnipotent, and omnipresent,
Being can comprehend ?
I can't tell how or why I came to be,
Why not before, what mortal yet could see;
I know I am, and that's enough for me.
Existing nature too ! can discern,
And wisdom infinite from thence I learn ;
'flects and causes mutually depending,
From infinite to infinite extending.
Sceptics and critics, by your learned leave,
Conscious perception can't the sense deceive,
G ALE'S RECREATIONº. 1.5
Pythagoras observing the different sound of hammers upon a
smith's anvil, discovered the harmony of music by weights sus-
pended at the ends of musical chords equally thick, generating
tones; which weights he found were to one another in a recipro-
cal proportion of the squares of the length of the chords of equaf
tension, and producing the same sound respectively : he thence
applied this harmony between weights and their distances of
suspension to the celestial bodies moving, at certain distances
about their centres of motion, called the harmony of the spheres,
proportioning the gravity, weight, or tension of each planet, to-
wards the sum reciprocally, as the squares of their respective dis-
tances, which astronomers have not gone beyond to this day.
The ancient astronomers first imagined, that the celestial
bodies had a circular and equal motion round the body which
they supposed at rest ; but hot finding this circular hypothesis
to agree with their observation (the sun spending near eight days
more in the northern than in the southern semi-circle of ecliptic),
to reconcile appearance better to supposition, fixed the earth (of
san) at rest. 3450 such parts from the centre of the supposed
circular orbit, as the radius of it is 100,000, which distance from:
the centre is called eccentricity, whence they readily caleuléte ;
the sud's place at any time. Though this theory answered pretty
well for the place of the sun, the motion of other planets coºl
not be accounted for by it ; therefore it was changed by Replei
for the elliptical theory; which supposes the stal in the lower
focus common to the elliptical ori, its of all the planets, with a
rotary motion only about his own axis, they circulating round
him, and describing constantly equai areas in equal times (or
areas proportional to the tinies) by rºys drawn from the sun to
each respective planet. By the satie hypothesis are represented
the motions ºf all the secondary planets round their primary
ones, placed in the focus of each secondary's orbit; and this by-
pothesis answers to the appearances in the heavens beyond all
others hitherto invented ; though Kepler himself at first doubted
whether some orbits vary from true ellipses; thinking it not int-
probable, that some might have a form like the section of an egg
&S 3
by the force of gravity dilating one part of the orbit more than
another. But this theory is not to be considered as truth, but a
method of adapting rules to appearances: it is but following the
track of the first circular theory, which supposed the earth (or
sun) at rest in the centre of the planetary orbits, and planets
moving circularly round them, which must then describe
*
C 2
| 6 GALE’s RECREATIONS.
equºi areas in equal times, as is now supposed in the elliptical
theory,
The Sun's least apparent diameter in apoge has been accu-
rately abserved 31 m 20s, and his greatest in perige 32n 33s, by
which it should result, that the sun's greatest and least distances
are as 953 to 1889, as 103,661 to 08,339 (vid. Keil's Astron.
p. 276), and the eccentricity only J 661 of such parts as the ra-
diºs of the circular orbit, sem. trans. (or mean dist.) of the ellip-
tica; ºne is 100,000 ; but the ancient cccentricity 3450 is above
slotºie 1661, from whence the circular theory is concluded to
be false. For admitting but 1725 one inalf of the ancient eccen-
tricity, it would better agree with the sun's apparent diameters
observed ; but then would not, so well as the whole, account for
the appearances of the sun's unequal motion round the year.
And making, as the ancients did, the centre of the circular orbit,
the centre of equal motion, 1725 eccentricity, will not account
for the annual inequalities; for the prostaphaereses, or differ-
ences between the sun's mean and true places, are thus twice as
Rauch as they will amount to with this half of ancient eccentri-
city. This defect of ancient eccentricity of the circular orbit was
afterwards remedied, by placing half of it each way from the
orbit’s centre, and making the centre of equal metion at the
contrary extreme to that where the earth or sun is placed, which
in the elliptical orbit is supposed, by Ward and Bullialdus, simi-
lar to the centre of equal motion in the circular theory. Mr.
Street's eccentricity to the present theory of the earth's motion
is 1732, and Mr. Flamsteed's 1692, which make a difference in
finding the sun's true place from his mean ; nor is this difference
likely to be adjusted, while so many observators of the celestials
are, like so many surveyors of a gentleman's estate, differing in
their quantities from one to another.
It has been observed by Kepler, that the squares of the peri-
odical times of revolving bodies, are as the cubes of the distances
from the centres of the orbits, about which they are supposed to
perform their equal motions; i.e. as the cubes of their mean
distances from the body about which they revolve. And this
universal theory of motion, examined and confirmed by Sir
Isaac Newton, is said to be only contradicted by supposing the
sun in motion, and the earth at rest.
e ALE’s RECREAT iO NS. 17
y
The Theory of Włotion of the Celestigi Bodies in our System.
—ºf ſº-
MERCURY, Venus, the Earth, Mars, Jupiter, and Saturn, in
ascending order from the Sun, revolve round him, in the lower
focus of the several elliptical orbits, as has been described ;
which, with the moon's motion round the earth, four moons, or
satellites, moving round Jupiter, and five round Saturn, at the
same time, co sixtute six primary, and ten secondary planets in
our system ; besides comets unnumbered, revolving in variously
inciined, and very eccentrical and remote orbits, crossing the
planetary orbs; all paying their respective devoirs to their great
Lord, who commands their constant attendance, while they
uutualiy gravitate, in their amours, acting on each other. The
motion of each body, and particularly that of our earth round
the Sun, the immensely greater body, is thus proved by philoso-
phical principles. The common centre of gravity between the
sun and earth, or of any other distant body, being situate
in the sun, the lesser body is compelled thereby to revolve round
him.
By the earth's uninterrupted rotary and progressive motion,
like the motion of a rolling stone over a hill, carrying its poles
nearly parallel, in an obliquity of 6640 with the plane of its or-
bit, the appearances of day and night are naturally accounted
for ; as likewise those of the seasons. And the poles of the earth
being again supposed to move backward, in a small circle, about
a degree in 72 years, will account for the precision of the equi-
noxes, or of the fixed stars departing forward of their longi-
tudes, according to what we experience.
The quantity of motion of the planetary bodies in their seve-
ral orbits, are set down farther on according to the observa-
tions of Đr. Haller; to which tables, are made farther addi-
tions and it provements from those published of that cele-
brated author's.
As to the fixed stars appearing so glorious in a sparkling ca-
nopy round us, preserving very nearly the same positions with
one another, though at such immense distances, they are proba-
bly suns to different systems, or globes of niatter, revolving res-
pectively round them, but imperceptible to us at such distances:
and these worlds, in the universal space, or inane, we may,
with reason, suppose to be of infinite number, moving toge-
C 3
18 WALE’s RECREATIONS,
ther round some central world, while each world has its res-
pective motions; being most agreeable to the notion we have of
the divine being, filling immensity, and supporting immense and
etermal existence.
And as it would be absurd to suppose the great being unat-
tended with numberless beings and worlds, till the time of a cre-
ation, mentioned by Moses in the scriptures, within so short a
duration as about six thousand years since ; so the late creation
there mentioned can only be the new modelling of this earth
from a chaos with some few other globes, put into new form and
motion, reinstating and reinhabiting them from the ruins of an
q}d world.
Of apparent, real, and absolute motion.
A person carried in a ship under sail in a river will perceive
the motion of outward objects, while he perceives not his own
motion ; and a ball being dropt from the mast-iread at such
time will fall in the same place on deck as if the ship had no
motion, though under the swiftest way; and that by reason of
the ship's motion under way, though ever so swift, being coin-
municated to the ball when it was dropt by the hand; by which
they, and all bodies moving together, remain in the same rela-
tive situation in motion as at rest. The earth, moving at the
rate of 15 miles per minute, and all bodies upon or near its sur-
face moving together, preserve the same relative situation with
one another; birds, insects, fish, &c. moving together with the
atmosphere and the water: as flies and insects, shut up in a
ship's cabin, preserve the same situation, whether the ship is at
anchor, or under saii; the air in the cabin being carried with
the ship. And a person can leap no farther on a ship's deck uns
der way towards the stern, than with the way she is going; be-
cause, being carried with her in the same motion communicated,
he remains in the same relative situation as if the ship had
been at rest; except that he exerts more motion than the ship's
in jumping over-board : this exertion of motion would be the
same as flying in the air, swimming in the water, or jumping
upon deck, still relative or comparative with the ship's motion
and with that exerted by the earth's absolute motion, or rest,
being as imard to determine as identity of space; for admitting
a motion exerted by the earth, one exerted by the ship, and
another by the man jumping on the deck; yet it is not impro-
bable, that our whole solar system may exert another motion
GALE'S RECREATIONS, 19
independent of all the rest, &c. whereby worlds may moveto-
gether, or move one another. - -
To outward spectators at rest, a person jumping on a ship's,
deck, under way, towards the stern, would appear not to move,
if he exerted as much motion as the ship had way ; but, jump-
ing towards the head, would appear to have more motion than
th ship. And the retrograde and stationary appearances of the
planetary bodies, while their motions really continue forward,
are accounted for by the motion of the observer with those
bodies, which is another argument for the earth's motion. The
motion of the celestial bodies, seen from different surfaces, wiłł
appear very various ; though at the same time they are in re-
ality the same.
-***Cº-º-º-
Of the Cause and Āfānner of Eclipses.
EACH primary and secondary body in our system being glo-
bular, will always be enlightened on the side next the Sun, while
the back part of it remains opaque, casting ºil a comical shadow,
terminating where the sun's rays, as tangests to the extreme
outer parts of the body's surface next tim, intersect each
other;-all bodies that fall in the way of this shadow are eclipsed
by it more or less; and the different phases of the Moon, and
the other bodies, appearing horned, gibbous, dischotomized, and
full, by having so much of their enlightened parts turned towards
the spectator, are thence accounted for.
And hence an Eclipse of the Sun, or rather of our Earth, is
caused by the interposing dark body of the Moon betwixt that
luminary and the spectator's sight, so as to intercept his view of
the Sun's light, either in part, or the whole; which can never
happen but at new Moon, when the Sun, Moon, and Earth are so
near being in a right line, that the conieal shadow cast by the
Moon towards the Earth, falls more or less upon it. . -
An Eclipse of the Moon is occasioned by the Earth coming
betwixt her and the Sun's body, and thereby depriving her of
his light; which can never happen but at full Moon, when the
Sun, Earth, and Moon, are so near being in a right line, that the
conical shadow cast by the Earth towards the Moon, falls more
or less upon her. -
In an Eclipse of the Sun, or rather of our Earth, the Moon's
shadow travels at a determinate rate over the eclipsed parts of the
}
ſ
20 & A LE's RECREATIONS.
Earth's surface; and the Moon moving faster through her orbit
than the Earth through her’s, she likewise passes through the
farth's shadow at a determinate rate in an Eclipse of the Moon ;
the dimensions of which shadows, and their motions, with
other requisites concerning eclipses, we shall now explain.
Dimensions of the Earth and Moon's Conical Shadows
in Eclipses.
The inverted luminous come, terminating the penumbral fru-
strum next the Sun, being equal and similar to the umbral cone,
terminating on the opposite side of the interposing body on this
side in, or beyond the remote body from the Sun, and the semi-
angle at the vertex of either come being equal to the Sun's ap-
parent diameter, the altitude of the Earth's shadow, and con-
sequently of the Moon's, will be thus determined by trigonometry.
Say, as the sine of the Sun's apparent sem, diam. at a mean
distance from the earth, (viz. S. 16.) is to the sem. (liam. of the
earth, so is the radius of the earth to 214,8 semi-diameters of the
Farth; the height of the Earth's shadow ; but as the Sun's ap-
parent diameteris 15m 50s at his greatest distance from the Earth,
the height of the Earth's shadow at that time will come out 217
of the Earth's semi diameters ; being aſſove three times as great
as the mean distance of the Moon, but falls short of the orbit of
Mars, and therefore can involve none of the heavenly bodies but
the Moon.
Now the diameter of the Earth to the diameter of the Moon
being as 25 to 7, so is 214,8 to 60, 144 semi diameters of the
Earth the height of the Moon's shadow ; the comical shadows
of the Earth and Moon being both similar, because the angle of
the Moon's shadow (and all spheres whose semi-diameters bear no
sensible proportion to their distance from the Sun) is the same
with that of the Earth.
Hence if the Moon's distance from the Earth be greater than
her mean distance, or 60 semi-diameters of the Earth, the Moon's
shadow cannot reach the Earth; at which time there may be a
central eclipse of the Sun, but cannot be a total one, for then a
bright luminous ring will appear to embrace the Moon's body,
then intercepting the Sun's light every where, except about the
circumference of his disk.
}<, ‘SNOIJ.V. Krioſi a Sº I v
an `uiou oiol utúl sso SI uns oth motiw uoddeq skewſº
tookW \oti u tuns oth Jo Sosdioo 'zi A ‘poulutiolop are sosdiloo Jo
attu, oil, Yº sapou Sºtoo [N our uto.1) boulºsip SunS Io ‘sutuſ on
-dioa alu obuo H Tºo) od IIIAA osduiao ur. ‘aoualaup plus oth lieu,
ssa Sulaq opunnel lot ºnq : uoddeu IIIA liooHV oth Jo asdipoa
Tenied tº ‘ooualagp our utt[] dayto.15 Juq ‘unsuoup uell, ssol od
opuluth s,ttoo IN oul Ji ? toluo you and ‘AAopuus su).Itº oth Ueno)
IHA too IV oth Jo quit oth ‘suelotuelp-ltuos owl osolu on Junbo
aq apudur S.Hoo IV out JI put { 1, lajuo youtubo uool\ ou, ‘Aoppus
s unded pue uooHA atti Jo Stolauten) oup Jo tuns atº, titul Jolbolā
eq ondloo all, luouſ opunnel suool, oil, JI requ ‘yuapi Ao SI 11
“imatº; all, utúl Ssaiologalouſ, st
u00/N alſ, ‘Jayautep sli).It I oth upil, sso sº ‘uool N out 5uſAIOAuſ
‘Aoppus Sulted oul Jo Iolauteſ, alſº su ‘ttosłal outes oup Ioſ puy
*S*Iquo asoul uell adulºsip taleou tº Ju Aopeus suſ, tº oil outcºut
-131 ol (); poooxa on Susta usabuty SI 11 Sº) quited oup uetſ, Ioleoli
eq \smui uns alſ, aloja.lotu put ; tıaddeq on pox.1osqo JoAoit
st qolu A ‘ums oil; o; tıontsoddo ui àuntoo “minºus pitt: ‘landm'ſ
‘SIBIN Jo Sampoq aſp asio.Atly put ‘aords a jutſui on III ºf pugiſoq ino
titll plmo AA AAOptus e relp ‘Suns ouſ, uvu) Joã5ſq to “ou [emba st'A
Apod sºltº, ou, Ji help ‘oldbauesqo SI yi ootlatl tuo IJ ionoute
-ºp Süoof oth soutſ, 99.1th Anott. od on paulullahap SI uoo IV oth
Jo aoutºsºp ouſ, in Mopells Suligº aul Jo uppealq au) as A3XIII os
‘poulturalep aq Ketu aoujins Sunit ºf oth to Aopeqs suoof, ou, Jo
sixe age inſiioo pure asiaasinº.I] alp ‘sorpoq aau}, osotn jo suggsod
Joquouſ sg : Kaixa Attoo Ibinolio aun HaAo Salyut 006; Inoqe & IIIA
(sº u0I toyantibio luoredde sºns alſ, puu ‘nooúode uſ aoops
alp ‘Goſſotſºad tº 5ujaq) Eſquinuod ap up paajosuſ oste oocy
-aus S, J.R. 3 oth jo Sanitºb at #, antiao s,threq Sun tuoiſ (IaaS
J. St. ‘ūnsatlı (;10.1; adulºsip s,tootº oth KG patituliałop are Honoos
suſ ſo s.1913:1; Eſp Hºoijdº ati, ‘ook.jps sºil tº oth he paptaip KI
-orbiſqo su đoo IA ou, Jo Aopelis ſºontoo oth put ‘outſ hoa Iſp e uſ
got a tu ‘Hiltº put: ‘Ilooſa ‘tº oth U.); A \ººl ; out! Houtes oup lº
tºodu uſ just] tº oil ‘it’ſ no.1: Sº I tºu A sapſul usiliuq 00ſ.
anoºr oq on payudauoo &HSeo J.S. Adji si ‘y uto II abwe)sſp seal
Iai, Jr. ‘ū1183 oun (iodin A\opets sºloo iv. oil ſo Injº.14 oil, L
‘ootiºns|B itrotu to: urūn
Japadā āufaq saspo qorq,w Hoq ūſ ūrū’ī an Hiod; iioo!N oth Jo
aoub sip aui tºol Usos og odoliº tº tºo of diiºo tin: ‘ottº (tetſ,
Joyeo.15 Io ‘Stijls aestū utti, Ssai or Spºttetº suoojº atº II
‘sºdi).93 ſo 9.0m)0s.
QQ G ALE's RECREATIONS.
Moon's mode; and eclipses of the Moon at full Moon when the
Sun's distance from her node is less than 120.
The limits of the eclipse of the Sun are hitherto considered
without allowance for the Moon's parallax, which is about one
degree (and sometimes more) near the horizon, called the hori-
zontal parallax ; and diminishes, in all degrees of the Moon's al-
titude, from the horizon to the zenith, where it vanishes. This
parallax being the angle between the true place of the body, as
if seen from the Earth's centre, and the apparent place of it, ac-
tually seen from the Earth's surface, or the angle, the semi-dia-
mer of the Earth would be seen under from that body, depresses
the true place of it to the apparent, in all altitudes from the
zeuith to the horizon, by that parallax ; so that the Moon
traving north latitude with us, it is thereby diminished ; or south
latitude with us, it is thereby encreased ; as the apparent lon-
gitude of the Moon thereby also differs from the true; by which
the limits of solar eclipses are variable by a small matter, ac-
cording to each degree of latitude of the places where those
eclipses are seen.
The Sun being at such an immense distance from the Earth, the
angle which the semi-diameter of our Earth would be there seen
ander, amounts to no more than 10s, and therefore in computing
the appearances of eclipses, the Sun may be reckoned without
paraliax that would affect the computation; though the same
semi-diameter seen from the Moon is considerable, and about a
:{egree when the Moon is at the point of our sensible horizon.
The angle under which the semi-diameter of the Moon's dark
shade appears at the Earth, when seen from the Moon, is equal
to the difference of the apparent semi-diameters of the Sun and
Moon, seen from the Earth; and the apparent semi-diameter of
the Moon's peaumbra, seen from the Moon, is equal to the
sum of the apparent semi-diameters of both Sun and Moon, seeii
from the Earth ; as the Earth's apparent semi-diameter, or that of
the Earth's disk, being equal to the Moon's horizontal parallax,
which a little consideration will prove; the apparent Semi-dia-
meters of the Sun and Moon, and also the horizontal parallax,
being calculated in astronomical tables to the several distances
of the Sun and Moon from the Earth, with the least, mean, and
greatest eccentricities of the lunar orbit,
G ALE’s RECREATIONS. 2: ;
T H E DOCTR IN E AND A PPLICATION OF MOR ALITY.
Of true happiness; and how to obtain it.
WORLDLY happiness, or what is otherwise called conten-
ment, might easily be attained, if we could bridle and restrain
our sensual appetites: the things necessary to procure this great
blessing are few in number, lie in little compass, and are ail
comprehended in that short petition of Agar–Give me neither
poverty nor riches, feed me with food convenient for me.—Prov.
xxx. 8.-But, alas! such is the depravity of human nature, that
there are few, very few, in whom some predominant passion
does not interpose her ability to delude, and gratify her tyranny
over the noblest part of man, his reason and liberty of reflection :
seducing the powers of his soul to an implicit reverence of her
magisterial persuasion: besides the plausible pretensions, and
engaging address of this seducer to obtain our favor and esteem,
she has the ascendancy over our very nature to conquer our
affections.
Nor is the bait contemptible: many people of parts and pru-
dence, age, and religion, have been staggered, and their virtue
put to proof by her allurements: the ruling passion attending us
in this life, throwing us daily into some confusion and disorder;
so that the epidemical disease of avarice, the immoderate love of
pleasure, and insatiable thirst of ambition or power, bring us
into continual slavery, and plunge us into the gulph of misery;
where all our thoughts and affections are swaliowed up. Did
happiness consist in the abundance of wealth, something might
be urged in favour of the miser; but it is evident to common
sense, that betwixt the hopes of getting, and the fears of losing,
his mind is kept in a state of continual anxiety.
There is no passion so mean or sordid as avarice; and it does
not appear how it is possible that those who idolize riches can
be infected with that distemper without being iiable to all the
symptoms with which it is attended ; such as pride, insolence,
and oppression, unruliness and luxury, and all the other inexor-
able tyrants of the soul! as soon therefore as any one gives
himself over to such insatiable desires, he gives over all thoughts
of virtue, and looks upon that only to be just and honest which
is most useful and advantageous to himself. When men's minds
and manners are thus corrupted, making it their business to
*4 G & LE's R 26R P. ATIONs.
defraud this man of his inheritance, to lay snares for another, to
wheedle a third to make him his heir, to force unreasonable gain
out of every thing, and to expose even themselves to sale, they
entirely diseard that innate pleasure that waits upon intlocence,
in exchange for those bosom quarrels and anxieties that rever-
berate and sting them to the heart.
Neither must we look for happiness in courts and palaces.
We are much mistaken in the value of a crown ; we admire its
brightness, but forget its britteness, and gaze upon its glory,
and consider not its frailty.—But if all the gay things were our
own which we fondly imagine are really to be met with in great-
ness, yet we should find ou reſiection, that they are always pur-
chased too dear; for it is a standing maxim in policy, that those
who covet dominion over others first become slaves to the lust
of power. Ambition knows no bounds; there is nothing so sa-
cred which it will not violate; it claims kindred with every vice,
and stoops to take up every sin that lies in its way; as it is such
a complicated mischief we should avoid it ourselves, and not
be dazzied by it in others.
Nor is the sensual person happier than the great in his search
of variety, and the disappointments he meets with ; for to
obtain this inestimable jewel of happiness, in the first place it
wiii be necessary for us to have a thorough knowledge of our-
selves, and to observe what passions are most predominant in
our nature: theſ, we mºust take counsel of our reason, and
follow lier dictates with steadiness and resolution, to ti void the
dangers into which we are most liable to be precipitated. No-
thing is more dishonourable and shameful than to suffer our rea-
son to be dethroned by every casual temptation, whereby that
divine principle which inspects over, and governs universal
nature, is brought under in man, and made subject to the yoke;
but though reason should ever sit at the helm, and govern our
passions, yet it should not attempt to destroy them, while its
proper business is to regulate and controul them ; not to govern
them as subjects, but slaves.
A rational conduct does not therefore consist in the fruitless
austerities and rigorous practices of religion ; but in the cha-
ritable exercise of conscience and reason, religion and morality,
and in acting in conformity to their just dictates, if we expect to
be happy; which is the true interest of the whole intelligent crea-
tion; and herein consists that glorious resemblance to the su-
preme and perfectly happy Being, dignifying men and angels,
GALE’s RECREATIONS. 25
which if duly pursued and imitated, will promote our happiness
throughout all ages.
On the Ficissitudes of States and Kingdoms.
IT is observable, that a state subsists and flourishes no longer
than whilst it cultivates and improves the means to which it
owed its rise and progress. The first Romans were plain, hearty,
and sincere; they went to the wars with honour, and returned
with success; and their very enemies reaped the benefit of their
victories as well as themselves; for their virtues always pro-
tected those whom their valour had subdued; they fought for
dominion, but not for tyranny, and chose rather to be loved
than feared. This made the provinces chearful in their sub-
mission, hearty in their contributions, and unwavering in their
obedience. It is not so much to be admired, that from so
small a beginning they should rise to such a stupendous height
of greatness, as that so many qualities, productive of a real
greatness, should be found united in one people, diffusing them-
selves with so exact a tenor throughout every part as to make
up the very life and being of the whole.
How much the Romans who lived in the age we are now
writing of, were fallen off from that original perfection, I leave
the reader to imagine. They were grown effeminate, factious,
proud, and inconsiderate. The court was beeome debauched,
the camp licentious, and the commonality obstimate and mu-
tinous. They were so far from pushing on to new conquests,
that they were not able to maintain their hereditary acquisi-
tions, &c.
Having lately received a Packet from Dagal Hal Lagal, Em-
peror of the Moon, with dispatches of the highest importance,
relating to the government, laws, and customs of the inhabitants
of Jupiter, we here communicate the contents for the service of
the public.
He first informs as, that this planet was always governed by
Empresses; that thesecretaries ofstate, the priesthood, magistracy,
and all their courts of law, consist of feumales, who manage the
helm of government, deal out divine oracles, dispense justice,
and plead causes between contending parties, as serjeants and
D
*
20 G ALE'S RECREATION S.
counsellors.Alo with us; but without a fee. The women also
were chosen governors of all their charitable institutions.
The men are engaged in employments suitable to their abi-
lities. Their original form of government was much of the
same nature with ours; but they soon found it necessary for the
happiness of the nation, by and with the advice and consent of
the whole community, to turn their courtiers into merchants
and tradesmen, their superior and inferior clergy into regiments
of soldiers, to strengthen their armies, fight battles, and garrison
frontier towns.
Their lawyers were changed into pioneers to level mountains,
drain marshes, dig canals, make and mend roads, and do all
other laborious works for the good of the public; so that fraud,
oppression, collusion, and corruption, which before reigned
among them, by the aforesaid inversion were entirely rooted out.
Their address to the present Empress runs thus in the high-
est style. To the most potent, august, pious, prudent, just, mer-
ciful, resplendent, and magnanimous, Adastrea, Roraitra, Braru,
Lieza, Heightonba, Zabachthe Matrix, Empress of the solar sys-
1cm ; whose first favourite at this time, Cinluda Eshul, is styled
Charmandra. To their metropolitan. To the most reverend mo-
1her in God, Shebal Drumbauda, high priestess of Bonavital,
capital of Jupiter. To their judges. To the Lady Chif-disin-
11 estralia, and Madam Justristral, &c. To the inferior clergy.
Veravendral. Their common Lawyers are called Amicitaaz, &c.
Two thirds of the late income of the priesthood are now ºp-
plied towards the support of the army, consisting of parsons and
lawyers; and the females who perform the offices of religion,
five upon the other third, are contented with their stations,
and very exemplary in their morals; no pluralities being here
allower!.
The ladies of the law, or amicitaaz, are maintained by a tax
laid upon folly in general, and all public diversions, such as
plays, assemblies, operas, balls, pleasure-gardens, masquerades,
baglios, &c. - -
A great trade is carried on betwixt the adjacent satellites and
this orb by vast fleets of habbernabs, which continually pass and
repass through the intervening atmosphere: the courtiers by
these means are now an useful body to the community, and ac-
quire prodigious fortunes, enriching the empire in general,
and her Imperial Majesty in particular, by this and other
6 ALE's RECREATIONS. 27
foreign intercourse; so that here are no beggars, but all the
poor are provided for by trade or manufacture.
Criminals here are not put to death, except for murder, but
are transported to the Moon, where they are kept in a state of
confinement to hard labour for life, or till their thorough re-
formation, and till compensation is made for their lives.
It is one part of the religion of this orb for the women not
to have commerce with the men after their conception, till they
are delivered: and if any man is found in bed with his wife
during the time of her pregnancy, he is brought to trial before
Madan, Justristral, and being convicted of having carnal know-
ledge of her, he is transported to the lunar regions for life, like
other motorious offenders; the Empress having first approved
and signed the sentence, which is only reversible by the favour
and interest of Charmandra.
The young women here, cautious of losing their virginity,
are not suffered to enter upon marriage till twenty, before the
consummation of which they are strictly examined by two ex-
perienced midwives, called Bambooz, who report their chastity
to the priestess of the parish, which report she enters in a public
register, when, and not before, the bride is delivered to her
husband's embraces; but if it appears upon examiºłºń that
she has lost her maidenhead, the marriage becomes instantly
void, and the bride is banished to the planet Venus for a com-
mon prostitute; as are likewise the married women here, found
guilty of adultery, who are restrained from that vice by taking a
solemn oath before the altar, twelve times in a year, of their
fidelity to their husbands.
The physicians here are in high esteem for their usefulness,
and are called the Grando Foguax, being all females ; they are
obliged to pass a public and strict examination before they are
allowed to practice, before the president Madam Kilpatrac, the
members of clappux, and a numerous assembly of learned audi-
ditors, met in the Regal Kipota!, or next royal amphitheatre.
They take no fees, but are paid for preserving the health of
the community by salaries allowed them out of the public re-
venue, and often relieve the patient who stands in need of their
charity. The current money of this orb is pieces of crystal, of
different colours and sizes, stamped with the Empress's mark, to
signify the value of each. Gold and silver are here of no worth.
The ladies of the faculty keep no coaches, but visit their
near patients on foot, and are carried on slamduks, creatures.
... - - J) º
28 G ALE'S RECREATIONs.
like English asses, to those at a distance: they speak but little,
and in familiar language, and discover the nature of diseases
without any ceremony: their medicines consist chiefly of vege-
tables, with a few animal and mineral productions, and they
chalk down their prescriptions, with few marks, on a piece of
board, which is sent to the hangslab, the nearest public reposi-
tory, where the medicines are delivered by the slabber.
Old men are nurses to the women, and old women nurses to
the nien, so accustomed for the natural tenderness betwixt the
SC XèS.
Each lady-physician is obliged to deliver to madam Kilpatrac,
and the clappux-members, a journal of her practice and proceed-
ings upon each respective patient, to be publicly lead and ex-
amined in the next ſtegal Kipotal ; and iſ any lives appear to be
ſost through mal-practice, or neglect, she is utterly disqualified
to practice for the future; but if her extraordinary services ap-
pear in the preservation of subjects' lives, she is then registered
upon the list of merit, to be chosen one of her Imperial Majes-
ty's physicians in ordinary.
The most flagrant vices reign in the army, called blu blustrax,
and in the navy, or vanal habbernabs, whose people are irre-
claimable, notwithstanding the influencing example of the Swag-
daghaggigs, their principal commanders.
Backbiters, detracters, tale-bearers, scolds, pernicious liars,
profane swearers, and stirrers up of strife, have their tongues
cut out for mutes, to serve the government as in Turkey.
Sodomites are employed as kennel-rakers, chintney-sweepers,
and night men, in the capitol, and are distinguished by badges
from the rest of the subjects.
Gamesters, if noblemen, are instantly degraded ; and if com-
moners, are punished by casting a die, whether they shall, or
shall not, be deprived of their fortunes; which fortunes, so
forfeited, are applied to the use of the public, and the offenders
employed as common labourers, in the state for a maintenance.
They have no bridewells, nor prisons, but for holding ºffenders
till trial. Debtors, sottish drunkards, petty criminals, and thieves,
if men, are punished by being sent to work-houses, where
they have no support but from what they earn, for a certain
time, ; and for every such repeated offence, are obliged to suffer
a double period of confinement.
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 29.
The Notions of Spinoza and Atheism Confuted.
*
BENEDICT Spinoza, or Espinoza, was born a Jew, at
Amsterdam, in Holland, but made no profession of any
religion, either jewish or christian: he wrote several books in
Latin, the most celebrated whereof is his Tractatus Theologico-
Politicus, wherein he endeavours to overturn the foundation of
all religion; the book therefore was accordingly condemned
by a public decree of the states ; though since it has been
publicly sold, and even reprinted both in Latim and French in
that country, and also in English at London.
Spinoza here insinuates that all religions are only political
engines, calculated for public good, to render the people obe-
dient to magistrates, and to make them practise virtue and
morality.
He does not lay down his notions of the Deity openly; but
only suggests his opinion. In his Ethics, published among his
posthumous works, he is more open and express; maintaining
that God is not, as we imagine him, an infinite, intelligent,
happy, and perfect being; but only that natural virtue and
faculty which is diffused throughout all creatures.
And the great principle of this doctrine of Spinozism is, that
there is nothing properly and absolutely existing but matter,
and its modifications; among which are even comprehended
thoughts abstract and general ideas, comparisons, relations,
combinations of relations, &c.
Spinozism is a species of naturalism, pantheism, or hylotheism,
as it is sometimes called, i.e. of the dogma which allows of no
God but nature, or the universe; and therefore makes it and
matter to be God; motions, long before Spinoza, held by many
different sects of philosophers among the Chaldaeans and Greeks;
very much like the opinion of the Stoics and those who held the
notion of an Anima Mundi. .
Strato, and some of the Peripateticks, were of opinion some-
thing like it. And though no ancient sect seems farther re-
moved from Spinozism than the Platonic, they attributing the
greatest freedom to God, and carefully distinguishing him from
matter, yet Gundlingius proves at large, that Plato gives matter
much the same origin with Spinoza; but the sect that approached
mearest to Spinozism was that which taught that all things were
In 3
36) & AL E'S RECREATIONS.
one, as Xenophanes the Colophonian, Parmenides Mellissus, and
especially Zemo Eleates; whence it obtained the name of the
Eleatic system of Atheism;-to which the opinion of those may
be reduced who held the first matter for God, as Almaricus and
Pavid of Dinantum. Also the sect of Foe in China and Japan,
the Seusi in Persia, and Zindikites in Turkey, philosophize much
after the manner of Spinoza. -
1. That there is but one substance in nature. Q. That this
only substance is endowed with an infinite number of attributes,
among which are extension and cogitation. 3. That all the
hodies in the universe are modifications of this substance consi-
clered as it is extended ; and that all the souls of men are modi-
fications of the same substance considered as cogitative. 4. That
God is a necessary and infinitely perfect Being, and is the cause
of all things that exist; but is uot a Being diſlerent from them.
5. That there is but one Being and one nature, and thus this
nature produces within itself, by an immanent act, all those which
we call creatures. 6. And that this E. EING is at the same time
both agent and patient, efficient cause and subject; but that he
produces nothing but modifications of himself.
Thus the DEITY is made sole agent, as well as patient in all
evil, both physical and moral, that called malum paenae as well as
malum culpa ; a doctrine, fraught with more impieties than all
the heathen poets have published concerning their Jupiter,
Venus, Bacchus, &c. What seems to have led Spinoza to frame
this system was the difficulty of conceiving either that matter is
eternal, and different from God, or that it could be produced
from nothing, or that an infinite and free Being could have made
a world such as this is. -
A matter that exists necessarily, and which is nevertheless
void of activity, and subject to the power of another principle, is
an object that startles our º as there seems no
agreement between the three conditions.
A matter created out of nothing is no less inconceivable, what-
ever efforts we make to foru an idea of an act of the will that
can change what before was nothing into real substance; con-
trary to the known maxim of philosophers, ea nihilo nihil fit. In
short, that an infinite, good, holy, free Being, who could have
made his creatures good and happy, should rather choose to
have them wicked, and eternally miserable, is no less incompre-
hensible; and amazingly so, as it is so difficult to reconcile the
freedom of man with the equality of a Being made out of nothing.
& A LE'S RECREATIONS. 31
These appear to be the difficulties which led Spinoza to
search for a new system, wherein God should not be distinct
from matter, and wherein he should act necessarily, and to the
extent of all his power, not out of himself (ad extra) but within
himself; but if this new system rescues us from some difficul-
ties, it involves us in others infinitely greater. Spinoza is very
full on the subject of the authors of the scriptures, and endea-
vours to shew, that the Pentateuch is not the work of Moses ;
contrary to the common opinion both of the Jews and Chris-
tians; and has also his particular sentiments as to the authors
of the other books; which part of the work has been answered
by M. Huet, in his Demonstratio Evangelica ; and M. Simon
in his Hist. Crit. du View v Test.
Numbers lave undertaken to refute Spinoza's doctrine; but
all very weakly, except what we have in Dr. Clark's sermons at
Boyle's lectures.
To which we shall add the opinion of some modern sceptics,
who acknowledge God in their actions, yet urge that all is God,
and that all causes and all effects ever existed in one power, as
we see exerted in nature ; that unless a cause could be found
to God as creator, the wisdom and power of God cannot be
otherwise understood than the wisdom and power of one nature,
self-existing and self-created ; and demand, by what necessary,
immanent, and wise causes did one God exist prior to one uni-
versal nature, to be the cause of it, and that very nature the ef-
fect of his creating power 3 And likewise how one necessary,
original, self-existing, and creating wisdom and power is better
understood than one necessary, original, self-existing and wise
mature ? alledging, that if all nature is not by necessity, or
chance, that the cause of it, God, must come by necessity, or
chance; diabolically making the Creator to be his creation, i. e.
all nature, and all causes and effects therein produced.
ANSWER.
The fools have said in their hearts, there is no God.
But if self-existing nature is as incomprehensible as God (as
all sceptics allow), and we find wisdom and power dispensed
through the world; it is more rational to give praise and ado-
ration to one incomprehensible, wise, and glorious creator, as
32 GALE'S RECREATIONS.
the cause of created nature, than to bestow it where it is lost (on
nature itself), and what cannot reward us for our duty and gra-
titude.
Consciousness is the infallible principle of all we know, and
by which we come to know any thing. Various are the effects
we consciously perceive are produced in nature by various ef-
ficient causes; and every particular effect we consciously per-
ceive is adequate to its efficient cause, from whence every effect
is singly and immediately produced ; whence it will follow,
that the immense, infinite, and wise existence of things that we
see produced and operating in nature, together, or in succes-
sion, must proceed by an infinite series of causes and effects,
from a necessary, original, all-wise, all-powerful, universal, and
infinite cause, continually supporting and acting upon nature,
prior to all natural causes, which is God from all eternity, and
for evermore.
As we are conscious of what is doing well or ill, and of praise
or blame due to ourselves or others, which consciousness proves
the diversity of our being and existence, and that all is not one
nature, it is amazing that men are so wilfully obstinate and
blinded in their understandings, as to acknowledge beings of su-
perior power and wisdom on earth whom they adore, and
yet refuse to acknowledge and adore a being superior to all;
the cause of all !
I never heard that the most obstimate sceptics who refuse to
own the free being of a God, ever disputed the free being of
their prince, whose laws they willingly submit to, and are bound
to obey, or not have the privilege of his protection: they talk
of every thing happening of necessity, and yet ask favours, which
shew their doctrine and their consciousness of things to be direct
contradiction: they talk of crimes committed by necessity, de-
serving punishment by necessity; and yet exclaim bitterly against
the offenders; and I have heard them praise what they ap-
prove, though happening by necessity: some I have known in
great fear of punishment for an offence given, ask pardon to pre-
vent it ; which proves they are not conscious of its necessity;
but will deny God and his glory for obstimacy, till they come
to fear him.
And there can be nothing more absurd, besides impiously
dangerous and diabolical, than to dispute the free being and ex-
istence of him that made the universe, and all things therein, by
ranking himself with his work, or making him inseparable
G ALE's RECREATIONS. . 3.3
* . *
from it; for this necessity of a pre-existing agent, or Creator,
is infinitely more probable than a necessary nature uncreated :
the voice of all nations, and all nature, consent to adore him as
Creator and supporter of all his glorious works; and shall the
opinions and tenets of a few paltry sceptics weigh against the
general sense and belief of all mankind
tewards and punishments here are sufficient grounds to
expect them in a state hereafter : we live now but in the
dawn of existence; where the greatest proof of immortality is
our continual new desires, and our hopes and expectations of
it, which could not be implanted in us for nothing. The
heathens, improved in their reason, doubted and discovered im-
mortality; and Mr. Addison, in his 210th Spectator, shews the
meanness and absurdity of expecting annihilation. The same
gentleman also, in Spectator 185, shews, that Atheists are great
zealots and bigots, and their opinions downright nonsense; that
the creed of this generation of wranglers requires an infinitely
greater measure of faith than any set of religious articles for
the good of mankind, which they so violently oppose.
The Origin of Popes and Popery.
g
THE author of the Devil's History, speaking of the Devil
being out of play for restoring idolatry, and finding him-
self at a loss how to proceed with mankind, in the time of
Jovian, the Emperor of Rome, who was a good christian, he
threw a bone of contention among the clergy for primacy, which
fully answered his purpose; and declaring for the Roman
pontif, in the following reign of the Emperor Mauritius, Boni-
face, who had long contended for the title of Supreme, fell into a
treaty with Phoeas, captain of the Emperor's guards, that he
should murder his master the Emperor, and his sons; when
Boniface, countenancing the treason, should declare him Empe-
ror, as Phocas, in return for the kindness done him, should ac-
knowledge the primacy of the church of Rome, by declaring
Boniface universal Bishop.
By this notable devilish policy, Satan then got at the head of
affairs in the christian world, as well spiritual as temporal, eccle-
siastical as civil; who never gained a more important point (says
the author) since his conquest over Eve in Paradise, ’till that
$1}}le,
34 G A LE'SRECREATIONS.
The Devil, indeed, is allowed to have prospered tolerably
well in his affairs for some time before this matter was accom-
plished, as his interests among the clergy gained ground for
some ages; but it was all a secret management, carried on with
difficulty; such as sowing discord and faction among the people,
perplexing the councils of their princes, and wheedling pri-
vately in with the dignified clergy.
He had raised abundance of little church rebellions, by setting
up heretics of several kinds, and raising them favourers among
the clergy, such as Ebion, Cerinthias, Pelagius, and others.
He had drawn in the bishops of Rome to set up the pageantry
of the Key; and while he, the Devil, set open the gates of Hell
to them all, set them upon locking up the gates of Heaven,
and giving the Bishop of Rome the Key; it was so gilded over
with delusion, and so blindly the age received it, that like Gid-
eon's Ephod, all the catholic world went a whoring after the Idol.
The story of this Key being given to the Bishop of Rome by
St. Peter (who by the way never had it himself), and of its
being lost by somebody or other (but the Devil never told who)
is this:—it being found again by a Lombard soldier in the army
of King Antharis, who attempting to cut it with his knife, Was
miraculously forced to direct the knife to cut his own throat;
which King Antharis and his nobles seeing, were thereby con-
verted to christianity. And that the King sent this Key, with
another made like it, to Pelagus, then Bishop of Rome, who
thereupon assumed the power of opening and shutting heaven's
gates; as he afterwards set a price or toll upon the entrance
thereof, as we do for passing a turnpike in England.
These fine things were successfully managed for some years
before the compact with Boniface and Phocas had taken effect,
and the Devil gained a deal of ground ; but when he had made
an universal Bishop, or Pope, he triumphed openly by setting up
a Murtherer upon the temporal throne, and a church Emperor
upon the ecclesiastical throne, of his own choosing; and so
begun his restoration.
The Devil's affairs went on swimmingly, and the clergy
brought so many gewgaws into their worship, and such devilish
principles were mixed with that which we called the christian
faith, that from this time the Bishop of Rome (now distinguished
by the name of Pope) commences whore of Babylon.
Tyranny of the worst sort crept into the pontificate, errors
of all sorts into the profession, and they proceeded from one
G ALE'S RECREATIONS. 3.5
-
thing to another, until the very Popes (for so the Bishops of
Rome were now called) professed openly to confederate with the
Devil, and to carry on a personal correspondence with him, at
the same time they took upon them the title of Christ's Vicar,
and the infallible Guide of the consciences of christians.
This we have sundry instances of in some merry Popes, who
(if fame lies not) were sorcerers, imagicians, had familiar spirits,
and immediate conversation with the Devil, visibly and invisibly;
by which means they became what we call Devils incarnate.
The hellish imposture and wickedness transacted in church-
government by the Romish clergy to this day, in those countries
where the popish authority prevails, are dismal instances of the
corruptions of original christianity; as they are shocking to all
true protestants of the reformed religion, who see, by the infinite
massacres of all heretics to popery, with what a vengeance the
Romish clergy shew their authority, whenever they get the up-
per-hand: so far from their following the mild and pure doc-
trines of Christ and his apostles, in bearing and forbearance,
there is nothing so wicked or inhuman but they will put in
practice to establish their church-tyranny over all men, even
princes themselves who presume to dispute, or doubt its infalli-
bility. This consideration should make us charitable to those
dissenters, professing christianity among us, who differ from us;
as by that reformation which brought fiberty and happiness to
Great Britain, and for which so many suffered tâmes and mar-
trydom in effecting it, came the severai dissentions among us;
wherein it is to be feared, that interest or party is inore the pre-
vailing principle than a zeal for Christ's doctrines; even from
the smugglers of the reformed christian religion down to the
hawkers and 'pedlars of salvation, who would be better restrained
by mild authority than by persecution.
In the times of fanatical usurpation, they had but little ten-
derness for a true church-man, and to this day the itinerant
teachers make a market of the people's ignorance, and reproach
our lawful clergy, as if guilty of crimes, whereof themselves are
chargeable.
The Scripture is allowed to be the standing rule of faith (not
fathers, creeds, catechisms, &c.) as the departure therefrom is
the infallible falling into antichristian apostacy; but men being
allowed to preach the scripture doctrines, and explain them
publicly, without being duly qualified, and legally authorized,
excite a frenzy among the people, misleading them into gross
30 & ALE'S RECREATIONs.
*i.
errors and superstitions for private lucre; for the texts of the
same scripture, we find, are explained into as many different
meanings as suit with the interest of the explainers. And who
but the ignorant, superstitious, weak, or mad, would run and
pay for such enthusiastic absurdity, or religious jargon, as are
licentiously preached up and down the countries, at home and
abroad, by fanatic disturbers of the people If no rule be estab-
lished for the preaching and practice of religion, there must in
time be as many rejigions and religious teachers as there are
people of different interest or party. And if the clergy of Eng-
laud, by law established, are insufficient for teaching the true re-
ligion throughout his Majesty's dominions, those mercenary
straggling teachers who pretend to correct the church of Eng-
land's errors, will be found far less qualified, and guilty of far
greater errors, as well as of contempt of their sovereign, who sits
at the head of the true church as guardiani.
Reformation on reformation, and dissention on dissention,
will be constant events where nonconformity is propagated, so
long as a mercenary nonconformist finds it his interest to stir up
and delude the people.
Read a book by Benjamin Bennett, intitled, a Memorial of
the Reformation; for a farther account of the rise and progress of
popery, and of the infernal power of the church of Rome, also
read the Devil's History.
Of the Jewish Year—Beginning of the Jewish Day, and the
Motive of the Legislature for firing the Permal Equinox on
the 21st of March, instead of the 20th, as it now happens.
THE Jews, whose year consisted of lunar months, begun
4heir month at the Moon's first appearance, and when it should
appear, if not clouded (and not at the Moon's true change),
of which proclamation was made in all public places, until
their nation had lost its authority; when they had recourse
to Cycles for determining the day of apparent change, and
the 14th day after, which they counted the day of the full
Moon; though it really happened the 15th day from the true
change: and hence the 15th day of the Moon came to be
called the 14th, which was the apparent and real day of full
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 37
Moon; though some are apt to think it really happens the 14th
after the true change.
The Jews always begin their day at Sun setting, about three-
fourths of a day before our astronomical day begins; the Ara-
bians, Athenians, and in general all these Eastern nations who
regulated their months and years by the course of the Moon, fol-
lowed their example : and this custom of beginning the day
prevailed among the ancient Gauls and Germans, and still conti.
nues in Bohemia and Poland, where the clock strikes twenty-
four at Sun-set, and the new day begins. Regard being had to
this custom seems to be the reason why the church of England
now orders the collect for any festival to be read in the evening
preceding that festival: and the celebration of our Easter depend-
ing on the time of the Jewish passover, and that on the vernal
equinox, if regard is not had to the commencement of the Jewish
day, we shall sometimes fall into the mistake the Nicene council
were solicitous to avoid, by keeping our paschal feast day of
Christ's resurrection at the same time with the Jewish passover.
Our present political day begins at midnight, yet some com-
pute the vernal equinox from theastronomical day, beginning 12
hours later, neither of which commencements are so much to be
regarded in this affair as the commencement of the Jewish day at
Sun-set, preceding both these times, for avoiding our keeping
Easter with their passover; for if the vernal equinox falls on the
20th of March (reckoning the beginning from midnight) some
time after sun-set of that day, and the fuji Moon falls later on
the same day after sun-set, but before inidnight, which may
happen to be on a Saturday, then Easter, according to the
rule for observing it, being on the Sunday after the full Moon
which happens next after the vernal equinox, should be kept the
next day, being Sunday, or the day after the Jewish sabbath,
ending at sun-set ; but the Jews then begin the 14th day of their
ecclesiastical month misan, on the 21st of their March, or 20th
of ours, at sun-set, who on that 21st day following are by the
law of Moses to celebrate their passover; and therefore our
Easter being made to fall with our 21st of March, that coin-
cidence with our commemoration of Christ's resurrection is
avoided by a Moon.
It was ordained at the Nicene council, anno 325, and since
by the British Parliament, that the vermal equinox should be
considered as happening on the 21st (a day forward of the true)
instead of the 20th of March (as it then really happened) for
E
3S GAL E'S RECREATIONs.
avoiding a concidence of Easter with the Jewish passover, which
Yet is not prevented, if the Jewish method of computing the
time of the vernal equinox, and full Moon next happening, is
fallacious ; whereby the Jews retarding a day may yet coincide
with us, as in the preceding case of the vernal equinox happen-
ing on the 20th : this is a nicety in distinction cannot always
be made with certainty, on account of their carrying the vernal
equinox before the end of our day into the beginning of their
next ; and therefore the vernal equinox might as well have been
fixed on the 20th of March, as it really happens; for, while we
make the vernal equinox on the 21st, and the Jewish, or true
vernal equinox to fall on the 20th of March, Easter is postponed
a whole Moon, besides the days to Sunday following ; whereas
it ought to have been kept the Sunday next after the Jewish
passover, as it should be kept when the full Moon of the Jews
happens the day next after the vernal equinox; provided they
keep their passover on that day; which yet is best determined
by astronomical tables of the Moon's mean motion from the Sun.
If the exact true time of the full Moon happening on, or next
after, the vernal equinox of Jew and Christian, were duly fixed
for determining Easter, difference will yet necessarily arise from
the time of that true and the mean full Moon, often happening
on different days in the same months of March or April ; or
from either happening so near the end of one day and the be-
ginning of the next, that the true day of happening may not be
easy to assign.
Yet if the legislature had ordained an exception to the pre-
sent rule for finding Easter, and made it postpone a week only,
instead of a Moon and to Sunday (from its original institution)
in cases where the Jewish passover and that rule should happen
to coincide, when the full Moon falls on the 20th of March
(which is the true time of the vermal equinox) though we had
differed from the church of Rome herein, it had certainly been
for our honor; the coincidence happening so seldom, would
have required little trouble to correct; at the same time, we had
shewn our strict adherence to a matter which the Papists them-
selves acknowledged to be right.
The form of the Jewish year was luna solar, or a solar year,
composed of 12 lunarmonths, besides the intercalary, or emboli-
mean month, weadar: the lunar months were called pleni and
capi, consisting of 30 and 29 days by turns; and this artificial
Junar month seems to be regarded in our old calendar, making
G ALE'S RECREATIONS. 3)
the Moon to have 30 days when the month has 3 i, and only 29
when it contains 30 ; the golden numbers pointing out the
ecclesiastical Moon (as it is called) are there fixed according to
this supposition. The embolimean, consisting of 30 days, were
added, when necessary, to keep the lunar year receding from the
equinoxes, that the passover might be kept at the time ap-
pointed, making the equinoxial Moon the first mouth.
They used a decennoval cycle of the years like our own, of
which 12 were common, and 7 embolimean : in their civil year
they sometimes added, and sometimes omitted a day, to make it
correspond with the year astronomical ; which, when common,
contained 354 days, 8 hours, and 793 helakim of 18 minutes
each; and the embolimlean 382 days, 21 hours, and 589 helakim.
They strictly regarded their tekuphae, or cardinal points, cor-
responding to the equinoxes and solstices, as their year by this
means was constantly regulated, so as never to require any such
reformation as the Julian form, after a long period ; for such
corrections were continually made and required by the constitu-
tion and form of their year as was every way adapted to their
fasts and festivals enjoined by the law.
Bishop Beveridge distinguishes their civil year into deficient,
abundant, and ordinary : in the first, a day, he says, is taken
from their astronomical year, whether common or embolimean:
in the second, a day is added ; and in the third, the astronomi-
cal computation is unalterably observed. This author also takes
notice, that they had likewise a solar year of the like extent
with the Julian. See Beveridge's Institutiones Chronologicae.
In the preface to Dean Prideaux's Connection, there is ang-
ther good account of this Jewish year.
The Reasons for the Commencement of the Date of the Year in
January, and Correction of the British Calendar.
THE Right Hon. the Earl of Macclesfield, in an excellent
speech made to the House of Peers, on Monday the 18th day
of March, 1750, julian style, explained to their Lordships the
reasonableness of having established in Great Britain one umi-
form method of reckoning or computing time, and of fixing
the dates of all matters which may be transacted by the inhabi-
tants of much the greatest part of Europe. His Lordship then
**
- E 2
40 - GALE's RECREAT Ions.
shewed the absurdity of the legal commencement of the year in
one part of our kingdom, differing by the space of near three
H:oºls from the egal commencement of the year in another
part of the Sati'e kingdoin, and also from the general usage
throughout the whole; in consequence of which, it was estab-
łished by the legislature, that the date of the year throughout
Great Britain should commence the year following from Janu-
ary, 1752. - * t
His lordship then made appear the necessary correction our
calendar stood in need of, with regard to the civil year, to make
the times of our fixed festivals, and dates of transactions thereon
depending, as also the time of Easter, and moveable feasts de-
pending on Easter, accord with the practice of the greatest part
of Europe, for the right understanding and dispatch of business,
as well as the benefit of commerce in general ;-in consequence
of which, it was established by the legislature, 1751, that the
third of September, 1752, according to the julian style, be rec-
koned the 14th day, new style, and so on; and that Easter-limit
should fall, and Easter be determined as formerly, from the 11
days so added; whereby our day of the month and festivals now
correspond in all those countries who keep their account accord-
ing to Pope Gregory's correction of the calendar in 1582; pre-
venting the seasons running back, as in the Julian account. See
the speech, containing many things instructive and curious. See
also remarks upon the solar and lunar years, the cycle of 19
years, commonly called the golden number, the epact, and a me-
thod of finding the time of Easter, as it is now observed in most
parts of Europe; being part of a letter from the Right Hon.
George Earl of Macclesfield to Martin Folks, Esq. President
of the Royal Society, communicated May 10th, 1750.
The Chronology of Christ's Crucifixion.
OUR Saviour was kept up all Thursday night before the Fri-
day, or next day, on which he was crucified, in the High
Priest's house, and led away in the morning to Pontius Pilate
(See Matth. xxvii. 1. compared with other Evangelists) who was
then Governor of Palestine, under Tiberius, the Emperor of
Rome. Pontius Pilate first sent Christ to Herod (Luke xxiii.),
who sent him again to Pilate, who took some time in examin-
ing him in the Pretorium, and in going out to confer with the
M. -
e ALE's RECREATIONS. 4 i
people standing without doors, lest they should be defiled by
entering into a hall where a heathen acted as judge. See St.
John's Gospel compared with the rest.
It was just before the second cock-crowing that Peter de-
nied him, before he was sent to Pilate; and it was about the
third Jewish hour (or our 9 o'clock) according to St. Mark,
when his Crucifixion was ordered or resolved on ; for by St.
Luke's Gospel, he was hung on the cross about the sixth hour,
(or 12 o'clock as we reckon) as he, as well as St. Matthew and
St. Mark, mentions a darkness from the sixth to the ninth hour;
and St. Mark tells us, it was about the ninth hour (which we
reckon three o'clock past noon) when he expired.
From whence it is plain, he was condemned about the third
Jewish hour (or nine o'clock as we reckon); arrived at Golgatha,
or Calvary, at or little before the sixth hour (or 12 at moon as
we reckon), when the darkness begun, and expired at three in
the afternoon, when the darkness ceased.
He did not live long on the cross, as appears from Pilate's
wondering at his being dead so soon ; and that his death was
towards Friday evening (April 3rd, Anno 33) is plain, from the
care the Jews took to kill the thieves executed at the same time,
by breaking their legs, (who had broke our Saviour's, if he had
not already been dead) lest the bodies should remain on the
cross upon their sabbath day; sabbath then happening at the
time of the Jewish passover, or in their passover-week, which was
a festival of seven days; though the passover was eaten on the
first according to St. John's Gospel.
It was also the law of Moses, that all who were hanged
should not remain after sum-set ; and accordingly we find by
St. Matthew, that St. Joseph, of Arimathea, buried our Saviour
that Friday Evening, soon after his execution. The Jews always
begun their day at sun-setting (before we begin ours at mid-
might), from whence to sun-rise they reckon 12 equal hours,
which was the former part of their day (as we reckon 12 equal
hours from midnight to noon following): the latter part of
their day was from Sun-rise to sun-setting, in which time they
reckoned 12 equal hours more ; and their first hour of sun-rise
was about the same as our six o'clock; their sixth hour, like our
twelve o'clock at noon; and their twelfth hour, at sun-setting,
about the same as our six-o'clock in the evening; these twelve
hours were called planetary hours; and those of the night,
though equal among themselves, were unequal to the planetary.
E 3 -- **,
Aº G ALE'S RECREATIONS.
or Jewish hours by day; which were also equal among them-
selves (being each the twelfth part of time from sun-rising to
setting, and at the time of the equinoxes, when the day and
night is of equal length; the jewish hours by day and night are
therefore equal.
The Evangelists have plainly pointed out the exact time of
our Saviour's Crucifixion, as well by the previous as such se-
quent circumstances relating thereto; so that no person can be
mistaken in determining or fixing the day and hour of Christ's
suffering, when they mention a darkness spread from noon to
three o'clock, according to our reckoning.
This darkness, by astronomical tables, is found to be no natu-
ral eclipse of the Sun, as St. Augustin, Origen, Erasmus, and
others supposed ; there being no solar eclipse at that time : the
darkness was not seen at Athens, or in other remote places; but
extended itself only in the neighbourhood of Jerusalem. The
impossibility of the Sun's being totally dark in a solar eclipse,
for three hours, evinces the darkness to be miraculous. The
Jewish passever being at the time when our Saviour suffered, at
1}le first fuil Moon after the vermal equinox, which them was on
Friday, April 3rd, in the year of Christ 33 (by astronomical ta-
łdes), there could happen only an eclipse of the Moon to the
remote parts of the earth, preceding by about three hours the
time of his Crucifixion : the Moon could not at Jerusalem hide
the Sun's light at Christ's suffering by day, when she was below
the horizon, the whole heaven's opposite ; so that the darkness
spoken of by the Evangelist must therefore be miraculous, and
no natural eclipse of the Sun.
Dionysius, the Areopagite, then a young man in Egypt, of
about 25 (well versed in astronomy for those times), on occasion
of this unnatural darkness, when he saw the Sun hid, and no
Moon present to hide it, cried out to his friend Apollophanes,
Aut Deus patitur, aut vicem patient is deflet ; either God suf-
fers, or is much concerned for him that suffers ; and many have
thought the remembrance of this incident was a great step in
his conversion to christianity, as appears by the preaching of St.
Paul (See the Acts of the Apostles); and also the dialogue be-
tween Dionysius and Appollophames (quoted by Straucius and
others), as recited by Suidas in his Lexicon upon the word Di-
onysius. Phlegon, the Trallian, an heathen writer, speaks of this
miraculous darkness as of an eclipse in these words:
G ALE's RECREATIONS. *
43
“ In the fourth year of the 202d Olympiad, there happened
“ the greatest eclipse that ever was known;” for he took this
miraculous darkness for an eclipse; as in those times the true
causes of eclipses were but imperfectly understood. The epocha
of the Olympiad begun in the 3938th year of the julian period
at the calends of July; therefore the fourth year of the 202d
Olympiad must be completed in the 4746th year of the julian pe-
riod, in the summer ; and this was the year on which our Sa-
viour suffered has been plainly proved by Scaliger, Strauchius,
and others; being in the year of our Lord 33 (according to
Dionysius, the author of that Era, and on Friday the 3d of
April, by the julian account; which was the 14th day of the
Jewish month Nisan; for which we have also the concurring
testinomy of Philo the Jew. Tacitus, in the 15th book of his
annals, says, “ The first founder of the Christian name was one
“ Christ, who was put to death under the reign of Tiberius by
Pontius Pilate, then governor of Palestine.”
And Josephus (a well known Jewish historian of great au-
thority), in the 5th chapter of the 18th book of his Antiquities,
tells us, that Vitellius having advanced his friend Marcellus to
the government of Judea, ordered Pilate to return to Rome, to
answer to the Emperor'Tiberius such matters as the Jews had ob-
jected against him; and Pilate having govermed the province ten
whole years, being obliged to submit to Vitellius's orders, set
out for Rome; but before he could reach that city, Tiberius
died, so that Pilate's government and Tiberius's life terminated
in the same year; and that Tiberius's happened in or about the
4750th year of the julian period, or according to Dionysius the
year of our Lord 37—so that Christ suffered between the years
27 and 37 is plain ; –which event must therefore happen in that
year betwixt the two, when the paschal full moon happened on a
Friday, which is according to the authority of the Evangelists,
who tell us that the Crucifixion was on a Friday, as before ob-
served. We are also told, that the day of our Saviour's resur-
rection was on a Sunday, the third day inclusive from the day
of his suffering, which was immediately made the Christian
Sabbath, as from the beginning, in the room of the Jewish
Sabbath, before and since kept on a Saturday.
Now there was no year between the 27th and 37th year of
Christ inclusive but the 33d year on which the paschal full
moon could happen upon the 3d day of April; this fell out
about noon at London, and consequently corresponded to about
4 || GALE's RECREATIONS.
half an hour after nine o'clock, as we reckon, at Jerusalem, or
about the 16th hour from the beginning of their fifth Feria, or
week day (beginning, according to the Jewish reckoning, on the
Thursday after sun-set), which astronomically set down is April
2d, 21 hours and half, anno 33, or the 4th hour on April 3d,
by the Jewish reckoning.
Other chronological events might be produced for ascer-
taining the time of our Saviour's passion; as Caiapha's high
priesthood, St. Luke's account of the time of our Saviour's bap-
tism, if the testimonies hitherto advanced to corroborate Phle-
gon's account of the time of the miraculous darkness happening
af that time (of our Saviour's suffering) were not sufficient, and
the true time of the passion not indisputably proved.
The Controversy of Phlegon's Eclipse at Christ's suffering
decided.
A controversy about Phlegon's Eclipse was begun by Dr.
Sykes, who endeavoured to shew, that Phlegon meant a common
eclipse of the Sun ; and because no such eclipse happened the
4th year of the 2020 olympiad, he would have it, that it was
the first year of that olympiad, and that the numeral A, by
which the Greeks signified 4, was made a J by the carlessness
of transcribers, and was at first probably an A to denote the
first year; and of this supposed change of the cº into J, he
found his conjecture, or what he calls his proof; but not to men-
tion Whiston's answer (who mixes so much chaff with his
wheat), alledging the Apochryphal authority superior to that of
the best historians, and equal to that of the sacred writ itself,
as to be not worth regarding, Mr. Chapman, of Cambridge, M.A.
took up the cudgels against Mr. Sykes (who had before writ a
reply to Whiston), and makes a mice and critical enquiry into
Phlegon's account of this eclipse, and the ancient authors who
have mentioned it, distinguishing those who had it at first hand
from Phlegon from those who barely transcribed from them ;
and in short does a great deal to corroborate Phlegon's testimony.
Dr. Sykes replies to this, and Chapman's rejoinder puts an end
to the controversy.
They all agree that the year of Christ's passion was the 4th of
the 202d olympiad (which has been already proved), and look
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 4.5
upon it as past all dispute; but they differ in respect to the
eclipse, and also an earthquake, mentioned by Phlegon, which
Sykes would have to be in another year of the Olympiad, and
consequently not that which happened at our Saviour's passion :
Chapman has fully proved it to be the same, and that the pas-
sage in Phlegon which relates to it is genuine.
“And in the IVth year of the CCHInd olympiad, there was
an eclipse of the Sun, the greatest that had been known, or ob-
served before; it was night at the sixth hour of the day, in-
somuch that the stars appeared in the heavens; and there
was also a great earthquake in Bythynia which overthrew a
great part of the city of Nice.”
To confirm the truth of this passage, Mr. Chapman observes,
that there are no less than seven ancient writers, three Greek,
viz. Eusebius, the author of the Cronicon Paschale, alias Chro-
micon Alexandrinum, who quotes this passage of Phlegon twice;
and Joannes Philoponus ; and four Latin, viz, St. Jerom, Anas-
tatius, the author of the Historia Miscella, and Freculphus
Lexoviensis, who all lived while the works of Phlegon were yet
in being; the latest of the Greek writers being about the year
600, and the latest of the Latins about 814), all quoting or trans-
lating this passage from Phlegon, and all concurring in one uni-
form representation thereof, and in one reading of a contro-
verted numeral : a number of writers very extraordinary, and
of great weight; there is not, I believe (adds the learned au-
thor) any ancient chronological fragment in a hundred (of those
which are now extant) so well attested and supported as those
of Phlegon.
Those who have a mind to examine the controversy relating
to this affair may consult these pamphlets, containing argu-
ments on both sides.
“ Dissertation of the Eclipse mentioned by Phlegon, or an
Enquiry whether that Eclipse had any Relation to the Darkness
which happened at our Saviour's Passion. By Arthur Ashley
Sykes, D.D. Printed at London, 1732.”
“The Testimony of Phlegon vindicated; or an Account of
the great Darkness and Earthquake at our Saviour's Passion,
described by Phlegon, including all the Testimonies, both Hea-
then and Christian, in the very words of the original Authors,
during the first six centuries of Christianity, with proper ob-
servations on those testimonies. By William Whiston, M. A.
Dondon, 1732.”
Ç
&
{
6
{
ſº
{
{
($
{
40 6 A LE'S RECREAT loss,
-**
“ Phlegon examined critically and impartially, t, Answer to
the late Dissertation and Defence of Dr. Sykes. To which is
added, a Postscript, explaining a Passage in Tertullian. By
John Chapman, M. A. Fellow of King's College, in Cambridge.
London, 1734. - -
“A second Defence of the Dissertation upon the Eclipse
mentioned by Phlegon; wherein Mr. Chapman's Objections,
and those of the A. of a letter to Dr. Sykes, are particularly
considered. By A. A. Sykes, D. D. London, 1731.”
“ Phlegon re-examined—in Answer to Dr. Sykes's second
Defence of his Dissertation concerning Phlegon. To which is
added, a Postscript concerning the Chronicon Paschale. By
John Chapman, Fellow of King's College, Cambridge. London,
1735.” Ending the controversy. *-
The six Dissertations published by William Whiston, in
1734, need not be regarded, one of which is a reply to Dr.
Sykes's Defence of his Dissertation: he falls short of Chapman,
and has nothing valuable but extracts from some original au-
thors (in which he is scarcely to be trusted), and the calculº-
tions of some eclipses, which help to set matters right in the said
controversy. Chapman entirely disregards him, opposing no
one but Dr. Sykes, calls in no assistance, nor refers to Whiston,
or any other.
Phlegon was an heathen, born at Tralles, a city of Lydia, and
when he grew up, became a Libertus or Freedman, of the Em-
peror Adrian, and was much esteemed for his learning, and
the works he published: among other pieces, of which a ca.
talogue is still in being, he wrote one of more note and emi-
nence than the rest, entitled, A Chronological Account of the
Victors of the Olympic Games, beginning with the first Olym-
piad, and continued down to the 229th, in sixteen books. Of
this, some fragments now remain, of which the passage in dis-
pute is one, but the whole work was extant in Photius's time,
who lived in the ninth century; for he tells us he had it in his
hands, and made considerable extracts from it: one may
judge it must have been a very long and valuable work, and of
great service towards settling many points in ancient chrono-
logy: we also find that the whole work was extant in Suidas's
time, who lived about 200 years after Photius ; but when it was
lost is uncertain. What we would chiefly observe from this is,
that Phlegon did not live at the time of the eclipse he mentions
(as some have supposed and argued on that supposition), but
G ALE's RECREATIONS. 47
transcribed his account of it from the annals of those times,
which might give a much more particular account of the eclipse
and earthquake that accompanied it than Phlegon has done, or
than perhaps suited his purpose to transcribe; and what pity
that ancient writings are not more preserved, that we might take
our prospects from the shoulders of giants. -
The evidence wanted by some of the generality or univer-
sality of the earthquake and eclipse, might possibly or not possi-
bly be there found; and thus endeth the story of an eclipse
and earthquake; being a miraculous darkness, and miraculous
eruption, observed only in that part of the earth when and where
Christ suffered ; and for which he came to suffer as God and
Man, for the general redemption and salvation of mankind;
notwithstanding which necessary event, those who were acces-
sary to his suffering, or of putting the king of heaven and
earth to so great pain and indignity, are doomed to eternal mi-
sery; like Henry the VIIIth and his abettors, who were the
providential instruments of bringing about a reformation of
Religion; but intended only the accomplishment of their own
wicked and villainous designs.
Of Primitive and Reformed Christianity.
The corruptions of Popery and the Pope's authority are some-
times confounded with the wholesome doctrines of the council
of Nice, every way different from each other: the present
reformed church of Eugland owes its authority to that
council, not to the Popish Church of England before the re-
formation. ~ -
Our church receives and acknowledges the authority of the
council of Nice, held anno 325, and of the three subsequent
councils: she rejected the errors and corruptions of popery
since crept into the church doctrines, but embraces the decrees
and deterinimations of the Nicene councils, which were all of
them held before popery had good footing, and before the
Popes usurped their pretended supreme authority over all ec-
clesiastical and temporal affairs, and also over all Christian
princes.
The council of Nice met only to determine the Arian Con-
troversy, and to regulate the festival of Easter; for we every
Sunday and holy-day repeat that very Creed which was then
48 G ALE's RECREATIONs.
first drawn up, together with the additions made thereto by the
following councils; and now keep Easter according to the de-
crees of that council, and therein differ from the custom of the
ancient Britons.
Henry the VIIIth's reformation of the Church of England
shook off the Pope's authority to give a sauction to his adultery,
and more freely to exercise his tyranny and oppression: he
dissolved the monasteries for the sake of their wealth, though re-
ligion and reformation were his pretended views: it is certain,
if he had any religion (which is much to be questioned), that
he lived and died a Papist in all points, except the Pope's su-
premacy, which he rejected, and persecuted all that owned it;
except those who were as much Papists as himself.
He burnt Papists and Protestants in the same fire; the for-
mer for not acknowledging him to be Pope, and the latter for
rejecting those six articles which contained the very marrow of
popery.
It is true, the steps taken towards a reformation in his reign
ſacilitated it in the next; but no thanks to him, who intended
no such thing, and was only accidentally an instrument there-
of, as his wicked actions happened providentially to be produc-
tive of future good; or rather he was the wicked tool by which
Providence wrought good out of evil; so that the reformation
ought no more to be ascribed to him than the salvation of man-
kind to Judas the traitor, who was an instrument of bringing it
about, though he meant no more, as before observed, than the
accomplishment of his own villainous designs.
The Temple of Folly;
A VISION.
The following Visionary Scenes, if rightly considered, convey very
instructive morals: there you have a real picture of mankind surrounded
with all their foibles, vanities, and imperfections ;-a thought of
this kind, so capable of affording useful hints, and inoffensive admoni-
tions, may not be unentertaining to the reader, as it is pointed at no
particular person, but levelled at the general depravity of the whole
Thation.
Falling into a Dream, after some late fatigues, I ima-
gined myself walking by the side of a pleasant grove,
meditating upon my own inadvertencies, and contemplating
the frailties of human nature. Methought, at some distance, I
G A L'E's H E CREATIONS. 4}
observed a person making hastily towards ine; by the rich ess of
his dress, I took him for a young heir just entered upon possession
of his estate; having set up a splendid equipage to squatider
what his frugal father with so much care and pains had got
together: curiosity prompted me to give him the meeting, and
to salute him in a manner suitable to his appearance; not doubt-
ing but from a compleater view i should find greater scope for
speculation, which fell out just as I expected.
Drawing near, I beheld the hat of this wonderful personage
very large, bound with a broad gold lace; his wig was of the
bag-kind; his waistcoat of various colours, intermixed with
flowers of gold and silver; his coat was covered with sundry
kinds of hieroglyphics, and above the middle, on his back, was
affixed a large oval plate of gold, from which a silken line hung
down, with a bearded fish-hook, and about if on the plate was
engraven in capitals: non capio, nisi capior ; he had wings on
his shoulders, like a cherub ; in his right hand he held an
enchanted rod, with which he could render himself and others
invisible; in his left hand he held a toy or rattle, resembling
that with which nurses please children.
Coming up, he addressed me with so becoming an air of com-
placency, and so easy and graceful a negligence, as shewed him
to be educated in one of the politest courts of Europe:—weim-
mediately entered into conversation, and he soon made me sen-
sible, that I had met with a person well worthy of my ac-
quaintance; a person who, notwithstanding the oddity of his
apparei, was possessed of all the most amiable qualifications both
of body and mind.
Having entertained me for a while with elegant discourses
on different subjects, the distinguishing characterstic of good
breeding, he thus proceeded :—“I perceive, Sir, you are in a
“ serious mood: I have for some time, from a principle of good
manuers, co-operated with you in imagination; now do you
accompany me for a few hours, and I will place before your
“ eyes, the real thing which you now fancy represents the im-
“aginary scene. I am high priest of the Goddess Folly, and
will conduct you to her Temple, give you a full view of that
stupendous edifice, and read you a lecture upon every class
of her numerous votaries.” I readily accepted the offered
favour; when, waving his magic wand over my head, we were
both, as I thought, instantly raised from the earth, passed swiftly
through the air, and came to a delightful plain, or garden, em-
lº -
C
{
º
$
&
&
%
&
§
&
t
&
*
Ö() G ALE'S RECREATIONs.
bellished with statues, cascades, fountains, grottos, groves, vistas,
walks, parterres, and every other ornament of ancient and mo-
dern invention. In the centre of this beautiful spot stood the
Temple of Folly, a very magnificent and amazing structureſ
built with Egyptian marble, curiously wrought, into which my
guide now conducted me by an easy ascent. He first led me up
to the temple to his own apartment, situated at the right hand
of the grand altar, over which the Goddess herself presided :
jassing along, I observed on each side numberless little chapels,
dedicated to different idols, and furnished with every article that
nature and art could produce in order to captivate the senses.
When I entered the place of his residence, he seated me in an
easy chair, covered with crimson velvet, laced with gold. Having
refreslied ourselves, he opened the door, walked backwards and
forwards, before the grand altar, and shook his rattle for the
space of a minute, which made a very shrill, though no inhar-
monious echo ; thus declaring himself:-“The dress I now ap-
“ pear in, which I imagine, Sir, has caused your surprise, is the
regular habit appropriated to my high office. This rattle you
saw me shake, is the summons to several votaries to attend
their respective altars, and perform the rites thereto belonging.
The deities to whom they are raised receive delegated pow-
&
&
&
&
<
*
&
t
“er from the Sovereign Goddess; and this vast congregation
“ consists of such attendants only as are inflamed by the objects
* *
of sense, who give a loose to their inordinate desires, and
obey their irregular passions, instead of the dictates of reason.
Those who can judge rightly of the causes of action, and
distinguish what ought to lie desired from what ought to be
avoided, and put their judgements in practice, have no busi-
mess here. The Sovereigu (; oddess presses no man into her ser-
vice ; for her attendants are all voluntary, pursuant to the
meaning of her motto I bear, Nom capio, nisi capio)'.-But
the temple now fills.--Take this wand, go where you will,
none can see you ; when this ceremony is over, return to me.”
I staid some time at the altar, where my friend officiated, and
took a full view of the Sovereign Goddess, who was seated in a
yellow velvet chair of state, under a satin cauopy of the same
colour; her complexion was fair, and her features agreeable, but
much prejudiced by her ridiculous gestures, and continual
iaughter: on her head was a crown of gold, Huig round with
little bells, like those on a child's coral, which made a continual
though no inharmonious jingling; her hoop extended five yards
&
Ç
{
le
&
K
º,
(,
&
&
º
g
º,
&
&
&
{
4
G ALE’s RECREATIONS. ..) |
on each side; before her stood a table covered with toys of all
sorts, the offerings of her devotees, with which she played, and
seemed delighted : her votaries were all disguised, looking like
a mixed multitude, composed of all nations upon earth ; and
were divided into small parties, whispering and Squeezing in a
confused hum. -
Tired of this station, I took a turn round the Temple, and
having observed the different idols in each compartment, I went
to the theatre, thence to the opera-house, and last of all to the
great room, where some were dancing, some gaming, some ca-
villing, some wheedling, and flattering for interest, and some
betraying their friends.
Having rambled about for a considerable time without see-
ing one object that could afford me true pleasure, I observed
the Goddess of Folly to withdraw, and her congregation dis-
appeared.
I hastened to my friend's apartment, who observing me more
inclined to melancholy than mirth, was pleased to entertain me
with the following discourse on the strange sights that so lately
had appeared before me.
“Though you have had a cursory view, Sir, of all the follies
“ incident to mankind, perhaps you may be at a loss to guess
“ how such a multitude of fools could possibly be assembled;
permit me therefore to inform you in what manner I gain
so many proselites to, and adorers of, the Goddess whom
“I serve; and for what reason we indulge their several ruling
“ passions. I travel through all Europe, and when I find a
party addicted to what is called pleasure, but in fact curiosity
and wanton sensuality, I shake my rattle, and instantly an
encircled round ; I, without much conjuration, can readily
discern how many of these fools are fit for my purpose ; I in-
vite them to my levee, and having allurements suited to every
inclination, I make them such offers of my favour and friend-
ship, that, greedily swallowing the bait, or taking my hook,
they enlist with great joy under the banner of my patroness.
The inhabitants of your island, male and female, have many
humours among them, to whom I annually pay a visit, and
seldom fail of gaining my mistress many proselites; for the
weakness and depravity of mankind cannot be more conspicu-
ous than in employing their time and acquisitions there to
ignoirle purposes: hence you beheld at the grand altar so
many devotees of distinction, all masqueraders' persons in
F Q
&
g
{
{
{
º
{
&
{
4.
4
&
{
&
&
Ç
{
&
&
&
&
&
ſ
$
£
&
&
º
{
t
&
&
{
K
.4
*
jº GALE'S RECREATIONS.
... . | - -
“ high life, who, according to the proverb, keep holiday all the
“ year: these over-act the vices of the vulgar, both in public
“, and private conduct, and are justly distinguished by their
“‘waist of discretion. Thus again, if a man finds himself ad-
“ dicted fo anger, and suffers not his intellectual faculties to
“ perform; their functions, I create in him by my allurements
“ an insatiańle thirst for revenge, that opportunity permitting
“ him to gratify, dire reflection may succeed; while he sur-
“ renders himself into my custody, and plays the fool by sur-
“ rendering his own quiet and happiness at the same time. -
“. If any be troubled with pride, the attendant of self-con-
“ ceit, and ambition gains the ascendant over them, I allure
“ them to adhere to those views which entail their destruction.
“ ºf they delight in pleasing the palate, or to stupify their
“senses with drinking; I allure them to excess and drunken-
“ mess, that they may play the fool with their constitutions,
“ their health, and their peace of mind. -
“If to please the eye, or the ear, be their favourite inclina-
“tion, I allure them to follow obscenity, plays, oratorios, music
“ meetings, balls, operas, assemblies, gardens, routs, drums,
“ drum-majors, riots, and hurricanes, that they may hear and
“ see objects for enhancing their vain ideas; and inflammatory
“ lust taking possession of them, or a desire of being distin-
“guished for trifles, I cause them to squander their substance
“ idly, and to feel want for their not applying it to charitable
“ or useful purposes; who are so great fools as to think of no-
“ thing but actual enjoyment with all the fine faces they meet
“ among the brilliant fair. -
“You might observe the idol fashion, peculiarly adored by:
“ the fair sex, to which they have so many different ways of
“ worshipping and sacrificing; some you might behold pay
“ their devotion in the habits they wear; others, by the sacri-
“ fices they make: some think the idol is a great lover of
“ whalebone, or cane, and therefore I allure them to be so silly
“ as to wear several yards of both sorts about their legs, and to
“ case their bodies with coats of mail made of the former; so
“ that their shapes may be reduced to the form of a taper to-
“ bacco-stopper; others, who are inclined to think that the
“ idol will esteem them for wearing frizzled sheep's heads, or
“ tetes de mouton, I allure to become ridiculously expensive, by
“ purchasing sham locks, while nature has furnished them with
“ better locks of her own ; thousands of the country folks I al-
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 5:3
“ lure with great zeal to sacrifice to this idol fashion, their time,
“ their money, their quiet, and too often their reputation.
“I shall not pretend to enumerate all the various instances
“ of lewdness, intemperance, and vanities, that have appeared
“ to you at this cursory view in the Temple of Folly ; but in
“ general, I, like Circe in the fable, omit no arts to allure per-
“ sons of all degrees and denominations, and especially strail-
“gers.”
Here my friend paused a while, and thus proceeded : “There
“ are several other meannesses to which I allure mankind; such
“ as to behold the prosperity of others with a grudging eye;
“ to look upon the afflicted without a sympathizing concern ;
“ to hug resentment, when by properly showing it a good un-
“ derstanding might ensue; to be pleased with the imperfec-
“ tions of others; to procure self-applause ; to be silent when
“ the cause of another should be maintained ; and to be guilty
‘‘ of other disingenuities of the like kind, bordering on pride
“ and envy, are all objects of my bait. Folly and inadvertency
“ are very near relations, and my business is to gain them pro-
“ selites by my various snares and allurements, and my endea-
“ vours seldom fail of success.
“Our indulging mankind in their favourite passions is by
“ way of chastisement. You must be sensible, Sir, that the too
frequent repetition of pleasure of any kind, makes it nauseous,
“ and palls the appetite; it is for this reason, all that offer sa-
“ crifices to the respective idols in the Temple of Folly are
“ obliged to submit to corporal punishment as often as the
“ Goddess shall think fit; hence the devotees grow weary of
“ their duty, and there are few but would gladly return to good
‘' habits, which we seldom allow. . .
“ But it gives me great pleasure to find there is one Ulysses
“ who can withstand all the charms and allurements he has had
“ recourse to.” The Goddess now returning to the temple be-
fore a multitude of adorers, and the temple bell sounding to
worship, my friend too beginning to shake his rattle, I started
upon liny scat, which awaked me.
The Philosophy of Manners, with the Doctrine and Applica-
tiºn thereof to Human Conduct.
THE mischiefs daily arising from the common neglect of
decency and good manners are a proof of the importance of
F Ö
54 G ALE'S RECREATIONs.
such necessary conduct in our behaviour as may prevent those
evils.
A statesman, lawyer, divine, orator, or disputant, of the
greatest talents, requires a degree of demeanour and address to
engage the attention and bias the inclination of his hearers
before he can persuade them to a right opinion; and therefore
too much care cannot be taken to acquire that quality which
must set off all the rest; and which serves to correct those sole-
cisms in behaviour which men, either through giddiness, or a
wrong turn of thought, are most likely to commit to their own
disadvantage.
Politeness is not less an ornamental accomplishment than a
thing necessary to procure happiness, connected as closely with
small things as with great ; which may be observed from the
cross accidents to be met with relating to trifles; for disquiet is
found a very great evil, let it arise from what cause it will.
Iu the concerns of common life, as well as among persons of
rank and fortune, it may be Glºserved, that numbers are brought
into bad circumstances from small neglects more than from
great errors in material affairs; for shillings and pence, so light-
ly thought of by many people, go to the making up of large
Słl???.S.
Our duty to our neighbour is not sufficient when we pay our
debts, and do him no injury; we owe him farther obligations
of civilities, complacencies, and endeavours to give him pleasure,
in order to preserve the true relish of life in reciprocal enjoy-
ments; as also in his affection and esteem, procured by means of
politeness done him. -
Honorius is a person equally distinguished for his birth and
fortune; his natural good sense has been improved by his edu-
catiºn ; his wit is lively, and his morals unspoited, yet lie has
contracted a notion, that it is beneath the man of true honour
to fail below the height of truth in ar:3 degree upon any occa-
sion whatsoever : fron; this principle, attº the habits he has ſal-
len into, he speaks abruptly whatever He thinks, without any re-
gard to the company or place where he is: he reads a lecture on
female hypocrisy before a married couple, where the lady was
violently suspected of it : soon after he fell into a warm (teeka-
mation on simºny and priestcraft before two diguitaries of the
church ; he is therefore more dreaded than esteemed by his ac-
quaintance. -
GAL E S R ECREATIOSs.
5
...}jºr
Prudentius, on the contrary, came into the world inder great
disadvantages of birth and fortune; yet by his behaviour lie has
acquired a handsome estate in the country, on which he lives
with greater reputation than most of his neighbours.
His readiness to do obliging offices gained him the love and
esteehi of his inferiors; his deference to those in high station
procured him their good will ; and the complacency he expressed
towards his equals, and those immediately above him, made
them espouse his interest with almost the sanie warmth as their
own; by which means he rose to preferment, and affluence has
made no alteration in his imanners.
The same easiness of disposition still attends him in that for-
tune to which it has raised him, who is at this day the delight
of all who know him; from an art he has of persuading them
that their pleasures and their interests are equally dear to him
as his own. -
Who then, if it were in his power, would refuse what Hono-
rius possesses ' But who would not wish that possession accom-
panied with Prudentia's talents and sweet disposition 2
The practice of politeness does not require that a trian should
fall into a carelessness, or contempt of science; since a neces-
sary stock of knowledge will distinguish every one from the pe-
tlant, and adorn his other qualities: perspicuity should run
through all his easy discourse ; and candour and sincerity appear
in all his thoughts and actions.
Religion, which is become the jest of fools, should be always
treated with the utmost respect; for what can be a greater of.
fence, or more shocking to good sense and manners, than to
speak ludicrously, or with contempt of “ that worship which
“ men, from a sense of duty, pay to that being unto whom they
owe their existence, with all those blessings and benefits attend-
ing it?” -
All party disputes and politics must be set aside, and reflec-
tions on men's professions; and aii expressions or behaviour
whatsoever that are any ways liable to give pain, should, with
the utmost caution, be avoided.
Invective, ridicule, and raillery, are very offensive weapons,
and dangerous to be dealt with ; the playing with which for di-
version, being similar to jesting with the point of a naked
sword, insulting or wounding the person it is turned against :
a false ambition, envy, and ill-nature, often prompt the posses-
56 - G A LE'S RECREATIONS.
sor to employ these weapons by making continual war against
the more worthy.
A sudden vehemence in discourse is not a little shocking to
others, at the same time it exhausts not a little the person who
puts it in practice ; contrary to the rules of good breeding :
this defect arises from impatience at the difference of opinion,
while we are equally guilty in cherishing the same tenacity in our-
selves. .
If submission to others be a thing disagreeable, why should
we expect it ourselves? Truth can only justify tenacity of opi-
ision; and if we calmly lay down what is reasonable, it will
hardly fail of convincing those to whom we speak: heat pro-
duces heat, and the clashing of opinions seldom fails to strike
out the fire of dissention: passion excites opposition, and that
very opposition, to a man of tolerable sense, should be the
strongest reproof for his inadvertency.
As this foible is more especially incident to the fair sex, it
may not be amiss to remind them likewise, that passion is as
great an enemy to beauty as it is to truth; it discomposes the
sweetest features, discolours the finest complexion, and gives
the air of a fury to the face of an angel; whereas, to effect what
they wish, what can be denied to beauty speaking with an air
of satisfaction ? Complaisance does all that vehemence would
4xtort ; as it is anger alone can abate the influence of their
charms. Redundancy in conversation is a fault rather from
carelessness than design; and is the more dangerous the less it
is considered.
A person of a loquacious disposition may escape open censure
from the respect due to his quality, or from an apprehension in
those with whom he converses, that a check would but increase
the evil, and like curbing a hard-mouthed horse, tend only to
make him run a head the faster: from whence the person in
fault becomes often rivetted to his error, by mistaking a silent
contempt for a profound attention.
Conversation should be looked upon as a sort of bank, in
which all who compose it should have their respective and
proper shares: the man who attempts to engross it, trespasses
upon the rights of his companions in partnership, and whether
they think fit to tell him so or not, he will not of consequence
be regarded as a fair dealer.
Conversation differs from other co-partnerships in one very
material point, which is this, that it is worse taken if a man
G ALE'S RECREATIONS. 57
pays in more than his proportion than if he had not contri-
buted his full quota ; provided he be not too far deficient.
Some of the fair sex, when past the moon of life, or in the
wane of their beauty, are apt to disoblige their hearers with to-
pics of detraction; by which they reduce the light of those stars
to gild the hemisphere only where they once shone with spark-
ling and resplendent lustre.
Some men are guilty of egotism, or self-panegyric, to the
great lessening of themselves and disturbance of others; and this
is a weakness, the bare mention of which shews it to be an im-
proper topic to entertain company ; yet there are men perpe-
tually introducing and recommending themselves who appear
amazed at the coolness of their auditors, by forgetting that
there is scarce a person in the room who has not as good an
opinion of himself at least as of any body else.
Disquisitions of this kind into liuman nature properly belong
to sages in polite philosophy; the first principle of which is
not to offend against such dispositions of mind as are almost
inseparable from our species; to find out and methodize which
require no small pains and application: reflections on these
sort of subjects will open a sense of novelty, which is attended
with a most powerful recommendation.
The character of a Marplot, in an assembly of impertinents,
should be carefully avoided.
Instances might be produced of Major Ramble engrossing
a tedious conversation on his travels for an hour, in company
with gentlemen who he knew had seen all and more than be
described; wherein a desire of displaying his own parts bu-
ried every other circumstance in oblivion. When Dr. Hectic
started a subject on medicinal bath waters, and tried the com-
pany's patience for a considerable time, without staying for
their approbation, Mr. Mathematics sat silent ; but the most
unaccountable of all, Mr. Papillo, after all these impertimen-
cies, read the conſpany a lecture upon a Medallion, to make
them amends for the late queer conversation he had observed ;
when every one losing all patience, took up his hat, and went
away without saying a word,
Thus far the rocks are described on which is split the bark of
good manners, and all those passengers of life set adrift who
would arrive at the character of being agreeable.
Having conducted you to the door of the world's great
school, you must enter and practice the precepts here laid down,
jS G ALE'S RECI: EATIONs.
avoiding all positiveness and affectation; and make what further
observations your experience can discover. Your best way to
improve will be from conversation with the fair sex; who,
in general, possess all the accomplishments of politeness in an
eminent degree, and are qualified to teach the utile and dulce;
hy whose means alone you may arrive at the summit of Mount
Pleasant.
Of the Supreme Being and Creator of the Universe; and his
Iuſluence and Dominion over all his wonderful Works.
AS we cannot but conceive the universe as depending on
the first cause and chief mover, whom it would be absurd,
not to say impious, to exclude from acting in it; so we have
Some hints of the manner in which he operates in nature from
the laws which we find established in it: theugh he is the
source of all cfficacy, yet we find that place is left for second
causes to act in subordination to him; and mechanism has its
share in carrying on the great scheme of nature: the establish-
ing the equality of action and re-action, even in those powers
which seem to surpass mechanism, and to be more immediately
derived from them, seems to be an indieation, that those
powers, while they derive their efficacy from him, are however,
in a certain degree, circumscribed and regulated in their opera-
tions by mechanical principles; and that they are not to be
considered as mere immediate volitions of his (as they are often
represented), but rather as instruments made by him to perform
the purposes for which he intended them.
For example; if the most noble phanomena in nature be pro-
duced by a rare elastic etherial medium, as Sir Isaac Newton
conjectured, the whole efficacy of this medium must be resolved
into his power and will who is the supreme cause: this how-
ever does not hinder but that the same medium may be subject
to the like laws as other elastic fluids, in its actions and vibra-
tions; and that if its nature were better known to us, we might
make curious and useful discoveries concerning its effect from
those laws. It is easy to see that this conjecture no way dero-
gates from the government and influences of the deity, while it
Jeaves us at liberty to pursue our enquiries concerning the na-
-utoa II* {}o jū) as Moſſ set on Julp ‘oſquqold Klûjû SI u
put: : out is lttosold tuo III “osta Ayuu on Jo Solbol \va.is louho all
lºw quo Sith utouſ uohuoluuuuttoo Xue out on su Ioſ ojºssed
-ut iſ opput stºu ou : oatuett Jo Iounne on Aq pottiisop uooq
3Abu ol squodd: Yutº “Suſun ouo Jo oonou axiu, Juq jottiito a AA
ºut top
Iſoul săultſ, oxes \sul upluſ\\ oottonguſ allºpouttur ours oup Aq
do “smouth Insul Jo uoulio Alojuſ oth Sq peoupoid on Sojubilo
esoul lau}ou w ‘aţţubue on trousouh jue).Iodul Kioa tº od on todie
hou Saop 11 ‘olun Jo SpoLiod hºstp Klos ºr ujuouſ “uſu Āq polo,
-ju aq ol ounbol on su os Hosſuſ'ſ uodu utopuddop osto \ſum oup
botuloſ sell & Hop oup St. Juq : Subout It...injeu Jouko to ‘shoutoo
jo strontºlovo.1 out Aq Sojitºtio osoti, undwa Stoudosop!d ouos
t ‘ros oſſ, tºol] sooué) sip Jºoti Kios le pue ‘q}rea of
Jo equjins out; Hitotioq split: A Jo spol punt onios polo Aoosip ‘cos
put put: Jo unoq “sluttuitº Jo Souaq tuto.J put: : A\o.15 on punoj
Aoti jou out; sºurid (Ious odolf M. Soorld tu put: “Inſpo oup, Jo Juo
doop 5up ‘Sapoq Isopleu au, uodu Jo Shueid jo stionssoudun oth
uto II : Lopio outes oil, tº uſeñu puuo ale Roq, a lotſ w ‘sootleſsip
aqt.top;suoo Kia A or loulo noto uto.U pole.ie/tos put uoxiouq od on
Soltinatios put ‘lolluutu Itºujo. K.I.S.A tº uſ aq on putao) aid solun
-attles Ulalu w ‘plu.ns of Jo tuoulouseud oth luog Klurphoſ).Ind
: H].Ibo oth Jo oot").Ins out to solull lauluoy in potiot!detſ over
Suonnoxo. 183.15 Jetſ, “uout Snoruojun Aq pole.I)stiolutop uooq
set uſ urols&s au, Jo Suonou put buouloutaºid osm. Isºſt put
9|actus allout oth ul aould axle, as waxin low pluolis I Kuw uoseo.1 ou
30s ow pue : tusſuurloout yo seldouſld ot) (In: A popunoduloo pue
pouiquio) Apue;suoo 'o N ‘uoisindo. “uonor.Ilup “All Autº putſ ow
3.131|A : aimleu Jo as moo uoultitoo all III osed oul St Aoux oA siq,
Ioj : Kotoujo pure oolo) iodoid Ilau, o Abu ol powo Ile air uppu...w
‘syueju puesnuouin usûl aletup.Ioqns 5ul AoEduto &g ‘osio.Aium oil, III
shop osmoo auto Idus oth 1911A (II.Iouttutu au, Fulu toouoo “poluosoid
-at aroq SI ſeq.A tº KIPulptognxo juſtin Kub oralp sº IoM ‘ousual
-Xa pue Injumped oiou leaddu Kudosolitid ulouſ ext:"I aw Swara
oup ‘osmeo autoidns on] spie.A0) oinleu Jo oppos all, un asſu aw
Louijuſ alſ, Io; ; alouto.{d on outnăut's os (Badde Aoû Hoſt(A Slso.I
-onuſ osoul land &alp streatu (IJIU W Aq : smonnay put: Areußeun
se aſ Bunuosoidal Ka ‘Kudosolitiq Jo lied outſſºns soul on KIQ
-eq0.1d sº yellºw Jo Sn a Audap put ‘ootto It sounduo Ino on puo
tle ind “sluounusu! are pattuahu Kuº Funuſupe mouſ w ‘osnco
oulaïdns aſp jo suonito A one paluul out Slawodosoq, as Iosal AII)
-seq on A Katſ, ‘Stojaſ M. taunſpoul e Homs Jo Suojelodo put otm)
69 's NOILv3 HO3 I s.3T V o
()() **
GALE’s RECREATIONS.
munication betwixt the other planets, and betwixt the different
systems. We are able by telescopes to discover very plainly
mountains, precipices, and cavities, in the Moon; but who tread
those precipices, or what purpose those great cavities, many of
which have a little elevation in the middle, serve, we know not;
and are at a loss to conceive, how this planet, without any at-
mosphere, vapours, or seas, as it is now the common opinion of
astronomers, can serve for like purposes as our earth. t
We observe sudden and surprising revolutions, on the surfac
of the great planet Jupiter, which would be fatal to the inha-
bitants of the earth. We observe in them all enough to raise
our curiosity, but not to satisfy it.
From hence, as well as from the state of the moral world,
and many other considerations, we are induced to believe, that
our present state would be imperfect without a subsequent one;
wherein our views of nature, and of its great author, may be
more clear and satisfactory. It does not appear to be suitable
to the wisdom that shines throughout all nature, to suppose that
we should see so far, and have our curiosity so much raised,
concerning the works of God, only to be disappointed at the
end.
As man is undoubtedly the chief being upon this globe, and
this globe may be no less considerable in the most valuable
respects than any other in the solar system; and this system, for
ought we know, not inferior to any in the universal system ; so,
if we should suppose man to perish, without ever arriving at
a more complete knowledge of nature than the very imperfect
one he attains in his present state, by analogy, or parity of rea-
son, we might conclude, that the like desires would be frus-
trated in the inhabitants of all other planets or systems; and that
the beautiful scheme of nature would never be unfolded, but
in an exceedingly imperfect manner, to any of them : this
therefore naturally leads us to consider our present state of pre-
paration or probation for farther advancement, which appears
to have been the opinion of the most judicious philosophers-of
old. And whoever attentively considers the constitution of
human nature, particularly the desires and passions of men, which
appear greatly superior to their present objects, will easily be per-
suaded, that man was designed for higher views than this life:
these the author of nature may have in reserve, to be opened to
us, at proper periods of time, and after due preparation: Surely
it is in his power to grant us a far greater improvement
GALE'S RECREATIONs. 61
of the faculties we already possess ; or even to endow us with
new faculties, “ For we know things in our present, or any
state, but according to our ways of perception; and our know-
ledge and faculties in a new state may be different, and the pre-
sent be of no use: we may perceive every thing intuitively, in
vast plans of ideas, or without external ideas, by the constitu-
tions of things; with a power of not forgetting, and to assume
faculties or ways of knowledge, as suits our purpose or design ;
and of making extensive comparisons and conclusions; and may
exist in a form requiring no nonrishment or supply of substance,
from motion, as in our present mortal state of being,” Pal. Au-
thor. Of which, at this time, we have no idea for penetrating far-
ther into the scheme of nature, and approaching nearer to himself,
the first supreme cause. We know not how far it was proper, or
necessary, that we should not be let into knowledge at once ;
but should advance gradually, that, by comparing new objects,
or new discoveries, with what was known to us before, our im-
provements might be more complete and regular ; or how far it
may be necessary, or advantageous, that intelligent beings should
pass through a kind of infancy in knowledge; for new know-
ledge does not consist so much in our having access to a new ob-
ject, as in comparing it with others already known; observing
its relations to them, or discerning what it has in common with
them, and wherein their disparity consists.
Thus our knowledge is vastly greater than the sum of what
all its objects separately could afford; and when a new object
comes within our reach, the addition to our knowledge is the
greater the more we already know; so that it increases not as:
the new objects increase, but in a much higher proportion.
Effects of Bad Company.
1. BAD company is ruinous to fame and reputation.
2. Judging men look on others from the company they fre-
quent; according to the old proverb, shew me your company,
and I'll tell you the man.
3. Ill company often gives an incurable wound to reputation.
4. Revelling with prostitutes, and parading with gamblers,
wert thou a king, thy reputation could not be safe.
5. Ill company, like objects besmeared with filthiness, be-
smear all those who come near or touch them.
6, Ill company is the ruin of youth, and the reproach of age.
G.
62 G ALE's RECREATIONs.
7. Ill company is the grand engine with which the devil ef-
feets most of his purposes on mankind.
S. Ill company is to be shunned as deadly poison, or as a
Suare laid for your safety and welfare. .
9. Unavoidable and innumerable mischiefs and misfortunes
attend the keeping bad company. -
10. Many men have been good till they were ill associated.
l I. Pure water clanges its quality and virtue by passing
through pernicious minerals.
I Q. When vice runs in a single stream or rivulet, it is shallow
and fordable ; but when many of these vicious streams fall and
unite into one large and deep channel, the unwary are drowned
therein.
13. Good and wise associates are like princes in offensive and
defensive leagues against the common enemy ; one is a bul-
wark for the mutual safety and protection of the other.
14, Bad companions and associates, like a jack o'lanthern, or
nisguiding light, lead the unwary insensibly into ambuscades.
15. Evil companions, like the syrens, allure men into danger-
ous follies and destructive vices.
16. He who frequents evil company requires stronger anti-
dotes carried about him than are carried by a physician visiting
his infected patients.
17. It is better to have no companion or associate than to
have an ill one.
J.S. Acquaintance is similar to commerce, or dealing of one
tradesman with another ; begun by accident, continued by
custom or inclination, and revocable, on either side, at pleasure.
I (). When a commerce of acquaintance happens between two
persºns, and is carried on in mutual confidence; and if through
inadvertency either find himself deceived in his choice by dis-
covering the other to be evil minded ; he, by prudent and safe
measures, should shake him off, as St. Paul did the viper.
20. When esteem is forfeited, acquaintance, or even friend-
slip, is broken. *
§ 1. When a wife forfeits her honouf, she forfeits her bus-
band's esteem ; her dependence is on the law, and her happiness
to be sought.
22. A worthy and honest companion of either sex is like a
guardian angel,
90 ‘SNOILva Hog I S. ITV o
C. :)
- ‘ttºm: Ilulis ow
samu \ \suſ oth Jo Suo'solutiod SI so Mosumo Jo (IoIuido out topout V
iosuo peq t uſ po Solduto uotia, son!!!qu Uwo sit Jo Moottoo puto)
s:II Jo Jiosutſu so.All ol uutu pººl tº lo! sl iſ pattſ AOII () I
'popsixo jul Auti uouſ IIons ſo sooutºs
-ui luaubolj one atoll, putſ ºw los : Klºotput. Su Jo Sºul put:
ujisap us... oup sew SSoutddºt; upiti w okouold on issºideti Ito.
iſoq, swola a Autºloni put uaissed juillo Ao.15 uxo sº on Sooglous
put ; tıcipleuš SI ou tuoſi w on uoupſ!!!o all taxo tºod tº Hos
-tuºtt on solesolut on A Tºddu itu (A) ºvu, soop banaš A\op 6
‘ssoustp doop uſ alquitut: put:
Núlio A am jutoos tuouſ snoyouſo Jo Kyoſu. A v. Ioal of you ‘SAAoi's
poisotoyºſ ºut out ſlºw polulu) un puſtu & 10) aſ:lissodun St I 'S
‘oluoſpit pub (liuoyſtoo
on tubill asodva o Kišuous ojout oth soalas Áſuo IIIºw osot|A
: oun) to Jo utotu Uţ ‘inoſ Apulaq Suoluorpiu ptiº opti. ptre ‘s), I
-Ids upolu ads iſoljo os lou plmous aw ‘paatasqo KIIT Iona 5 adolu
aul Siti, a to AA—i ayelsa leadij tº utope on ‘s;uſu, Jo asuas isn'ſ e
pute “\omptroo tºušal ‘uomeonpa leioqli e s austubai Ao H 2
'povo;dula Águioa si aſ su juq ‘quoa, sīl Jo laudou oxetti
tteo le:IA uodn Hash; anſea 19A2u ſlºw puput snouauai; all. I, 9
'uonnºlsuoo aq, uſ poluos Kºtto.113
os to Ao qānotſ, ‘suonisods!p slow oth oiulºus to turnsa.I on
ºf Jo Soonotºid oul tº ‘uoos si utopsiAA ana, Jo ooloſ olid, ‘g
‘strostad Hotu Jo studetto ºutputy att] put ‘ssa.jp on Houlu
(II)sm.I., JO peaksut ‘spinul IIaq] utopt: o, Injo.It:0 olotu aq
ssauqhop pluow xas Huy all ‘ajú loſ Iaulted tº Joao;oulo iſoq,
in q1..IoM [Boi o) plujoi biotia; otout e Áed on uout alo AA ºf
i Inoſauqaq 5uţăilgo put injuoop ‘ātupuaosop
-uoo e IIIA ‘purul poleAulno Ila A u Jo uoirot:1]]+ oth Sunsel pub
IngloAod Aou put i oduolosuſ put opſid (HIAA popuoye ‘A ſubaq
Jo Idunu, oil, poall-lious Aoti 'sutabulo oth Stºos, Ao H 'g
'uoubu Joy!!od tº Jo alſo
Jo asoul ssp.a.ins on punoj udoq axell utºpuſ pH w tº Jo shutoutnuos
smodatioš pue Lapua, ‘soilot oth Jelū ‘āoloriello ania suosiod
t; Buſtigop Joj K.I]unoo go aoutouaſip S. Juououſ oſmºſ os J.O. "C
- 'uſe; 10) ‘do.10 AHap put “toxios
-old ‘loloanoid slu Kiashtu on pošenoquanjo set uput lando oiott
pug poºl A Juq : 195uuq sitſ Ajsmus on SIIC 105.x, ºf HL I
- S
ÖS I)
'suoºpa.12sq O ºm.toſt pup smooupl?00s!!!"
64 GAL E's RECREATIONS.
11. Gf how little value and dependance are the strongest pro-
fessiºns of jove gºd friendship in a heart abandoned to the wild
starts of passion, fiying from one extreme to another
12. It is prudent sometimes to smother resentment, and even
to repay great oftences with great benefits; by these means we
tnay gain over a powerful and dangerous enemy to become a
faithful and sure friend, as well as to enjoy the godlike pleasure
of returning good for evil.
13. The basest returns for the greatest obligations raise a hor-
For in the honest mind, shocking to human nature; yet we may
learn, from the exemplary danger of listening to temptation, how
soon it may seduce us to listen to what we most detested ; for
lic who can be false to his God, and can make his religion subser-
vient to his interest, is not likely to prove true to his friend.
1 1. This world, or state of being, may be likened to an inn,
where one generation is continually passing off, and another suc-
ceeding.
15. Let none, however insignificant he may think himself,
imagine that he is neglected by his creator; for every station,
as far as it is providential, is appointed by the next cousum-
lºate wisdom——
Who sees with equal eye, as God of all,
A hero perish, or a sparrow fall. POPE,
16. There is scarcely a passion that gives a warmer glow to
the heart than gratitude : it is the foundation of every duty to
God and man; but cannot dwell in contraeted souls.
17. Kind and generous actions often meet with return when
long forgotten by the doer.
18. The ill tendency of severity to youth for little faults,
striking with terror their tender minds, is very obvious; as it
puts them upon all kinds of shifts, or arts of evasion, to prevent
punishment; thereby corrupting their native honesty and sim-
plicity, which ought, as a first principle, to be carefully culti-
vated and succoured.
19. Prudence and patience are remedies for the deepest af-
flictions and distress.
20. As we treat others, we may one time or other expect to
be treated.
21. The folly of the hermetic art, and of stretching life beyond
its usual date, is ridiculous, and contrary to good sense.
CALE'S RECREATIONS. 65
22. What folly and impiety appear in some, who find fault
with the appointments of infinite wisdom, and would reform the
original constitution of things
23. Mutual dependance of station is necessary to preserve
the beauty, order, and well being of society.
24. A compassionate action carries its own reward.
25. In the course of providence, occurrences, seemingly dis-
advantageous to us, prove greatly beneficial in the event.
26. As we know not how we should behave in a different
station, it teaches us to be satisfied with the station allotted us.
27. Those reproofs do the most good, given in the least offen-
sive manner ; when, by some distant hint, you make the offen-
der his own accuser. *
28. As we cannot limit the divine omnipotence, so it is fruit-
less to busy ourselves in speculations we can never clear.
29. All that is necessary for us to know of truth and duty
lies plain before us ; and we can have no certain knowledge be-
yond our real ideas.
30. Mr. Addison observes in his Spectator (a library of
useful knowledge for both sexes), that we are not, at present, in
a situation to judge of the counsels by which providence acts,
since but liftle arrives at our knowledge, and even that little we
discern but imperfectly; and those events, the permission of
which seems now to accuse the divine goodness, may, in the
consummation of all things, both magnify his goodness and exalt
his wisdom.
31. Moral good and evil are seen to be productive of all the
happiness or misery in the world.
32. So erroneous is human judgement, that granting our
wishes would, sometimes, be the greatest cruelty done to us.
33. We behold different natious equally ardent in praying to
heaven for each other's defeat or destruction; instead of re-
signing the merit of their separate causes into God's hands.
34. A reliance on divine providence, and ascribing our suc-
cesses to God's power, is the only sure way to engage his pro-
tection; and to gain that firmness of mind which nothing else.
can afford; for he who holds the universe in dependance and
existence can easily avert the most hidden mischief, and by un-
foreseen causes turn it upon the head of the contriver,
35. To him who formed us all of one clay, it is seen, in many
instances, that the life of the meanest slave has the same protec-
tion as that of the greatest hero, and is as providentially guarded,
G 3
66 G ALE's RECREATIONS.
36. The wise author of nature has so ordered the constitu-
tion of the human mind, for the mutual happiness and preser-
vation of the human species, that the pure joys of natural affec-
tion for our children give us a delight hardly to be equalled.
How greatly therefore are those their own enemies who suffer
their vicious passions to interrupt, or totally destroy, these solid
enjoyments, and those of friendship !
37. One crime committed with impunity leads to the com-
mission of a greater, till the hopes of concealment terminate in
remorse and punishment.
38. An overbearing and insolent disposition always deserves,
and often meets, with humbling circumstances.
39. Happy is that disposition which is brought to a just sense
of its own demerits.
40. We learn from visible instances how great an injury
those parents do to their children who bring them up in a way
they are not likely to support.
41. As we know not how soon a reverse of fortune may set
our inferiors above us, we should learn from thence never to
behave disdainfully to any.
42. A fixed or well-grounded esteem often rises superior to
ill-usage, and rejoices at an opportunity of shewing itself, when
the conduct of an ingrate is altered.
43. An infinite disproportion or difference is seen between a
tyrant governed by his cruel jealousies and raging passions, and
a mind tempered with wisdom and benevolence: the horrors of
ſhe one illustrate, by contrast, the beauty and amiableuess of
the other. t
44. The haughty oppressor is often dealt with deceitfully :
his cruelty furnishes his best friends with arts to evade his power.
45. Among well instructed minds, we see grandeur makes no
part of real happiness.
46. How dreadful a temptation is extreme poverty! but when
innocently box...e. with resolution and patience, it is a happy
state, compared to any relief purchased by guilt, and the re-
proach of a bad conscience.
47. What a commanding awe is virtue seen to have over the
vicious heart, when it checks the flushed libertine, in the height
of his promised pleasure, from destroying virgin innocence
48. He becomes a victim to repentance, and a guardian and
rewarder of virtue, when he preserves those charins he was
about to destroy
G ALE's RECREATIONS. (j7
**
49. From the immorality of servants, derived from example
and negligence of masters of families, flows that irresistible tor-
rent of misfortunes which spreads through all ranks of life.
50. Old age, by means of ill example and immorality, is op-
pressed with beggary; youth are drawn into the commitment
of murders and robberies from the same evil cause.
51. If we consider the happiness which results from a fatherly
conduct of masters towards servants under their inspection and
notice, it would encourage every moral man to use his influence
towards their well doing, instead of exercising a libertine beha-
viour, so pernicious and frightful in its consequences.
Of the Advantages to be gained from any Company.
1. AS the bee sucks honey from every flower, whether grow-
ing in the field or in the garden, from which the spider also
extracts his poison; so a provident man, let his company
be what it will, may gain advantage from it, while the
indiscreet and improvident man is worsted by most conver-
sation. -
2. Wise men improve themselves from contrary qualities; for
when vice beats up for recruits, as soon as her ugly form is dis-
covered, instead of enlisting, she frightens her attendants, who
fly to virtue's standard for refuge, and immediately take on in
her corps.
3. Every man learns to correct his own faults by seeing how
ugly those deformities appear in others.
4. A drunken fellow, wallowing in a kennel, would make us
believe, at first sight, that Circe has transformed him into a
swine; as the soldiers of Ulysses, in Homer's fables, were trans-
formed on a like occasion ; being a lesson of instruction in Ho-
mer against such bestiality. *
5. Choler, passion, and insolent pride, by being seen, correct
those deformities in others.
6. Some have imagined, that cruel commanders will be trans-
migrated into cart horses, and whipped by carmen to their duty.
7. Some others have imagined that the rich popish clergy,
who fleece the poor and distressed, as well as the rich and opu-
lent (preaching up charity, and doing mone), will be transmi-
grated into beggars, to stroll the country for a livelihood,
6S GALE'S RECREATIONS.
8. Others have imagined, that the great whore of Babylon,
dressed in Scarlet, will be transmigrated into a poor street-
walker, and prostitute herself to every mean fellow for a liveli-
hood.
9. Others again have imagined, that the part of mankind
who prostitute honest principles for gain to themselves, and to
the disadvantage of others, will be transmigrated into robbers of
different degrees and denominations.
10. That lawyers will be transmigrated into false witnesses;
and that every one who has dishonoured his profession will be
transmigrated into a being of a class the most worthy of his de-
InheritS.
1 J. Reasonable men mend by looking at vice; but profligates
grow the worse for the sight. -
12. As neither example nor precept, except in matters of re-
ligion, can be an absolute guide for any man's conduct, it must
be an experienced and practical judgement in the knowledge
of men and things, that must direct him in the doublings and
turnings of the world,
13. Since in the state of man's life events are casual for the
future, it is impossible that any man can leave to his successors
infallible rules to direct them, because he knows not how times
and things may altar.
14. In some things men will fall short of those who went be-
fore them; in others they will go beyond them : such imperfect
beings are mem.
15. As the industrious bee gathers honey from different flow-
ers, so (like men gathering fruit from all kinds of company) she
completes the composition by blending together the honey ga-
thered from several. *
I (). It requires care in conversation, and choice of acquaint-
ance, to distinguish the real and useful from the counterfeit and
worthless sort: this is done by observing every good and bad
talent without dislike or prejudice to any man.
17. As men cannot pass through the world without meeting
vice in their passage; so when they meet it, they should make the
best use of it, that they may avoid being intimate with, or in-
fected by it. * *
18. The example of good society may be improved to the
doing some future good. º
19. When we fall into bad company, we may from thence
learn where the rocks lie that we are to shun. -
GALE's RECREATIONs. 69
*
To .
20. As the mariner makes every wind serve him for sailing
towards his intended port, even amidst dangers, difficulties, and
currents, when he has sea room; so a prudent man will navigate
himself into the harbour of safety and happiness in any com-
pany.
21. As embassadors from foreign states avail themselves of
all advantages they are sent to take; so mankind, sent hither to
avail themselves of the happiness of a future state, should gain as
much empire on that douinion as they can ; who, like the phy-
sicians, by correcting poison should make it medicable for the
mind's health, Hwhich, of its own nature, and without such me-
cessary correction, is destructive to the human being.
22. The imperfections and depravities of the present human
state, with all the different modes of pleasure and pain con-
sidered, are such, that the best and wisest human being may,
with reason, wish for a translation from this to some other orb,
or situation of being, among the innumerable worlds, revolving in
infinite space, either visible or remote from sight; in hopes that
there is some state amongst them to be found of more substantial
and permanent happiness than what, from experience, can be
enjoyed upon this our contracted spot of earth.
23. If the multiplication of our faculties of perception, and
the enlargement of our understanding, connected with a sub-
stance fitted for such a change (not affected by hunger, thirst,
heat, cold, pain, &c.) could once become our privilege, without
a possibility of a future death, or a falling from that state, but
still advancing towards perfection, to what a pitch of happiness
(O infinite and sacred Creator) shall we then attain.
CHANGE OF ACQUAINTANCE.
BY O BSERVATOR.
1. ACQUAINTANCE, or friendship, is dissolved, like a
broken league, or a cloud by the winds, when the conditions
are forfeited.
2. Acquaintance, founded on self-interest and selfish views,
changes with advantage and new prospects.
3. The aggressor, in acquaintance or friendship, first breaks
the ties.
4. There is no right of future acquaintance founded in the
custom of present intimacy.
70 G ALE'S RECREATIONS.
5. Choice, or liberty, will warrant an alteration in friendship,
or acquaintance, on a sufficient cause assigned.
6. Esteem is forfeited in friendship as well as in love.
7. Gratitude, entailed by a generous benefactor, should be ac-
knowledged as a debt due, though never discharged, for the
weighty obligations received.
8. To forbid gratitude is to forbid humanity and duty.
9. Praise for a small accomplishment is often founded on
fear, is a tribute of flattery, and at best to be suspected of sin-
cerity, when actions do not concur to prove the heart.
---
Rules found in the Study of a Periodical Author.
1. SELECT the best things, and improve what is useful.
2. Reject immoral and indecent subjects.
3. Promote truth, and suppress error.
4. Determine place of connection.
5. Extract truth from the dross of words, scattered in a mul-
titude of books; as gold is selected and refined from its ore,
scattered abroad in the mines.
6. Truth is smothered by many, but made conspicuous by
few and expressive words.
7. Eloquence (by metaphor, similitude, and allusion) strikes
like a likeness in a glass.
8. False metaphor and allusion are similar to painting in dis-
proportion, or to giving a wrong likeness.
9. The ornaments of language should be striking, while they
convey a strong likeness of the thing, or things, represented.
10. Never sacrifice truth to prejudice.
11. Do no injustice.
12. Treat an open enemy with generosity; but a treacherous
and concealed one as he deserves.
13. Moral rules and maxims, drawn from experience, will
direct men to the port of happiness, as ships are guided through
a tempestuous occan to a safe harbour by the plain and sure
rules of navigation,
l2 *3 NOIlya Ioa H salvº)
ootnºptiodop sciouto (or 5 to lootſoa lemmti uſ lot on tougour
orio Jo uogoolſp oth pul: “ooutoutſtly pur. Iowod oft|Aſp aq, topuu
‘tion buiploqus Aol put ºth tu pongalo ouaw ‘sueodde 3, “ue}\
'sutopitipi put shup Joao Sulu put 5upſsoud KI
lutopiao annopſ void out Aſp ºut Nq poorld alº Saúl Moſq w top
-tim (pot) Ng patidsºn put poleop) Juautuoso; [RAIojo swel out
o, Suſpiobe ‘tionealo Jo Sesodiud alji oluooxa pnt: ‘IIIA sitſ Koqo
on ‘oouapi Aold on Aſp all, Jo ‘s]tioju to “slºtotuuſsuſ st: pontaio
alſo M Roul till ‘poiſojuſ sſ 11 obtail w—: uſed Io allustrold slogo
IIowa on YoodSol III ‘UAO to pooj op on to Aod (Ioun Jo Suoios
-troo opetti as Aoxºll otos, ‘sſertiſtie poleolo tolpo Ilu o Aoqi, stron
-Bus polluxo Itaúl Jo Suoſostoo sug arou alow on A\ 'ptiotto idutoo
Sanſubry Ilah run III, put: “uatuojpnſ pub ‘uostol ‘rionoago.I
‘Vioulouſ ‘riondoorod ‘tionesuos Aoux Islg Kolū osuous ‘unito Jo
Jods slip IIodu juioq (IoI) pasjooo... asig ‘synºld aq} axiII ‘ual V
‘Āialoos ſo spenpl.Appuſ oil, pue “situț, Ile Jo
Monto.10 oth on loodso.I uſ tielt. Jo Anup oth poisoſtuttu si uoi)"
-alo Jo sº tow oup Jo ‘uonus losold put: ‘Nuoulieu ‘noſtin ‘ouioqos
‘aomooutloo ‘bottupuadop oup uſ : Ssanidduſ upſuuſ Jo pºt.
‘Āqdosolſtid ſellout Jo looſqus Jodoid aun SI us!!IA putºslopin on
: Noſua ow sugatſoq put “soul not: ‘SIo avod oup Joj ‘sºuth II* Jo
Johne aq, on 3.5utuouſ put opunt.tº Ino alloxo soul our put
: ssotſpooj pun: Ssauqua tº s.1onto.10 oth Jo Seap! Ino allºwa Sottº oth
IIIA ‘Actiº on soonoſos ojº uouo intº ‘uopu Alasqo uno Hoptin
1soiu auroo HoàIAA SyſIoM osoul Niluſoodse ‘tion Polo Jo Syllos, oil,
Jo Inoptibañ put. Aloue's okuguſ on ONIJ.VIdiwGJ.NOO
- 'popoul)2(I won 5,7331 p.mlb.V.
10 : woºvat) ſo sy.toſ oſ, wo.tſpot.taſia upſiſ ſo ſºng on L
‘p, 1ſtripe poo; oth prie ‘payerſ are prºl ou.L
: p.11nbow (loos tuousno Kq one sliqeq poor)
'upo no K puw aq ‘pinow no& se you ol,no& JI
‘uetti put unnos alſ, SMIBut Ruiptrensiaplin HäuoqJ,
'appse liºn, JoAa SSoutreoul tuo.II Uns puv
‘apins plmous sqols InoS IIe ooliopnid pub SVTTVd
200/2S ap Innox (sº.14 0) ss2.ippy
72 G ALE'S RECREATIONs.
and happiness; in which a deviation from the laws of nature,
and the general good of creation, can never be supposed, to the
disorder, confusion, or destruction of any part thereof, which
would be to subvert and destroy the peace, order and harmony
of the whole. That since the beauty, order, and good of the
whole creation is evidently supported and preserved by the in-
finite wisdom and power of an almighty Creator, he must be
virtually present every where, by his essence, to direct and influ-
ence the whole; or by his delegated powers and commands to
his ministers and agents, in their several appointed stations and
subordinations, amidst innumerable revolving worlds, in the in-
finite space, who are directed to regulate and govern under
them.
In which several appointed stations and gradations of power
and influence, every intelligent being created should co-operate
to the great end or design of the world; from which the inani-
mate and sensitive parts of creation, with the whole species of
animals, governed by the laws of nature and instinct, never devi-
ate. , And man, and other intelligences, by their freedom only
can fail of their duty; like the lesser wheels and movements of
a grand machine, always going true to answer one main end,
except disturbed and made to go wrong by falling into the hands
of evil guides. -
Hence it also appears, that the first cause of infinite nature,
and of nature's whole scheme, could have no beginning; there-
fore the cause must be infinite in power and wisdom, which
must be God; who therefore must exist necessarily (indepen-
dent of creation, or of any power or being), and therefore can
never cease to exist, from etermity to etermity; without a possi-
bility of ever changing his existence to non-entity; who, being
able to do all things possible and consistent with his own attri-
butes, glory, and . to do, yet cannot destroy himself.
Who is the fountain of all life, wisdom, power, glory, perfec-
tion, and happiness, as well as the cause and support of all
created beings, of all material forms, and of every other sub-
stance whatsoever, that can be seen or comprehended; in and
by whom all things perpetually subsist ; whose attributes and
perfections are infinite and incomprehensible.
Hence it is inferred, that all those intelligent beings, holding
their existence and degrees of excellence under him, who are
conscious of their freedom to act or forbear to act, and of being
G ALE'S RECREATIONS. 73
subject to his laws and protection, are by that consciousness
bound to obey and perform the duty required of them, in each
particular superior or inferior station of life, in the scale of sub-
ordinate intelligent beings. And thence it is farther inferred, that
those intelligent beings who depend on his power and goodness
in every state should not only in duty submit to and obey his
laws, but are bound in gratitude to be thankful for his benefits
received with humble prostrations, worship, and adoration :
who, if they expect to be made farther happy, or continued in
the happiness they at present enjoy, through his boundless fa-
vour and bounty, should solicit the continuance of his favour,
influence, and support, here and hereafter.
Hence it will follow, that men's religious duty is founded in
the practice of morality, depending on a rational and natural
religion, and not on an enthusiastic superstition, improved by
true faith and revelation, in praying, homage, worship, adoration,
thanksgiving, and soliciting favour of the giver of all benefits,
and supreme of all beings.
This natural and moral religion, improved by true faith,
chiefly consists in the love of God and man ; and doing to
others as we would be done unto ; being, as we are told by the
great example and Saviour of mankind, the sum and substance
of the gospel.
For he who does good or evil to others sets a forcible exam-
ple for others to do the like good or evil to himself; --whence,
on the one hand, proceed friendship, friendly alliances, kind-
messes, and the several benefits from doing good to others that
happen to men linked in society; as, on the other hand, pro-
ceed quarrels, hatred, malice, effusion of blood, and all the
mischiefs and evils consequent from injuring others that befal
mankind; of which the diviue Socrates (who was an example
and sufferer before Christ for shewing men their errors of ac-
tion) gave us a clear demonstration, as to the effects of moral
or immoral conduct.
Against mankind's reason, and sober approbations, the seve-
ral implanted rebellious and unruly passions and affections
are observed to be continually making war, and causing their
unhappiness and misery: to oppose and conquer which pas-
sions and affections is the work of a philosopher and a Christian,
and of parents by an early education to perform.
|H
GALE’s RECREATIONs.
From nature's chain, whatever link you strike,
Tenth or ten thousandth break the chain alike.
Aspiring to be Gods, if angels fell,
Aspiring to be angels, men rebel ;
And who but wishes to invert the laws
Of order, sins, against th' eternal cause.
Pop E's ETHICé.
EN.D OF THE FIRST PART.
{`URIOUS
|RIE CIR JE AT II (O) NS,
—u—
PART II,
* *-º-º-º-º-º-º-º: -- *-* * ...”
Previous to these Recreations with the Cºrrels, it will be recº-
sary to explain the Method of making the Pass : that is,
bringing a certain number of Cards from the bottom of the
Pack to the top; as many of ºthese Recreations depend ºn
that Mama:uvre.
|HOLP the pack of cards in your right hand, so that the
** palm of your hand may be under the cards; place the
thumb of that hand on one side of the pack, the first, second, and
third fingers on the other side, and your little finger between
those cards that are to be brought to the top, and the rest of
the pack; then place your left hand over the cards, in such
manner, that the thumb may be at C. (Pl. I. Fig. 1 and 2.) the
fore finger at A. and the other fingers at B.
The hands and the two parts of the cards being thus dis-
posed, you draw off the lower cards confined by the little fin-
ger and the other parts of the right hand, and place them, with
an imperceptible motion, on the top of the pack.
It is quite necessary, before you attempt any of the recrea-
tions that depend on making the pass, that you can perform
H Q

76 G ALE'S RECREAT I or's.
it so dexterously that the eye cannot distinguish the motion of
your and , otherwise, instead of deceiving others, you will
expose yourself. It is also proper that the cards make no noise,
as that will occasion suspicion. This dexterity is not to be at
tained witheut some practice.
It will be necessary, in several of the following recreations,
to have a pack of cards, including one or more that are a
surall in atter longer or wider than the rest; a proper method of
pieparing which will be given in the course of these recreations.
The Can't! of Divination.
3 (ave a pack in which there is a long card; open the pack
at that part where the long card is, and present the pack to a
erson in such maimer that he will naturally draw that card.
[e is then to put it into any part of the pack, and shuffle the
cºtt's : you fake the pack, and offer the same card in like man-
tier to a second or third person; observing, however, that they
... not stand near enough to see the card each other draws:
jou then draw several cards yourself, among which is the long
eard, and ask each of the parties, if his card be among those
cards, and he will naturally say yes, as they have all drawn
the same card: you then shuffle all the cards together, and
cutting them at the long card, you hold it before the first per-
son, so that the others may not see it, and tell him that it is his
card: you then put it again in the pack, and shuffling them a
second time, you cut again at the same card, and hold it in like
manner to the second person, and so of the rest.
if the first person should not draw the long card, each of
the parties must draw different cards; when cutting the pack
at the long card, you put those they have drawn over it, and
seeming to shuffle the cards indiscriminately, you cut them
again at the long card, and shew one of them his card: you
then shuffle and cut in the same manner, and shew another per-
son his card, and so on ; remembering that the card drawn off
py the last person is the first next the long card; and so of
the rest.
This recreation may be performed without the long card
in the following manner. Let a person draw any card what-
ever, and replace it in the pack; you then make the pass, and
bring that card to the top of the pack, and shuffle them with-
out losing sight of that card, You then offer that card to a
!?
!
G ALE's RECREATIONS. 77
second person, that he may draw it, and put it in the middle
of the pack. You make the pass, and shuffie the cards a second
time in the same manner, and offer the card to a third persol,
and so again to a fourth or fifth, as is more fully explained fur-
ther on.
There is frequently exhibited another experiment, similar to
this, which is by making a person draw the long card; then
giving him the pack, you tell him to place his card where he
pleases, and shuffle them, and you will then name his card, or
cut the pack where it is: you may also tell him to put the pack
in his pocket, and you will draw the card, which you may easily
do by the touch.
The four Confederate Cards.
Let a person draw any four cards from the pack, and tell
him to think on one of them : when he returns you the four
cards, you dexterously place two of them under the pack, and
two on the top : under those at the bottom, you place four
cards of any sort ; and then taking eight or ten from the bot-
tom cards, you spread them on the table, and ask the person
if the card he fixed on be among them : if he say no, you are
sure it is one of the two cards on the top : you then pass
those two cards to the bottom, and drawing off the lowest of
them, you ask if that is not his card ; if he again say no, you
take that card up, and bid him draw his card from the bottom
of the pack. -
If the person says his card is among those you first drew
from the bottom, you must dexterously take the four cards that
you put under them, and placing them on the top, let the other
two be the bottom cards of the pack, which you are to draw
in the manner before described.
The Numerical Card.
Let the long card be the sixteenth in a pack of piquet
cards. Take ten or twelve cards from the top of the pack,
and spreading them on the table, desire a person to think of any
one of them, and to observe the number it is from the first
card. Make the pass at the long card, which will then be at
the bottom ; then ask the party the number of his card, and
count to yourself from that number to 16, turning the cards
up one by one from the bottom: then stop at the seven-
teenth card, and ask the person if he has seen his card, when
H 3
78 G ALE'S RECREATIONS.
he will say no ; you then ask how many more cards you shall
qraw before his card appears; and when he has named the
number, you draw the card aside with your finger, and turn
up the number of cards he proposed, and then throw down
the card he fixed on.
Divination by the Sword.
After a card has been drawn, you place it under the long
eard, and by shuffling them dexterously you bring it to the top
of the pack; then lay or throw the pack on the ground, ob-
serving where the top card lays: a handkerchief is then bound
over your eyes, in such manner however that you can see the
ground, which may be easily done : a sword is then put into
your hand, with which you touch several of the cards, seemingly
in great doubt, but never losing sight of the top card, in which
at last you fix the point of the sword, and present it to him who
drew it. Two or three cards may be discovered in the same
manner, that is, by placing them under the long card, and then
bringing them to the top of the pack.
The Card thought on per force.
You part a pack of cards before a person, in such man-
ner that one of the pictured cards only is completely visible;
you ther te!! him to think on one of those cards, observing
attentively if he fixes his eye on the pictured card : when he
says he has determined, you shuffle the cards, and turning them
up, one by one, you tell him, that is his card.
If he does not appear to fix his eye on the pictured card,
or if he spread the cards in order to fix upon another, you tell
him to draw the card he chooses, and then by placing it under
the long card, you perform some other recreation. It is easy to
conceive, that this recreation may fail, and that it should not
be attempted with those who are conversant with deceptions
of this sort.
he transmutable Cards.
You must have in the pack two cards of the same sort,
suppºse the king of spades: one of these is to be placed next
the bºttºn card, which may be the seven of hearts, or any
other card ; the other is to be placed at top : you then shuffle
the cards, without displacing those three cards, and shew
a person that, the bottom card is the scwen of hearts; thes
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 79
drawing that card privately aside with your finger, which
you have wetted for that purpose, you take the king of spades
from the bottom, which the person supposes to be the Seven
of hearts, and lay it on the table, telling him to cover it with
his hand;—you then shuffle the cards again, without displacing
the first and last card, and passing the other king of Spades at
the top to the bottom, you shew it to another person —you
then draw that privately away, and taking the bottom card,
which will then be the seven of hearts, you lay that on the
table, and tell the second person, who believes it to be the king
of spades, to cover it with his hand.
You then command the seven of hearts, which is supposed
to be under the hand of the first person, to change into the
king of spades; and the king of spades, which is supposed to
be under the hand of the second person, to change into the
seven of hearts; and when the two parties take their hands off,
and turn up the cards, they will see, to their no small astonish-
ment, after having so carefully observed the bottom card, that
yotºr commands are punctually obeyed.
The Three Magical Parties.
You are to offer the long card to any one, that he may
draw it, and place it again in any part of the pack he thinks
proper;-you then make the pass, and bring that card to the
top of the pack;-you next divide the pack into three heaps,
observing to put the long card in the middle heap, as that is
most commonly chosen —you then demand of the person
which of the heaps the card he drew shall be in. If he reply
in the middle parcel, you immediately shew him the card;
but if he says in either of the others, you take all the cards in
your hand, placing the parcel he has named over the other two,
observing to put your little finger between that and the middle
heap, at the top of which is the card he drew; you then ask
at what number in that heap he will have his card appear ; if
he says, for example, the sixth card, you tell down five cards
from the top of the pack, and then dexterously making the
pass, you bring the long card to the top, and tell it down as
the sixth. - .
The Inverted Cards.
Prepare a pack of cards, by cutting one end of them
about one-tenth of an inch narrower than the other; then offer.
S() GALE's RECREATIONs.
the pack to any one that he may draw a card; place the pack
upon the table, and observe carefully if he turn the card while
he is looking at it; if he do not, when you take the pack from
the table, you offer the other end of it for him to insert that
card; but if he turn the card, you then offer him the same
end of the pack. You afterwards offer the cards to a second
or third person, for them to draw and replace a card in the same
manner. You then let any one shuffle the cards, and taking
them again in your own hand, as you turn them up one by
one, you easily perceive by the touch which those cards are
that have been inverted, and laying the first of them down on
the table, you ask the person if that card be his ; if he say no,
you ask the same of the second person : and if he say no, you
tell the third person it is his card; and so of the second and
third cards. You should lay the pack on the table after each
person has drawn his card, and turn it dexterously in taking it
up, when it is to be turned, that the experiment may not ap-
pear to depend on the cards being inverted.
The Card discovered by the Touch or Smell.
You offer the long card, or any other that you know, and
as the person who has drawn it holds it in his hand, you pre-
tend to feel the pips or figure on the under side by your fore
finger; or you sagaciously smell to it, and then pronounce
what card it is.
If it be the long card, you may give the pack to the person
who drew it, and leave him at liberty either to replace it, or
not ; then taking the pack, you feel immediately whether it
be there or not, and shuffling the cards in a careless manmer,
without looking at them, you pronounce accordingly.
The incomprehensible Transposition.
Take a card, the same as your long card, and rolling it up
very closely, put it in an egg, by making a hole as small as pos-
sible, and which you are to fill up carefully with white wax.
You then offer the long card to be drawn, and when it is
replaced in the pack, you shuffle the cards several times, giving
the egg to the person who drew the card; and while he is
breaking it, you privately withdraw the long card, that it may
appear, upon examining the cards, to have gone from the pack
into the egg. This recreation may be rendered more surprising
by having several eggs, in each of which is placed a card of
GALE'S RECREATIONs. 81
the same sort, and then giving the person the liberty to choose
which egg he thinks fit.
This deception may be still further diversified, by having, as
most public performers have, a confederate, who is previously
to know the egg in which the card is placed ; for you may then
break the other eggs, and shew that the only one that contains
a card is that in which you directed it to be.
The Card in the Pocket-book.
This recreaſion is to be performed by a confederate, who is
previously to know the card you have taken from the pack
and put in your pocket-book ; you then present the pack to
your confederate, and desire him to fix on a card, which we
will suppose to be the queen of diamonds, and then place the
pack on the table;—you then ask him the name of the card,
and when he says the queen of diamonds, you ask him if he
be not mistaken, and if he be sure that card is in the pack;
when he replies in the affirmative, you say, it might be there
when you looked over the cards, but I believe it is now in my
pocket; then desire a third person to put his hand in your
pocket, and take out your book, and when it is opened the card
will appear.
Experiments of this kind appear as wonderful to those who
have no idea of a confederacy as they do simple and trifling to
those that are in the secret.
To tell the Card that a Person has only touched with his
- Finger.
This recreation also is to be performed by confederacy.
You previously agree with your confederate on certain signs,
by which he is to denote the suit, and the particular card of
each suit, as thus ; if he touches the first button of his coat,
it signifies an ace ; if the second, a king, &c. and then again
if he takes out his handkerchief, it denotes the suit to be hearts;
if he takes snuff, diamonds, &c. these preliminaries being
settled, you give the pack to a person who is near your confe-
derate, and tell him to separate any one card from the rest,
while you are absent, and draw his finger once over it ; he is
then to return you the pack, and while you are shuffling the
cards, you carefully note the signals made by your confederate :
then turning the cards over one by one, you directly fix on the
card he touched,
S2 GALE'S RECREATIONS.
To name several Cards that two Persons have drawn from the
- Pack.
Divide a piquet pack of cards into two parts by a long card :
let the first part contain a quint to a king in clubs and spades,
the four eights, the ten of diamonds and ten of hearts; and let
the other part contain the two quart majors in hearts and dia-
monds, the four sevens and the four nines.—The cards may be
divided in any other manner that is easy to be remembered.
Then shuffle the cards, but be careful not to displace any of
those cards of the last part which are under the long card : you
then cut at that card, and leave the pack in two parts; next,
present the first of those parts to a person, and tell him to
draw two or three cards, and place the remainder on the table;
you present the second parcel in like manner to another ; then
having dexterously placed the cards drawn by the first person
in the second parcel, and those drawn by the second person in
the first parcel, you shuffle the cards, observing not to displace
any but the upper cards: then spreading the cards on the
table, you name those that each person drew; which you may
very easily do, by observing the cards that are changed in each
parcel.
The two convertible Aces.
On the ace of spades, fix with soap a heart, and on the ace of
hearts a spade, in such manner that they will easily slip off.
Shew these two aces to the company; then taking the ace of
spades, you desire a person to put his foot upon it, and as you
place it on the ground, draw away the spade : in like manner
you place the seeming ace of hearts under the foot of another
person: you then command the two cards to change their places;
and that they obey your commands, the two persons on taking
up their cards will have occular demonstration.
A deception similar to this is sometimes practised with one
card, suppose the ace of spades, over which a heart is pasted
slightly; after shewing a person the card, you let him hold one
end of it, and you hold the other, and while you amuse him
with discourse, you slide off the heart; then laying the card on
the table, you bid him cover it with his hand : you then knock
under the table, and command the heart to turn into the ace of
G ALE's RECREATIONs. 83
spades. By deceptions like these, people of little experience and
much conceit are frequently deprived of their money, and ren-
dered ridiculous,
To shuffle Cards in such a manner as always to keep one cer-
tain Card at the Bottom.
A person with a hard hand and stiff joints should never
think of playing deceptions with the cards, as clumsy fingers
will not do. In shewing tricks with cards, the principal point
consists in shuffling them nimbly, and yet keeping one certain
card, either at the bottom or in some known place of the pack,
four or five cards from the bottom ; for by this you may seem
to work wonders, since it is easy for you to see, or take notice
of a card; which, though you are perceived to do, it will not
be suspected, if you shuffle them well together afterwards by
the method here taught, which is this: in shuffling, let the
bottom card be always kept a little before, or, which is best,
a little behind all the rest of the cards; put it a little beyond
the rest before, right over your fore finger, or else, which is
the best, a little behind the rest, so that the little finger of the
left hand may slip up, and meet with it ; at the first, shuffle as
thick as you can, and at last, throw upon the board the bottom
card, with as many more as you would preserve for any pur-
pose, a little before or a little behind the rest; and be sure to
let your fore finger, if the pack be laid before, or your little
finger, if the pack be laid behind, always creep up to meet
with the bottom card; and when you feel it, you may there
hold it till you have shuffled over again ; which being done,
the card which was first at the bottom will come there again:
thus you may shuffle them before their faces, and yet leave
your moted card at the bottom:—you must try to be very perfect
in this method of shuffling; and having once attained it, you
may do almost what you please; for whatever pack you make,
though it is ten, twelve, or twenty cards, you may still keep
it next the bottom, and yet shuffle them often, to please the cu-
R'l OllS.
To call for any Card in the Pack.
This trick, which requires very little practice or indeed under-
standing, to perform, is dome in the following manner.
Having plivately seen a card, put it at the bottom of the
pack; then shuffle the cards till it comes to the bottom again;
84 G ALE’s RECREATIONS,
then put the cards behind you, and say here I call for, naming
the bottom card, which you have seen; and as you hold them
behind you, turn the top card with its face upwards ; then hold
forth the cards, and as you hold them you may see what the
next card is ; them put the cards behind you again, and take
the top card and put it at the bottom, with its face downwards,
and turn the next card with its face upwards, and whilst you
are doing this, say, here I call for, naming the card you saw
last; then hold forth the cards again, shewing the bottom card,
which will be that you call for ; then put the cards behind you
again, and proceed in the same manner as you did before:–you
may by this method go through them all, and call for all the
cards in the pack, to the admiration of the beholders, who
will be surprised how you could find them out when you hold
them behind you.
How to make a Card jump out of the Pack and run on the Table.
Take a pack of cards, and let any one draw any card that they
fancy best, and afterwards take and put it into the pack, but so
that you may know where to find it at pleasure : for by this
time, I suppose, you know how to shuffle the cards, and where
to find any card when it is put into the pack; then take a piece
of wax, and put it under the thumb-mail of your right hand,
and there fasten a hair to your thumb, and the other end of the
hair to the card; then spread the pack of cards open on the
table: then say, if you are a pure virgin, the card will jump out
of the pack; then by your words or charms seem to make it
jump on the table,
How to tell what Card any Man thinks on, and how to convºy
the same into a Hernel of a Nut or Cherry-stone, and the
same again into one's Pocket; and how to make him draw the
same, or any Card you please, and all under one device.
Take a nut, or cherry-stone, and burn a hole through the
side of the top of the shell, and also through the kernel if you
will, with a hot bodkin, or bore it with an awl, and with a
needle pull out the kernel, so as the same may be as wide as
the hole of the shell : then write the name of the card on a
piece of fine paper, and roll it up hard; then put it into the
nut or cherry-stone, and stop the hole up with wax, and rub
the same over with a little dust, and it will not be perceived :
then let some stander by draw a card, saying, it is no matter
GA, LE's RECREATIONS. 8.5
what card you draw: and if your hands so serve you to use the
card well, you shall proffer him, and he shall receive the same
card that you have rolled up in the nut; then take another nuf
and fill it up with ink, and then stop the hole up with wax, and
then give that nut which is filled with ink to some boy to crack,
and when he finds the ink come out of his mouth, it will eause
great laughter. By this feat on the cards, many wonders may
be done.
How to let twenty Gentlemen draw twenty Cards, and to make
one Card every Man's Card.
Take a pack of cards, let any gentleman draw a card, and
let him put it in the pack again, but be you sure that you know
where to find it again at pleasure; then shuffle the cards again
as you are taught before, and then let another gentleman draw.
a card, but be sure that you ket him draw no other but the same
card as the other did draw, and so till 10 or 12, or as many
cards as you think fit: when you have so done, let another
gentleman draw another card, but not the same, and put the
card into the pack where you have kept the other card, and
shuffle them till you have brought both the cards together; then
shewing the last card to the company, the other will shew the
trick. By this means many other feats may be done.
How to change a Pack of Cards into all manner of Pictures.
You must take a pack of cards, and paint upon the back-
side of one half of the pack, what manner of figures shall please.
your fancy best ; as men, women, birds, flowers, &c. then
paint the other half of the cards, viz. on that side where the spots
are on, after the same manner you did the other half; so be-
ween them both you will have a compleat pack of all pictures:
and when you will perform this trick you must shew the cards
but half-way. This is one of the best tricks on the cards.
To make the Constable catch the Knave.
Take a pack of cards, and look out the four knaves; lay one
of then privately on the top of the pack, and lay the other three
down upon the table, saying, here you see are three knaves got
together, about no good you may be sure; then lay down a king
beside them, saying, but here comes the constable, and catches
I
36 G-ALE's RECREATIONS.
them together ; Oh, says he, have I caught you together?
Well, the next time I catch you together, I'll punish you severely
for all your rogueries. Oh, but, say they, you shan't catch us
together in haste; for they conclude to run three several ways.
Well, I'll go here, says one, so take one of the knaves and put
him at the top of the pack ; and I'll go here, says another, so.
put him at the bottom; then I'll go here, says the third, so put
Ilim in the middle: nay, says the constable, if you run, I'll make
sure of one, so I’ll follow the first: then take the king, and
put him at the top, and let any one cut the cards asunder two or
three times, then deal out the cards one by one, and you shall
find the three knaves together, and the constable with them.
Note.—This feat would be best done with a pack of cards
that has two knaves of that sort of which you put one in the mid-
dle.
How to make a Card jump out of an egg.
To do this wonderful feat, you must have two sticks made
of a size, and both of a likeness, so that no person can know
one from the other; one of these sticks must be made so arti-
ficially as to conceal a card in the middle, as thus: you must
have one of your sticks turned hollow quite through, and then
an artificial spring to throw the card in the egg at your pleasure.
The operation is thus : take and peal any card in the pack,
which you please, and so roll it up, and then prlt it into your
false stick, and there let it be till you have occasion to make
use of it; then take a pack of cards, and let any one draw a
card, but be sure let it be the same sort of card that you have
in the stick already ; then let them put it in the pack again,
and when you have shuffled them, let that card fall into your
lap which the party drew ; so calling for some eggs, desire the
party that drew the card, or any other person in the company,
to chuse any one of these eggs, and when they have chosen
one, ask them if there be any thing in it, and they will answer
no : then take the egg in your left hand, and the false stick in
your right, and so break the egg with your stick; then let the
spring go, and the card will appear in the egg, to the amazenient
of the beholders l then conceal that stick, and produce the true
one upon the table.
G ALE'S RECREATIONS. .' 87
For a Person to chuse a Card, you being supposed not to know
what it is, and then for the Person to hold the Cards between
his Finger and Thumb, to strike them all out of his Hand,
ercept the very Card he had taken.
This is called the nerve trick, and is thus performed ; having
previously looked at a card, bid the person draw one, taking
care to shove that to him which you know ; when he has looked
at it, let him put it at the bottom; let him shuffle the cards :
then you look at them again, and finding the card, place it at
the bottom; then cut them in half; give the party that part
which contains his chosen card at the bottom, to hold between
his finger and thumb just at the corner; bid him pinch them as
tight as he can ; then striking them pretty sharp, they will all
fall to the ground, except the bottom one, which is the card he
had chosen.
This is a very curious trick, and if cleanly done, is really as-
tonishing : but may be aecounted for from the nature of the
nerves, which are always more retentive when any thing is al-
tempted to be taken either by force or surprise.
To tell what Card a Person thinks upon, though you are not in
the room, or which Card he has touched or waved his Hand Grer.
To do this trick, you must lay a wager that you will tell the
card the person has touched, though you do not see it : let
several cards be laid out on a table, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, on any
number; then turn your back, or leave the room, while the
person makes choice; on your return, you must inquire what
he will lay, having your eye upon the cards laid out; if he says
he will lay six to one, or ten to one, you must take the highest
number, as that will, in all probability, fie the card he had fixed
on. You must seem to pause about counting the cards as they
lay, and choosing the farthest off.
Iłow to deliver out four Aces, and convert them to four Knaves.
This trick is one among the many which is effected by a
quick sleight #for if it is done in a bungling manner, it may easily
be detected, and the pretender will be liable to contempt instead
of applause.
To do this, make a pack of eight cards, viz. four aces and
four knaves, and let them be laid in this order: an ace and a
I 2
SS GALE's RECREArions.
knave, and so alternately through all the eight cards; then
shuffle them, so as always at the second shuffiing, or at least
when you have done shuffling them, one of the aces may be
the nethermost card; then use some words or device, and
putting your hand with the cards to the edge of the table, let
vut privately a piece of the second card, which is one of the
knaves; then shewing to the standers-by the mether card, which
is one of the aces, be sure to cover the piece of the knave with
Your fingers; then draw out the same knave, laying it down on
the table; then shuffle the cards as before, and you will have
two aces at hottom ; therefore take off the uppermost card,
and thrust it into the middle of the pack; do the same with
the nethermost card, which is one of the aces, then you may
how another ace as before ; and instead of that lay down ano-
ther knave; proceed in the same method, till, instead of the
tour aces, you have laid down the four knaves.
The beholders, all the time thinking that they lay four aces on
the table, are greatly deceived when the cards are turned up,
stad will wonder at the transformation.
'fo fell what Card a Person pitches on, without seeing the Card
till you find it in the Pack.
The many different tricks which may be done with cards must
Have been invented by various persons, at different periods,
as it cannot be supposed that any one person could be the
inventer of all. This trick is done in the following manner;
as you hold the cards in your hand, let any one take a card
out of the pack, and look at it; then take the card from them
with your eyes shut, and put it at the bottom of the pack;
then shuffle the cards till you know it is come to the bottom
again: then putting the cards behind you, pretend to shuf-
fle them behind you, but let your shuffling be only this; take
off the uppermost card, and put it at the bottom, reckon that
two : then take off another card, and reckon that three ;
then take off as many as you please from the top, and put
them at the bottom, counting to yourself, how many you take
off: then bring the cards forth, and hold them with their faces
towards you; then take off one by one, privately counting
the number, and smell to them, as though you found it out by
your nose, till you come to the right card ; then produce it,
saying this is it ; and they will wonder how you found it out,
GALE’s RECREATIONS 89
A little practice will serve to perfect any person in this trick;
and indeed most of them depend on practice, as well as other
manual operations.
To discover the Number of Points on three Cards, placed
wnder three different Parcels of Cards.
You are first to agree that the ace shall tell eleven, the
pictured cards ten each, and the others according to their
number of points; as at the game of piquet: then propose
to any one to choose three cards, and over each of them to put
as many cards as will make the number of the points of that
card fifteen;–suppose for example, he chooses a 7, a 10, and an
ace; then over the 7 he must place eight cards; over the 10,
five cards; and over the ace, four: take the remainder of
the cards, and seeming to look for some card among them, tell
how many there are, and adding sixteen to that number, you
will have the number of points on the three cards. As in this
instance, where there will remain Twelve cards, if you add six-
teen to that muniber, it will make Twenty-eight, which is the
number of points on the three cards”.
The Ten Duplicates.
Take twenty cards, and after any one has shuffled them,
lay them down by pairs on the board, without looking at them :
then desire several persons to look each of them at different
pairs, and remember what cards compose them : you then.
take up all the cards in the order they lay, and place them
again on the table, according to the order of the letters in the
following words.
M U T U S.
1 2 3 4 5
D E D I T'
6 7 S 9 10.
1 1 12 13 l 4, 15
C O C T St
16, 17 18 19, 20. &
* If this recreation be performed with a pack of quadrille cards, the
number added to the remaining cards must be eight.
t These words convey no meaning : the last word is sometimes written
Coecis; but that being no Latin word, can make no sense with the others;
if, indeed, it was Caecis, a sort of sense might be made out; but then the
* Would by no means answer the o in Nomen, as it must do to perform
the recreation.
I 3
00 t; A 1, E'S RECR EAT IONS.
Now you will observe that these words contain ten letters
repeated, or ten pair of letters; therefore you ask each person
which row, or rows, the cards he looked at are in ; if he says
they are in the first row, you know that they must be the
second and fourth ; if in the second and fourth rows, they must
be the ninth and nineteeth, and so of the rest.
To name the Number of Cards that a Person shall take out
of the Pack.
To perform this recreation, you must so dispose a piquet
pack of cards, that you can easily remember the order in which
they are placed ;-suppose for example, that they are placed
according to the words in the following line.
Seven aces, eight kings, nine queens, and ten knaves;–
And that every card be of a different suit, following each
other in this order, spades, clubs, hearts, and diamonds : then
the eight first cards will be the seven of spades, ace of clubs,
right of hearts, king of diamonds, nine of spades, queen of
clubs, ten of hearts, and knave of diamonds; and so of
the rest”. -
You shew that the cards are placed promiscuously, and then
offer them with the backs upward to any one, that he may
draw what quantity he pleases; which, when he has done, you
dexterously look at the card that precedes, and that which
follows those he has taken: after he has well regarded the
cards, you take them from him, and putting them into different
parts of the pack, shuffle them, or give them to him to shuffle ;
during which you recollect, by the foregoing line, all the cards
he took out, and as you lay them down, one by one, you mame
each card.
This is a pleasing recreation for those that have a good
therhory; they that have not should never attempt it.
-1 Continy of different Names being written on the Cards, to
tell the particular Nume which any Person has thought onf.
On ten cards, write a hundred different names, observing
only, that the last name on each card begins with one of the
* This recreation may be further diversified, by placing the cards
in such manner, by the table for thirty-two numbers, that after
they have been shuffled once or twice, they may come into the above
ºrder.
+ This is called the impenetrable Secret,
G ALE'S RECREATION Se {) {
letters of the word IND ROMJACUS, which letters, in the
order they stand, answer to the numbers 1, 2, 3, &c. to 10 :
on ten other cards, write the same names, with this restric-
tion, that the first name on every card must be taken from the
first of the other cards, whose last name begins with I ; the
second name must be taken from that whose last name begins
with N ; and so of the rest: then let any one choose a card
out of the first ten, and after he has fixed on a name give it
you again, when you carefully note the last mame, by which you
know the number of that card. You then take the other ten
cards, and after shuffling them, shew them to the person one by
one, and ask if he sees the name he chose, and when he says
he does, you look to that name which is the same in number
from the top with the number of the card he took from the
other parcel, and that will be the name he fixed on. As for
example, suppose he took out the card that had the word
Daphnis at time bottom, which is the third card, and that he
fixed on the name Galatea, then that would necessarily be the
third on the other card.
G ALE'S RECREATIONs.
Order of the Words on the first Ten Cards.
First Card. Second.
Celadon Pomona
Andromeda Omphalus
Silenus Ariadne
Acis Lisis
Eglea Flora .
Sirincus Danae
Thyrsis Alcander
Polyphemus Tiresias
Proteus Issoria
Jason Narcissus
Fifth. Sirth.
Jatona Icarus
Hilas Clitander
Thisbe Alcinous
Diana Endimion
Palaemon Alcidon
Hebe Iphis
Sappho Achelous
Acteon Philomela
Medusa Cephalus
Orpheus Mirtilus
Ninth.
Hipolitus Eson
Corilas Calistus
Procris Arachne
Caparissa Pirus
Arethusus Vertumnus
Third. Fourth.
Deucalion Licas |
Hesioma Calypso
Galatea Medea
Thetis Adonis
Atys Ceres
Palamedes Cassandra
Melibaeus Pales
Orion Menelaus
Nisus Glaucus
Daphnis Rophelina
Seventh. Eighth.
Ganymede Leander
Aristea Peleus
Hyacinthus Calista
Circe Cadmus
Mopsa Psyche
Piramus Semele
Philemon Iphigenia
Astrea Silvia
Pelias Alpheus
Adrianus Coridon
Tenth.
Dryope Isander
Nessus Isidora
Philoctetes Melicerte
Marsias Riblis
Licas Silvander
GALE’s RECREATIONS.
93
Order of the Words on the last Te
First Card
Celadon
Pomona
MDeucalion
Licas
Latona
Icarus
Ganymede
Leander
Hypolitus
Dryope
Fifth
Eglea
Flora
Atys
Ceres
Palaemon
Alcidon
Mopsa
Psyche
Arethusus
Licas
Proteus
Jssoria
Nisus
Glaucus
Medusa
f
Second
Andromeda
Omphalus
Hesiona
Calypso
Hilas
Clitander
Aristéa
Peleus
Corilas
Nessus
S;* { h
Sirineus
Danae
Palamedes
Cassandra
Hebe
Iphis
Piramus
Semele
Eson
Isander
Ninth
Cephalus
Pelias
Alpheus
Pirus
Riblis
n Cards:
Third Fourth
Silenus Acis
Ariadne Lisis
Galatea Thetis
Medea Adonis
Thisbe Diana
Alcinous Endimion
Hiacinthus Circe
Calista Cadmus
Procris Caparissa
Philoctetes Marsias
Seventh Eightſ.
Thyrsis Polyphemus
Alcander Tiresias
Melibaeus Orion
Pales Menelaus
Sappho Acteon
Archelous Philomela
Philemon Astrea
Iphigenia Silvia
Calistus Arachne
Isidora Melicerte
Tenth
Jason Myrtilus
Narcissus Adrianus
Daphnis Corydon
Rophelina Vertumnus
Orpheus Silvander
94 G ALE’s RECREATIONs.
Instead of ten cards, there may be twenty to each parcel,
by adding duplicates to each card, which will make the re-
creation appear the more mysterious, and will not at all em-
barrass it, as you have nothing to remember but the last name
on each card; or, instead of names, you may write questions on
one of the parcels, and answers on the other.
Of the Combination of the Cards.
The tables we here give are the basis of many recreations,
as well on numbers, letters, and other subjects, as on the cards;
and the effect here produced by them is the more surprising, as
that which should seem to prevent any collusion, that is, the
shuffling of the cards, is, on the contrary, the cause from whence
it proceeds. - -
It is a matter of indifference what numbers are made use of
in forming these tables: we shall here eonfine ourselves to such
as are applicable to the subsequent recreations: any one may
construct them in such manner as is agreeable to the purpose he
intends they shall answer. -
To make them, for example, correspond to the nine digits
and a cypher, there must be ten cards, and at the top of nine
of them must be written one of the digits, and on the tenth a
cypher; these cards must be placed upon each other in the
regular order, the number 1 being on the first, and the cypher
at bottom: you then take the cards in your left hand, as is
commonly done in shuffling, and taking off the two top cards,
1 and 2, you place the two following, 3 and 4, upon them;
and under those four cards the three following, 5, 6, and 7 :
at the top you put the cards 8 and 9, and at the bottom the
card marked 0 , constantly placing in succession 2 at top
and 3 at the bottom, and they will then be in the following
order:
8.9.3.4.1.2.5.6.7.0
If you shuffle them a second time, in the same manner, they
will then stand in this order:
6.7.3.4.8.9.1.2.5.0
GALE'S RECREATION$. 95
Thus, at every new shuffle, they will have a different order, as
expressed in the following line:
shuffle 8.9.3.4, 1.2.5.6.7.0
6.7.3.4.8.9, 1.2.5.0
2.5.3.4.6.7.8.9. 1.0
9. 1.3.4.2.5.6.7.8.0
7.8.3.4.9.1.2.4.6.0
5.6.3.4.7.8.9.1.2.0
1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.0
:
It is a remarkable property of this number, that the cards
return to the order in which they were first placed, after a num-
ber of shuffles, which added to the number of columns that
never change the order, is equal to the number of cards: thus
the number of shuffles is 7, and the number of columns in which
the cards marked 3, 4, &c, never change their places is 3, which
are equal to 10, the number of the cards: this property is not
common to all numbers; the cards sometimes returning to the
first order in less number, and sometimes in a greater number of
shuffles than that of the cards.
Though the cards are here directed to be shuffled by twos
and threes only, yet tables may be constructed with equal faci-
lity for shuffling them by 2, and 1, 3, and 4, or any other num-
bºr whatever; observing that the fewer cards are taken toge-
tnºy, the less liable you will be to err.
Note.—Before you venture to perform these recreations, you
should accustom yourself to shuffle the cards exactly and readi-
ly, which will be easily attained by practice,
96
G ALE'S RECREATIONS.
TABLES OF COMBINATIONS,
Constructed on the foregoing principles.
order before shuffling. After 1st shuffle. After 2nd.
I
Q
.*
& Y
• )
4.
TABLE I.
FOR TEN NUM BERS.
8
9
3
!
.;
6
After 3rd,
Q
5
3
:
!
GALE's RECREATIONs.
TABLE II.
FoR Twenty-Four NUMBERs.
Order before shuffling. After lst shuffle. After 2d. After 3d.
I Q3 2I 17
2 24 22 20
3 1 S 12 Q
4. 19 15 7
5 } 3 5 13
6 14 Ö 14
7 8 O 3
S 9 3 IS
9 3 1 S 12
1() 4. } 9 15
11 I 23 2}
I 2 2 Q.1, QQ
I 3 5 I 3 5
14 6 14 6
15 7 8 9
16 10 4. 19
17 1 I I Q3
18 , 12 2 24.
IQ I 5 7 8
2O 16 10 4.
21 17 | 1 I
QQ Q 16 10
23 Q1 17 II.
‘ºl. 22. 20 - 1ſº
98. GALE’s RECREATIONS.
TABLE III.
FOR TWENTY-SEVEN NUMBERS.
Order before shuffling. After 1st shuffle. After 2d. After 3d.
I 23 21 17
2 24, 22 2O
3 18 12 2
4. 19 - 15 7
5 13 5 13
6 14 6 14
7 S 9 3
8 9 3 13
9 3 18 12 t
10 4. 19 16
1 1 I 23 21
12 2 24 22
13 5 13 5
1 4. 6 14 - 6
15 7 8 9
16 10 4. 19
17 11 1. 23
I 8 12 Q 24
19 15 jºy 8
20 16 10 4.
21 17 11 I
22 20 16 IO
23 21 17 11
24 22 20 I 6
25 25 25 25
26 26 26 26
27 27 2 Q
GALE’s RECREATIONS.
TABLE i W.
FOR THIRTY-TWO NUMBERS.
Order before shuffling. After 1st shuffle. After 2nd. After 3rd,
1 28 26 QQ
Q 29 27 25
3 23 17 7
& 4. $24, 20 I Q
5 1S 10 Q
6 19 | 1 3
7 13 I 28
8 14 2 Q
9 S 14 2
10 9 S 14
J I 3 Q3 17
12 4. 24 $20
13 l 2S 26
14 2 29 27
15 5 1 S 10
16 6 19 1 I *
17 7 13 l
18 10 9 S
19 I 1 3 Q3
20 19 4. $24.
Q | 15 5 18
QQ 16 Ö 19
Q3 17 7 13
24, QO I 2 4.
Q5 21 15 5
Q6 22 I () 6
Q Q5 21 15
28 26 22 16
20 2 25 2I
30 30 30 3()
31 31 31 3]
33 32 32 ..}}
• {
K Q
.# Q0 GALs's RECREATIONS.
4-
:
-º-
:
Several Letters that contain no meaning, being written uport
Cards, to make them, after they have been twice shuffled, give
an Answer to a question that shall be proposed: as for Ex-
amp/e, what is Love &
Let 24 letters be written on as many cards, which, after they
have been twice shuffled, shall give the following answer:
A Dream of Joy that soon is oeer.
First write one of the letters in that line on each of the
cards’; then write the answer on a paper, and assign one of the
“24 first numbers to each card, in the following order:
A D R. E. A. M. O F J O Y T H A T
J 2 3 4 5 (; 7 S O 10 1 1 12 13 14 15
S O O N I S O ' E. R.
10 17 IS 10 20 21 22 Q3 24
Next, wrife on another paper a line of numbers, from 1 to
24, and looking in the table for 24 combinations, you will see
that the first number after the second shuffle is 21 ; therefore
the card that has the first letter of the answer, which is A, must
be placed against that number in the line of numbers you have
just made f ; in like manner the number 22 being the second
of the same column, indicates that the card which answers to
the 'second letter, D, of the answer, must be placed against that
number ; and so of the rest; the cards will then stand in the
following order: -
O O F S A M N T O I S R H A E O' E.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 1 12 13 14, 15 16 17
J O R. A. D Y T
18 19 20 21 22
From whence it follows, that after these cards have been twice
shuffled, they must infalliby stand in the order of the letters in
the answer.
Observe 1, you should have several questions with their
answers, consisting of 24 letters, written on cards: these cards
should be put in cases, and numbered, that you may know to
* These letters should be written in capitals on one of the corners of
each card, that the words may be easily legible when the cards are
spread open. -
+ For the same reason, if you would have the answer after one shuf-
fle, ſhe cards must be placed according to the first column of the table;
or if after three shuffles, according to the third column.
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 101
which question each answer belongs : you then present the
questions; and when any one of them is chosen, you pull out
the case that contains the answer, and shewing that the letters
written on them make no sense, you then shuffle them, and the
answer becomes obvious.
2. To make this recreation the more extraordinary, you
may have three cards, on each of which an answer is written;
one of which cards must be a little wider, and another a little
longer, than the others; you give these three cards to any one,
and when he has privately chosen one of them, he gives you the
other two, which you put into your pocket, without looking at
them, having discovered by feeling which he has chosen. You
then pull out the case that contains the cards that answer to his
question, and perform as before.
3. You may also contrive to have a long card at the bottom
after the second shuffle ; the cards may be then cut several
times, till you perceive by the touch that the long card is at the
botton, and then give the answer; for the repeated cuttings,
however often, will make no alteration in the order of the cards.
The second of these observations is applicable to some of the
subsequent recreations, and the third may be practised in almost
all experiments with the cards. You should take care to put
up the cards as soon as the answer has been shewn; so that if
any oue should desire the recreation to be repeated, you may
offer another question, and pull out those cards that contain
the answer.
Though this recreation cannot fail of exciting at all times
pleasure and surprise, yet it must be owned that a great part of
the applause it receives arises from the address with which it is
performed.
The twenty-four letters of the Alphabet being written upon so
many Cards, to shuffle them and pronounce the letters shall
then be in their natural Order; but that not succeeding, to
shiftie them a second time, and then shew them in proper
Order :
Write the 24 letters on the cards in the following order:
1 2 3 4 5 (; 7 S () 10 1 1 12
R S H Q F tº T P G U X C
13 14 15 16 17 J S 19 Q0 Q1 22 Q3 24
N O D Y Z I K & A B L M.
K 3
I (). G ATLE'S RECREATIONS.
The cards being disposed in this manner, shew them upon
the table, that it may appear they are promiscuously marked ;
then shuffle and lay them again on the table, pronouncing that
they will be then in alphabetical order: appear to be surprised
that you have failed : take them up again, and give them a
second shuffle, and then counting them down on the table, they
will all be in their natural order.
Several Letters being written promiscuously upon 32 Cards,
after they have been once shuffled, to find in a Part of them
a Question ; and then shuffling the Remainder a second Time,
to shew the Answer.
Suppose the question to be, What is each Briton's boast !
and the answer, His liberty; which taken together contain 32
letters.
After you have written those letters on 32 cards, write on a
paper the words, his liberty, and annex to the letters the first ten
numbers, thus:
H I S L I B E R T Y
I 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 10
Then have recoursefo the table of combinations for ten num-
bers, and apply the respective numbers to them in the same
manner as in the former recreation, taking the first column,
as these are to be shuffled only once, according to that order.
H B S T , E R T H I Y
1 2 3 4 5 0 7 S 9 10
This is the order in which these cards must stand after the
whole number 32 has been once shuffled, so that after a second
shuffic they may stand in their proper order: next dispose the
whole number of the letters according to the first column for 32
letters: the last ten are to be here placed in the order above;
as follows:
w H A T I S E A C H B R I T O N'S
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 1 12 13 14 15 1017
B O A S T
18 10 20 21 22
I B S L E H T H I Y
23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 39
G ALE’s RECREATIONS. 103
Therefore, by the first column of the table, they will next
stand thus:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 1 0 1 1 12 13 14 15 16
1 T B R O N S C H B O A E A S T long card
I7 S 19 Q0 Q1 23 º 34 25 26 27 28 20 30 31 32
I I S H3 S L I B E R T W H H I Y
You must observe, that the card here placed the 16th in or-
der, being the last of the question, is a long card ; that you may
cut them, or have them cut, after the first shuffle, at that part,
and by that means separate them from the other ten cards that
contain the answer.
Your cards being thus disposed, you shew that they make mo
meaning; then shuffle them once, and cutting them at the
long card, you give the first part to any one who reads the
question, but can find no answer in the others, which you
open before him ; you then shuffle them a second time, and
shew the answer as above.
To write 32 Letters on so many Cards, then shuffle and deal
them by twos to two Persons, in such manner, that the Cards
gf one shall contain a Question, and those of the other an
! . . . . . ºr
L. : }l Slt'6'1".
Suppose the question to be, Is nothing certain and the an-
swer, Yes, disappointment.
Over the letters of this question and answer, write the fol-
lowing numbers, which correspond to the order in which the
cards are to be dealt by two and two.
I S N O T H I N G C E R T A I N
31 32 27 QS 23 24 19 20 15 16 ſ 1 12 7 S 3 4.
Y E S D H S A P O I N T M E N T
29 30 25 26 21 22 17 18 13 14 0 10 5 6 l 2
Then have recourse to the first column of the table for 32
numbers, and dispose these 32 cards in the following order, by
that column :
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 10 1 1 12 13 14 15 16
O I E R G C A N T P I N T A I S
17 18 19 20 21 Q2 23 24 25 26 27 28 20 30 31 32
T M E H S D I N N O Y N T E I S
The cards being thus disposed, shuffle them once, and deal
them two and two ; when one of the parties will necessarily have
the question, and the other the answer.
} 0.4 G ALE's RECREATIONs.
Instead of letters, you may write words upon the 32 cards, 16
of which may contain a question, and the remainder the answer;
or what other matter you please. If there be found difficulty
in accommodating the words to the number of cards, there may
he two or more letters or syllables written upon one card.
The Five Beatitudes.
The five blessings we will suppose to be, 1. Science, 2. Cou-
rage, 3. Health, 4. Riches, and 5. Virtue: these are to be found
upon cards that you deal, one by one, to five persons: first
write the letters of these words successively, in the order they
stand, and then add the numbers here annexed to them
S C I E N C E. C O U R A G E
31 26 21 16 11 6 1 32 27 22 17 I 2 7 Q
H E A L T H R. I C H E S
QS Q3 IS 13 S 3 20 24 10 14 () 4
V I R T U F.
3() 25 Q() 15 l O 5
Then range them in order agreeable to the first column of the
fable for 31 numbers, as in the last recreation—thus:
L II N A T E R E U A C R G T I U
1 2 3 4 5 (; 7 8 () 10 l l 12 13 14, 15 16
E. E. C. l I C H S () H R E E V S C
17 J S 10 Q0 Q1 22 Q3 24, 25 26 27 2S 29 30 31 32
Next take a pack of cards, and write on the four first the
word science; on the four next the word courage ; and so of
reSt. &
Matters being thus prepared, you shew that the cards
on which the letters are written convey no meaning : then
take the pack on which the words are written, and spreading
open the first four cards, with their backs upwards, you desire
the first person to choose one; then close those cºrds, and
spread the next four to the second person; and so to all five;
teiting them to hold up their cards, lest you should have a confe-
derate in the room.
You ther, shuffle the cards, and deal them one by one, in
the common order, beginning with the person who cl:ese the
first card, and each one will find in his fans; the same word
as is written on his card. You will observe, that after the sixth
G ALE'S RECREATIONS. I ().5
round of dealing, there will be two cards left, which you give
to the first and second persons, as their words contain a letter
more than the others.
The Cards of the Game of Piquet being mired together, after
shuffling them, to bring, by cutting them, ail the Cards of
each suit together.
The order in which the cards must be placed to produce
the effect desired, being established on the same principle as
that which has been before explained, except that the shuffling
is here to be repeated three times, we think it will be sufficient
to give the order in which they are to be placed before the first
shuffle.
Order of the Cards.
I Ace clubs 17 King clubs
2 Knave clubs **. 18 Ten hearts
3 Eight diamonds 19 Nine hearts
4 Seven diamonds 20 Seven clubs
wide card
5 Ten clubs 21 Ace diamonds
6 Eight spades 22 Knave spades
7 Seven’spades 23 Queen hearts
wide card
8 Ten diamonds 24 Knave hearts
9 Nine diamonds 25 Ace spades
10 Queen diamonds 26 King diamonds
1 1 Knave diamonds 27 Nine clubs
12 Queen clubs 28 Ace hearts
13 Eight hearts 29 King hearts
14 Seven hearts 30 Eight clubs
wide card
15 Ten spades 31 King spades
16 Nine spades 32 Queen spades
You then shuffle the cards, and cutting at the wide card,
which will be the seven of hearts, you lay the eight cards that
are cut, which will be the suit of hearts, down on the table;
then shuffling the remaining cards a second time, you cut at
the second wide card, which will be the seven of spades, and lay
in like manner, the eight spades down on the table : you
shuffle the cards a third time, and offering them to any one to
106 GALE'S RECREATIONs.
cut, he will naturally cut them at the wide cardº, which is the
seven of diamonds, and consequently divide the remaining
cards into two equal parts, one of which will be diamonds
and the other clubs.
The Cards at Piquet being all mixed together, to divide the
Pack into two equal Parts, and Name the Number of Points
contained in each Part.
-
You are first to agree, that each king, queen, and knave,
shall count, as usual, 10, the ace 1, and the other cards ac-
cording to the number of the points; then dispose the cards,
by the table for 32 numbers, in the following order, and ob-
serve, that the last card of the first division must be a wide
card.
Order of the Cards before shuffling :
I Seven hearts 17 Nine diamonds
Q Nine clubs JS Ace spades
3 Eight hearts 19 Ten clubs
4. Eight spades 20 Knave diamonds
5 Knave spades 21 Eight diamonds
6 Ten spades 22 King diamonds
7 Queen clubs 23 Seven spades
8 Ace clubs 24 Seven diamonds
9 Ace hearts 25 Queen diamonds
10 Nine hearts 26 Knave hearts
11 Queen spades 27 King clubs
12 Knave clubs 28 Nine spades
13 Ten diamonds 29 King spades
14 Ten hearts 30 Ace diamonds
15 King hearts 31 Seven clubs
16 Queen hearts 32 Eight clubs
* You must take particular notice, whether they be cut at the widr
card, and if they are not, you must have them cut, or cut them again your-
;, cłf,
GALE’s RECREATIONS. 107
You then shuffle them carefully, according to the method be-
fore described, and they will stand in the following order:
Cards. Numbers. Cards. Numbers.
Brought up 34
1 Nine spades 9 6 Ten clubs | O
2 King spades 10 7 Ten diamonds 10
3 Seven spades 7 8 Ten hearts 1 O
4 Seven diamonds 7 9 Ace clubs }
5 Ace spades I 10 Ace hearts (wide card) I
Carried up 34 Total 66
Brought up 101
11 Eight hearts S 22 Queen hearts 10
12 Eight spades 8 23 Nine diamonds 9
13 Seven hearts #7 24 Knave diamonds I ()
14 Nine clubs 9 25 Eight diamonds S
15 Knave spades I () 26 King diamonds 10
16 Ten spades 10 27 Queen diamonds I ()
17 Queen clubs I O 28 Knave hearts I O
18 Nine hearts 9 29 King clubs 1O
19 Queen spades 10 30 Ace diamonds H
20 Knave clubs I () 31 Seven clubs 7
21 King hearts 1() 32 Eight clubs 8
Carried up 101 Total 194
When the cards are by shuffling disposed in this order, you
cut them at the wide card, and pronounce that the cards you
have cut off contain 06 points, and consequently the remaining
part 194. This recreation excites a great degree of admiration,
but the applying these cards to the next recreation produces a
much greater.
The inconceivable Repique.
When you would perform this recreation with the cards
used in the last, you must observe not to disorder the first ten
cards in laying them down on the table; putting those cards
together in their proper order; therefore you shuffle them a
second time in the same mainer, aud offer them to any one to
cut, observing carefully if he cut them at the wide card, which
will be the ace of hearts, and will then be at top ; if not, you
1 Q8
GALE'S RECREATIONs.
must make him, under some pretence or other, cut them till
it is ; and the cards will then be ranged in such order that you
will repique the person against whom you play, though you let
him choose, even after he has cut, in what suit you shall make
the repique.
Order of the Cards after they have been shuffled and cut.
I
º
I 3
14,
I 5
| 6
Eight hearts
Eight spadesh
Knave spades
Ten spades
Queen clubs
Knave clubs
King hearts
Queen hearts
Eight diamonds
King diamonds
Queen diamonds
Ace diamonds
Seven clubs
Eight clubs
Knave hearts
King clubs
17
1S
19
23
2 I
O :)
33
24.
25
26
27
28
O
.*
so
31
32
Nine diamonds
Knave diamonds
Nine hearts
Queen spades
Seven hearts
Nine clubs
Ten hearts
Ace clubs
Seven spades
Seven diamonds
Nine spades
King spades
Ace spades
Ten clubs
Ten diamonds
Ace hearts
wide card
The cards being thus disposed, you ask your adversary in
what suit you shall repique him : if he say in clubs, or dia-
monds, you must deal the cards by threes, and the hands will be
as follows:
Elder.
Hearts, king
queen
kuave
nine
eight
SeVén
Spades, queen
knave
— eight
Diamonds, eight
Clubs, eight
------ seven
Younger.
Clubs, ace
-- king
-- queen
—-- knave
-- nine
Diamonds, ace
— king
Queen
knave
— nine
Spades, ten
Hearts, ten
G ALE's RECREATIONS. 169
tentrée, or take in Rentrée of the
of the elder. younger
Seven spades Ten clubs
Seven diamonds Ten diamonds
Nine spades Ace hearts.
King spades
Ace spades
If he against whom you play, who is supposed to be elder
hand, has named clubs for the repique, and has taken in five
cards, you must then lay out the queen, knave, and nine of dia-
monds, and you will have, with the three cards you take in, a
sixiem major in clubs, and quatorze tens. If he leave one or
two cards, you must discard all the diamonds.
If he require to be repiqued in diamonds, then discard the queen,
knave, and nine of clubs; or all the clubs, if he leave two cards;
and you will then have a hand of the same strength as before.
Note—If the adversary shoald discard five of his hearts, you
will not repique him, as he will then have a septiem in spades;
or if he only take one card; but neither of these any one can do
who has the least knowledge of the game. If the person against
whom you play would be reqiqued in hearts or spades, you must
deal the cards by twos, and the game will stand thus:
Elder hand. Younger hand.
King diamonds Ace clubs
Knave diamonds King clubs
Nine diamonds Ace diamonds
Eight diamonds Queen diamonds
Queen clubs Queen spades
Knave clubs Knave spades
Nine clubs Ten spades
Eight clubs King hearts
Seven clubs Queen hearts
Eight hearts Knave hearts
Seven hearts Ten hearts
Eight spades Nine hearts
Rentrée. Rentrée.
Seven spades Ten clubs
Seven diamonds Ten diamone's
Nine spades Ace hearts
King spades
Ace spades
},
i 10 GAL E'S RECREATIONS.
If he require to be repiqued in hearts, you keep the quint to
a king in hearts, and the ten of spades, and lay out which of the
rest you please: then, even if he should leave two cards, you
will have a sixiem major in hearts, and quartorze tens, which
will make a repique.
But if he demand to be reqiqued in spades; at the end
of the deal you must dexterousiy pass the three cards that are
at the bottom of the stock (viz. the ten of clubs, ten of
diamonds, and ace of hearts) to the top, and by that means
you reserve the nine, king, and ace of spades for yourself;
so that by keeping the quint in hearts, though you should be
obliged to lay out four cards, you will have a sixiem to a king
in spades, with which, and the quint of hearts, you must make
a reqique.
Observe here likewise, that if the adversary lay out only three
cards, you will not make the repique; but that he will never
do, unless he be quite ignorant of the game, or has some know-
ledge of your intention.
This last stroke of piquet has gained great applause, when
those that have publicly performed it have known how to
conduct it dexterously. Many persons who understand the na-
ture of combining the cards, have gone as far as the passing the
three cards from the bottom of the stock, and have then been
forced to confess their ignorance of the manner in which it was
performed.
The Metamorphosed Curds.
Provide thirty two cards that are differently coloured ; on
which several different words are written, and different objects
painted: these cards are to be dealt two and two, to four [re:-
sons, and at three different times, shuffling them each time:
after the first deaſ, every one's cards are to be of the same co-
lour: after the second deal, they are all to have objects that are
similar; and after the third, words that convey a sentiment.
GALE’s RECREATIONs. | ] }
Dispose of the cards in the following order:
Order of
the cards. Colours. Objects. Words.
l Yellow Bird I find
Q Yellow Bird In you
3 Green Flower Charming
4. Green Flower Flowers
5 White Bird To hear
6 White Orange Beauty
7 Red Butterfly My
S Red Flower Notes
9 Red Flower In
! () Red Butterfly Shepherdess
| 1 Green Butterfly Lover
I Q Green. Butterfly Your
1 J White Flower Of
14 White Flower an inconstant
15 Yellow Qrange Image
16 Yellow Flower Inchanting
17 White Qrange Ardor
1S Yellow Rutterfly My
19 bellow Butterfly Phyllis
2O White 13irt; Birds
21 Red Orange Sing
22 Red Orange Dear
23 Green Orange and Sweetness
24, Green Orange The
25 Green Bird Of
Q6 Green Bird Present
27 Yellow Flower As
28 Red Bird Changes
29 Red Bird Bosom
30 Yellow Orange Me
3]. White Butterfly Your
32 White Butterfly I long
The cards thus coloured, figured and transcribed, are to be
put in a case, in the order they here stand.
When you would perform this recreation, you take the
cards out of the case, and shew, without changing the order
in which they were put, that the colours, objects, and words,
are all placed promiscuously: you then shuffle them in the
I, Q
I 2 G & LE'S RECREAT 1 ONS.
same manner as before, and deal them two and two, to four
persons, observing that they do not take up their cards till all
are dealt, nor mix them together; and the eight cards dealt to
each person will be found all of one colour: you then take
each person's cards, and put those of the second person under
those of the first, and those of the fourth person under those
of the third : after which, you shuffle them a second time,
and having dealt them in the same manner, on the first
person's cards will be painted all the birds; on the second
person's cards, all the butterflies; on those of the third, the
oranges; and on those of the fourth, the flowers. You take
the cards a second time, and observing the same precautions,
shu Hle and deal them as before, and then the first person, who
had the last time the birds in his hands, will have the words in
his hand that compose this sentence—
Sing, dear birds, I long to hear your enchanting notes;
The second person, who had the last deal, the butterflies, will
now have these words, t
Of an inconstant lover your changes present me the image;
The third, who had the oranges, will have this sentence,
As in my Phyllis, I find in you beauty and sweetness;
The fourth, who had the flowers, will have these words,
Charming flowers, adorn the bosom of my shepherdess.
It seems quite unnecessary to give any farther detail, as they
who understand the foregoing recreations will easily perform
this.
The Repique with Carte Blanche.
In the following recreations relative to piquet, we shall
confine ourselves to the order in which the cards must stand
after they are cut, and ready to be dealt : they who choose to
shuffle them first, in order to make the performance appear
the more extraordinary, may easily dispose them in a proper
order for that purpose, by having recourse to the table of com-
binations for 32 numbers.
Elder
Younger
E.
Y.
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 1I 3
Order of the Cards :
Ace spades
Seven spades
Seven clubs
Ten hearts
Ace hearts
Knave spades
Nine hearts
Eight clubs
Queen spades
Ace diamonds
Eight hearts
Eight spades
Queen diamonds
Ace clubs
Nine diamonds
:
16 Nine clubs
17 King diamonds
18 Ten diamonds
19 Seven hearts
20 Seven diamonds
21 Nine spades
22 Knave diamonds
23 Ten clubs
24 Eight diamonds
25 King hearts
26 King clubs
27 Queen hearts X-Elder's rentrée
28 King spades
29 Ten spades
30 Queen clubs
31 Knave clubs }* rentrée
32 Knave hearts
L 3
114
G ALE's RECREATIONS.
The cards being thus disposed, the hands of the players,
after they have been dealt two and two, will be as fellows :
Elder.
Ace spades
Queen spades
Knave spades
Nine spades
Seven spades
Ace diamonds
King diamonds
Queen diamonds
Knave diamonds
Younger.
Ten clubs
Nine clubs
Eight clubs
Seven clubs
Ten hearts
Nine hearts
Eight hearts
Seven hearts
Nine diamonds
Ten diamonds Eight diamonds
Ace hearts Seven diamonds
Ace clubs Eight spades
The Rentrée
King hearts Queen clubs
Queen hearts - Knave clubs
King clubs Knave hearts
King spades t
Ten spades
The cards being thus dealt, you desire the other player to
cast his eye over the two hands, and take which he pleases, or,
condition, that if he keep the hand dealt him he shall be eldest;
but if he take the other hand he shall be youngest.
If he keep the hand dealt him, which in appearance is much
preferable to the other, he will naturally lay out the four lowest
Spades, and leave a card, by carrying the quint in diamonds and
four aces: you then tell down your carte blanche, and keeping
the two quarts in clubs and hearts, lay out the others, and
with your rentree you will have a sixiem in clubs, and a
Quint in hearts, with which you will make a repique, count-
ing 107 points; though if the cards were played, you would be
capoted.
If the opposite player choose the youngest hand, you then
discard the quart to a king in diamonds with the seven of
spades, and with your rentrée you will have a sixiem major in
Spades, and quatorze of aces; by which you will make repique
and capot. -
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 11.5
Here also you may miss the repique, if the other player keep
the hand dealt him, and discard his diamonds; but this, as in
the other cases, no one will do who has any knowledge of the
game.
Case at Piquet, where you repique the elder Hand, though he
have the Choice of the Cards after they are dealt.
The cards must here stand, after they have been cut, in the
following order:
1 Ace spades
Elder Q tºde,
Younger 3 Knave clubs
S 4 Ten clubs
E. 5 Ace clubs
6 Nine hearts
Y 7 Eight clubs
S Nine diamonds
F () Queen clubs
* 10 Eight diamonds
Y. 11 Seven clubs
12 Ten diamonds
p. 13 Ten spades
* 14 Eight hearts
Y 15 Nine clubs
10 King clubs
p. 17 King spades
18 Queen spades
Y. 19 Knave diamonds
20 Seven spades
E. 31 Seven diamonds
—dº Knave spades
Seven diamonds
Knave spades
King hearts
Knave hearts
Queen hearts
Seven hearts
Ten hearts
Ace hearts
#entrée Y 31 Queen diamonds
* 32 King diamonds
:
jºr
*
Rentrée E.
;
§
tº
O
1 16
GALE's RECREAtföNs.
The cards being thus disposed” when they are deat, the
hand of the two players will be as follows:
Elder. Younger.
Spades, ace Diamonds, ace
king knave
queen ten
knave —— nine
ten Clubs, king
— eight —-- knave
Clubs, ace —— ten
-- queen -- mine
Hearts, nine ——-- eight
— eight ——-- Sever?
Diamonds, eight Spades, nine
SeVCI) —- seven
Rentrée Rentrée
King hearts Seven hearts
Queen hearts Ace hearts
Knave hearts King diamonds
Ten hearts Queen diamonels
You then give the other players the liberty of choosing either
hand, but without seeing them ; if he choose the elder hand,
you discard the king of clubs, with the nine and seven of
spades, and by your rentrée you will have a sixiem in diamonds
and the point, which will make 22, and then added to the quint
in clubs will make 97, and you will necessarily win, as the adver-
sary will not fail to lay out his two small hearts.
If, on the contrary, he choose the younger hand, you discard
the knave, ten and eight of spades, with the seven and eight of
diamonds; then by taking in the quint to a king in hearts, you
will have a septiem in hearts, a tierce major in spades, and three
queens, which will tell 90, though the adversary should discard
to the most advantage possible.
* In all these recreations with piquet, there should be a wide card
last, that they may be properly cut.
*
6 ALE's RECREATIONS. 1 I 7
Case at Piquet, where you give the other Player mot only the
Choice of the suit in which he will be reqiqued, but that of
dealing the Cards by Twos or by Threes, and of taking
either Hand after they are dealt, you being to tell and play
first.
The cards must be disposed as follows:
1 Queen clubs 17 Queen spades
2 Nine clubs 1S Nine spades
3 Eight clubs 19 Eight spadcs
4 Seven clubs 20 Seven spades
wide card wide card
5 Ace hearts 21 Ace diamonds
6 King hearts 22 King diamonds
7 Knave hearts 23 Knave diamonds
8 Ten hearts 24 Ten diamonds
9 Queen hearts 25 Queen diamonds
10 Nine hearts 26 Nine diamonds
11 Eight hearts 27 Eight diamonds
12 Seven hearts - 28 Seven diamonds
wide card wide card
13 Ace spades 29 Ace clubs
14 King spades 30 King clubs
15 Knave spades 31 Knave clubs
16 Ten spades 32 Ten clubs
It is evident, by this disposition of the cards, that if they are
cut at any one of the wide cards, which are the last of each
suit, there will be always a stock of eight cards of the same suit;
consequently, if he with whom you play require to be re-
piqued in clubs, by cutting at the first wide card, which is the
seven of clubs, the eight clubs will necessarily be at the bottom
of the pack; and you will have for your rentrée a quint major
in clubs: the same will happen in all the other suits, by cut-
ting at the seven of each. If he deal the cards by twos, the
hands will be as follows”:
*The hands will be always the same, though in different suits,
! 1 S G ALE's RECREATIONs.
Elder.
Ace hearts
King hearts
Queen hearts
Nine hearts
Ace spades
King spades
Queen spades
Nine spades
Ace diamonds
King diamonds
Queen diamonds
Nine diamonds
- Rentrée
Ace clubs
King clubs
Knave clubs
Tem clubs
Queen clubs
Younger.
Knave hearts
Ten hearts
Eight hearts
Seven hearts
Knave spades
Ten spades
Eight spades
Seven spades
Knave diamonds
Ten diamonds
Eight diamonds
Seven diamonds
Nine clubs
Eight clubs
Seven clubs
But if he deal the cards by threes, the hands will stand thus:
Elder.
Ace hearts
King hearts
Knave hearts
Seven hearts
Ace spades
Queen spades
Nine spades
Eight spades
Knave diamonds
Ten diamonds
Queen diamonds
Younger.
Ten hearts
Queen hearts
Nine hearts
King spades
Knave spades
Ten spades
Seven spades
Ace diamonds
King diamonds
Nine diamonds
Eight diamonds
Seven diamonds
Rentree.
Ace clubs
King clubs
Knave clubs
Ten clubs
(Queen clubs
Nine clubs
Eight clubs
Seven clubs
CALE'S RECREATIONS. 119
If the other player require to be repiqued in spades, you cut
them at the 7 of that suit, and tell him he is at liberty to deal
them by twos or threes”; if he deal them by twos, he is to
choose which hand he will have, without seeing them; you being
still eldest.
If he keep his own hand, you discard the nine of hearts,
Spades, and diamonds, and either of the two queens; and by
your rentrée you will have a quint major in clubs, quatorze
aces, and quatorze kings, by which you make a repique; but
if he choose the cards dealt for the elder, you discard the
seven of hearts, spades, and diamonds, and any two of the
eights; and you will have by your rentrée the same quint in
clubs, quatorze queens and quatorze knaves; which will also
make a repique.
If the adversary deal the cards by threes, and keep his hand,
you discard the king, eight, and seven of hearts, with the nine
and eight of spades; and by your rentrée you will have the
quint major in clubs, a tierce to a queen in diamonds, three
aces, three queens, and three knaves, with which you make a
repique ; but if he choose the cards dealt for the elder, you dis-
card the queen and nine of hearts, the knave and seven of
spades, and the ace of diamonds; and you will then have the
same quint in clubs, a tierce to a nine in diamonds, three kings
and three tens, with which you will tell 29 points; therefore by
playing one, you can in this case make a pique only.
2. ** ***. .** f Tº - sº r .* * g * tº 2 . } f ºv .4//re-
4n exemplary Case at Piquet, where you repique you, Adven
sary after giving him the Choice of having the Cards dealt
either by Twos or Threes.
To dispose the cards in the order necessary to produce the
effect here required, and in all others where you give the choice
of having the cards dealt either by twos or threes, you must
have recourse to the following table :
* You are to take care he does not shuffle the cards ; and the better
to prevent it, you may so dispose them as to shuffle them before him, after
the manner explained in some of the foregoing recreations.
126 GALE's RECREATIONS.
Cards that will Numb. Cards that will Variable
of the come to the
go to the eldest Cards. youngest. cards.
1 tº l }
2 = Q
- } 3 - tº sº 3 = a
- 4. } 4 =
5 as am. * 5 *
} G } * = - mº 6 &=
7 * : * * 7 's-
} 8 : - - - 8 &
9 *= 9
I O } - - see 10 G-
11 I 1 - }
12 } 12 wº
13 E= \ 13
14 tº 14 }
| \ 1 5 R - º ºs 15 E-
ſ 16 \ 16 S-
- 17 l * = * 17 &=
\ | S § - *= * 18 tº:
10 * * * 19 =
M 2O } - * * 20 E
QQ - - ºne 22 tº
y Q: § Q3 ºf
& 24 } 2.4 tº
This table shews the different hands that result from the
two different methods of dealing the cards; that the eldest hand
has always, in some order or other, the six cards placed against
the numbers, 1, 2, 9, 13, 14, and 21 ; and the younger, the
six cards placed against 4, 11, 12, 16, 23, and 24; it shews
likewise, that the 12 cards marked 3, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 15, 17,
18, 19, 20, and 22, may be in either hand, so far as concerns
the manner of dealing the cards. -
GALE'S REGREATIONS. J Qºţ-
Being therefore certain when you deal that the cards
marked 1, 2, 9, 13, 14, and 21, will always be in the ad-
versary's hand, and those marked 4, 11, 12, 16, 23, and 24,
will be in your own hand, you must apply your six numbers
to such cards as with the three of the rentrée (which you
Inay choose as you please) will always make a great hand, and
Superior to the adversary: the great cards which you are
forced to leave, you must distribute among the variable cards,
in such manner that they can have no remarkable effect, when
dealt either way
This method we have observed in the following example,
which we here give for the satisfaction of those who would
compose these sorts of games themselves: to the numbers 4,
11, 12, 16, 23, and 24, annex a sixiem major in hearts, which
joined to the three tens of the rentrée are sufficient to make a
repique, youngest hand; but as you must prevent the elder
hand from defeating your point, by having seven cards in any
of the other suits, you are so to dispose some part of each suit,
by the columm of variable cards, that he may never have, whe-
ther the cards are dealt by twos or threes, any large sequence: ;
as you will see by the following disposition of the cards.
1 King diamonds 17 Ace clubs
2 Ace diamonds 18 Seven spades
3 Nine diamonds 19 King spades
24 Ace hearts 20 Ace spades
5 Queen spades . 21 Knave diamonds
6 Eight diamonds 22 Eight clubs
7 Queen clubs - 23 Ten hearts
8 Eight spades 24 Queen hearts
9 King clubs 25 Knave spades
10 Seven hearts 26 Nine spades
11 King hearts 27 Knave clubs
12 Nine hearts 28 Eight hearts
13 Queen diamonds 29 Nine clubs
14 Seven diamonds 30 Ten diamonds
15 Seven clubs 31 Ten spades
16 Knave hearts 32 Ten clubs
M
*
* If you cannot effect this by the cards that are to be dealt the adver-
sary, you must so dispose his reutree, that he may lay out his game, as in
the metamorphosed cards.
{22 GAL E'S RECREAT iONS.
By this arrangement of the cards, you will be sure to succeed,
whether you deal the cards by twos or threes ; even though the
adversary, thinking to frustrate your intention, should leave
three cards. -
Remark—There is no danger that any of these recreations
at piquet should be applied to a bad purpose, for after the
cards have been once shuffled by both players, it will be im-
possible to succeed in any one of them : there are, however,
tricks to be played at this, as at all other games with the
cards; such as changing the whole pack, or some particular
cards, or taking in part, or all the discard, or making the pass,
that is, bringing part of the cards at bottom to the top, as will
be more fully explained ; all of which many persons ean per-
form so dexterously, that it is impossible for the eye to discover
them. We say nothing of the practice of marking the cards,
for of that almost every one's experience will afford sufficient
proof. To aggravate the misfortune, it is indubitably true,
that many persons, who are strictly honest in all other respects,
are dishonest at cards; and that no rank or condition of men,
no, nor women neither, is entirely free from this vice.
Several different Cards being shewn to different Persons, that
each of them may fºr on one of those Cards, to name that on
which each Person fixed.
There must be as many different cards shewn to each per-
son as there are persons to choose ; therefore suppose there are
three persons, then to each of them you must shew three cards,
and telling the first person to retain one in his memory, you
lay those three cards down, and shew three others to the second
person, and so to the third : you then take up the first person's
cards, and lay them down, one by one, separately, with their
faces upwards : you next place the second person's card over
the first ; and in like manner the third person's card over the
second's ; so that in each parcel there will be one card belong-
ing to each person : you then ask each of them in which par-
cel his card is, and when you know that, you immediately
know which card it is ; for the first person's card will always
be the first, the second person's the second, and the third per-
son's the third, in that parcel where they each say his card is.
This recreation may be performed with a single person, by
letting hiºn fix on three, four, or more cards: in this case
GA1. E.'s it EUR EAT'ſ ONS. 123
you must shew him as many parcels as he is to choose cards,
and every parcel must consist of that number out of which he
must fix on one; and you then proceed as before, he telling you
the parcel that contains each of his cards.
To name the Rank of the Card that a Person has drawn
from a Piquel Pack.
By the rank of the card, we mean whether it be ace, king,
queen, &c. you are therefore first to fix a certain number to
each card; thus, you call the king 4, the queen 3, the knave 2,
the ace 1, and the others according to the number of their pips.
You then shuffle the cards, and let the person draw any one
of them: then turning up the remaining cards, you add the
number of the first to that of the second, that to the third,
and so on, till it amount to ten, which you then reject anºt
begin again; or if it be more, you reject the ten, and carry
the remainder to the next card; and so continue till you come
to the last card; and to the last amount you must add 4, and
subtract that sum from 10, if it be less; or from 20, if it be
more than 10, and the remainder will be the number of the
card that was drawn; as for example, if the remainder be 2,
the card drawn was a knave; if 3, a queen, &c.
To tell the Amount of the Numbers of two Cards that a Per-
son has drawn from a common Pack of Cards.
The small cards here tell, as before, according to the
number of their pips, but each pictured card tells for 10 :
let the person add as many more cards to each of those he has
drawn, as will make each of their numbers 25; then take
the remaining cards in your hand, and seeming to search for
some card among them, tell them over to yourself, and their
number will be the amount of the two cards drawn. An ex-
ample will make this plain : suppose the person has drawn
a 10 and a 7, then he must add 15 cards to the first, to make
the number 25, and 18 cards to the last, for the same reason ;
now 15 and 18 Inake 33, and the two cards themselves make
35, which deducted from 52 leaves 17, which must be the
number of the remaining cards, and also of the two cards
drawn. . - r
This recreation may be performed without your touching
the cards, thus : let the person who has draw in the two cards
M Q
124 GAL E'S RECREATIONS.
deduct the numbers of each of them from 26, which is half
the number of the pack, and after adding the remainders
together, let him tell you the amount, which you privately
deduct from 52, the number of all the cards, and the remainder
will be the amount of the two cards. For example, suppose
the two cards to be, as before, 10 and 7; then the person
deducting 10 from 26, there remain 16; and deducting 7 from
26, there remain 19 ; those two remainders added together will
make 35, which you subtract from 52, and there must remain
17 for the amount of the two cards as before.
As the number 26 may be thought to lead to a discovery
of the principle on which the recreation is founded, it being
manifestly the half of the pack, to render it more mysterious,
ºon may take any other number less than 26, but greater than
10, as for example 24, and let the party subtract the number
of each of his cards from that ; therefore, supposing the
numbers to be as before 10 and 7, the remainders will be 14
and 17, which make 31, to which you must add 4, for the dou-
ble of the 2 you took from 26, and the amount will be 35,
which is to be deducted from 52, as before. By this alteration
the performance will not only be rendered more abstruse, but
also more diversified, as you may change the number from
which those of the two cards are to be deducted, every time you
repeat the experiment. -
This recreation may be performed equally well with a
pack of piquet cards, and then the numbers of the two cards
must be deducted from 16, which is the half of the pack; or
if you choose to make it more mysterious, from any other
number less than 16 and more than 10; afterwards adding,
as in the last case, the double of what that number wants to
make it 16.
To tell the Amount of the Numbers of any three Cards that a
Person shall draw from the Pack.
After the party has drawn his three cards, you are to draw
one yourself, and lay it aside; for it is necessary that the
number of the remaining cards be divisible by 3, which they
will not be in a pack of 52 cards, if only 3 be drawn: the
card you draw, you may call the confederate, and pretend it is
by the aid of that card you discover the amount of the others:
then tell the party to add as many more to each of his cards
as will make its number 16, which is the third part of the
GALE’s RECREATIONs. | Q.5
remaining 48 cards; therefore, suppose he has drawn a 10, a 7,
and a 6; to the first he must add 6 cards, to the second 9, and
to the third 10, which together make 25, and the 4 cards
drawn being added to them make 29:-you then take the re-
maining cards, and telling them over, as in the last recreation,
you find their number to be 25, which must be the amount of
the three cards the person drew.
You may perform this recreation likewise without touching
the cards, as thus: after the party has drawn his three cards,
and you have drawn one, let him deduct the number of each
of the cards he has drawn from 17, which is one third of the
pack, after you have drawn your card; and let him tell you the
amount of the several remainders, to which you privately add
one for the card you drew, and deducting that amount from
52, the whole number of cards, the remainder will be the
amount of the three cards drawn;–for example, suppose the
three cards to be 10, 7, and 6, as before ; then each of those
numbers being subtracted from 17, the remainders will be
respectively 7, 10, and 11, which, added together, make 28, to
which the single card you drew being added makes 29, and that
number deducted from 52 leaves 23, which is the amount of the
three cards the party drew.
There is little reason to imagine any one will discover
why you here make choice of the number 17; but if you are
desirous of rendering the recreation still more abstruse, and at
the same time susceptible of greater variety, you may fix on
any other number less than 17, but more than 10 ; and after-
wards add to the amount of the remainders the double of what
that number is less than 17 ; in the same manner as in the last
recreation.
This recreation may also be performed with a pack of
piquet cards ; but then you must draw, or, what will answer
the same purpose, deduct 2, in your own mind, from the
whole number 32, that the remainder may be divisible by 3;
and let him deduct the number of each of his cards from that
sum, which is 10, and add the remainders together, as before:
thus, if his three cards be 10, 7, and 6, he is to deduct each of
them from 10, which is the third part of 30; therefore the
remainders will be 0, 3, and 4, which added together, make 7,
and that added to the 2 you deducted from the whole number,
makes 0, which taken from 32, heaves 23, and that must be the
amount of his three cards.
126 G ALE'S RECREATIONS.
Among the different purposes to which the doctrine of com-
binations may be applied, those of writing in cypher, and decy-
phering, hold a principal place, as will appear by the following
reCreatlonS.
To communicate Intelligence by a Pack of Piquet Cards.
The parties must previously agree in what manner the cards
shall be first placed, and then how they shall be shuffled : thus,
suppose the cards are to be first placed in the order as hereafter
follows, and then shuffled by taking off 3 from the top, putting
the next 2 over them, and the following three under them”, and
so alternately ; therefore the party who sends the cypher first
writes the contents of it on a separate paper, and then copies
the first 32 letters on the cards, by writing one letter on every
card ; he then shuffles them in the manner described, and writes
the second 32 letters; he shuffles them a second time and writes
the third 32 letters, and so of the rest. An example will make
this plain: suppose the letters to be as follows:
I am in full march to relieve you ; within three days I shall
be with you; if the enemy in the mean time should make an
assault, remember what you owe to your country, to your
family and yourself; live with honour, or die with glory,
Order of the cards before
the 1st shuffle.
Ace spades i a d u y i
'i'en diamonds a l e u l
Fight hearts In l m o i u
King spades - is u m l
Nine clubs n h I e o
Seven diamonds f b m r i
Nine Diamonds u e a c t n
Ace clubs ł w k r y i
Knave hearts l s e e a e
Seven spades in i a r m w
Ten clubs a i t h e r
Ten hearts r r h of
Queen spades c h e e i
Eight diamonds h a b y w
Eight clubs t y o o o 1
* By shuffling the cards in this manner, there will remain only two
tº put under at last, -
G A LE'S RECREATIONS. 12
Seven hearts o y a o h o
Queen clubs r on u y h
Nine spades e u i y f y
King hearts I e t e u o
Queen diamonds e d s o e
Eight spades i i n w s o
Knave clubs v f a n tº g
Seven clubs e t s l y
Ace hearts - y r e b r
Nine hearts o l n w of
Ace diamonds u h s t & d
Rimave spades w l m a l
Ten spades i e y tº r r
King diamonds t t i b u r
Queen hearts li h m in u
King clubs in a t h
Knave diamonds }} {* li T O
The person that receives these cards first places them in the
order agreed ou, and transcribes the first letter on every card;
he then shuffles them, according to order, and transcribes the
second letter on each card ; he shuffles them a second time,
and transcribes the third letter; and so of the rest.
If the cards were to be shuffled the second time by threes
and fours, the third time by twos and fours, &c. it would
make the cypher still more difficult to discover; though as all
cyphers depend on the combination of letters, there are scarcely
any that may not be decyphered with time and paius ; as we
shall shew farther on: those cyphers are the best that are by
their nature most free from suspicion of being cyphers; as for
example, if the letters were here written with one of the sym-
pathetic inks, the cards might then pass for a common pack.
The Card discovered under the Handkerchief.
Let a person draw any card from the rest, and put it in the
middle of the pack : you make the pass at that place, and the
card will consequently be at top; then placing the pack on the
table, cover it with a handkerchief, and putting your hand un-
der it, take off the top card, and after seeming to search among
the cards for some time, draw it out.
This recreation may be performed by putting the cards in
another person's pocket, after the pass is made : several cards
1 QS G ALE'S RECREATIONS.
may also be drawn and placed together in the middle of the
pack, and the pass then made.
To change the Cards that several persons have drawn from the
Pack.
On the top of the pack, put any card you please ; suppose the
queen of clubs : make the pass, and bring that card to the
middle of the pack, and offer it a person to draw ; then, by
cutting the cards, bring the queen again to the middle of the
pack : make the pass a second time, and bring it to the top,
and shuffle the cards without displacing those on the top :
make the pass a third time, and bring it to the middle of the
pack, and offer it to a second person to draw ; who must be at
a proper distance from the first person, that he may not perceive
it is the same card : after the like manner did five persons draw
the same card.
Shuffle the pack, without losing sight of the queen of clubs,
and laying down four other cards with the queen, ask each
person, if he sees his card there : they will all reply, yes,
as they all drew the queen of clubs: place four of those cards
to the pack, and drawing the queen privately away; you ap-
proach the first person, and shewing him that card, so that the
others cannot see it, ask if that be his card : then putting it
on the top of the pack, blow on it or give it a stroke with your
hand, and shew it in the same manner to the second person ;
and so of the rest.
The Four inseparable Kings.
Take the four kings, and behind the last of them place two
other cards so that they may not be seen : then spread open
the four kings to the company, and put the six cards at the
bottom of the pack : draw one of the kings, and put him at
the top of the pack; draw one of the two cards at the bottom,
and put it towards the middle : draw the other, and put it at
some distance from the last, and then shew that there remains a
king at bottom: then let any one cut the cards, and as there re-
mained three kings at bottom, they will then be all together in
the middle of the pack.
To tell the Number of Cards by their Weight.
Take a parcel of cards, suppose 40, among which insert
two long cards; let the first be, for example, the 15th, and the
other the 26th from the top: seem to shuffle the cards, and then
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 129
cutting them at the first long card, poise those you have cut
offin your left hand, and say, “there should be here fifteen
cards:” cut them again at the second long card, and say, “there
are here only eleven cards :” then poising the remainder, you
say, “here are fourteen cards.”
To discover the Card that is drawn by the throw of a Die.
Prepare a pack of cards in which six different cards are con-
tained six times; that is, in which there are only six sorts of
cards: dispose these cards in such manner that each of the
six different cards shall follow each other, and let the last
of each suit be a long card : the cards being thus disposed, it
follows, that if you divide them into six parcels, by cutting at
each of the long cards, those parcels will all consist of similar
cards.
Let a person draw a card from the pack, and let him replace
it in the parcel from whence it was drawn by dexterously
offering that part : cut the cards several times, so that a long
long card may be always at bottom: divide the cards in this
manner into six heaps, and giving a die to the person who
drew the card, tell him that the point he throws shall indicate
the parcei in which is the card he drew; then take up that par-
cel, and shew him the card.
You should put the cards in your pocket immediately after
performing this recreation, and have another pack ready to shew,
if any one should ask to see the cards.
To separate the two Colours of a Pack of Cards by one cut.
The pack must be prepared thus: all the cards of one colour
must be cut something narrower at one end than the other :
you shew the cards, and give them to any one that he may shuf-
fle them ; then holding them between your hands, one hand be-
ng at each extremity, with one motion you separate the hearts
and diamonds from the spades and clubs.
This recreation is easy and pleasant to perform, but should
not be repeated; unless you have another pack of cards which
you can adroitly substitute in the place of the former, and
with them you may separate the pictured cards from the
others, they being prepared for that purpose ; which will afford
a fresh surprise. You may also write on a number of blank
cards certain letters or words that form a question, and on
} 30 GAL E'S RECREATIONS.
others the answer. Several other recreations may likewise be
performed by the same method.
The metamorphosed Cards.
In the middle of a pack, place a card that is something wider
than the rest, which we will suppose to be the knave of spades,
under which place the seven of diamonds, and under that the
ten of clubs; on the top of the pack, put cards similar to these,
and others on which are painted different objects, in the man-
ner following: -
First card A bird
2 A seven of diamonds
3 A flower
4. Another seven of diamonds
5 A bird
6 Ten of clubs
7 A flower
S Another ten of clubs.
Then seven or eight indifferent cards; the knave of spades,
which is the wide card; the seven of diamonds ; the ten of
clubs; and the rest any indifferent cards.
Two persons are then to draw the two cards that are under
the wide card, which are the seven of diamonds and the ten
of clubs: you then take the pack in your left hand, and
Open it at the wide card, as you open a book, and tell him
who drew the seven of diamonds to place it in that opening :
you then blow on the cards, and without closing them, you
instantly bring the card which is at top, and on which a bird
is painted over that seven of diamonds ; which, to do this
dexterously, you must wet the middle finger of your left hand,
with which you are to bring the card to the middle of the
pack: you then bid the person look at his card, and when he
has remarked the change, to place it where it was before;
then blow on the cards a second time, and bringing the Seven
of diamonds, which is at the top of the pack, to the opening,
wou bid him look at his card again, when he will see it is that
he drew. You may do the same with all the other painted
cards, either with the same person, or with him who drew the
ten of clubs. -
The whole artifice in this recreation consists in bringing
the card at the top of the pack to the opening in the middle,
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 13;
by the wet finger, which requires no great practice. You
must observe not to let the pack go out of your hands while
you are performing this recreation. -
The Cards in the Opera Glass.
Provide an opera glass about two inches and a half
long, the tube of which is to be ivory, and so thin that the
light may pass through it: in this tube, place a lens of two
inches and a quarter focus, so that a card of about three
quarters of an inch long may appear of the size of a common
card; at the bottom of the tube there is to be a circle of
black pasteboard, to which must be fastened a small card
with figures on both sides, by two threads of silk, in such
manner that, by turning the tube, either side of the card may
be visible.
You then offer two cards in a pack to two persons, which
they are to draw, and that are the same as those in the glass :
after which, you shew each of them the card he has drawn
in the glass, by turning it to the proper position.
The better to induce the parties to draw the two cards,
place them first on the top of the pack, and then by making
the pass, bring them to the middle: when you can make
the pass in a dexterous manner, it is preferable, on many
occasions, to the long card, which obliges you to change
the pack frequently; for otherwise it would be observed
that the same card is always drawn, and doubtless occasion
suspicion. -
The Cards in Tea Caddies.
Two cards being drawn by different persons are put into
separate tea caddies and locked up : the performer changes
the cards without touching them, or any confederacy.—
The caddies are made with a copper flap, which has a hinge
at the bottom, opens against the front, where it catches under
the bolt of the lock, so as when the lid is shut and locked,
the flap will fall down upon the bottom; the performer places
two cards that he intends to be chosen between the flap and
the front, which being lined with green cloth, may be handled
without any suspicion; he then desires the first person to put
his card into one of the caddies, taking care it be that which
contains the contrary card from the one that he chose, and the
second into the other; he then desires they will lock them up,
Y 32 G A LE'S RECREATIONs.
which unlocks the flaps, covers their cards, and when opened,
presents the contrary ones to the view of the company.
To guess the Thoughts of any person, assuring him that you
will write beforehand on a Piece of Paper the amount of the
Parcel of Cards he shall happen to choose out of the two
placed on the Table.
Take some cards, divide them into two parcels, taking
care that in one there are only two or three sevens, and in the
other seven court cards; call for a pen and ink, and write on a
bit of paper the sevens; then turn the bit of paper down, that
what you have written may not be seem : then tell the person to
make his choice: let him choose whatever he pleases, your
number will be good, since, if he should choose the greatest
parcel, you may shew your paper on which is written the
Sevens; then desire him to count the number of cards con-
tained in the parcel he has chosen, and he will find it to be
seven, as you had guessed. This will appear astonishing to
him and to the company; but they will easily recover from their
surprise, when, on raising the other parcel, you will shew it
contains only sevens, and consequently whatever parcel he had
chosen, your number which you had set down was good, since
one parcel contained seven cards, and the other nothing but
Sevens.—This trick must not be done twice before the same
company, for then it would become tiresome —but generally,
whenever you do a trick before a company, you must never
begin it again before the same.
The Magic Ring.
Make a ring large enough to go on the second or third
finger, in which let there be set a large transparent stone; to
the bottom of which must be fixed a small piece of black silk,
that may be either drawn aside or expanded by turning the
stone round: under the silk is to be the figure of a small
card.
Then make a person draw the same sort of card as that
at the bottom of the ring, and tell him to burn it in the candle:
having first shewn him the ring, you take part of the burnt
card, and reducing it to powder, you rub the stone with it,
and at the same time turn it artfully about, so that the small
card at bottom may come in view.
GALE’s RECREATIONs.
|
The Card in the Mirror.
Provide a mirror, either round, or oval, the frame of which
must be at least as wide as a card : the glass in the mid-
dle must be made to move in the two grooves, and so much of
the quicksilver must be scraped off as is equal to the size of a
common card: you will observe that the glass must likewise be
wider than the distance between the frame, by at least the width
of a card.
Then paste over the part where the quicksilver is rubbed
off, a piece of pasteboard, on which is a card that must
exactly fit the space, which must at first be placed behind the
frame.
This mirror must be placed against a partition, through
which is to go two strings, by which an assistant in the
adjoining room can easily move the glass in the grooves,
and consequently make the card appear or disappear at plea-
Sll I e.
This recreation may be performed without an assistant, if a
table be placed against the partition, and the string from the
glass be made to pass through a leg of it, and communicate
with a small trigger, which you may easily push down with your
foot, and at the same time be wiping the glass with your hand-
kerchief, that the card may appear the more conspicuous. It
may also be diversified by having the figure of a head, suppose
that of some absent friend, in the place of the card.
Matters being thus prepared, you contrive to make a per-
son draw the same sort of card with that fixed to the mirror,
and place it in the middle of the pack; you them make the
pass, and bring it to the bottom; you then direct the person to
look for his card in the mirror, when the confederate behind
the partition is to draw it slowly forward, and it will appear as
placed between the glass and the quicksilver. While the glass
is drawing forward, you slide off the card from the bottom of the
pack, and convey it away.
The card fixed to the mirror may easily be changed each time
the experiment is performed : this recreation may be also
made with a print that has a glass before it, and a frame of suf-
ficient width, by making a slit in the frame through which
the card is to pass; but the effect will not be so striking as in the
Illil'I'OI’.
N
134 GALE's RECREATIONS.
The divinating perspective Glass.
Let a small perspective glass be made that is wide enough
at the end where the object glass is placed to hold a table simi-
lar to the following:
1. 131 10... 132 10. 133
2.931 1 1.232 20.933
3.331 12.332 21.333
4. 121 13. 122 22. 123
5.22 I 14.222 23.223
2 I 15.329 24.323
7.1 1 1 16...] I 2 25, 113
8.21 1 17.212 26.213
9.3 l l l 8.312 27.313
Take a pack of cards that consists of 27 only, and giving
them to a person, desire him to fix on any one, then shuffle
them and give the pack to you : place the twenty-seven cards
in three heaps, by laying down one alternately on each heap;
but before you lay each card down, shew it to the person
without seeing it yourself; and when the three heaps are
finished, ask him at what number, from 1 to 27, he will have
his card appear, and in which heap it then is 2 then look at
the heap through the glass, and if the first of the three numbers
which stands against that number it is to appear at be 1, put
that heap at top ; if the number be 2, put it in the middle;
and if it be three, put it at bottom: then divide the cards into
three heaps in the same manner, a second and a third time,
and his card will then be at the number he chose.
For example: suppose he desires that his card shall be the
20th from the top, and the first time of making the heaps he
says it is in the third heap ; you then look at the table in the
perspective, holding it at the same time over that heap, and
you see that the first figure is 2, you therefore put that heap
in the middle of the pack: the second and third times you
in iike manner put the heap in which he says it is, at the
*
bottom, the number each time being 3: then looking at
GALE’s RECREATIONS. 135
the pack with your glass, as if to discover which the card was,
you lay the cards down one by one, and the twentieth card
will be that he fixed on. *
You may shew the person his card in the same manner,
without asking him at what numberit shall appear, by fixing on
any number yourself; you may also perform this recreation
with the magnetical dial, by making the hand point to any num-
ber, from 1 to 27, at which you intend the card shall be found.
The foregoing recreations with the cards will be found suf-
ficient to explain all others of a similar nature that have or may
be made, the number of which is very great. To perform
these we have described requires no great practice; the two
principal points are, the making the pass in a dexterous manner,
and a certain address by which you influence a person to draw
the card you present.
Those recreations that are performed by the long card are, in
general, the most easy, but they are confined to a pack of cards
that is ready prepared; whereas, those that depend on making
the pass, may be performed with any pack that is offered.
The Dancing Card. y
One of the company is desired to draw a card, which the con-
jurer shuffles again with the others, and then orders it to appear
upon the wall; the card instantly obeys, then advancing by de-
grees, and according to orders, it ascends in a straight line, from
right to left; it disappears on the top of the wall, and a moment
after it appears again, and continues to dance upon all horizon-
tal line, &c. &c.
EXPLAN AT I O N.
This trick is so simple that I could have dispensed with
speaking of it; it consists in the first place, in obtaining a forced
card drawn, which is easily known by the card being larger
than the rest; after having shuffled it with the others, it is
taken out of the pack, the better to impose upon the com-
pany: the instant it is ordered to appear on the wall, the
compeer, or invisible agent, very expertly draws a thread, at the
end of which is fastened a similar card, which comes out from
behind a glass; another thread drawn very tight, on which it
slides, by the means of some very small silk rings fastened, run-
ning thereon, prescribes its motion and progress.
Si parva heit componere magnis.
N 2
136 G ALE'S RECREATIONs.
The Card nailed to the JVall with a Pistol shot.
The conjurer obtains a card drawn, and requests the person
who has chosen it, to tear off one of its corners, and to ob-
serve it well to know it again; he takes the card thus torn and
tears it all to pieces, burns it, and reduces it to ashes; he then
gets a pistol loaded with powder, mixed and confounded
with the said ashes, and instead of a leaden ball, a nail,
toalked by one of the company, is put into the barrel; then
the pack of cards is thrown up into the air, the pistol is fired,
and the burnt card is found nailed against the wall, the piece
torn from it is then produced, and found to fit exactly the place
from whence it was torn, and the mail is acknowledged to be the
same by the person who marked it.
EXPLAN ATION.
A corner of the chosen card being torn, the conjurer steps
into his closet, takes a similar card, and tears a corner of it
exactly in the same manner; returning, he asks for the
chosen card, places it subtily under the pack, and expertly
substitutes that which he has prepared, in order to burn it in
its stead; he then lays hold of the pistol for the first time,
under pretence of shewing how it should be cocked, fired, and
handled; one of the company is then desired to load the pistol
with some powder and paper; he seizes this interval to convey
the card to his invisible agent, who speedily nails it upon a
square piece of board, which serves to shut up hermetically,
a hole made in the partition, and the hangings, but which is
invisible, being covered with a piece of the same ; by this
means the card nailed to the wall or partition does not yet
appear: the piece of tapestry with which it is covered is
slightly fastened on one side with two pins, and on the other
to a thread, the loose end of which the compeer holds in his
hand: as soon as this last hears the pistol fired, he draws the
thread, and rapidly transports the piece of tapestry behind the
glass, the card consequently appears, and as it is the same that
had been marked with the mail just put into the pistol, it is no
wonder ſhat this trick, so difficult to account for, obtains the
applause of a numerous assembly: it depends entirely on first
loading the pistol with powder, after which a tin tube is co-
vered on the charge of powder, the card and mail being ram-
med down in the tin tube; the pistol being inverted, the tube
G ALE's RECREATIONS. 1.37
and its contents fall into the conjurer's hand to convey to his
invisible agent.
N. B. If any one should suspect that the nail in the pistol
has been juggled, his suspicion is protested against, and he is
desired to come again the next day to be convinced of his er-
ror; then he is presented with a pistol which is taken to pieces,
to shew him that there is not the least preparation.
The burnt Card shut up in a Watch.
Here the conjurer presents the company with a pack of cards,
and gets one of them to draw at random; he borrows three
watches, which one of the spectators is desired to fold up in
three different pieces of paper; they are then laid on a table
and covered with a napkin ; the chosen card is burnt, and its
ashes are put into a box; shortly after the box is opened, but
the ashes are gone : the three watches are laid on a plate, and
one of the company is desired to choose one of them, and open
it, in which he finds under the glass a piece of the burnt card,
and under the watch case, a small card representing in miniature
that reduced to ashes.
EX PLAN ATION.
The chosen card is known directly by the disposition of
the pack; the watches, well enveloped in paper, are laid on the
little trap, which opens and lets it fall into a drawer; as soon
as the compeer is acquainted with the card drawn, he stretches
out his arm under the table and takes one of the watches, in
which he deposits the card destined to be produced before
the company : the watches should be covered with a napkin,
sustained by several bottles, or something similar, otherwise the
compeer's hand would be perceived moving the napkin : the
three watches are presented to a by-stander upon a plate, with
care to turn next to him that which contains the card in
miniature, and which is marked by having a little of its cor-
ner torn:—if the person should be cunning, and waggishly
affects to take the watch next to him, he is desired to mix and
confound them well together, under the pretence of em-
bellishing the trick, and the stratagem is put in execution.
The method of causing the ashes of a burnt card to disappear
in a box, consists in depositing a bit of wood or pasteboard
within the lid, which fills it exactly in length and breadth,
and which nevertheless is loose enough to fall down into the
N 3
138 GAL E'S RECREATIONs.
bottom of the box when it is shut; the piece of wood or
pasteboard being of the same colour as the inside of the box,
forms a double bottom, hides the ashes from the eyes of the
dazzled spectator, who, in the same moment, is induced to think
that the ashes are taken out in order to be combined anew, to
produce the card in miniature which is found in the watch.
The Cards named, discovered with the Eyes blinded.
A pack of cards are caused to be drawn by some person:
a woman arriving in the room, names all the cards just drawn,
without making the least mistake, with regard to their colour,
number, &c.
EX PLAN AT I O N.
The cards are disposed as we observed before: the con-
jurer having, unnoticed, observed the card drawn, he informs
Iris wife, or agent, even at the very instant he promises he will
take particular care he or she shall know nothing about it: he
says he will not speak a word, while his wife names the cards,
and that the person who holds them shall be confined to shew
them to the company, by saying this is such or such a card, &c.
.it is in this last phrase he names the card which is underneath ;
his wife, who hears him, and who knows by heart the dispo-
toº of the pack, names the cards which follow it; that is to
$43, for instance, if she is given to understand that the 19th is
underneath, she names the 10th, the 17th, &c. having mentioned
the whole pack, her husband, who, during this time never speaks
a word, resumes the use of his speech, and begs of the person
who had chosen then, to ask what are the others that remain
unnamed ; the wife is informed by this question, that there is
not one remaining, and answers accordingly.
The Card springing up into the Air from the Pack without
r - being touched.
One of the cards is drawn, which is afterwards put in and
shuffled with the rest of the pack; then the pack is put into a
kind of square spoon, placed upright upon a bottle, which serves
it as a pedestal, and at the company's pleasure the card instant-
ly flies up into the air. -
- EX PLAN ATION.
In the first place, a forced card must be chosen in the man-
per described ; then the pack must be placed in the spoon, so
that the chosen card may lean on a pin, bent in the form of a
G ALE's RECREATIONS. J 35
hook ; this pin is fastened to a thread, and ascending through
the pack, leans upon the upper end of the spoon; then it de-
scends under the room through the table : in this disposition,
the compeer cannot pull the thread without dragging along with
it the hook and card, which causes it to be perceived as flying
in the air: the thread slides upon the bluntedge of the spoon
as easily as if it run in a pulley.
In order to place the cards in the spoon quick enough, that
the spectators may perceive no preparation, care must be taken
that another pack is presented dexterously on the table: the
chosen card in the other, with the hook and thread, must be
previously prepared as above described. r
The burnt Writing restored.
Cover the outside of a small memorandum book with black
paper, and in one of its inside covers, make a flap, to open se-
cretly, and observe there must be nothing over the flap but the
black paper that covers the book. .
Mix soot with black or brown soap, with which rub the
side of the black paper next the flap : then wipe it quite clean,
so that a white paper pressed against it will not receive any
Inark.
Provide a black lead pencil that will not mark without
pressing hard on the paper. Have likewise a small box, about
the size of the memorandum book, and that opens on both
sides, but on one of them by a private method. Give a per-
son a pencil, and a slip of thin paper, on which he is to
write what he thinks proper: you present him the memoran-
dum book at the same time, that he may not write on the bare
board. You tell him to keep what he writes to himself, and
direct him to burn it on an iron plate laid on a chafindish of
coals, and give you the ashes. You then go into another room
to fetch your magic box before described, and take with you the
memorandum book. .
Having previously placed a paper under the flap in the cover
of the book, when he presses hard with the pencil to write on
his paper, every stroke, by means of the stuff rubbed on the
black paper, will appear on that under the flap ; you therefore
take it out, and put it into one side of the box.
You then return to the other room, and taking a slip of
blank paper, you put it into the other side of the box, strewing
the ashes of the burnt paper over it. Then shaking the box
140 GALE'S RECREATIONS.
for a few moments, and at the same time turning it dexterously
over, you open the other side, and shew the person the paper
you first put in, the writing of which he will readily acknow-
ledge to be his.
There may likewise be a flap in the other cover of the
book, and you may rub the paper against that with red lead.
In this case you give the person the choice of writing either
with a red or black pencil ; and present him the proper side of
the book accordingly.
The opaque Bow rendered Transparent.
Make a box of three or four inches long, and two or three
wide, and have a sort of perspective glass, the bottom of which
is of the same size with the box, and slides out, that you may
privately place a paper on it. The sides of this perspective are
to be of glass, covered on the inside with fine paper.
Let a person write on a slip of paper, putting your memo-
randum book under it, as in the last recreation: then give
him the little box, and let him put what he has written into it.
In the mean tinie, you put the memorandum book into the
press, where the perspective is already placed : your assistant
then takes the paper out of the book, and puts it at the bottom
of the perspective ; which you presently take out of the press,
and direct the person to put the little box that contains his
paper under it: you then look in at the top of the perspective;
and feigning to see through the top of the box, you read what is
written on the paper at the bottom of the perspective.
With this perspective box you may perform another recrea-
tion, which is, by having in a bag twelve or more ivory coun-
ters, numbered, which you shew to the company, that they
may see all the numbers are different: you tell a person to
draw any one of them, and keep it close in his hand: you then
put the bag in the press, when your assistant examines the coun-
ters, and sees which is wanting, and puts another of the same
number at the bottom of the perspective, which you then take
out ; and placing the person's hand close to it, look in at the
top, and pretending to see through his hand, you name the num-
ber on the counter in it. s
The penetrative Guinea.
Provide a round tin box, of the size of a large snuff box,
and in this place eight other boxes, which will go easily into
G. A. LE'S y
RECREATIONS. 14]
each other, and let the least of them be of a size to hold a gui-
nea:—each of these boxes should shut with a hinge, and to the
least of them there must be a small lock that is fastened with a
spring, but cannot be opened without a key ; and observe that
all these boxes must shut so freely, that they may be all closed
at once: place these boxes in each other, with their tops open,
in the drawer of the table on which you may make your experi-
ments ; or if you please, in your pocket, in such manner that
they cannot be displaced.
Then ask a person to lend you a new guinea, and desire him
to mark it, that it may not be changed : you take this piece in
one hand, and in the other you have another of the same appear-
anee, and putting your hand into the drawer, you slip the piece
that is marked into the least box, and shutting them all at once,
you take them out ; then shewing the piece you have in your
hand, and which the company supposes to be the same that was
marked, you pretend to make it pass through the box, and dex-
terously convey it away. .
You then present the box, for the spectators do not yet know
there are more than one, to any person in company, who when
he opens it finds another, and another, till he comes to the last,
but that he cannot open without the key, which you then give
him, and retiring to a distant part of the room, you tell him to
take out the guinea himself, and see if it be that he marked.
This recreation may be made more surprising, by putting the
key into the snuffbox of one of the company, which you may
do by asking him for a pinch of snuff, and at the same time
conceal the key, which must be very small, among the suuff:
and when the person who is to open the box asks for the key,
you tell him that one of the company has it in his snuffbox.
This part of the recreation may likewise be performed by means
of a confederate.
An artificial Memory.
The reader must have observed, that to perform several of the
recreations in this book; it is necessary to have a good memo-
ry; but as that is a gift every one has not from nature, many
methods have been contrived to supply that defect by art: the
most material of which we shall here describe.
An artificial memory respects either figures or words; for the
former let the five vowels a, e, i, o, u, represent the first five digits:
the diphthongs that begin with the first four vowels, as au, ea, ie,
I 42 G ALE’s RECREATIONs.
ou, representing the remaining four digits, and let y stand for an
0, or cypher. , Let the ten first consonants also stand for the
nine digits and the cypher; as in the following table.

©
i
O
&l u au ea ie Ou ; y
l Q 3 4. 5 6 7 8 || 9 O
b | c | d f g h k | | | m n
Then to represent any number, let the first letter be a vowel
or diphthong, the second a consonant, the third a vowel, the
fourth a consonant, &c. thus for the number 1763, you write
or remember the word akaud: if there are several sums to be
retained, you place the words in forms of verses, which will
make then more pleasing to repeat and more easy to remember:
for example, if you would remember the dates of the accession of
the family of Stuart to the crown of England; the powder plot;
the decapitation of Charles I. the Restoration; the Revolution;
the Union of England and Scotland; the accession of the House
of Hanover and the last rebellion, which were in 1603, 1605,
1649, 1660, 1689, 1707, 1714, and 1746, you write as follows;
for you are to observe that in this, and in similar cases, where
the first figure is always the same, it is unnecessary to write it
after the first time :
Ahyd hyg ham haun
hiem kyk kaf koh.
This method is rendered in some instances still more easy by
adding parts of words to dates; thus, to remember the date of the
accession of the monarchs from James I. to the present king,
you may write as follows, omitting the letter that would stand
for one thousand :
Jamhyd Charheg Charhom Jamhieg
Willhiem Ankcy Georkaf Seckek Thikaun
When several cyphers come together, instead of repeating y
or n, you may write y or n 2, 3, &c. thus for 3400, write ify2,
and for 256,000, write ehung. .
To remember any number of words, select the initial letters of
those words, and to the first add a, if it begins with a consonant,
or b, if it begins with a vowel. In like manner, add e or c to the
second initial letter; to the third add i or d, to the fourth o or
f: and to the fifth u or g. So that of the five initials you make
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 143
five syllables, which are joined together in one word : then of
the next five initials you make, in the same manner, another
word, and of every two words you make a verse: for example,
suppose you would remember the names of all the kings since
the conquest in the order in which they reigned, you then
write as follows :
Wawehisohu. Rajehieſeg
Ebrehihohu - Ebecrihohu
Ebmeedjocu Cajewiaſgu Gage
Or if you would remember the letters that begin any number
of verses, suppose the twenty first lines of Pope's Essay on Mau,
you write as follows:
Abtelitoeg Abacodtotu
Taocedaflu Basewioſfu.
The Handkerchief marked, cut, torn, and mended.
Two persons of the company are desired to step forward;
a handkerchief is given them, which they are to hold by the
four corners; several other handkerchiefs are asked from the
company, and as they are received, they are put within the
first, in order to make them a bundle; when there are about a
dozen of then heaped up together, the two persons who hold
the bundle, cause one of them to be drawn at random by a third
spectator; this last is desired to examine its mark and number,
if any such there be, and to cut of one of the corners with a
pair of scissars; any one may cut a piece also ; after that the
handkerchief is torn in pieces: the bits and scraps being ga-
thered together, on which are poured certain pretended drugs or
liquors, all are folded and firmly bound with a riband, in order
to reduce them to a small parcel, then they are put under a giass;
a few moments after the handkerchief is taken to be unfoided,
and every body acknowledges the mark, and the spectators are
surprized to see it has not received the least damage in the
operation.
EXPLAN ATION.
This operation, which produces so general an illusion, is
very simple: one of the company with whom the juggler is
acquainted, having two handkerchiefs perfectly alike, having
previously deposited one of them in the hands of the compeer
concealed behind the curtain, throws the other upon the floor
144. GALE's RECREATIONs,
to perform the trick with: the operator takes care to put
this handkerchief uppermost in making the bundle, though
he affects to mix them together promiscuously; the person
whom he desires to draw one of the handkerchiefs takes na-
turally that which comes first to hand; he desires to shake
them again, on pretence to embellish the operation: the
juggler having shook them over again himself, to bring the
right handkerchief uppermost, desires somebody less pene-
trating, whose mien denotes simplicity, and who, in putting
his hand into the bundle, takes without ceremony the first that
presents itself:—when the handkerchief is torn and carefully
folded up, it is put under a glass, on a table placed near a
partition; in that part of the table on which it is deposited, is
a little trap, which opens, and lets it fall into a drawer; the
compeer hid behind the curtain passes his hand within the
table, opens the trap, and substitutes a second handkerchief
instead of the first, then shuts the trap, which fits so exactly
the hole it closes, it seems one and the same piece with the
surface of the table; and deceives by this means the eyes of
the most incredulous and penetrating spectator.
The Artificial Bird, singing at the company's command.
This bird, perched on a bottle, sings without any preli-
minary exercise, any tune demanded of him, even composed
upon the spot by the most consummate musicians: he sings
equally as well when transported from one bottle to another
upon different tables: the wind issuing out of his beak is
strong enough to extinguish a candle, and to relight it; this
may be done when he is even taken away from the bottle and
held in the hand.
ExPLAN ATION.
Behind the curtain, a part of which covers the partition,
are two hollow metal cones, these cones, which are unequal,
serve the compeer as a speaking trumpet, in the same manner
as the speaking figure sometimes exhibited in London : the
compeer imitating the voice of a bird, as the celebrated
Rossignol, follows the tunes which the musicians play by
heart, or from a music book laid before them : if the tune
proposed should be too difficult for the musicians and the
compeer to execute, without previous exercise, the company
is informed, that to render the trick more surprising, the bird
GALE'S RECREATIONS. P45
will begin by singing some tune well known, from which it
will pass suddenly to the tune in question: this is done to
gain time; some of the musicians avail themselves of the in-
terval, by observing more particularly the music, and the coul-
peer makes use of the two different echoes, to convey his
voice to two different points, according to the table and bottle
on which the bird stands: the bird contains in its belly a little
double pair of bellows, like those of a serenata, and between
its feet is a moveable piu which works the bellows; this pin
in entering the neck of the bottle, leans on a piece of wood,
which cannot be perceived from the bottle's opacity: this
piece laying vertically on the moveable bottom of the bottle,
can easily move the bellows, and be made to move by the
engines placed under the carpet, when the compeer draws
the wire concealed in the feet of the table; by this means the
bellows are moved to extinguish the candle, and to convince
the spectators that the voice is really formed in the bird's throat
by the wind that issues forth from the beak. When the con-
jurer takes the bird in his hand, he works the bellows himself
with his thumb, and the wind extinguishing the candle, per-
suades the company that the bird sings, independent of the
machine concealed in the table and behind the partition: the
candle being but just extinguished, and the wick still hot,
cannot possibly approach the bird's beak without being illu-
minated; for care is taken to put a little flour of brimstone in
it which produces the effects of a match.
The Piece of Money shut up in a Bor, from whence it escapes
without its being touched.
One of the company is entreated to hold a box, into which
a piece of money or a ring is deposited in his presence; the
conjurer withdraws from the person, and begs of him to shake
the box a little, when the piece is consequently heard to rattle
within : at the third shake it is still heard; but at the fourth,
it is no more in the box, for it is found in the shoe of one of
the company.
EXPLAN ATION.
Every coujurer carries a quantity of these boxes about for
sale; that which caused so much admiration differs from the
others only in being a little better made, and belonging to a
unan who knows how to embellish his tricks by all sorts of
449 GALE's RECREATHONs.
favourable circumstances: this box is made so, that in
Shaking it softly up and down, you hear the piece it contains;
but shaking it strongly in an horizontal direction, a little
spring falls upon the piece and hinders it from sounding,
which excites the opinion of its being no more therein: he
who does the trick then touches the box, on tPretence of
shewing how it should be shaken; and though it be locked,
1he piece drops into your hand, through a little chink, which
opens secretly; he leaves the box with the same person, and
causes the company to imagine the piece is still in the box, or
it is not according to the manner in which it is shaken : in fine,
he causes the piece to be found in the shoe of a person who
is, or is not, in correspondence with him, and has ſurmished him
with a similar piece ; or by sending some person to slip it dex-
terously over the floor: in this last case, it is found on the
ground only, and the person is made to believe that he let it fall
in taking off his shoe.
The Writing concealed in a Snuff Bor, from whence it is taken
out, without touching the Bor, and found in a War Candle.
The conjurer borrows a snuff box from one of the company,
whom he desires to write a phrase of his own choice on a little
piece of paper: this writing is put into the box; another person
soon after takes it out reduced to ashes, and at last it is
caused to be found in a wax candle at the choice of one of the
spectators. -
Ex PLANATION.
The box borrowed should be neither gold, silver, nor hinged :
a plain round box of pastèboard will suffice, of which the
inside is blackish, and whose lid may be taken off. While
the spectator writes the phrase, the lid is conveyed away into
the adjacent closet: it is quickly placed there upon a sheet
of lead, which is cut round with a pair of scissars, to make a
double bottom: it is put into the lid with a little piece of
paper, folded up in four, hid underneath it : the conjurer
returns, and gets the written paper folded up, in the same
manner as that concealed in the lid: the spectator is desired
to put his writifig in the snuffbox'; then it is covered, and the
double bottom, which the lid coitains, falls into the box, hides
the writing, and leaves visible only the other paper : in taking
this paper, in order to burn it, the spectator is duped, for he
GAL E'S RECREATIONS. I | P
innocently leaves his writing in the box: then he is desired
to put this false paper into a tin shovel, and to present it to
the flames, in order to burn it, and to hold it at a certain
distance to heat slowly : this last circumstance is only a pre-
tence to gain time, while the conjurer carries the box and the
writing to his closet; he has there a wax candle prepared, of
which one end, like those of church tapers, is pierced with an
iron of a conic form: it is in this hollow come he puts hastily
the writing in question, and fills up the aperture with some
warm wax, the better to incorporate with the candle: he
mixes and confounds this candle with several others, and
causes it to be chosen preferably, by means of the stratagem
mentioned before.
The same means are employed to produce the writing in an
orange, a guinea in a casket, or a lemon, &c. &c.
Three Pen Knives having been put into a Silver Cup, one of
which jumps out at the Command of any of the Spectators.
Three pen knives are borrowed from different persons of
the company; they are put into a cup which stands upon a
table; it is shewn that the table has no communication with
the cup, and that this last co:::2ins no kind of preparation;
nevertheless, one of the knives, at any one of the speciator's
desire, jumps upon the ground, and the other two remain mo-
tionless. - -
3X PLANATION.
When the cup is laid upon the table, a half crown piece is
slipt into the botton of it, fastened in the middle to a small
black silk thread ; this thread mounts perpendicularly to the
ceiling, and goes to join the hand of the compeer, who draws
the thread upon a moment's notice, and dexterously makes that
pen knife jump out of the middle which was the only one
placed on the half crown piece; the others fall immediately to
the bottom of the cup. º
The Dance of the Egg.
Three eggs are carried into the room; two are laid upon
the table; the third is put into a hat: a little cane, or a switch,
borrowed from one of the company, which is shewn uot to
have been in any manner prepared, is laid across the hat; at
the same instant the hat falls upon the ground, the egg adheres?
SS
£ O Q
t
\
º
4.48 GALE'S RECREATIONs.
fast to the cane, as if it were glued to it; then the music begins
to play, and the egg, as if sensible of the harmony, slips in
tuining from one end of the cane to the other, and continues to
move till the music ceases.
EX PLAN ATION.
The egg is fastened to a thread, with a little peg, put in length-
ways, and which leans transversely upon the inside surface of the
shell: the hole made to introduce the peg, is stopt up with a
little white wax ; the other end of the thread is fastened to the
conjurer's chest of his body, with a pin bent in the form of a
hook; the cane passing underneath the thread, very near the
egg, serves to support it : as soon as the music begins, the con-
jurer pushes the cane from left to right, or from right to left,
and moves his body unperceived, and at the first sight the egg
seems to run along the cane, without any visible assistance;
but this is only a delusion of the sight, for it is constantly fas-
tened to the thread; its centre of gravity remains always at the
same distance from the hook which retains it ; it is the cane.
which in sliding presents successively its different points to the
surface of the egg as it moves or dances.
Cf the Bird's Death and Resurrection.
The egg chosen out of the three to dance on the cane
being broken, but presently changed by the conjurer to the
real egg, to shew that it had not been previously prepared, the
two others left upon the table are taken up ; one of which is
chosen by a spectator, and in breaking out flies a living canary
bird : a lady of the company is desired to take the bird into
her hand, and soon after it is found to be dead; then it is taken
from her, and laid under a glass upon a table; some minutes
after, the glass is taken off, and the bird flies away.
EXPLAN ATION.
Two eggs are emptied, and the half of the shells are taken
and adjusted together with two little strips of paper, glued in
the form of a zone, or an equator : being thus prepared, they
represent an egg, and can contain a little living canary bird,
provided a little hole be made in it with a pin, to permit its free
respiration. tº
The instant this bird is delivered into the hands of a person
who condescends to hold it, the conjurer stifles it by a hard
GALE’s RECREATIONS. 149
squeeze between his finger and thumb: it is then put under a
glass, upon the trap before mentioned, that the compeer may
place a living one in its stead.
The Golden Head on three Rings dancing and jumping in a
Glass, to answer different Questions.
To shew that this head is desolate and void of communica-
tion, several crown pieces are placed in the bottom of a glass,
covered with a close lid, which notwithstanding does not hin-
der his head, described to be of massy gold, to jump into the
glass to answer many questions proposed : at the same time a
bunch of rings, seen in another glass at a little distance, per-
form the same motions as by sympathy.
EX PLAN ATION.
A second head is put in the place of the first shewn to the
company, and taken off the table on which the operation is to
be made : this second head is fastened to a silk thread, which,
passing through the table, reaches under the floor to join the
compeer, who dances either the rings, or head, at pleasure, in
order to correspoud properly with the conjurer; and the rings
jump in like manner at pleasure.
The Rings passed on a double Riband.
in a great number of rings furnished by the company, two
ribands are introduced, of which the ends are given to two
couple of the spectators to hold; soon after, without hurting
the ribands, and without taking off the rings over either of the
ends, they are loosed from the ribands, and returned to their
OWIlú: I S. -
These strings or ribands, with the balls, or beads, are sold at
most toy shops in London, as well as many other commodities
for such kind of experiments. -
EX PLAN ATION.
Ozanam, about a century since, published in his mathematical
recreations, the manner of doing this trick; it is known by
all conjurers by the name of my grandmother's beads, from
their using little balls instead of rings: to perform this trick
with success, first double one of the ribands so that the
two ends of it touch one another; do the same with the
second, and then fasten them both together with a thread of
O 3
150 G ALE'S RECREATIONs.
the same colour round their middle: this being previously
prepared, when you are going to perform the trick, give one
of the spectators the two ends of the riband to hold, and
those of the second to another, by this means their eyes are
deceived; each thinking he holds in his hands the extremities
of two different ribands, but it is quite otherwise; for if in
this position they were to pull hard enough to break the thread,
the ribands would consequently separate, and the rings fall
upon the ground ; but to avoid this accident, and to finish
the trick with success, you must beg of them to approach one
another, and ask each of them to give one of the ends thcy
hold ; involve them together so as to make a knot, and render
to each that which the other held before; by this means each
o them then hold the extremites of two different ribands :
soon after the cheat can no longer be perceived, the rings,
which have never been passed on both ribands are taken off
Ruch more easily when the thread is broken, and the spectator
who thought them really passed on both is surprised to sec
them disengaged.
The Sympathetic Lamp.
This lanıp is put upon a table; the conjurer gives a signal to
the compeer to blow in a pipe, without directing the wind io
the place where it is laid, and nevertheless it extinguishes it im-
mediately, as if some person had blown it out.
EX Pl, A NATION .
The candlestick which bears the lamp contains a pair of bel-
łows in its basis, by which the wind is conveyed straight to the
flame through a little pipe: the compeer, inder the floor, or be-
hind the curtain, in moving the machinery, oncealed under the
table, makes the bellows blow to extinguish the lamp in the mo-
ment desired.
The Little Huntsman.
It is a little image about the size of the little Turk: it
holds a bow in its hand, with an arrow, which is shot the very
instant the company think proper, and strikes a pasteboard
marked and placed on the top of a column: this pasteboard
is divided into several circles, which are numbered, and the
arrow always enters a number previously chosen by one of the
spectators.
G ALE'S RECREATIONS, * } {
ExPLAN ATION.
The action of the spring which pushes the arrow is re-
tained for a moment by a pin, which the compeer takes off
at pleasure, in moving the machinery concealed in the table :
when this pin is pushed, the shaft flies rapidly towards the
pasteboard, as the cock of the pistol falls upon the hammer
when one draws the trigger.
In laying the automaton on the table, it must be placed so,
that the arrow points exactly at one of the numbered circles,
which will be the easier done the less this is distant from the
mark : to cause the number to which the dart is pointed to
be chosen, forced cards must be presented to one of the
spectators, who must, according to art, choose the number in
question: this depends upon a particular address of the
conjurer, very difficult to be described by words; however
it may be said in general to consist, first, in putting the card
pitched upon under the pack; secondly, on keeping it always
in the same place, though one shuffles, or seems to shuffle the
gards, to make people think that neither of the cards has been
scen; thirdly, to pass this card into the middle of the pack
the very instant it is presented ; fourthly, on making several
cards pass before the spectator's band, to cause him to think
he may choose either of them indifferently; fifthly, in
making these cards pass rapidly, that he may not have time
to take any other; in fine, in slipping dexterously the card
intended into his hand, entreating him at the same time very
civilly, in order to deceive him, to take which he pleases; for
it requires no small share of impudence to perform experiments
of this kind.
The Ball thrºwn into the little three-doored House, and issu-
ing from either at Command.
EX PLAN ATION.
An inclined pipe, in which the ball rolls downwards, has
in its lower part, at different heighths, two holes, which are
shut by valves opened by the compeer's playing the machinery
under the stage : these two holes, from the opening and ex-
tremity of two other pipes, reach the one to the right,
the other to the left, to two different doors; the first pipe
reaches to the middle door: if it be desired that the ball
should issue from the right hand door, the compeer plays the
| 52 G ALE's RECREATIONS.
machinery to open the first valve which the ball meets in
coming down : this valve being open, the ball naturally falls
into the second tube, which conveys it to the right hand door.
If it be desired that the ball should pass at the left hand
door, the compeer, by means of another piece of machinery,
opens the second valve, and the ball passing over the first,
which is shut, necessarily falls into the third tube, which
conveys it to the door demanded: in short, if it be desired
that the ball should come out at the middle door, the compeer
has nothing to do ; because the ball runs directly to it in
following the first tube, without falling into either of the two
others.
Theophrastus Paracelsus; or, The Pigeom killed by the Thrust
of a Sword given to its Shade or Image.
The name of Theophrastus Paracelsus is given to this trick,
because it is pretended, that a man so called killed his brother,
by stal bing his picture with a dagger: this anecdote, which
undoubtedly is not related by cotemporary historians, nor by
eye witnesses, should be considered without doubt, as apo-
cryphal ; however, the trick in question consists in fastening
a pigeon by the neck to a double riband, drawn very tight, and
sustained by two columns; and in cutting of the animal's head
without touching it, in the very instant the sword is thrust at,
or drawn against the shadow of the bird.
EXPLAN AT I O N.
The two double ribands to which the pigeon is fastened,
conceal a very sharp little steel blade, bent in the form of a
sickle: the blade is fastened to a silk string, which, passing
between the two ribands, and through one of the columns,
reaches the hands of the compeer underneath the floor: the
pigeon's neck should be controuled by a kind of a silke. Ying,
to hinder it from advancing or retreating: he who performs the
trick draws his sword upon the bird's shadow, and at this in-
stant giving a hard stamp with his foot, as a signal for the com-
peer to draw the string, causes the sickle which embraces the
pigeon's neck to cut off its head. y - : * >
GALE's RECREATIONS. 1 53
The Magic Nosegay blowing at the Word of Command.
EX PLAN ATION.
The branches of this nosegay may be made of rolled paper,
of tin, or any other matter whatever, provided they be hollow
or empty; they must, in the first place, be pierced in several
places, in order to apply to them little masses of wax, repre-
senting flowers and fruits; secondly, this wax must be enve-
loped with some gummed taffety, or a very thin gold beater's
skin; thirdly, these envelopings must be quickly glued to
the branches, so as to seem a part of them, or at least a pro-
longation: fourthly, the colours of the flowers and fruits they
represent must be given them ; fifthly, the wax must be
heated till it melts, and runs down the branches and handle
of the nosegay. -
After this preparation, if you pump the air through the
stem of the nosegay, the envelopings will of course contract
themselves, so as to appear withered, &c. and as you blow,
the wind penctrating into the ramifications of the branches,
the envelopings, like little acrostatical balloons, dilate them-
selves so as to resume their primitive and blowing appear-
#ll) (* {2.
To perform this trick, you must begin by twisting and
dressing lightly all these envelopings, and render them almost
invisible, by making them to enter into the branches of the
nosegay; then the nosegay must be placed in a kind of bottle
containing a little pair of bellows, and of which the move-
able bottom being put in motion by the machinery in the ta-
ble, may swell the envelopings at the moment required.
The Ring in a Pistol, found afterwards in the Beak of a .
Turtle Dove, in a Bor previously visited, and sealed up.
One of the company is desired to put his ring into a pistol,
loaded by one of the spectators; an empty box is shewn to
the company, which is caused to be shut by a third person,
who fastens it with a riband, which he seals with his own arms :
then this box is put upon a table, of which the counyany
never lose sight; nevertheless, after having fired the pistol,
on opening the box, this same ring is discovered in the beak of
a dove,
154 GAL E'S RECR BAT IONS.
IEX PLAN ATION.
On pretence to show how to handle the pistol, the conjurer
lays hold of it, and dexterously withdraws the ring, in the same
manner he did the mail spoken of before : it is carried to the
compeer, who puts it directly in the beak of a tame dove; he
them extends his arm to the inside of the table, placed near the
partition, in order to open the trap mentioned before, and puts
the bird into the box, of which the bottom opens secretly;
the sealed riband which surrounds the box cannot hinder
it from opening, because it is done only by one half of the
bottom opening inside instead of outside; and great care is
before taken not to make a second turn with the riband,
which, crossing the first, would oppose the introduction of
the dove.
We shall not mention here the means for making such a box.
for it would not only require a long discourse to explain, since
there is not a joiner, ebonist, or cabinet-maker, of any in-
telligence, who does not invent, or know, several secrets of
this kind.
The Coffer that opens at pleasure.
EX PLAN ATION,
This coffer contains a puppet, whose carcase forms a kind
of a pudding spring, i. e. a wire wound up in a spiral form ;
thus the little image, though higher than the coffer, may stand
upright therein when it is shut, as its body is contracted by
pressure: the coffer leans upon the machinery, which has a
communication with the bolt of the lock, and the centre of the
table: when the bolt is disengaged from the staple, the above
spring, finding no other resistance than the weight of the lid,
* forces it easily to rise: this the invisible agent can always
perform in concert with the conjurer. -
The Watch pounded in a Mortar.
...A watch is borrowed from one of the company, which is
immediately put into a mortar: some moments after another
person is desired to break it, the wheels, the fusee, the spring,
and, the barrel shewn crushed and fractured ; finally, in a few
minutes after, the watch is returned to the lender uninjured,
who acknowledges it to be his own.
G ALE's RECREATIONS. 155
*
:
d
s
EXPLANATION.
whose hands, chain, and trinkets, resemble in some measure
; those of the first, which is not very difficult, because we may
i be acquainted with the person who lends the watch, or address
# ourselves to a person whose watch we have had an opportunity
} elsewhere to examine. y
After having replaced the fractured watch in the mortar, the
company must be amused an instant with a new trick, while all
the pieces are gathered out of the mortar, and the first watch
placed in their room.
A Pistol loaded with Powder and Ball, and discharged at any
Person, who deateriously receives the Ball on the point of a
Knife.
The conjurer presents one of the company with a common
pistol, some powder, and a real leadémbati, to load; the con-
jurer then, at the distance of six yards, désires the person'tó
cock the pistol, and discharge it at him, who holds a knife ini-
t
thé ball on the point of the said knife.
EXPLA NATION.
• . . . . * * * *
also used in the above, in which a ball is fixed instead of a nail :
#excepting, that the conjurer has a double headed knife, on one
!of which blades is previously fixed a ball, which is conceñted
by his hand ; and the moment the pistol is fired, this ball is ex-
Šposed to the observance of the audience, as if instantaneously
*caught from the said pistol's discharge.
The Mystical Dial. -
On apiece of square pasteboard ABCD (Plate 1. Fig. 3) draw
# On the inside of this, there must be another circle of paste-
board, ILMN, moveable round the centre O, and the extre-
imity of this must be divided into the same number of equal
harts as the other: on this also must be written the letters of the
phabet, which however, need not be disposed in the same
In order to succeed, and produce an illusion in doiligºthis
# trick, care must be taken to put into the mortar a second watch,
médiately directed to the mouth of the pistol, and thus catchés
the circle EFGH, and "divide it into twenty six equahparts, in
ſeach of which must be written one of the letters of the alphabet:





1 56 G ALE'S RECREAT 10 N.S.
order: the person with whom you correspond must have a si-
milar dial, and at the beginning of your letter, you must put
any two letters that answer to each other when you have fixed
the dial.
EXAMPLE.
Suppose you would write as follows:
If you will come over to us, you shall have a pension, and you
may still make a sham opposition.
You begin with the letters Ma, which shew how the dial
is fixed; then for if you, you write unjuc, and so for the rest, as
will see at the bottom of the plate.
The same intention may be answered by a ruler, the upper
part of which is fixed, and the lower part made to slide; but
in this case the upper part must contain two alphabets in
succession, that some letter of that part may constantly cor-
respond to one in the lower part : the divisions standing
directly over each other in a straight line will be much more
obvious than in the circumference of a circle; or two straight
pieces of pasteboard regularly divided, the one containing a
single and the other a double alphabet, would answer exactly
the same purpose: in this case a blank space may be left at
each end of the single alphabet, and one or two weights being
placed on both the pieces will keep them steady.
The Corresponding Spaces.
Take two pieces of pasteboard or stiff paper, through which
wou must cut long squares, at different distances, as you will see
in the following example; one of these pieces you keep your-
self, and the other you give to your correspondent: when you
would send him any secret intelligence, you lay the pasteboard
upon a paper of the same size, and in the spaces cut out, you
write what you would have understood by him only, and then
fill up the intermediate spaces with somewhat that snakes with
those words a different sense. -
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 157
*-*.
I shall le much obliged to you, as reading alone engages
|
, - & g
my attention at present, if you will lend me any one of the
| -
*s
eight | volumes of the Spectator. I hope you will excuse this
--ºsmºs-ºsmºs º ºr
* H--
evening H don't know a better
} ==== ? ---
freedom, but for a winter's
mº-º-º-º-º:
entertainment. If I fail
to return it soon, never trust me
to COme.
tºº
for the time
A paper of this sort may be placed four different ways, either
by putting the bottom at top, or by turning it over, and by those
means the superfluous words may be the more easily adapted to
the sense of the others.
This is a very eligible cypher, as it is free from suspicion, but
it will do only for short messages, for if the spaces be frequent,
it will be very difficult to make the concealed and obvious
meanings agree together: and if the sense be not clear, the writ-
ing will be liable to suspicion.
The Musical Cypher.
The construction of this cypher is similar to that of the
mystical dial: the circle EFGH (Plate II.) is to be divided
into twenty six equal parts, in each part there must be written
one of the letters of the alphabet; and on the interior circle
ILMN, moveable round the centre O, there is to be the same
number of divisions : the circumference of the inner circle
must be ruled in the manner of music paper, and in each
division there is to be placed a note, different either in figure
or position; lastly, within the musical lines place the three
keys, and on the outer circle, the figures that are commonly
used to deuote the time.
Then provide yourself with a ruled paper, and place one
of the keys, as suppose that of ge resol, against the time
two-fourths at the beginning of the paper, which will inform
your correspondent how to fix his circle : you then copy the
P
, 58 i Y
GALE'S RECREATIONS.
notes that answer to the several letters of the words you intend
to write, in the manner expressed at the bottom of the plate.
A cypher of this sort may be made more difficult to discover
by frequently changing the key, and that will not in the least
embarrass the reader. You may likewise add the mark “ or t
to the note that begins a word, which will make it more easy to
read, and at the same time give the music a more natural aspect :
this cypher is preferable to that of the mystical dial, as it may
be enclosed in a letter about common affairs, and pass unsus-
pected ; unless it should fall into the hands of any one who un-
derstands composition, for he would very likely surmise, from
the odd disposition of the notes, “that more is meant than meets
the ear.”
A Person making choice of several Numbers, another shall
name him the Number by which the Sum of those Numbers
is divisible.
Provide a small bag, divided into two parts: in one part put
several tickets, on each of which is written a number divisible
by three, as 6, 9, 15, 36, 63, 120, 213, 300, &c. and in the
other part put tickets marked with the number 3 only: from
the first part draw a handful of tickets, and after shewing them,
put them in again ; then open the bag, and desire any one to
take out as many tickets as he thinks proper; shut the bag,
and when you open it again offer the other part to another per-
son, telling him to take out one ticket only : you them pronounce
that ticket to contain the number by which the amount of the
other numbers is divisible; for each of those numbers being di-
visible by 3, the sum also must be divisible by the same number.
To find the Difference between two Numbers, the greatest of
which is unknown.
Take as many nines as there are figures in the smallest num-
her, and subtract that sum from the number of nines; let
another person add that difference to the largest number, and
taking away the first figure of the amount, add it to the last
figure, and that sum will be the difference of the two numbers.
For example : Matthew, who is 22, tells Henry, who is
older, that he can discover the difference of their ages; he
therefore privately deducts 22 from 99, and the difference,
which is 77, he tells Henry to add to his age, and to take
away the first figure from the amount, and add it to the last
GALE’s RECREATIONS. - I 59
figure, and that last sum will be the difference of their ages, as
thus : -
The difference between Matthew's age and 99 is - - - 77
To which Henry adding his age - - - - - - - - 35
The sum is - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 1 12
12
I
Then by taking away the first figure I and adding it to
the last figure 2, the sum is - - - - - - - - - lº
Which added to Matthew's age - - - - - - - - **
Gives the age of Henry, which is - - - - - - - - 93
To tell, by the Dial of a Watch, at what hour any Person in-
tends to rise. - r
Let the person set the hand of the dial to any hour he
pleases, and tell you what hour that is, and to the number of
that hour you add, in your mind, 12 : then tell him to count
- - - '*, ... F. -- º ~... " * ---. - - - - A 1 - ...? !. Sl or, *
privately the number of that amount upon trie us..., be inning
- ** * ty.
with the next hour to that on which he proposes to rise and
counting backwards, first reckoning the number of the hour
. which he has placed the hand. An example will make this
plain. . . .
Suppose the hour at which he intends to rise be 8 and
that he has placed the hand at 5, you add 12 to 5, and reſi
him to count 17 on the dial, first reckoning 5, the hour at
which the index stands, and counting backwards from the hour
at which he intends to rise, and the number 17 will necessarily
eñd at 8, which shews that to be the hour he chose. •
That the hour at which the counting ends must be that on
which he proposed' to rise will be evident on a little reflection:
for if he had begun at that hour, and counted 12, he would
necessarily have come to it again; and calling the number 17,
by adding 5 to it, only serves to disguise the matter, but can
make no sort of difference in the counting.
jö0 - G&LE'S RECREATIONs.
-: Person choosing any two out of several given Numbers,
and after adding them together, striking out one of the
figures from the Amount to tell you what that Figure was.
Such numbers must be offered as are divisible by 9 ; and
when any two of them are added together, there must be no
cypher in the amount; the figures of that amount, moreover,
must make either 9 or 18 : such are the numbers following:
30,63, 81, 117, 126, 169, 207, 226, 252, 201, 306,315, 360,
and 432.
These numbers must be written on eards : and when any
two of them are added together, if a figure be struck out of
the sum, it will be what would make the other figures either 9 or
18; for example: if a person chose 126 and 259, their ſum
will be 378, from which he strikes out the 7, the remaining
figures 3 and S will make 11, to which 7 must be added to mak.
I 8.
Two Persons choosing two Numbers, and multiplying them to-
gether, by knowing the last Figure of the Product to fell
the other Figures.
1. the imper 73 be multiplied by the numbers of the
following arithmetical progressions, 3, 6, 9, 13, 15, 18, 21, 24,
and 27, their products will terminate with the nine digits IIl
this order, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 ; the numbers being as
follows, 219, 438, 657, 867, 1095, 1814, 1533, 1755, 1971;
therefore put into one of the divisions. of the little bag, II].6°Il-
tioned in a former recreation, several tickets marked with the
number 73, and in the other part of the bag, the numbers 3, 6,
9, 12, 15, 18, 21, 24, and 27.
Then open that part of the bag where are the numbers 73,
and desire a person to take out one ticket only, then dexte-
rously change the opening, and desire another person to take a
ticket from that part, and when you have multiplied their two
numbers together, by knowing the last figure of the product, you
will readily tell them by the foregoing series what the other
figures are.
G ALE's RECREATIONS. 101
The Magical Century.
If the number 1 I be multiplied by any one of the nine
digits, the two figures of the product will always be similar;
as follows :
I l l l l 1
I 2 3 4 5 6
|
| | || 1 || 1 1 1 1 |
1
7 8 9
- - *-
I
11 22 33 44 55 66 77 88 99
Place a parcel of counters on a table, and propose to any
one to add, alternately, a certain number of those counters
till they amount to a hundred, but never to add more than 10
at one time; you tell him, moreover, that if you stake first,
he shall never mnke the even century, but you will : in order
to which you must first stake 1, and remembering the order of
the above series, 1 1, 22, 33, &c. you constantly add to what
he stakes as many as will make one more than the numbers of
that series, that is, as will make 12, 23, 34, &c. till you come to
89, after which the other party cannot make the century him-
self, or prevent you from making it, -
If the other party has no knowledge of numbers, you may
stake any number first, under 10, provided you take care to se-
cure some one of the last terms, as 56, 67, 78, &c.
This recreation may be performed with other numbers;
and in order to succeed, you must divide the number to be
attained by a number that has one digit more than what you
can stake each time, and the remainder will be the number
you must first stake. Observe, that to be sure of success, there
must be always a remainder ; suppose, for example, the
number to be attained is 52, making use of a pack of cards
instead of counters, and that you are never to add more than
6; then divide 52 by the next number above 6, that is by 7,
and the remainder, which is 3, will be the number you must
stake first ; and whatever the other stakes, you must add as
much to it as will make it equal to the number by which you
divided, that is seven ; therefore if his first stake be 1, you must
stake 6, &c. so that your second stake will make the heap 10,
your third stake will make it 17, and so on, till you come to
45, when as he cannot stake more than 6, you must make the
number 52.
P 3
ſtºº G ALE’s RECREATIONs.
In this, as in the former case, if the other person has no
knowledge of numbers, your may stake any number first under
7; or you may let him stake first, only taking care to secure
either of the numbers 10, 17, 24, 31, &c. after which he cannot
make 52, if you constantly add as many to his stake as will
make it 7.
The Confederate Counters.
Present to three persons a ring, a seal, and a snuff box,
of which desire each person to choose one privately: the three
persons you discriminate in your mind by the letters A, E, I,
and by the same letters you distinguish the ring, the seal, and
the box; provide 24 counters, of which give the first person A,
1, the second person E, 2, and the third person I, 3 ; put the 18
remaining counters on the table, and let him that has the ring
take as many counters more as he already has ; him that has the
seal, take twice as many as he has ; and him that has the box
four times as many; while they are taking the counters, you
retire out of sight; and when they have done, you return, and
casting your eyes on the table, take notice how many counters
are left.
The remaining counters will be either 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, or 7,
which you are to refer to the vowels in the syllables of the fol-
lowing verse :
1 2 3 5 6
ja dis–de vint—sigrand
Par fer—Cesar
7
prince.
If there be but one counter left, the two vowels in the syl-
lables par fer denote that the first person has the ring, to which
you have assigned the letter A ; the second person has the seal,
to which you have assigned the letter E.; and consequently the
third person must have the box. In like manner, if there be
six counters remaining, the two vowels in the syllables si grand
shew that the first person has the box, denoted by the letter I ;
the second person has the ring, to which the letter A is as-
signed ; and consequently the third person has the seal; and so
of the rest; for the three articles can be taken only six dif-
ferent ways: now each of these ways necessarily changes the
6 At, E's RECREAT10 Rs. 163
number ºf counters to be taken by the three persons; from
whence it follows, that the counters remaining on the table
will be of six different numbers; the vowels in the syllables of
the verse serve only to aid the memory in discovering the nian-
ner in which the three articles are taken,
Question.
There are an hundred apples and one basket, ranged in a
straight line at the distance of a pace one from another ; the
question is, how many paces must he walk that pretends to ga-
ther the apples one after another, and so put them into the bas-
ket, which is not to be removed from its place 3
It is certain, that for the first apple he must make 2 paces,
one to go and another to return ; for the second 4, two to go
and two to return ; for the third 6, three to go, and so on in
this arithmetical progression, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, &c. of which the
last and greatest term will be 200, that is, double the number
of apples : to 200, the last term, add 2, the first term, and
multiply the sum 202 by 50, which is half the number of ap-
ples, or the number of the multitude of the terms ; and the
prouduct, 19, 100, will be the sum of all the terms to the num-
ber of paces demanded ; and if I pace be called 1 yard, the
distance of space gone over is equal to 5 miles and 3 quarters,
all to about 20 yards.
Several Dice being thrown, to find the Number of Points
that arise from them after some operations.
Suppose three dice thrown upon a table, which we shall
call A, B, C ; bid the person that threw them add together all
the uppermost points, and likewise those underneath of any
two of the three; for instance, B and C, A being set apart,
without altering its face : then bid him throw again the same
two dice, B and C, and make him add to the foregoing sum, all
the points of the upper faces, and withal the lowermost points,
or those underneath of one of them, C for instance, B being
set apart near A without changing its face, for giving a second
sum ; in fine, order him once more to throw the last dye C,
and bid him add to the foregoing second sum the upper points,
for a third sum, which is thus to be discovered: after the
third dye C is set by the other two, without changing its pos-
ture, do you come up, and compute all the points upon the
faces of the three dice, and add to their sum as many 7's as
104 & Aie's RECREATIONs.
there are dice ; that is, in this example 21, and the sum of these
is what you look for; for when a dye is well made, 7 is the
number of the points of the opposite faces.
To exemplify the matter; suppose the first throw of the
three dice, A, B, C, brought up 1, 4, 5 ; setting apart the first 1,
we add to these three points 1, 4, 5, the points 3 and 2 that are
found under or oppºsite to the upper points 4 and 5, of the
other two dice; and this gives me the first sum 15:-now sup-
pose again, that the two last dice are thrown, and shew upper-
most the two points 3 and 6, we set that with the three points
apart, near the dye that had 1 before, and add to the foregoing
sum (15) these two points 3 and 6, and withal 1, the point that
is found lowermost in the dye that is still kept in service, and
adel 6 for its face at this throw ; thus we have 25 for the second
sum : we suppose at last that this third and last dye being
thrown a third time, it comes up 6, which we add to the se-
cond sum 25, and so make the third sum 3 l ; and this sum is
to be found out by adding 21 to 10, the sum of the points
1, 3, 6, that appear upon the faces or uppermost sides of the
three dice then set by. i
The Dice being thrown, to find the upper Points of each Dye
without seeing them.
Make any one throw two dice upon a table, and add 5 to the
the double of the upper points of one of them, and add to the
sum multiplied by 5, the number of the uppermost points of
the other, or the second dye ; after that, having asked him the
joint sum, throw out of it 25, the square of the number 5 that
you gave to him, and the remainder will be a number consisting
of two figures ; the first of which to the left representing the
tens is the namber of the upper points of the first dye, and
the second figure to the right representing units, is the number
of the upper points of the second dye.
We will suppose that the number of the points of the first
dye that conies up is 2, and that of the second 3; we add 5
to 4, the double of the points of the first, and multiply the
sum 9 by the same number 5, the product of which operation
is 45, to which we add 3, the number of the upper points of
the second dye, and so make it 48; then we throw out of it
25, the square of the same number 5*, and the remainder is 23,
the first figure of which 2, represents the number of points of
* The square of a number is multiplying it by itself.
G ALE'S RECREATIONS. 165
the first dye, and the second, 3, the number of points of the se-
cond dye.
Another way of answering this problem, is this: ask him
who threw the dice, what the points underneath make together,
and how much the under points of one surpass those of the
other ; and if this excess is, for example, 1, and the sum of all
the lower points is 9, add these two numbers 1 and 9, and sub-
tract the sum 10 from 14; then take 2, the half of the re-
ntainder 4, for the number of the upper points of one of the
dice; and as for the upper dye, instead of adding the excess I
to the sum 9, subtract it out of 0, and take the remainder 8
out of 14, 6 is the remainder, the half of which, 3, is the num-
ber of the upper points of the second dye. .
A third way is this: bid the person who threw the dice add
together the upper points, and tell you their sum, which we
here suppose to be 5 ; then give him orders to multiply the
number of the upper points of one dye by the number of up-
per points of the other dye, and to acquaint you in like man-
ner with their product, which we here suppose to be 6: now
having this product six, and the preceding sum 5, square 5, and
from its square 25 subtract 24, the quadruple of the product 6,
and the remainder is 1 : then take the square root of the
regainder, which in this case is 1, and by adding it to and
subtracting it from the foregoing sum 5, you have these two
numbers, 6, 4, the halfs of which 3, 2, are the numbers of the
upper points of each dye.
Upon the throw of three Dice, to find the upper Points of each
Dye without seeing them.
Order the person that has thrown the dice, to place them
near one another in a straight line, and ask him the sum of
the lowermost points of the first and second dye, which we
here suppose to be 9: then ask him the sum of the points
underneath of the second and third, which we here suppose
to be 5: and at last the under points of the first and third,
which we put 6: now, having these numbers given you,
9, 5, 6, subtract the second number 5 from 15, the sum of
the first and third, 9 and 6; and the remainder 10 from 14 :
so there remains 4, the half of which, 2, is the number of the
upper points of the first dye: to find the number of the
upper points of the second, subtract the third number 6 from
*
11, the sum of the two first 9 and 5; and the remainder 8
60 G ALE'S RECREATIONs.
trom 14 again; so you have a second remainder 6, the half
of which, 3, is the number demanded : at last for the third
dye, subtract the first number 9 from 11, the sum of the
second and third, 5, 6, and the remainder 2 from 14; so you
have a second remainder 12, the half of which, 6, is the num-
ber of the upper points of the third dye.
To find a Number thought of by another.
Order the person to take I from the number thought upon,
and after doubling the remainder, to take 1 from it and add to
the last remainder, the number thought upon : then ask him
what the sum is, and after adding 3 to it, take the third part
of it for the number thought of: for example, let 5 be the
munber, take 1 from it, there remains 4; then take 1 from 8,
the double of that 4, and the remainder is 7, which becomes 12,
by the addition of 5, the number thought of; and that 12, by
the addition of 3, makes 15, the third part of which 5, is the
number thought of.
Another way is this: after taking 1 from the number
thought of, let the remainder be tripled; then let him take 1
from that triple, and add to the remainder the number thought
of; at last, ask him the number arising from that addition,
and if you add 4 to it, you will find the fe:::h part of the
sum to be the number thought of: thus 5, bating 1, makes 4,
that tripled makes 12, which losing 1, sinks to 11, and en-
larged by the accession of 5, comes to 16, which by the addi-
tion of 4 is 20, and the fourth part of that, viz. 5, is the number
thought of.
A curious and agreeable Wager, which you are sure of winning.
Address some person in the company, and say, madam,
or sir, have you a watch, a ring, an etwee, or any other
trinket 2 begin by examining what has been given you, in
order to form an idea of its value, since you are to lay your
bet considerably under the intrinsic value of the trinket, to avoid
being duped. -
Suppose what has been offered to you is a watch, you are to
propose a guinea as a wager against it ; saying to the lady or
gentleman, I lay a guinea that you do not say three times, my
watch; when it is put on the table, and your wager is accepted,
ask the person, presenting him his watch, what is that; he will
not fail to answer, it is my watch.
GALE'S RECREATIONS. i07
Present him afterwards another object, making him the same
question ; suppose the object you present to be a pen, a piece
of paper, or any other thing; if the person names the object you
present, he has lost; if on the contrary, he is on his guard, and
answers, my watch, he must certainly win; but if I lose, what
will you give nie; the person, being always on his guard, will
answer again, my watch; then, appealing to his own words, you
will take the watch, and leave him the stake.
Method of Melting Steel, and to see it liquify.
Melt a piece of steel quite in the fire; then holding it with
a pair of pincers or tongs, take in the other hand a stick of
brimstone, and touch the piece of steel with it; immediately
after the contact, you will see the steel melt and drop like a li-
quid.
To pull off any Person's Shirt without undressing him, or
having occasion for a Confederate.
The means of performing this trick are the following : only
observing that the clothes of the person whose shirt is to be
pulled off be wide and easy.
Begin by making him pull off his stock and unbuttoning
his shirt at the neck and sleeves, afterwards tye a little string
in the button hole of the left sleeve; then passing your hand
behind his back, pull the shirt out of his breeches, and slide
it over his head ; then pulling it out before in the same man-
ner, you will leave it on his stomach; after that go to the
right hand, and pull the sleeve down, so as to have it all out
of the arm; the shirt being then all of a heap, as well i, the
right sleeve as before the stomach, you are to make use of the
little string fastened to the button hole of the left sleeve, to get
back the sleeve that must have slipt up, and pull the whole
shirt out that way.
To hide your way of operating from the person whom you
unshirt, and from the assembly, you may cover his head with a
lady's cloak, holding a corner of it in your teeth.
In order to be more at your ease, you may mount on a chair,
and do the whole operation under the cloak.
I68 GALE's RecREATIONs.
- | -
How to dispose two little Figures, so that one shall light a .
W Candle, and the other put it out.
Take two little figures of wood or clay, or any other ma-
terials you please, only taking care that there is a little hole at
the mouth of each: put in the mouth of one a few grains of
bruised gunpowder, and a little bit of phosphorus in the mouth
of the other; taking care that these preparations are made be-
forehand. - l -
Then take a lighted wax candle, and present it to the mouth
of the figure with the gunpowder, which taking fire will put
the candle out; then present your candle, having the snuff still
hot, to the other figure; it will immediately light again by
means of the phosphorus. .
... You may propose the same effects to be produced by two
figures drawn on a wall with a pencil or coal, by applying with
a little starch or water a few grains of bruised gunpowder to
the mouth of one, and a bit of phosphorus to the mouth of the
other.
Optical Illusions.
On the bottom of the vessel A B C D, (Plate III. Fig. 1.)
place three pieces of money, as a shilling, a half-crown, and
crown; the first at E, the second at F, and the last at G :
them place a person at H, where he can see no farther into
the vessel than I; and tell him that by pouring water into the
vessel you will make him see three different pieces of money;
hidding him observe carefully, whether any money goes in with
the water. * -
You must either pour it in very gently, or contrive to fix
the pieces, that they may not move out of their places by the
motion of the water
When the water comes up to K, the piece at E will become
isible; when it comes up to L, the pieces at E and F will
appear; and when it rises to M, all the three pieces will be
visible. - --
From what has been said of the refraction of light", the
cauge of this phenomenon will be evident; for while the vessel
is empty, the ray H I will naturally proceed in a straightline;
but in proportion as it becomes immersed in water, it will be
See Appendix,
& ALE'S RECREATIONS. 169
necessarily refracted into the several directions NE, OF, PG,
and consequently the several pieces must become visible.
Optical Augmentation.
Take a large drinking glass of a conical figure, that is
Small at bottom and wide at top; in which put a shilling, and
fill the glass about half full of water : then place a plate on
the top of it, and turn it quickly over, that the water may
not get out: you will then see on the plate a piece of the size
of a half crown; and somewhat higher up, another piece of the
size of a shilling.
This phenomenon arises from seeing the piece through the
conical surface of the water at the side of the glass, and through
the flat surface at the top of the water at the same time; for
the conical surface dilates the rays, and makes the piece appear
larger ; but by the flat surface the rays are only refracted, by
which the piece is seen higher up in the glass, but still of its
natural size: that this is the cause will be further evident by
filling the glass with water, for as the shilling cannot be then
seen from the top, the large piece only will be visible,
After you have amused yourself with this remarkable pheno-
menon, you may give the glass to a servant, telling him to throw
out the water, and take care of the two pieces of money; and
if he has no suspicion of the deception, he will be not a little
Surprised to find one piece only.
Optical Subtraction.
Against the wainscot of a room fix three small pieces of pa-
per, as A, B, C, (Plate III. Fig. 2.) at the height of your eye,
and placing yourself directly before them, at a few yards dis-
tance, shut your right eye, and look at them with the left ;
when you will see only two of those papers, suppose A and B;
but altering the position of your eye, you will then see the
third and one of the first, suppose A ; and by altering your
position a second time, you will see B and C ; but never all
three of them together.
The cause of this phenomenon is, that one of the three
pencils of rays that come from these objects, falls on the optic
nerve at D; whereas to produce distinct vision, it is necessary
that the rays of light fall on some part of the retina E, F, G, H :
we see by this experiment, one of the uses of having two
eyes; for he that has one only can never see three objects
Q
: , J & A LE'S RECREATIONS.
Placed in this position, nor all the parts of one object of the
1. # 3. - * e * * .
same extent, without altering the situation of his eye.
The Camera Obscura, or dark Chamber.
We shall here give a short description of this optical inven-
tion ; for though it is very common, it is also very pleasing: and
though almost every one has seen it, every one knows not how
to construct it.
Make a circular hole in the shutter of a window, frºm
whence there is a prospect of the fields, or any other object
not too near; and in this hole place a convex glass, either
double or single, whose focus is at the distance of five or six
feet : the distance should not be less than three feet; for if it
be, the images will be too small, and there will not be suffi-
sient room for the spectators to stand conveniently ; on the
other hand, the focus should never be more than 15 or 20 feet,
for then the images would be obscure, and the colouring faint :
the best distance is from six to twelve feet:—take care that
no light enters the room but by this glass : at a distance from
it, equal to that of its focus, place a pasteboard, covered with
the whitest paper; this paper should have a black border, to
prevent any of the side rays from disturbing the picture ; let
it be two feet and a half long, and eighteen or twenty inches
high ; bend the length of it inwards to the fºrm of part of
a circle whose diameter is equal to double the focal distance
of the glas" : then fix it on a frame of the Santº figure, and
put it on a moveable foot, that it may be easily fixcel at titat
exact distance from the glass where the objects paint themselves
to the greatest perfection : when it is thus piaced, all the
objects that are in the front of the window will be painted on
the paper, in an inverted position, this inverted position of th
images may be deemed an imperfection, but it is easily re-
medied ; for if you stand above the board on which they are
received, and look down on it, they will appear in their natural
position ; or if you stand before it, and placing a common
mirror against your breast in an oblique direction, look down
in it, you will there see the images erect, and they will receive
an additional lustre from the reflection of the glass: or place
two lenses in a tube that draws out ; or, lastly, if you place
a large concave mirror at a proper distance before the picture,
it will appear before the mirror in the air, and in an erect
G ALE'S RECREATIONs. 1 ſ 3
position, with the greatest regularity, and in the ri, ost ....turai
colours.
If you place a moveable mirror without the window, by turn-
ing it more or less, yet will have on the paper all the objects
that are on each side ºf the window,
There is another method of making the dark chamber,
which is by a scioptric ball, that is, a ball of wood, through
which a hole is made, in which hole a lens is fixed : this ball
is placed in a wooden frame, in which it turns freeiy, rouad :
the frame is fixed to the hole in the situtter, ai, the ball
by turning all out answers, in great part, the use of the mirror
on the ou'side of the window : if the hole in the window
be nº bigger than a pea, the objects will be represented without
&ny lens.
lf instead of placing the mirror without the window, you
place it in the room, and above the hole (which must then
be made inear the top of the shutter), you may receive the
representation on a paper placed horizontally on a table :
and draw at your leisure all the objects that are there
painted.
Nothing can be more pleasing than this recreation, especially
when the objects are strongly enlightened by the sun; and not
only land prospects, but a sea port, when the water is some-
what agitated, or at the setting of the sun, presents a very de-
fightful appearance.
This representation affords the most perfect model for
painters, as well for the tone of colours as that degradation
of shades, occasioned by the interposition of the air, which has
been so justly expressed by sense modern painters,
It is necessary that the paper have a circular form, for
otherwise, when the center of it was in the focus of the glass,
the two sides would be beyond it, and consequently the images
would be confused : if the frame were contrived of a spherical
figure, and the glass were in its center, the representation would
be still more accurate. If the object without be at the distance
of twice the focal length of the glass, the image in the room
will be of the same magnitude with the object.
The lights, shades, and colours in the camera obscura ap-
pear not only just, but, by the images being reduced to a
smaller compass, much stronger than in nature; add to this,
that these pictures exceed all others by representing the motion
of the several objects; thus we see the animals walk, run, or
Q Q
| 72 GALE's RECREATION 3.
fly, the clouds float in the air, the leaves quiver, the waves
roll, &c. and all in strict conformity to the laws of nature.
The best situation for a dark chamber is directly North, and
the best time of the day is noon.
To shew the Spots on the Sun's Disk by its Image in the Ca-
mera Obscura.
Put the object glass of a ten or twelve foot telescope into
the scioptric ball, and turn it about till it be directly opposite
the sun :' wifen the sun is directly opposite the hole, the lens
'Aili itself be sufficient ; or by means of the mirror on the
outside of the window, as in the last recreation, the lens will
answer the purpose at any time: then place the pasteboard,
mentiomed in the last recreation, in the focus of the lens, and
you will see a clear bright image of the sun, of about an inch
diameter, in which the spots on the sun's surface will be exactly
described.
As this image is too bright to be scen with pleasure by the
naked eye, you may view it through a lens, whose focus is 6
or 8 inches distant, which at the same time that it prevents the
light from being offensive, will, by magnifying both the image
and the spots, make them appear to greater advantage.
To magnify small Objects by means of the Sun's Rays let into
a dark Chamber.
Let the rays of light that pass through the lens in the shutter
be thrown on a large concave mirror, properly fixed in a frame;
then take a slip, or thin plate of glass, and sticking any small ob-
ject on it, hold it in the incident rays, at a little more than the
focal distance from the mirror, and you will see, on the opposite
wall, amidst the reflected rays, the image of that object, very
large, and extremely clear and bright. This experiment never
fails to give the spectator the highest satisfaction.
The Magic Lantern.
This very remarkable machine, which is now known over
all the world, caused great astonishment at its origin: it
is still beheld with pleasing admiration, and the spectator
very frequently contents himself with wondering at its effects,
without endeavouring to investigate their cause : the inven-
tion of this ingenious illusion is attributed to the celebrated
GALE's RECREATIONS. - | 73.
P. Kircher, who has published, on various sciences, works
equally learned, curious, and entertaining.
The design of this machine is to represent at large, on a
cloth or board, placed in the dark, the images of small objects,
painted with transparent colours on plates of glass.
Its construction is as follows: let ABCD (Pl. III. Fig. 3)
be a tin box, eight inches high, ten long, and six wide (or any
other similar dimensions); at the top must be a funnel E, of
four inches in diameter, with a cover F, which at the same time
that it gives a passage to the smoke, prevents the light from
coming out of the box.
On the side AC there is a door, by which is adjusted a
concave mirror G, of metal or tin, and of five inclies diameter;
being part of a sphere whose diameter is eighteen inches, this
mirror must be so disposed that it may be pushed forward or
drawn back by means of the handle H, that enters the tin tube
I, which is soldered to the door.
In the middle of the box must be placed a low tin lamp K,
which is to be moveable : it should have three or four lights,
that must be at the height of the focus of the mirror G.
In the side BD, and opposite to the mirror, there must be an
aperture of three inchos wide and two inches and a half high,
in which is to be fixed a convex glass L, of the same dimen-
sion: I prefer this form for the glass, says M. Guyot, that the
picture thrown upon the eloth may have the same form, which
is much preferable to a circular aperture, through which the
figures can never be completely seen but when they are at the
center of the glass : it is surprising that this imperfection has
been suffered to continue so long, when it is so easily remedied ;
the focus must be from four inches and a half to five inches,
so that the lamp may be placed both in its focus, and in that of
the concave mirror. -
On the same side, place a piece of tin MN, of four inches
and a half square, having an opening at the sides about
four inches and a half high, and a quarter of an inch wide:
through this opening or groove are to pass the glasses, on
which are painted the figures that are to be seen on the cloth :
in this tin piece, and opposite the glass L, let there be an
aperture of three inches and a quarter long, and two inches
and a quarter high, to which must be adjusted a tube O, of
the same form, and six inches long : this tube is to be fixed
into the piece MN:-another tube, six inches long, and,
O 3
174 G ALE’S RECREATIONS.
moveable, must enter that just mentioned, in which must be
placed two convex lenses, P and Q ; that of P may have a
focus of about three inches, and that of Q, which is to be
placed at the extremity of the tube, one of ten or twelve inches:
the distance between these glasses is to be regulated by their
foci: between these glasses, there must be placed a pasſeboard
R, in which is an aperture of an inch wide, and 4-5ths of an
inch high : by placing this tube farther in or out of the other,
the inages on the cloth will appear larger or smaller.
From what has been said of the preceding machines, the cor-
struction of this will be easily understood : the foci of the
concave mirror, and the lens L, meeting in the flame of the
lamp, they together throw a strong light on the figures painted
on the glasses that pass through the groove MN, and by that
means render their colours distinct on the cloth : the rays from
those glasses passing through the lens P are collected by the
aperture in the pasteboard R, and conveyed to the lens Q, by
which they are thrown on the cloth.
The lantern being thus adjusted, you must provide plates of
clear glass, of twelve or fifteen inches long, and three inches wide,
which are to be placed in thin frames, that they may pass freely
through the groove MN, after being painted in the manner we
shall now describe.
Method of Painting the Glasses for the Lantern.
Draw on a paper the subject you intend to paint, and fix
it at each end to the glass : provide a varnish with which you
Have mixed some black paint, and with a fine pencil draw on
the other side of the glass, with very light touches, the design
drawn on the paper: if you are desirous of making the
painting as perfect as possible, you should draw some of the
outlines in their proper colours, provided they are the strongest
tints of those colours that are used :-when the outlines are
dry, you colour the figures with their proper tints or degrada-
tions; and those colours will not peel off, if you temper them
with a strong white warnish. All those colours that are not
terrestrial, as Prussian blue, carmine, calcined verdigris, &c.
may be used to advantage, when tempered with a proper var-
nish: you are then to shade them with black mixed with the
same varnish, or white bistre, as you find convenient : you
may also leave strong lights in some parts, without any colours,
GALE’s RECREATIONS. 175
in order to produce a more striking effect. Observe, in par-
ticular, not to use more than four or five colours, such as blue,
red, green, and yellow. You should employ however a great
variety of tints, to give your painting a more natural air,
without which they will represent vulgar objects, which are by
no means the more pleasing, because they are gaudy,
When the lamp in this lantern is lighted, and by drawing
out the tube to a proper length, the figures painted on the glass
appear bright and well defined, the spectator cannot fail of
being highly entertained by the succession of natural or gro-
tesque figures that are painted on the glasses.
This piece of optics may be rendered much more amusing,
and at the same time more marvellous, by preparing figures to
which different natural motions may be given : there are in
the Philosophical Essays of M. Muschenbroek, different me-
thods of performing all these various movements, by some
mechanical contrivances that are not difficult to execute,
which every one may perform according to his own taste;
either by movements in the figures themselves, or by painting
the subject on two glasses, and passing them at the same time
through the groove.
How to rub out Twenty Chalks at five Times rubbing out, every
Time an odd one. -
Tricks of this kind are more generally the diversion of
low mechanies, who, having studied what is trifling more than
what is useful, fancy themselves conjurers, and not a little
proud, often affront and insult those of superior knowledge;
always ready to lay wagers, when in their cups, offer five to
one, ten to one, or any odds that come uppermost, that none
can do the like but themselves; yet sometimes these cunning
men find themselves at a loss, when they meet with a person
who is equally knowing, who makes their pockets pay for
their boasting;-from these sort of wagers arise quarrels; for
if one is not equal to another in point of calculation, he
thinks he may be in point of manhood; a challenge is given and
accepted; and the combatants, fierce as bull-dogs, begin throw-
ing their athletic arms at each other, the stones are rammed
deeper with their falls, the noisy attendants make confusion,
ashamed with their vociferous clamouring: “Well struck,
Dick, that was a nice one; Tom, at him again, under his ribs,
darken his day-lights, mind your points, find out his bread
I 76 G ALE'S RECREATIONS.
basket, tip him Slack's favorite, give him a cross-buttock, and
come Ben Bosle over his jaw-bone. Huzza! huzza huzza lº
Then the valiant heroes, encouraged by their friends, the rabble,
bruise one another's flesh; and at last, the victor, perhaps, gains
for his triumph a black eye, bloody nose, and dislocated jaw,
and all his comfort is, that his antagonist has the same sort of
iſonour doubled : after all this, a few tankards of porter make
friends; but their wives and families are the greatest sufferers,
who are at home pining in rags and want, while their husbands
are losing their time, and abusing themselves.
The following trick is one of those most in practice amongst
them :
To do this trick, you must make twenty chalks or long strokes
upon a board, as in the margin :
Then begin and count backwards, as 20, 10, 1 –
18, 17, rub out these four, then proceed saying, 2—
10, 15, 14, 13, rub out these four, and begin 3—
again, 12, 1 1, 10, 9, and rub out these, and pro- 4—
ceed again, 8, 7, 6, 5, then rub out these, and 5—
lastly say, 4, 3, 2, 1 ; when these four are rubbed 6—
out, the whoſe twenty are rubbed out at five times, 7—
and every time an odd one, that is the 17th, 13th, 8—
9th, 5th, and 1 st. ()—
This is a trick, which, if once seen, may be I ()—
easily retained; and the only puzzle at first is, it ! I —
not occurring immediately to the mind, to begin lº–
to rub them out backwards: it is as simple as | 3—
any thing possibly can be, and might do very well 14—
when people are social and good-humoured to- I j—
gether ; but when they are flushed with liquor, I 6–
and fractious by nature, I advise all those who 17—
love peace and quietness not to be curious to 1 S-
know what they cannot directly comprehend, as I ()—
one word brings on another, and the consequences 20–––
may be what is displayed in the preface to this trick.
To cut a Looking-glass, or Piece of Chrystal, let it be ever so
thick, without the help of a Diamond, in the same shape as
the Mark of the Drawing made on it with Ink.
This remarkable operation unites utility with amusement;
for being in the country, or in a place where there is no gla-
G ALE'S RECREATIONS. 177
zier Hor glassman to be had, the following means will answer
the purpose without their help.
Take a bit of a walnut-tree, about the thickness of a can-
dle, and cut one of its ends to a point; put that end in the fire,
and let it burn till it is quite red : while the stick is burn-
ing, draw on the glass or chrystal, with ink, the design or out-
line of the form in which you mean to cut it out: then take
a file, or bit of glass, and scratch a little the place where you
mean to begin your section; then take the wood red hot from
the fire, and lay the point of it about the twentieth part of an
inch, or thickness of a guinea, from the marked place, taking
care to blow always on that point, in order to keep it red; fol-
lowing the drawing traced on the glass, leaving, as before,
about the twentieth part of an inch interval every time that you
present your piece of wood, which you must take care to blow
often.
After having followed exactly the outlines of your draw-
ing, to separate the two pieces thus cut, you need only pull
them up and down, and they will divide.
To change the Colour of a Rose.
Nothing more is wanting to change the colour of a rose,
whether it is on its stalk or not, than to burn some sulphur un-
der iſ ; which will make it turn white, and it will not regain
its primitive colour in less than two hours.
Blind Abbess and her Nuns.
A blind abbess visiting her nuns, who were equally distributed
in eight cells, built at the four corners of a square, and in the
middle of each side, finds an equal number of persons in each
row or side containing three cells : at a second visit, she finds
the same number of persons in each row, though their number
was enlarged by the accession of four men ; and coming a
third time, she still finds the same number of persons in each
row, though the four men were then goise, and had carried
each of them a nun with them.
To resolve the first case, when the four men were got into
the cells, we must conceive it so, that there was a man in each
corner cell, and that two nuns removed from thence to each
| | S G ALE'S RECREATIOxs.
of the middle cells : at this rate, ach coruet
3 C 3 cell contained one person less than before; and
each middle cell two more than before : sup-
pose then, that at the first visitation each cell
contained 3 ºuns; and so, that there were nine
3 3 } in each row, and twenty-four in ail; at the se-
--—-' cond visit, which is the first case in question,
there must have been five nuts in each middle cell, and two
*s-sº-sººmsºmº- persons, viz. a nºn and a nun in each corner
3
3
Q 5 Q celi ; which still ſºakes nine persons in each
T(; ,Y.
5 5 To account for the second case, when the
four men were gone, and four nuts with then,
2 5 2 each corner ceil must have contained one ºut,
— more than at the first visit, and each raiddie
cell two fewer; and thus, according to the supposition laid
down, ech corner ceil contained four nuns,

4, 1 4 and there was only one in each middle cell,
which still make mine in a row, though the
1 l whole number was but twenty.
4 l 4
To find the Number remaining, after some Operations, without
asking any Questions.
Bid a person add what number you will to the Humber
thought of, and multiply the sum by the number thought of:
for if you make him subtract the square of the number thought
of from the product, and tell you the remainder, you have
nothing to do but to divide the remainder by the number you
gave him to add before ; for the quotient is the number thought
of: thus 4 added to the 5 (the number thought of) makes
9, which being multiplied by 5, makes 45 : from which take
25, the square of the number thought of, and there remains 20,
which being divided by 4, you have 5 in the quotient.
Or else bid the person that thinks take a certain lesser num-
ber from the number thought of, and multiply the remaindel
by the same number thought of ; for if you make him take the
square of the number thought of from the product, and tel,
the remainder, by dividing the remainder by the number you
G.A. LE's R CCREATIONS. | 79
ordered to be taken from the number thought of, you have the
Lumber whought of in the quotient.
But of all the ways of finding out a number thought of, the
following is certainly the easiest : make him take from the
number thought of what number you pitch upon that is less
than it, and set the remainder apart ; then make him add the
same number to the number thought upon, and the preceding
remainder to the sum, for a second sum ; which he is to dis.
cover to you, and the half of that sum is the number thought
of: thus 5 being thought of, and three taken from it, the re-
mainder is 2; and the same number 3 added to 5 makes S,
and that with the preceding remainder, 10, the half of which,
5, is the number thought of.
To find the Number thought of by another without asking any
Questions.
Bid the other person add to the number thought of its half,
if it be even ; or its greatest half, if it be odd ; and to that sum
its half or greatest half, according as it is even or odd, for the
second sum, from which bid him subtract the double of the
number thought of, and take the half of the remainder, or its
least half, if the remainder be odd; and thus he is to continue
to take half after half, till he comes to an unit : in the mean
time you are to observe how many subdivisions he makes, re-
taining in your mind for the first division 2, for the second 4,
for the third 8, and so on in a double proportion, remembering
still to add 1 every time he took the least half; and that when
he can make no subdivision, you are to retain only 1 :- by this
means you have the number that he has halved so often, and
the quadruple of that number is the number thought of, if so
be he was not obliged to take the greatest half at the begin-
ning, which can only happen when the number thought of is
evenly even, or divisible by 4: in other cases, if the greatest
half was taken at the first division, you must subtract 3 from
that quadruple ; if the greatest half was taken only at the second
division, you subtract but 2; and if he took the greatest half at
each of the two divisions, you are to subtract 5 from the quad-
ruple, and the remainder is the number thought of.
For example, let 4 be the number thought of, which by
the addition of its half, 2, becomes 0, and that by the addition
of its half 3, is 9; from which 8, the double of the number
| SO G ALE'S RECREATIONS.
thought of, being subtracted, the remainder is 1, that admits of
no division: and for this reason you retain only 1 in your mind,
the quadruple of which, 4, is the number thought of.
Again ; let 7 be the number thought of; this being odd,
the greatest half of it, 4, added to it makes 11, which is odd
again; and so to the greatest half of 11 added to 11, makes
17, from which we take 14, the double of the number thought
of, and so the remainder is 3, the least half of which is 1, that
admits of no farther division: here there being but one
sub-division, we retain 2, and to that add 1 for the least half
taken, so we have 3, the quadruple of which is 12 ; but because
the greatest moiety was taken both in the first and second divi-
sion, we must subtract 5 from 12, and the remainder 7 is the
nuldber thought of.
To find out Two Numbers thought of by any one.
Bid a person multiply the two numbers 5, 3, together; and
then multiply the sum of two numbers 8 by the number you
want to find, whether the greater or lesser, and subtract the pro-
duct of the two numbers 15 from that product (which is 40, if
you want the greater, and 24, if you look for the lesser number)
and tell you the remainder, 25, or 9, the square roots of which
satisfies the demand.
When the least of the two numbers does not exceed 9, it
is easier to find them out after this manner: let 1 be added
to the triple of the greatest (of the two numbers thought of,
the triple of that sum, and the total sum discovered; from
which you are to take off 3, and then the right hand figure
is the least, and the left hand figure the greatest number
thought of; thus 3 times 5, more, 1, and the triple of that
48 added to 8, the sum of the two numbers, makes 56, which
losing 3, is 53; 3 the right hand figure being the least, and 5
on the left the greatest number thought of: or to 9 times the
greatest number, add the sum of them both, then is the left
hand figure the greatest, and the right hand one the least; thus
9 times 5 is 45, to which add 8, the sum is 53.
Strange Tricks performed by Electricity."
Among the wonderful discoveries of human nature, there is
hardly any that rank higher than electricity.
GAL ES RECREATIONS. i 3 i
This phenomenon, like many others, was found out merely by
accident; yet it has proved not only a source for various expe-
riments, but likewise extremely beneficial to mankind.
The great Dr. Frauklin has improved more in this branch of
knowledge than any other person ; he even contrived to bring
lightning from the clouds by means of conductors; these con-
ductors are of great service, when fixed to churches, and other
public edifices, to preserve them from the dreadful effects of the
rapiduess of eiemental fire.
When eiectricity is made use of physically, it is of great utili-
ty, and has been known to relieve, and sometimes entirely cure,
various disorders; it is very serviceable in the rheumatism, and
other chronic disorders.
One circumstance I shall mention, which I received" from a
gentleman who has been dead some years, but whose character
as an artist, and an ingenious person, will be a long time remiem-
bered ; i mean Mr. Benjamin Rackstrow, of Fleet-street.
He told me, that having some company one day to see his
museum, and his electrical experiments, they were rather fearful
of undergoing the shock; when a person who was much given
to inebriety, being in the room, and rather intoxicated, volun-
tarily offered to let the experiment be tried on him : this was
agreed to, upon which he received it pretty smartly three or
four times, and thought no more about it at that time :-a
few days afterwards he had occasion to go to Chichester, in
Sussex, and being rather low in circumstances, was obliged to
walk.
This man had been affected for many years with a rupture,
which was extremely troublesome, but on his journey he had
.not the least symptom of it; on which he wrote a letter to Mr.
Rackstrow, informing him of this agreeable circumstance, and
imputing it entirely to his receiving the shock from his elec-
trical apparatus: the man lived to confirm this by word of
mouth ; and what is really extraordinary, the rupture never
returned, which is suflicient to establish its physical conse-
quence; it is of farther service in palsies and contractions, and is
performed by sparks, drawn by friction, from the electrical
machine. -
Its real use being thus established, we may now, without
offending, be a little merry with other circumstances which
have, and may happen again, by means of electricity.
R
* The person from whom it is taken.
1 SQ G ALE's RECREATIONS.
Some ladies and gentlemen, coming to Mr. Rackstrow's,
brought with them a negro servant who had not been long in
England: after they had seen his natural and artificial curi-
osities, they desired to see some of his electrical experiments,
and gave him a hint to play a trick or two upon poor Mungo :
Mungo was not a little surprised at the shocks he received, but
could not guess from whence they came ; but when the room
was darkened, and fire made to come out of his fingers' ends,
he roared out like a mad bull, crying, the devil! the devil'
and in endeavouring to get out of the room, overset the skeleton
of a Rhinoceros, run his head against a case full of butterflies,
and broke to pieces a fine bust of the Marquis of Granby; and
having once more gained day light, made a sudden spring into
the street, and run immediately home, to the no small diversion
of his master and family.
Mrs. Bulky being troubled with a tympany, was recom-
mended to be electrified ; she accordingly went to a professor
in that way, who asked her if she could bear a pretty hard
shock 2 O, yes, Sir, said she, as hard as you please, and as
often as you please, I am very fond of being shocked: the man
by this supposed she had before undergone the operation, and
was not sparing to give her what she seemed so well to under-
stand; but, alas ! he wound up his instrument too high : so
that he not only overset his patient, but actually conveyed her
into a cellar where they sold ox check and peas soup; down
went the streaming pam full of savory broth, and off flew her
monument of a cap into the other boiling cauldron.
The cook reddened like a heated poker, the customers rose
from their seats, and confusion took place in this subterraneous
abode.
All culinary business was at an end for the present; the
electrical doctor came running to the assistance of his patient;
but as soon as the cause of the disaster was explained, the oc-
cupier of the place declared the damages should be made good;
her pan of leg of beef was entirely lost, her peas soup sponſed
by the powder and pomatum of the lady's head dress, the
doctor was the cause of all, and he should pay for all ; but he
declared he would, sooner than pay a farthing, electrify the
house till it fell about their ears.
At last the lady, however, having adjusted herself in the
best manner size could, gave the good woulan a crown, and so
G ALE's RECREATIONS. 1 S3
compromised the matter; however, it cured her of her tympany,
for she never went to the doctor afterwards.
Many are the tricks played by ineans of an electrifying ma-
chime: a person in the city had one in his shop which was not
seen by the passers by ; he hung at the door an old steelyard,
which, from its make, seemed to be very ancient; this attracted
the attention and notice of many, who no sooner went to ex-
amine it than they received the shock; those that knew
what it was only smiled, and went on ; others stared, and could
not guess from whence it came.
A drunken porter being called one day, and asked what he
would have to carry the steelyard to a certain place, went to
examine it, but he no sooner touched it than he felt a blow, and
turning round, with an oath, declared, if he knew who it was,
he would pay them well for their impudence: he then returned
to speak about his job, and received another shock, and ano-
ther after that, till, irritated by the supposed assaults, given by
he could not tell whom, he stripped in buff to fight all that came
in his way, till he got a mob of boys and dogs at his heels, and
was glad to get away at any rate.
Such tricks are not recommended as proper to be practised,
for they are really dangerous; a strange person might, on find-
ing the truth, break the windows, or keep it in his mind, and
do the electrifying gentleman some injury, which might make
him repent of his experiments.
Small electrical machines are often introduced in company,
and create not only mirth, but produce real rational amuse-
ment; such can never be disagreeable, but must give satisfac-
tion to all who have any idea of philosophical knowledge, and
wish to improve their minds by mathematical experiments: to
all such, we may safely recommend the electrical apparatus,
which will be both useful and profitable.
M A G NET is M.
Definitions.
1 Magnetism is the science that explains the several proper-
ties of the attractive and repellant powers in the magnet or load-
St0rle.
2. The magnet is a rich, heavy, iron ore, of a hard substance,
a dusky grey colour, with some mixture of a reddish brown,
and sparkling when broken.
R 2
184 GALE'S RECREATIONS.
3. The magnetic virtue is called the third species of attrac-
tion; gravity being the first, and electricity the second.
4. The two ends of a magnet, when it is properly formed,
are called its poles; and when it is placed on a pivot, in
just equilibrium, one end will turn towards the North, and is
ca!!ed its North pole, and the other end the South pole: the
poles of a magnet are found by holding a very fine short needle
over it; for where the poles are, the needle will stand upright,
but no where else: the exterior parts are then to be filed or
ground off, and the two extremities which contain the poles to
He made quite smooth.
5. When the two poles of a magnet are surrounded with
lates of steel, it is said to be armed.
(). If the end of a small iron bar be rubbed against one of the
poles of a magnet, it is said to be touched, and is then called an
artificial magnet.
7. If such a magnet be supported on a pivot, it is called a
magnetic needle; one end of it turning towards the North, and
the other towards the South.
8. The difference between the position of the needle, and the
exact points of North and South, is called its declimation.
9. A needle which is touched will incline towards the earth,
and that is called its inclimation, or dipping.
APTHO RISMIS.
I. The magnetic attraction is produced by effluvia emitted
by the magnet, and passing from one pole to the other: the
direction of the magnetic effluvia is shewn by the following
experiment: let A B, CD, (Plate IV. Fig. 1.) be the poles
of a magnet; round every side lightly strew steel filings on a
sheet of white paper; the particles of the filings will be so af-
fected by the effluvia of the stone, as to shew the course they
take every way: in the middle of each pole, between A B and
CD, they appear to proceed in lines nearly straight; towards
the ends they are more and more curved, till at last the lines
from both sides coinciding with each other, form numberless
curves round the stone, which are nearly of a circular figure, as
in the plate. This experiment seems to shew that the magne-
tic effluvia issuing from one pole circulates to the other.
2. One pole of a magnet will attract iron, and the other
repel it, but uo other body. The property of the magnet to
GALE'S RECREATIONS. I 85
attract iron has been known many ages; but those of its polar
direction, and of its communicating that property to iron, was
not discovered till the 14th century.
3. The magnet attracts iron as well in vacuo as in the
air. -
4. The magnetic attraction will be continued through several
pieces of iron placed contiguous to each other.
5. The magnetic effluvia pervades all bodies.
6. The magnetic attraction extends to a considerable
distance. The learned Muschenbroek made a number of
experiments, with great care and assiduity, to determine the
extent and progress of the magnetic attraction; but was never
able to discover any regular proportion between the force and
distance, but merely that the force increased as the iron ap-
proached the magnet; nor does there seem to be any prospect
of establishing the proportion of attraction to the distance,
till a method is found, if it can be found, of separating the
attracting from the repelling parts: a needle has been known
to be attracted by an iron bar at the distance of eight or ten
feet.
7. The North pole of one magnet will attract the South
pole of another; and the similar poles will repel each other.
If a magnet be gently cut through the middle of its axis, each
piece becomes a complete magnet; for the parts that were
contiguous become poles, and even opposite poles; so that
the end of each piece may become a North or South pole ac-
cording as the section is made nearest to the North or South
pole of the large magnet. Upon cutting a magnet longitu-
dinally, there will be four poles, in the same position as before
the cutting. Sometimes a strong stroke with a hammer will
bring all the magnetic power from one end of a needle to the
other; sometimes make it more strong where it was before, and
at other times totally destroy it.
S. The end of a needle touched by the North pole of a mag-
met will turn South, and that touched by the South pole will
turn North.
9. The declination of the magnetic needle is different in
different parts of the earth, and in the same part at different
times: the declination of the needle at London in the year
1580 was 11 degrees, 15 minutes, East: in the year 1657,
there was no declination, that is, the needle stood exactly,
R 3
186 G ALE's RVCR EATIONs.
North and South ; at present, the declination is more than 22
degrees westward.
10. The inclination of the needle is not always the same
in different places, nor at the same place at different times:
the inclination of the needle when it was first observed, in
the year 1576, was found to be 71 degrees, 50 minutes; at
present it is between 74 and 75 degrees.
To prevent the dipping of the needle in the common com-
pass, the end that is not touched is made something heavier, by
which it is kept in equilibrio. Under the equator, the needle
has no inclination, being equally attracted by the two poles of
the earth.
11. The strength of natural magnets differs in those of
different magnitudes, but not in proportion to their magni-
tudes: the smallest magnets have generally the greatest
power, in proportion to their bulk :-a large magnet will
seldom take up more than three or four times its own weight;
whereas a small one will frequently take up more than ten
times its weight: a magnet that weighs scarce three grains,
and that a gentleman wears in his ring, will take up 740 grains,
or 250 times its owu weight. A magnetic bar made by Mr.
Canton, according to the method we shall hereafter describe,
and that weighed 10 ounces, 12 pennyweights, took up some-
thing more than 79 ounces: and a flat semicircular steel magnet
that weighed an ounce and 13 pennyweights, lifted an iron
wedge of 90 ounces.
13. The strength of a matural magnet is considerably in-
creased by its being armed : there are various ways of arming
magnets; the most eligible seems to be that of placing two
pieces of steel against the two poles, so that they may come
down below the bottom of the stone, and binding them on
with one or more pieces of brass: the two ends of the steel
pieces then become the poles of the magnet: to determine the
quantity of steel to be applied, try the magnet with several steel
bars, and the greatest weight it takes up, with a bar on, is to
be the weight of its armour.
Though an armed magnet has a great degree of force, it
may be easily counteracted : if an oblong piece of iron be
suspended by one of its poles, and the pole of a different de-
nomination of a weaker and unarmed magnet be placed under
the iron, it will quit the first magnet and adhere to the other :
in like manner, when a needle hangs by its point to a magnet,
G A LE'S RECREATIONS. 1 S7
if a common bar of iron be applied to the head of the needle,
it will directly quit the magnet and adhere to the bar; but if
it hangs by its head to the magnet, neither the iron, nor a weak
magnet, will disengage it. Though the pole of an armed mag-
met has great power, yet if an iron bar of great length be
placed under it, the magnet will not appear to have any force
whatever.
If a magnet by laying a long time unused has lost part of
its power, it may sometimes be recovered : an armed magnet
that weighed 14 ounces and a half, and would take up 16 times
its own weight, by laying by some years lost one fourth part
of its power; but as much weight being applied to it as it
would then take up, and being suffered to hang to it some
weeks, it would then take up an additional quantity ; and the
quantity being continually increased, at different periods, for
the space of two years, it would then take up more than 20
pounds; whereas, before its virtue was impaired, it would not
take up 15.
13. Iron acquires a magnetic power by being continually
rubbed in the same direction ; from hence files, augurs, and
such like tools, have always some magnetic power.
14. Iron bars become magnetic by standing a long time
nearly upright ; therefore pokers, tongs, and other irons,
that always stand with the same end downwards, are con-
stantly magnetic ; and the continual friction they receive, in
keeping them clean, contributes much to this. Some bars ac-
quire several magnetic poles alternately, North and South.
15. The magnetic virtue may be communicated by electri-
city. When the electric shock is very strong, it will give
a polarity to needles; and sometimes it will reverse their
poles.
16. A strong blow at the end of a magnetic bar will give it
a magnetic power: if such a bar, or a pair of pincers, be struck
hard, or thrown forcibly against a stone floor, they will mani-
festly attract a small needle that floats upon the surface of the
water in a glass.
17. Fire totally destroys the power of magnets, as well natu-
ral as artificial.
i SS G ALE'S RECREATIONS.
Method of making Artificial Magnets.
Procure a dozen bars; six of soft steel, each three inches
long, a quarter of an inch broad, and one twentieth of an
inch thick, with two pieces of iron, each half the length of
one of the bars, but of the same breadth and thickness; and
six of hard steel, each five inches and a half long, half an inch
broad, and three twentieths of an inch thick, with two pieces of
iron of one half the length, but the same breadth and thickness
as one of the liard bars; and let all the bars be marked with a
line quite round them at one end.
Then take an iron poker and tongs (Plate IV. Fig. 2.)
the larger they are and the longer they have been used, the bet-
ter; and fixing the poker upright between the knees, hold to
it, near the top, one of the soft bars, having its marked end
downward, by a piece of sewing silk, which must be pulled
tight with the left hand, that the bar may not slide; then
grasping the tongs with the right hand, a little below the mid-
de, and holding them nearly in a vertical position, let the bar
he stroked by the lower end, from the bottom to the top, about
ten times on each side, which will give it a magnetic power
sufficient to lift a small key at the marked end ; which end, if
the bar was suspended on a point, would turn towards the North,
and is therefore called the North pole, and the unmarked end
is, for the same reason, called the South pole of the bar.
Four of the soft bars being impregnated after this manner,
łay the other two (Fig. 3) parallel to each other, at the
distance of about a quarter of an inch between the two
pieces of iron belonging to them, a North and South pole
against each piece of iron; then take two of the four bars
already made magnetical, and place them together, so as to
make a double bar in thickness, the North pole of one even
with the South pole of the other; and the remaining two being
put to these in such manner as to have two North and two
South poles together, separate the North from the South poles
at one end by a large pin, and place them perpendicularly
with that end downwards, on the middle of one of the parallel
bars, the two North poles towards its South, and the two South
poles towards its North end; slide them backward and forward,
three or four times, the whole length of the bar; and removing
them from the middle of this, place them on the middle of
G ALE'S RECREAT1ONs. I 89
the other bar as before directed, and go over that in the same
manner ; then turn both the bars the other side upwards, and
repeat the former operation;–this being done, take the two
from between the pieces of iron, and placing the outermost
of the touching bars in their room, let the other two be the
outermost of the four to touch these with ; and this process
being repeated till each pair of bars have been touched three
or four times over, which will give them a considerable mag-
netic power, put the half dozen together after the manner of
the four, (Fig. .) and touch with then two pair of hard bars,
placed between their irons, at the distance of about half an
inch from each other; then lay the soft bars aside, and with
the four hard ones, let the other two be impregnated, (Fig. )
holding the touching bars apart, at the lower end, near two
tenths of an inch, to which distance let them be separated,
after they are set on the parallel bar, and brought together
again before they are taken off.
This being observed, proceed according to the method
described above till each pair has been touched two or three
times over ; but as this vertical way of touching a bar will
not give it quite so much of the magnetic virtue as it will
receive, let each pair be now touched once or twice over, in
their parallel position between the irons, (Fig. ) with two of
the bars held horizontally, or nearly so ; by drawing at the
same time the north of one from the middle over the south
end, and the south of the other from the middle over the north
end of a parallel bar; then bringing them to the middle again,
without touching the parallel bar, give three or four of these
horizontal strokes to each side : the horizontal touch after
the vertical will make the bars as strong as they can possibly
be made ; as appears by their not receiving any additional
strength, when the vertical touch is given by a great number,
and the horizontal by bars of a superior magnetic power:-
this whole process may be gone through in about half an
hour; and each of the large bars, if well hardened, may be
made to lift 28 troy ounces: and sometimes more : and when
these bars are thus impregnated, they will give to an hard bar
of the same size its full virtue in less than two minutes ; and
therefore will answer all the purposes of magnetism in navi-
gation and experimental philosophy, much better than the
loadstone, which is well known not to have sufficient power
to impregnate hard bars. The half dozen being put into a
i Q0 G A LE'S RECREATIONS.
case, (Fig. 7,) in such manner, as that two poles of the same
denomination may not be together, and their irons with them
as one bar, they will retain the virtue they have received; but
if their power should, by making experiments, be ever so far
impaired, it may be restored without any foreign assistance
in a few minutes; and if, out of curiosity, a much larger
set of bars should be required, these will communicate to
them a sufficient power to proceed with, and they may in
a short time, by the same method, be brought to their full
strength.
The Magnetic Perspective Glass.
Provide an ivory tube, about two inches and a half
long, and of the form expressed in plate V. Fig. I ; the
sides of this tube must be thin enough to admit a considerable
quantity of light: it is to open at one end with a screw ;
at that end there must be placed an eye glass A, Fig. 2. of
about two inches focus, and at the other end any glass you
please.
Have a small magnetic needle, like that placed on a com-
pass : it must be strongly touched, and so placed at the bot-
tom of the tube, that it may turn freely round; it is to be
fixed on the center of a small ivory circle, C, of the thickness
of a counter, which is placed on the object glass D, and painted
on the object glass D, and painted black on the side next it:
this circle must be kept fast by a circular rim of pasteboard,
that the needle may not rise off its pivot, after the same manner
as in the compass: this tube will thus become a compass suf-
ficiently transparent to slew the motions of the needle: the eye-
glass serves more clearly to distinguish the direction of the nee-
dle; and the glass at the other end, merely to give the tube the
appearance of a common perspective.
It will appear, by aphorism 8, that the needle in this tube,
when placed over, and at a small distance from a magnet, or
any machine in which it is contained, will necessarily place
itself in a position directed by that magnet, and consequently
shew where the North and South pole of it is placed ; the
North end of the needle constantly pointing to the South end of
the magnet.
This effect will take place though the magnet be inclosed in
a case of wood, or even metal, as the magnetic effluvia pene-
trates all bodies; you must observe, however, that the aſ-
G AL ES y
RECREAT I O N S. 191
tracting magnet must not be very far distant from the needle,
especially if it be small, as in that case its influence extends but
to a short distance.
This tube may be differently constructed by placing the
needie in a perpendicular direction, on a small axis of iron, on
which it must turn quite freely, between two small plates of
brass placed on each side the tube; the two ends of the needle
should be in exact equilibrium : the north and south ends of
this needle will, in like manizier, be attracted by the south and
north ends of the magnetic bar; the former construction,
however, appears preferable, as it is more easily excited, and
the situation of the needle much more easily distinguished.
The Magnetic Table.
Under the top of a common table, place a magnet that
turns on a pivot, and fix a board under it, that nothing may
appear; there may also be a drawer under the table, which
you pull out to slew that there is nothing concealed : at one
end of the table, there must be a pin that communicates with
the magnet, and by which it inay be placed in different posi-
tions: this pin must be so placed as Lot to be visible by the
spectators:—strew some steel filings, or very small Hails, over
that part of the table where the magnet is ; then ask any one
to lend you a knife, or a key, which will them attract part of
the nails or filings, in the same manner as the iron attracts the
needle, as may be seen in the 12th aphorism ; then placing
your hand, in a careless manner, on the pin at the end of the
table, you alter the position of the magnet; and giving the
key to any person, you desire him to make the experiment,
which he will then uot be able to perform : you then give the
key to another person, at the same time placing the magnet, by
means of the pin, in the first position, when that person will
immediately perform the experiment.
The communicative Crown.
Take a crown piece, and bore a hole in the side of it, in
which place a piece of wire, or a large needle, well polished,
and strongly touched with a magnet; then close the hole with
a small piece of pewter, that it may not be perceived: now
the needle in the magnetic perspective (before described,)
when it is brought near to this piece of money, will fix itself
192 G ALE'S RECREATIONs.
in a direction correspondent to the wire or needle in that
piece. -
Desire any person to lend you a crown piece, which you
dexterously change for one that you have prepared as above;
then give the latter piece to another person, and leave him at
liberty either to put it privately in a snuff-box, or not ; he is
then to place the box on a table, and you are to tell him, by
means of your glass, if the crown is or is not in the box ;
then bringing your perspective close to the box, you will know,
by the motion of the needle, whether it be there or not :
for as the needle in the perspective will always keep to the
north of itself, if you do not perceive it has any motion, you
conclude the crown is not in the box ;-it may happen however,
that the wire in the crown may be placed to the north, in
which case you will be deceived; therefore to be sure of
success, when you find the needle in the perspective remains
stationary, you may make some pretence to desire the person to
move the box into another position, by which you will certainly
know if the crown piece be there or not.
You must remember, that the needle in the perspective must
here be very sensible, as the wire in the crown camot possibly
have any great attractive force.
The Magician's Mirrors.
In the wainscot of a room, make two overtures of a foot
high and ten inches wide, and about a foot distant from each
other: let them be at the common height of a man's head,
and in each of the in place a transparent glass, surrounded with
a frame like a common mirror.
Behind this partition place two mirrors, one on the out-
ward side of each overture, inclined to the wainscot in an angle
of forty-five degrees’: let them both be eighteen inches square;
let all the space between them be enclosed by boards or
pasteboards, painted black, and well closed, that no light may
enter; let there he also two curtains to cover them, which may
be drawn aside at pleasure.
When a person looks into one of these supposed mirrors,
instead of seeing his own face, he will perceive the object that
is in the front of the other; so that if two persons present
* Every square or right angle is 90 degrees, half of which is 45,
and is readily formed by making the two angles cqual.
GALE's RECREATIONS. 193
themselves at the same time before these mirrors, instead of
each one seeing himself, they will reciprocally see each other.
Note.—There should be a sconce with a candle placed on
each side of the two glasses in the wainscot, to enlighten the
faces of the persons who look in them, otherwise this experiment
will have no remarkable effect. - •- - -
This recreation may be considerably improved by placing
the two glasses in the wainscot, in adjoining rooms, and a
number of persons being previously placed in one room, when
a stranger enters the other, you may tell him his face is dirty,
and desire him to look in the glass, which he will naturally do;
and on seeing a strange face, he will instantly draw back;
but returning to it, and seeing another, another, and another,
like the phantom kings in Macbeth, what his surprise will be
is more easy to conceive than express: after this, a real mir-
ror may be privately let down on the back of the glass, and if
he can be prevailed on to look in it once more, he will then,
to his farther astonishment, see his own face; and may be told,
perhaps persuaded, that all he thought he saw before was mere
imagination. - -
How many tricks less artful than this, have passed in former
times for sorcery; and pass at this time, in some countries, for
apparitions! - * .
Note—When a man looks in a mirror that is placed per-
pendicular to another, his face will appear entirely deformed:
if the mirror be a little inclined, so as to make an angle of
eighty degrees (that is, one ninth part from the perpendicular)
he will then see all the parts of his face, except the nose and
forehead; if it be inclined to sixty degrees (that is, one third
part), he will appear with three noses and six eyes; in short,
the apparent deformity will vary at each degree of inclination;
and when the glass comes to forty five degrees (that is, half
way down), the face will vanish: if instead of placing the two
mirrors in this situation, they are so disposed that their junction
may be vertical, their different inclinations will produce other
effects; as the situation of the object relative to these mirrors
is quite different: the effects of these mirrors, though remark-
able enough, occasion but little surprise, as there is no method
of concealing the cause by which they are produced.
194 UALE's RECREATI oss.
Polemoscopes.
By the term Polemoscope is meant any instrument, whether
catoptric or dioptric, by which you may see what passes in
another place, without being seen from thence: the machines
contain one or more plain mirrors, which convey by reflection
the image of the object to the eye of the spectator: there are
small instruments of this kind, made in the form of an opera
glass, by which, while you seem to look straight forward, you
see what passes on one side, and by that means gratify your cu-
riosity without the appearance of incivility.
To the constructing of this sort of polemoscope, nothing more
is necessary than to fix in a common opera glass a small mirror,
inclined to an angle of forty five degrees, and adjust a proper
object glass: this glass at the same time may answer its com
inon use, by adding an object glass, and so contriving the small
tube that it may remove the mirror at pleasure.
The tube of a polemoscope may be placed against a wall,
the inclined mirror being a little above it, and turned outwards;
by which means you will discover what passes on the other
side without being seen yourself. An instrument of this sort
would be of use in sieges, where there is danger without the
wall from the fire of the enemy, and on other occasions: this
instrument may also be constructed that the tube may turn
round, and the mirror be elevated or depressed, that you may
see successively, and at pleasure, all the objects that you would
perceive, if you were at the top of the wall against which the in
strument is placed.
The Artificial Irainbow.
Opposite a window into which the sun shines direct, sus.
pend a glass globe filled with water, by a string that runs ove
a pulley, so that the sun's rays may fall on it ; then drawing
the globe gradually up, when it comes to the height of abou
forty degrees, you will see, by placing yourself in a proper situ
ation, a purple colour in the glass, and by drawing it gradu
ally up higher, the other prismatic colours, blue, green, yellow
rud red, will successively appear ; after which the colours wi
disappear, till the globe is raised to about fifty degrees, whe
they will again be seen, but in an inverted order, the red aſ
i pearing first, and the blue or violet last ; and when the glo
G AL ES RECREATIONS. | 95
tones up to little or more than fifty four degrees, they will to-
tally vanish. -
These appearances serve to explain the phenomena of natural
rainbows, of which there are frequently two ; the one being
about eight degrees above the other, and the order of their co-
jours is inverted, as in this experiment, red being the uppermost
colour in the lower bow, and violet the other.
The rainbow is not in the clouds, but in the falling rain,
and always opposite the sum : the different order of the co-
lours in the bow arises from their different reflections; those
of the under bow being caused by two refractions and two re-
flections, and therefore the colours of this are less bright
than the other, their strength being diminished by every re-
flection.
Now it has been proved by repeated experiments that forty
degrees form the greatest angle by which the most refrangible
rays can, after one reflection, be refracted to the eye; and that
something more than forty two degrees forms the greatest an-
gle under which the least refrangible ray can come to the eye
after one reflection; therefore, all the colours of the lower
bow must lie in the space of less than two degrees: in like
manner, it has been proved, that fifty degrees make the least
angle under which the least refrangible rays can be visible
to the eye after two reflections; and that about fifty four de-
grees will be the least angle under which the most refrangible
rays can come to the eye after two reflections; therefore, all
the colours of the upper bow must be in less than four degrees.
It follows, from what is here said, that all rainbows are of a
circular form and equal magnitude, and as they are always op-
posite the Sun, the parts we see of them must be in proportion
to his height above the horizon; when his altitude is forty
degrees, only the upper rainbow can be visible, and when it is
fifty four degrees there can be no rainbow; but as the sun's
height, during the winter half year, is never equal to forty de-
grees, there may be always then two bows visible.
By the means of two plain Looking Glasses to make a Face ap-
pear under different Forms
Having placed one of the two glasses horizontally, raise
the other to about right angles over the first; and while the
two glasses continue in this posture, if you dome up to the
S 2 - -
I ()0 G ALE’s RVCREATIONS.
perpendicular glass, you will see your face quite deformed and
imperfect ; for it will appear without forehead, eyes, nose, or
cars, and nothing will be seen but a mouth and a chin raised
bold: do but incline the glass ever so little from the perpen-
dicular, and your face will appear with all its parts, excepting
the eyes and the forehead; stoop a little more, and you will
see two noses and four eyes; and then a little further, and you
will see three noses and six eyes;–continue to incline it still a
little more, and you will see nothing but two noses, two
mouths, and two chins ; and then a little further again, and
you will see one nose and one mouth ;-at last incline a little
further, that is, till the angle of inclination comes to be 44
degrees, and your face will quite disappear.
If you incline the two glasses, the one towards the other, you
will see your face perfect and entire; and by the different incli-
nations, you will see the representation of your face, upright
and inverted alternately, &c.
By the means of Water to make a Counter appear that, while
the Vessel was empty of Water, was hid from the Eye.
Take an empty vessel, and put a counter in it, at such a
distance from the eye, that the height of the sides of the vessel
keeps it hid: you may make the eye to see this counter
without altering the place of either the eye, the vessel, or the
counter, viz. by pouring water into it; for as sight, which is
performed in a straight line, does upon encountering a thicker
medium, refract towards a perpendicular, so in this case the wa-
ter poured into the vessel being a thicker medium than the air,
will make the rays darted from the eyes to refract towards the
line that is perpendicular to its surface; and so the eye will see
the counter at the bottom of the vessel, which, without that re-
fraction, could not be seen.
To know which of two different Waters is the lightest without
any Scales.
Take a solid body, the specific gravity of which is less than
that of water, deal, or fir-wood, for instance, and put it into each
of the two waters, and rest assured that it will sink deeper in the
lighter than in the heavier water; and so by observing the dif-
ference of the sinking, you will know which is the lightest wa-
ter, and consequently the wholsomest for drinking,
\
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 197
To contrive a Cask to hold three different fliquors that may
be drawn unmired at one and the same Tap.
The cask (Pl. V. Fig. 3.) must be divided into three parts or
cells, A, B, C, for containing the three different liquors, as red
wine, white wine, and water ; which you may put into their
respective cells at one and the same bung, thus ;
Put into the bung a funnel D, with three pipes, E, F, G,
each of which terminates in its respective cell: upon this
fuunel clap another funnel H with three holes, that may an-
swer when you fill the orifices of each pipe; for thus, if you
turn the funnel H so as to make each hole answer successively
to its corresponding pipe, the liquor you pour into the funnel H
will enter that pipe, it being still supposed, that when one pipe
is open the other two are shut.
Now to draw these liquors without mixing, you must have
three pipes, K, L, M, each of which answers to a cell, and a
sort of cock or spigot I N, with three holes answering the three
pipes, and so turning it till one of the holes fits its respective
pipe, you draw the respective liquor by itself. .
To know if a suspicious Piece of Money is good or bad.
If it be a piece of silver that is not very thick, as a crown,
or half a crown, the goodness of which you want to try; take
another piece of good silver of equal balance with it, and tie
both pieces with thread or horse hair to the scales of an exact
balance (to avoid the wetting of the scales themselves), and dip
the two pieces thus tied in water; for then if they are of equal
gooduess, that is, of equal purity, they will hang in equilibria in
the water as well as in the air; but if the piece in question is
lighter in the water than the other, it is certainly false, that
is, there is some other metal mixed with it that has less specific
gravity than silver, such as copper; if it is heavier than the
other, it is likewise bad, as being mixed with a metal of greater
specific gravity than silver, such as lead.
If the piece proposed is very thick, such as that crown of
gold that Hiero, king of Syracuse, sent to Archimedes to
know if the goldsmith had put into it all the eighteen pounds,
of gold that he had given him for that end ; take a piece of
pure gold of equal weight with the crown proposed, viz.
eighteen pounds; and without taking the trouble of weighing
S 3
198 G ALE's RECREATIONs.
them in water, put them into a vessel full of water, one after ano-
ther, and that which drives out most water, must necessarily be
mixed with another metal of less specific gravity than gold, as
taking up more space, though of equal weight.
To find the Burden of a Ship at Sea, or in the River.
It is a certain truth, that a ship will carry a weight equal to
that of a quantity of water of the same bigness with itself; sub-
tracting from it the weight of the iron about the ship, for the
wood is of much the same weight with water; and so, if it were
not for the iron, a ship might sail full of water.
The consequence of this is, that, however a ship be loaded,
it will not sink quite, as long as the weight of its cargo is less
than that of an equal bulk of water: now to know this bulk
or extent, you must measure the capacity or solidity of the
ship, which we here suppose to be 1000 cubical feet, and mul-
tiply that by 73 pounds, the weight of a cubical foot of sea wa-
ſer; for then you have in the product 73,000 pounds for the
weight of a bulk of water equal to that of the ship ; so
that in this example, we may call the burden of the ship
73,000 pounds, or 36 tons and a half, reckoning a ton 2,000
pounds, that being the weight of a ton of sea water; if the
cargo of this ship exceeds 30 tons and a half, she will sink ;
and if her loading is just 73,000 lb. she will swim very deep in
the water upon the very point of sinking; so that she cannot
sail safe and easy, unless her loading be considerably short
of 73,000 pounds weight; if the loading comes near to 73,000
pounds, as being, for example, just 30 tons, she will swim at
sea, but will sink when she comes into the mouth of a fresh
water river; for this water being lighter than sea water will
ise surmounted by the weight of the vessel, especially if that
weight is greater than the weight of an equal bulk of the same
Water.
When two Wessels or Chests are like one another, and of equal
Weight, being filled with different Metals, to distinguish
the one from the other.
This is easily resolved, if we consider that two pieces of
different metals of equal weight in air do not weigh equally
in water, because that of the greatest specific gravity takes
up a lesser space in water; it being a certain truth, that any
metal weighs less in water than in air, by reason of the water,
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 199
the room of which it fills; for example, if the water weighs
a pound, the metal will weigh in that water a pound less than
in the air: this gravitation diminishes more or less according as
the specific gravity of the metal is greater than that of the
Water. -
We will suppose then two chests perſectly like one another,
of equal weight in the air, one of which is full of gold, and
the other of silver; we weigh them in water, and that which
then weighs down the other must needs be the gold chest, the
specific gravity of gold being greater than that of silver, which
makes the gold lose less of its gravitation in water than silver.
We know by experience, that gold loses in water about an
cighteenth part only, whereas silver loses near a tenth part ; so
that if each of the two chests weighs in the air, for example,
180 pounds, the chest that is full of gold will lose in the water
ten pounds of its weight; and the chest that is full of silver
will lose eighteen; that is, the chest full of gold will weigh 170
pounds, and that of silver only 162.
Or, if you will, considering that gold is of a greater specific
gravity than silver, the chest full of gold, though similar and
of equal weight with the other, must needs have a lesser bulk
than the other; and, therefore, if you dip separately each of
them into a vessel full of water, you may conclude that the
chest which expels less water has the lesser bulk, and conse.
quently contains the gold.
To measure the Depth of the Sea.
Tie a great weight to a very long cord, or rope, and let it
fall into the sea till you find it can descend no further, which
will happen when the weight touches the bottom of the sea,
if the quantity or bulk of water, the room of which is taken
up by the weight, and the rope, weighs less than the weight and
rope themselves ; for if they weighed more, the weight would
cease to descend, though it did not touch the bottom of the sea.
Thus one may be deceived in measuring the length of a rope
let down into the water, in order to determine the depth of the
sea; and therefore, to prevent mistakes, you had best tie to the
end of the same rope another weight heavier than the former,
and if this weight does not sink the rope deeper than the other
did, you may rest assured that the length of the rope is the true
depth of the sea; if it does sink the rope deeper, you must tie
Q00 GAL E'S RECREATIONS.
a third weight yet heavier, and so on, till you find two weights
of unequal gravitation that run just the same length of the rope,
upon which you may conclude, that the length of the wet rope
is certainly the same with the depth of the sea.
To make a Deaf Man hear the Sound of a Musical Instrument.
It must be a stringed instrument, with a neck of some length,
as a lute, a guitar, or the like; and before you begin to play,
you must by signs direct the deaf man to take hold with his
teeth of the end of the neck of the instrument; for then if one
strikes the strings with the bow one after another, the sound
will enter the deaf man's mouth, and be conveyed to the or-
gan of hearing through the hole in the palate ; and thus the
cleaf man will hear with a great deal of pleasure the sound of
the instrument, as has been several times experienced; may,
those who are uot deaf may make the experiment upon them-
selves, by stopping their ears so as not to hear the instrument,
and then holding the end of the instrument in their teeth, while
another touches the strings.
To make an Egg enter a Phial without breaking.
*~
Let the neck of a vial be ever so straight, an egg will go into
it without breaking, if it be first steeped in very strong vinegar,
for in process of time the vinegar does so soften it, that the
shell will bend and extend lengthways without breaking ; and
when it is in, cold water thrown upon it will recover its primi-
tive hardness, and, as Cardan says, its primitive figure.
To hold a Glass full of Water with the Mouth down, so that the
Water shall not run out.
Take a glass full of water, cover it with a cup that is a little
hollow, inverting the cup upon the glass; hold the cup firm in
this position with one hand, and the glass with the other; then
with a jerk turn the glass and the cup upside down, and so the
cup will stand upright, and the glass will be inverted, resting
its mouth upon the interior bottom of the cup : this done, you
will find that part of the water contained in the glass will
run out by the void space between the bottom of the
cup, and the brim of the glass; and when that space is
filled, so that the water in it reaches the brim of the glass,
all passage being then denied to the air, so that it cannot
GALE's RECREATIONs. 20 I
enter the glass, nor succeed in the room of the water, the
water remaining in the glass will not fall lower, but continue
suspended in the glass. -
If you would have a little more water descend into the cup,
you must, with a pipe or otherwise, draw the water out of the
cup, to give passage to the air in the glass; upon which, part
of the water will fall into the glass till it has stopped up the
passage of the air afresh, in which case no more will come
down; or, without sucking out the water in the cup, you
may incline the cup and glass so that the water in the cup
shall quit one side of the brim of the glass, and so give passage
to the air, which will then suffer the water in the glass to
descend till the passage is stopped again.
This may likewise be resolved by covering the brim of the
glass that is full of water, with a leaf of strong paper, and then
turn the glass as above ; and without holding your hand any
longer upon the paper, you will find it as it were glued for some
time to the brim of the glass, and during that time the water
will be kept in the glass.
The Mysterious Watch.
You desire any person to lend you his watch, and ask him
if he thinks it will or will not go when it is laid on the table:
if he says it will, you place it over the end of the magnet, and
it will presently stop : you then mark with chalk, or a pencil,
the precise point where you placed the watch, and moving
the position of the magnet, you give the watch to another
person, and desire him to make the experiment, in which he
not succeeding, you give it to a third person, at the same time
replacing the magnet, and he will immediately perform the ex-
periment.
The Magnetic Dial.
Provide a circle of wood or ivory, of about five or six
inches diameter, as Pl. V. Fig. 4. which must turn quite free
on the stand B, in the circular border A : on the circle must
be placed the dial of pasteboard C, whose circumference is
to be divided into twelve equal parts, in which must be in-
scribed the numbers from oile to twelve, as on a common dial:
there must be a small groove in the circular frame A to
receive the pasteboard circle ; and observe that the dial must
J.02 G A LE'S RECREAT 10 N.S.
be made to turn free, that it may go round without moving
the circular border in which it is placed.
Between the pasteboard circle and the bottom of the frame,
place a small artificial magnet E, (Fig. 5.) that has a hole in its
middle, or a small protuberance. On the outside of the frame,
place a small pin P, which serves to shew where the magnetic
needle I, that is placed on a pivot at the centre of the dial, is to
stop : this needle must turn quite free on its pivot, and its two
sides should be in exact equilibrio.
Then provide a small bag that has five or six divisions,
like a lady's work bag, but smaller: in one of these divisions,
put small square pieces of pasteboard, on which are written
the numbers from one to twelve ; and if you please, you may
put several of each number: in each of the other divisions,
you must put twelve or more like pieces, observing that
all the pieces in each division must be marked with the same
number.
Now the needle being placed upon its pivot, and turned
quickly about, it will necessarily stop at that point where the
north end of the magnetic bar is placed ; and which you pre-
viously know by the situation of the small pin in the circular
border.
You therefore present to any person that division of the bag
which contains the several pieces on which is written the number
opposite to the north end of the bar, and tell him to draw any
one of them he pleases; then placing the needle on the pivot,
you turn it quickly about, and it will necessarily stop, as we have
already said, at that particular number.
Another may be made with the same dial, by desiring two
persons to draw, each of them, one number out of two dif-
ferent divisions of the bag, and if their numbers, when added
together, exceed twelve, the needle or index will stop at the
number they exceed it ; but if they do not amount to twelve,
the index will stop at the sum of those two numbers. In order
to perform this, you must place the pin against the number five,
if the two numbers to be drawn from the bag be ten and seven ;
or against nine, if they be seven and two.
If this be made immediately after the former, as it easily may
by dexterously moving the pin, it will appear still the more ex-
traordinary,
G A LE'S RECREATIONs. 20.3
The Intelligent Fly.
At the center of a box about six inches square and one inch
deep (Pl. VI. Fig. 1), place a pivot; have a touched needle L,
three inches and a half long, and at the end of it that is touched
fix a fly made of enamel; the other end of the needle must be
Somewhat heavier to keep it in equilibrio : this needle is to be
placed on the pivot.
On a piece of square pasteboard that will just go into the
box, draw a circle ABCD, three inches and a half diameter;
and another at a small distance, concentric with the former:
the part within the last circle must be cut out: this paste-
board circle is to be placed about half an inch from the bottom
of the box, and divided into ten equal parts, in which are to
be written the letters A, E, I, O, U, D, G, L, N, R, as in the
figure.
Place a glass about half an inch above the circle, and cover
it with a circle of paper C, large enough to hide the needle,
and leave only the fly visible ; on this paper you may paint
some allegoric figures, that its use may not be suspected : you
must next write on 24 cards the following questions: these
cards are to be packed and shuffled, so that they may be in the
order the questions are here placed.
Questions.
1. Which is the land of liberty 2 2. Which is the first city
in the world ! 3. Whom do many men despise, though they
have not half his merit 3 4. Who is the poorest man in the
world ! 5. Who is the meanest of all mankind & 6. For
what do all young women long 7. Who, by station, is the
most miserable of all beings 8. By what does a man discover
his weakness 9. What would every married woman do if
she could 10. In what does a man shew his pride and folly 3
I 1. What makes a woman cry more than the loss of her hus-
band 7 12. How does a man talk who has nothing to say?
13. What most resembles a fine lady ? 14. What frequently
reminds us of a great loss without giving disgust 15. What
makes a young woman in love with an old man 16. What
does the poet want to cover his empty skull? 17. What should
a man never take from the woman he loves * 1 S. What must
that man be who would gain the esteem of all 3 19. Who is
he that seeks a man's company when his money and friends are
304 g ALE's REC R &ATIONs.
all gone? (20. What gains the good will of the physician, the
lawyer, and the harlot 21. What do good men revere and
knaves abuse 3 22. What does a man depend on when he
trusts to his friends for support? 23. What can he be sure of
who leaves his affairs to another ? 24. What makes as great a
difference almost, if not altogether, between this man and that
as between that and a brute?
After you have ranged the cards in the manner beforemen-
tioned, you place them on the table, and ask any person which
of them, in the order they then stand, shall contain the ques-
tion to which the fly shall give him the answer. As he says,
for example, your confederate, who has the following copy of
answers, will make the needle, at the end of which the fly is,
successively point to the letters that compose that word, then
counting the cards over till you come to the 20th, you will find
that word answers the question.
Answers.
1. England. 2. London. 3. A dog. 4. A niggard. 5. A
liar. 6. A ring. 7. A nun. 8. Anger. 9. Rule. 10. A
duel. 1 1. An onion. 12. Loud. 13 An Angel. 14. A
dial. 15. Gold. 16. A laurel. 17. A denial. 18. Gene-
rous. 19. A dunn. 20. A guinea. 21. Religion. 22.
reed. 23. Ruin. 24. Learning.
Many others may be performed by this intelligent fly, by
numbers, cards, &c. similar to those we have already explained,
on other occasions, and which, to avoid the appearance of re-
petition, we shall nothere describe.
To break a Pole or Cylindrical Staff, the extremes of which
shall be laid upon two glasses, without hurting the said glasses.
Take two equal tumblers, or wine glasses, which fill with
water, and place them at such a distance, that the ends of the
staff may just rest upon the edges of the glass; then with ano-
ther staff, strike the one suspended betwixt the two glasses just
in the middle, and the staff, if not very strong, will be broken,
whilst the glasses remain unhurt.
The real Apparition.
Behind the partition AB (Pl. VI. Fig. 2.) place in a po-
sition something oblique, the concave mirror EF, which must
GALE'S RECREATIONS. Q05
iye at least ten inches in diameter, and its distance from the par-
tition equal to three fourths of the distance of its centre.
In the partition, make an opening of seven or eight inches,
either square or circular; it must face the mirror, and be of
the same height with it: behind this partition, place a strong
light, so disposed, that it may not be seen at the opening, and
may illumine an object placed at C, without throwing any
light on the mirror.
Beneath the aperture in the partition, place the object C,
which you intend shall appear on the outside of the partition,
in an inverted position; and which we will suppose to be a
flower: before the partition, and beneath the aperture, place
a little flower pot, D, the top of which should be even with
the bottom of the aperture, that the eye placed at G, may see
the flower in the same position as if its stalk came out of the
pot. -
Take care to paint the space between the back part o
the partition and the mirror, black, to prevent any reflec-
tions of light from being thrown on the mirror; in a word,
so dispose the whole that it may be as little enlightened as
possible.
When a person is placed at the point G, he will perceive
the flower that is behind the partition, at the top of the pot
at D; but on putting out his hand to pluck it, he will find that
he attempts to grasp a shadow.
OBSERVATION.
The phenomena that may be produced by means of con-
cave mirrors are highly curious and astonishing : by their aid,
spectres of various kinds may be exhibited. Suppose, for ex-
ample, you were to tell any one, that at such an hour, and in
such a place, he should see the apparition of an absent or de-
ceased friend (of whose portrait you are in possession); in
order to produce this phantom, instead of the hole in the par-
tition AB, in the last figure, there must be a door, which
opens into an apartment to which there is a considerable
descent; under that door you are to place the portrait, which
must be inverted and strongly illuminated, that it may be
livelily reflected by the mirror, which must be large and well
polished; then having introduced the incredulous spectator
at another door, and placed him in the proper point of view,
T
2O6 *
G ALE's RECREATIONS.
you suddenly throw open the door at AB, when to his grea
astonishment, he will immediately see the apparition of his
friend.
it will objected, perhaps, that this is not a perfect appa-
rition, because it is only visible at one point of view, and by
one person; but it should be remembered, that it was an
established maxim in the last centuries, that a spectre might be
visible to one person, and not to others; so Shakspeare makes
hoth Hamlet and Macbeth see apparitions which were not vi-
sible to others present at the same time : it is not unlikely more-
over that this maxim took its rise from certain apparitions of
this kind that were raised by the monks, to serve some pur-
poses they called religious; as they alone were in possession of
what iittle learning there then was in the world.
There is one phenomenon we must not here omit; for though
it be common enough, it is also pleasing, and easy to be per-
formed : if you place yourself before a concave mirror, and
at a proper distance, your figure will appear inverted, and if
you stretch out your hand towards the mirror, you will per-
ceive another hand that seems to meet and join it, though im-
perceptible to the touch. If instead of your hand, you make
use of a drawn sword, and present it in such manner that its
point may be directed towards the focus of the parallel rays of
the mirror, another Sword will appear, and seem to encounter
that in your hand. You are to observe, that to make this ex-
periment succeed well, you must have a mirror of at least a
foot in diameter, that you may see yourself in part. If you
have a mirror large enough to see your whole person, the il-
lusion will be much more striking. This phenomenon, with
which so much parade has been made by some modern expe-
rimental philosophers, was described by Baptista Porta, more
than 200 years since.
A1 Solar Sonata.
In a large case, such as is used for dials and spring clocks,
the front of which, or at least the lower part of it, must be of
glass, covered on the inside with gauze, let there be placed a
barrel organ, which, when wound up, is prevented from
playing, by a catch that takes a toothed wheel at the end of the
barrel: to one end of this catch, there must be joined a wire,
at the end of which there is a flat circle of cork, of the same
dimensions with the inside of a glass tube, in which it is to
G ALE'S RECREATIONS. 2O7
rise and fall; this tube must communicate with a reservoir
that goes across the front part of the bottom of the case, which
is to be filled with spirits, such as are used in thermometers,
but not coloured, that it may be the better concealed by the
gauze.
This case being placed in the sun, the spirits will be rare-
fied by the heat, and rising in the tube will lift up the catch,
or trigger, and set the organ in play ; which it will continue
to do as long as it is kept in the sun; for the spirits cannot run
out of the tube, and that part of the catch to which the circle is
fixed being prevented from rising beyond a certain point, by a
check placed over it. Care must be taken to remove the ma-
chine out of the sun before the organ runs down, that is, stop-
ping may be evidently effected by the cold.
When the machine is placed against the side of a room on
which the sun shines strong, it may constantly remain in the
same place, if you inclose in it a second case, made of thick
wood, and placed at a little distance from the other. When
you want it to perform, it will only be necessary to throw open
the door of the outer case, and expose it to the sun.
But if the machine be moveable, it will perform in all seasons
by being placed before the fire; and in the winter it will Biore
readily stop when removed into the cold.
A machine of this sort is said to have been invented by Cor-
nelius Dreble, in the last century: what the construction of that
was we know not, but might very likely be more complex,
though it could scarcely answer the intention more readily.
An Azttomatous Harpsichord.
Under the keys of a common harpsichord, let there he
fixed a barrel, something like that in a chamber organ, with
stops or pins corresponding to the tunes you would have it
play: these stops must be moveable, so that the tunes may
be varied at pleasure : from each of the keys, let there go a
wire perpendicularly down ; the ends of these wires must be
turned up for about one fourth of an inch; behind these
wires, let there be an iron bar, to prevent them from going too
far back: now as the barrel turns round, its pins take the
ends of the wires, which pull down the keys, and play the
harpsichord. The barrel and wires are to be all enclosed in a
ÇiğSČ.
‘F 3
208 GAL E'S RECREATIONS.
In the chimney of the same room where the harpsichord
stands, or at least in one adjacent, there must be a smoke jack,
from whence comes down a wire, or cord, that passing behind
the wainscot adjoining the chimney, goes under the floor,
and up one of the legs of the harpsichord into the case, and
round a small wheel fixed on the axis of that first mentioned :
there should be pulleys at different distances behind the wain-
scot and under the floor, to facilitate the motion of the cord.
This machinery may be applied to any other keyed instru-
ment, as well as to chimes, and to many other purposes where a
regular continued motion is required.
An instrument of this sort may be considered as a perpetual
uţotion, according to the common acceptation of the term,
for it will never cease going till the fire be extinguished, or
some parts of the machinery be worn out.
The Nocturnal Reveilleur.
Against the wall of a room, near the ceiling, fix a wheel of 12
or 18 inches diameter: on the rim of which place a number of
bells in tune, and, if you please, of different sizes: to the axis
of this wheel, there should be fixed a fly to regulate its motion;
and round the circumference there must be wound a rope, to
the end of which should be hung a weight.
Near to the wheel, let a stand be fixed, on which is an
upright piece that holds a balance or moveable lever, on one
cind of which rests the weight just mentioned, and to the
other end must hang an inverted hollow cone, or funnel, the
aperture of which is very small; this cone must be gra-
duated on the inside, that the sand put in may answer to the
number of hours it is to run : against the upright piece, on
the side next the cone, there must be fixed a check, to prevent
it from descending: this stand, together with the wheel, may
be enclosed in a case, and so contrived as to be moved from
one room to another with very little trouble.
It is evident from the construction of this machine, that
when a certain quantity of the sand is run out, the weight
will descend, and put the wheel in motion, which motion will
continue till the weight comes to the ground; if the wheel be
required to continne longer in motion, two or more pulleys may
be added, over which the rope may run.
The size of the bells should be adapted to the somniferous
GALE’s RECREATIONS. 209
disposition of the party they are intended to rouse ; or if you
please, a drum or tabor may be added, the stick to which may
be fixed in the side of the room by a swivel that goes through
the middle of it; and one end of it being lifted up by teeth
placed on the circumference of the wheel, the other end will al-
ternately strike the drum. -
To make Water in a Glass seem to boil and sparkle.
Take a glass nearly full of water, or other liquor, and setting
one hand upon the foot of it to hold it fast, turn slightly one
of the fingers of your other hand upon the brim or edge of the
glass (having before privately wet your finger), and so passing
softly on with your finger pressing a little—then the glass will
begin to make a noise—the parts of the glass will sensibly ap-
pear to tremble, with notable rarefaction and condensation—the
water will shake, seem to boil, cast itself out of the glass, and
leap out by small drops, to the great astonishment of the ob-
servers, if they are ignorant of the cause—which is only the
rarefaction of the parts of the glass, occasioned by the motion
and pressure of the finger.
JEND OF THE SECOND PART,
GALE'S RECREATIONs.
INSTRUCTIVE
QUIERIES, IPAIR ADOX ES,
3nagramg, (tt,
PART III.
Parador.
ALL men will readily agree, that no one can transmit
A title to posterity he never enjoyed ; and yet
A certain honourable man, a baronet was born,
Altho' his father ne'er was one !—nor laugh my tale to scorn,
When I affirm the title came by lineal descent;
But strive to reconcile the same, for no deceit is in't.
Answer.
A baronet, living in Westminster city,
Whose father resigning his breath
Before the old grandfather, was (which is pity),
Born after his grandfather's death ;
Who, a baronet being, the infant became
Heir both to his title and pelf,
The minute when born, tho' his father the same
Had never enjoyed himself.
GALE'S RECREATIONS. --- Q J 1
Enigma.
Radics and Gentlemen,
I am come to teh you in plain prose, that I am a very
great poet ; Dactyls and Spondees are familiar to me; many
of the most elegant productions of the age are indebted to me
for no small share of their merit; I smooth their rugged num-
bers, and supply vacancies of wit.
Sometimes I am a fiddler, and consequently somebody of
In Ote.
I open the balls at court, and lead up the ragged regiment
of St. Giles's. Your Giardinis and Geminianis without me
are less significant than the poor blind scraper of Bedlam. I
preside over your concerts, and always make one with the
four-and-twenty.
In physic more renowned than the High German Doctor.
Let stupid dromes study—I practice. Without a word of
Hypocrates, I have done wonders, where the whole stiffrumped
faculty have failed : it stands on record that I have cured
the fever; and for a certain distemper that shall be nameless,
am a most amazing specific.
As a dancing master, I as much excel the red-heeled petit
maitres of the age, as roast beef and plumb pudding are be-
yond soup maigre les grenouilles fricassees, Avaunt ye mi-
nuet-mongers | No more of your coupees and your ballances !
I teach without the clog of rules, and my pupils learn by in-
stinct: I have taken an awkward bumpkin, without a grain
of mercury in him, and led him like a tame bear through all
the modes and attitudes of dancing; thus realizing the poet's
fiction, and making beast dance after me.
Nor do I want activity myself as a dancer : I have hopped
you many a hornpipe and rigadoon upon the tight rope.
I served my time with a sawyer, and there I learned—see-
saw ; my master was desperately enamoured of Miss K–Cripes,
and used me as a spokesman; I managed matters so well with
her, that many's the good time and often I have made the
shut's guts warble again : offering once to salute her with greasy
lips, the nymph was struck speechless at the affront, and my
master in a pet discarded poor Pill Garlic.
Answer.
A FIDDLESTICK.
Q 12 G ALE'S RECREATIONS.
Parador.
One grandfather and two grandsons—one father and his son;
Another with two other sons (so strange their kindred run;)
Two first cousins and two seconds—uncle and nephew dear;
But yet still no more than four men there are included here,
And their surmanies are all the same, ’tis true without all doubt,
Now all that is desired, is to find the paradox out.
Answer.
A had a loving brother named E; \
Who was own father unto master D, tº-
Therefore A's D's own uncle as you see; }
D married B's daughter (we’ll suppose)
From whence B father and D son arose;
Then D (pray mind if I be right), I say,
Must needs be grandson to his uncle A :
But B and D first cousins were before,
Made two grandsons—two second cousins more
Arise when we find that C and D
Are brothers too (by marriage) unto B.
Anagram.
One fam'd physician when transpos'd, a being great will
silew,
Who, when commissioned fr a DOVC, La RéS Cºlle Of Illé]]
Who, wh missioned from above, takes ea f
below.
Answer.
The physician Galen, when transpos'd will shew
That an Angel may guard a poor mortal below.
Parador.
If from six ye take nine, and from nine ye take ten,
Ye wits now the mystery explain,
And if fifty from forty be taken, there then
Shall be just half a dozen remain.
Parador.
Nothing and six, with five hundred when fram’d,
Will tell you a poet in ancient times fam'd.
G ALE’s RECREATIONS, 21 J
Answers.
ff from six ye take nine, and from IX take X,
And from XL take fifty, then Six does remain;
A cypher and VI, with a D, when right fram’d,
Shews the poet's name OVID, in ancient times fam'd.
Query.
Whence arose the custom of Smoaking tobacco in England,
and how long since
Answer.
The custom of smoaking tobacco in England arose about
the year 1585, in the 27th of the reign of Queen Elizabeth:
when one Mr. Ralph Lane, a military man of note, and a
Captain Philip Amides, returned to England from the island
Roanoke, at the mouth of Albemarle Sound. Mr. Lane and
his company brought home some tobacco, the first (Mr. Cam-
den thinks) brought into England. Sir Walter Raleigh, then
in high vogue, and much esteemed by the gay, as well as the
gallant world, soon brought this odoriferous plant into much
esteem; so that many ladies as well as noblemen made no
scruple sometimes to take a pipe, and which the Queen did
not fail to encourage; and, Some say, used it herself.
Query.
Whence arose the custom of frying pancakes on Shrove-
Tuesday, and how long since 3
Answer.
One Simon Eyre, a shoemaker, being chosen lord-mayor
of London, made a pancake feast on Shrove Tuesday for
all the apprentices in London; and from that it became a
CuSt Olm. :
He ordered, that upon ringing of a bell in every parish the
apprentices should leave work, and shut up their shops for that
day; which being ever since yearly observed, is called the
pancake bell ; he made them a large feast of puddings, pies,
and pancakes, and what remained, when all had dined, was
given to the poor: then after, in that year (1446), he built
Łeadenhall.
' ' || |, & ALE'S RECREATIONs.
Query.
Who was the first man that introduced coaches into England,
and how long is it since 2
Answer.
Coaches were first introduced into England in the year
1589, and backney coaches in the year 1693 : the first states-
man that ever set up this equipage was John de Laval de Bois,
Dauphin, who could not travel on horseback on account of his
enormous bulk. Queen Elizabeth, as we find by history, used
to go even to the parliament house on horseback.
Parados.
I have twelve times seen bisscxtile, pray tell how that can be 2
Since twelve times four make forty-eight, and I am but forty
three.
Answer.
If a person be born on the 25th of February, and travel west-
ward the globe about, lie may see twelve bissostile years before
he be completely forty-four years of age, if he was born in a
bissextile year.
Parador.
One and two when they're wrote down fair,
Will make one hundred, I declare.
Answer.
The figure I and 00s will make 100.
Parador.
Take one from nineteen, the remainder you'll see
Is twenty exactly—Pray how can this be 2
Ainswer.
XIX make nineteen, from which take 1, there will remain
XX.
Parador."
Come tell to me what figures three,
When multiplied by four,
GAL E S R ECREATIONS.
J
Q
...”
Make five exact, 'tis truth in fact,
This unto me explore ?
Answer.
In decimals 1.25 is #, which being multiplied by 4, the pro-
duct is 5.
Parador.
The sum of four figures in value will be
Above seven thousand, nine hundred and three ;
But when they are halved, you'll find very fair
The sum will be nothing, in truth to declare.
Answer.
The four figures are 8888, which, by drawing a line through
the middle of the same thus 0000 the sum will be eight 0s or
nothing. 0000
Parador.
Six hundred and sixty so ordered may be,
That if you divide the whole number by three,
The quote will exactly in numbers express
The half of six hundred and sixty, not less.
Answer.
If the tails of the sixes in the said number be reversed, the
sum will be 990, the third of which is 330, equal to half of
600.
Parador.
The sum of nine figures a number will make,
From which, if just fifty you're pleased to take,
One third of that number remains still behind,
This number, young Tyro, be pleased to find.
Answer.
Reverse the figure six, and it will become nine, and write the
figure 3 in the ten's place, which will present 30; to which add
the eight digits, their sum will be 75; from which take 50, re-
mains 25, being the third of 75.
Q 1 & G ALE'S RECREATIONs.
Parador.
Just one pound ten (shillings) will name a man,
His sign likewise, ’tis not the swan :
Come tell this landlord's name and sign,
That John may know to call and dine.
Answer.
The man's name was Mark Noble, who lived at the sign of
the Angel. .
Parador.
A truss of hay, weighing but half a hundred weight in a scale,
weighed two hundred weight stuck upon the end of a fork, car-
ried upon Hodge's shoulder: How could that be?
Answer.
The fork was as the steelyard—Roger's shoulder as the fulcrum
sustaining the burthen between the two powers, acting at both
ends of the fork.
\
Parador.
How can a mechanic file a square hole with a round file, and
fill up an oval hole with a round stopper ?
Answer.
A piece of pliable metal being doubled, by applying a round
file to the double edge, and filing a half square gap, on opening
the metal, a square will appear. Again, if two corners and an
edge, at the end of a miser's iron chest, be filed away, with a
round or any other file, there may be an exact square hole
left. And further, if a cylindrical body being cut obliquely,
the plane of the section will be an oval; and consequently a
round body, situated obliquely in an oval hole, will completely
fill it. -
Query.
Ye lovely fair, the truth declare,
Do blushes more dispense
A mark within of conscious sin
Or spotless innocence,
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 217
Answer.
The rosy cheek more frequently does shine
From innocence than from a sense of crime :
The man who knows no honour knows no shame;
And he that's lost to truth is lost to fame.
A delicacy peculiar to the fair has often been observed
to produce a blush, when impropriety so far prevails as to in-
troduce an immodest subject; and it is no uncommon thing
for a person to blush on being discovered in an error of any
kind; and farther, diffident and very delicate people will blush
when speaking to their superiors, &c. in either case a crime
cannot be implied. On the other hand, observation convinces
us, that the hardened wretch, when before a dispenser of jus-
tice, and indubitably guilty of flagrant crimes, 1. not even
change countenance: hence a blush cannot be considered as
an infallible criterion of either innocence or guilt ; but much
inore frequently the former than the latter.
Query.
Ye lovely fair, who every heart engage,
Whose learn'd productions grace many a page,
Inform me, what is love? that soft regard
Which you create, you only can reward 7
Answer.
Love is a tender fondness, a strong desire,
An ardent wish, an unextinguished fire ;
A longing Soul, a chaste imploring mind,
To share those charms we in another find.
Pythagoras says, “ Love breaketh the brain, but never
“bruiseth the brow; consumeth the heart, but never touches
“the skin; and maketh a deep wound to be felt before any scar
“ be seen.”
An Arithmetical Parador.
In an Arabic manuscript was found this remarkable de-
cision of a dispute: “Two Arabians sat down to dinner;
one had five loaves, the other three; a stranger passing by,
“ desired permission to eat with them; which they agreed to:
"the stranger dined, laid down eight pieces of money, and
t]
218 GA LE's RECREATIONS.
“ departed: the proprietor of the five loaves took up five
“ pieces, and left three for the other, who objected, and
“ insisted for one half: the cause came before Ali (the ma-
“gistrate), who gave the following judgement: let the
‘owner of the five loaves have seven pieces of money; and
“ the owner of the three loaves one."—Query the justice of
this sentence.
«
Answer.
Ali's sentence was just ; for suppose the loaves to be di-
vided each into three equal parts, making twenty-four parts in
all the eight loaves, and each person to eat an equal or eighth
part ; therefore the stranger had seven parts of the person
who contributed five loaves, or fifteen parts, and only one of
him who contributed only three loaves, which make nine
parts.
Query.
Take a cup of cold water, fill’d up to the brim,
Then one after tºother slip ten shillings in ;
When this you've perform’d, I'd have you discover
What is the reason the cup won't run over.
Answer.
It is a natural quality of all dry substances to resist water
in a small degree: hence the top of the cup being supposed
to be dry, the shillings, or any other small thing, being not so
great as to overcome the resistance, and slipped in with a steady
hand, the water will rise above the dry edge, without running
over, till so many are put in as to cause the weight of tile
heaped up part to overcome the repulsion of the dry edge.
The truth of this proposition may be proved various ways,
but by none more simply and easily than by dipping your finger
in the water and wetting the edge of the cup with it, upon
which all the water which is above the rim of the cup will
I'll ll OVCIT.
A Parador.
Mathematicians affirm, that of all bodies contained under
the same superficies, a sphere is the most capacious ; but
surely they have never considered the amazing capaciousness
of a body whose name is now required, and of which it may
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 210
be thuly affirmed, that supposing it's greatest length nine inches,
altest breadth four inches, and greatest depth three inches,
under these dimensions it contains a solid foot,
Answer,
A SHOE.
Query.
Which is more free of cares and strife,
A married or a single life
Answer.
Celibacy, on the one hand, is free from the contentions of
jarring couples; and on the other, utterly insensible of
those endearing faculties which are the frequent attendants on
a happy pair.
'Tis without doubt a single life
Must be most free from cares and strife.
Query.
Modesty and bashfulness are often spoken of indiscrimi-
nately. What is their distinction ?
Answer.
Modesty is an emblem of chastity and humility, and is
very becoming : it is decent without being forward, and can
assume a modest assurance without diffidence ; whereas bash-
fulness is childish and rustic, awkward and unbecoming ; and
is nostly caused by fear, or diffidence, or the want of keeping
company.
Query.
Ingenious nymphs, if e'er you wish to share
The joys connubial, and desire to wear
The pledge of love, its origin declare;
Say from what motive first the custom sprung,
And why on the fourth finger always hung.
Answer.
The custom was introduced by the ancients, who used to
present their mistresses with a ring, meaning thereby to express,
as a ring has no end, so there should be no end of that love




220 U ALE'S RECREATIONS.
which is necessary to constitute connubial felicity; and it was
put upon the fourth finger of the left hand, because anatomists
affirm, that there is a vein in it having a direct conveyance to
the heart, which is the source of love and affection.
Query. \
What system of philosophy gives the most convincing and
demonstrative proof of the immortality of man 7 }
Answer. *-
*
It may be said, without incurring the imputation of
atheism, that no system of plailosophy gives us either convincing |
or demonstrative proofs of the immortality of man; perhaps
metaphysics bid fairest to answer the conditions of the query;
inferences may be drawn from anatomy, and even from
botany ; but every argument drawn from philosophy seems to
be weak; and it is from inspiration only that we have con.
‘vincing proofs of the immortality of man.
Query.
The origin of Valentines declare,
From what it sprang, from wholiſ, and when, and where.
Answer.
It is supposed that the origin of Valentines was from one
Valentine, a priest, who lived in the third century, and who,
upon his being disappointed of a bishopric, forsook the chris-
tian faith: he published that there were thirty gods and
goddesses, fifteen of each sex, whom he called aones crages, and
taught, that our Saviour, like another Pandora, sprung from
their correspondences, and farther affirmed, that he passed
through the Virgin Mary with a body he brought out of
Heaven, as through a pipe or conduit, and that all men should
not rise again: his followers, who were unmarried, usually met
together on the 14th of February each year, and each chose
one of the opposite sex, who were to instruct and advise each
other on religious and other affairs during the following year.
But some persons are of opinion, that it had its origin from
the observation of the birds, who choose their mates about this
time of the year.
GALE’s RECREATIONS: . 221
Query.
Fequired an explanation of all the letters on a Guinea.
Answer.
The inscription on a Guinea runs thus:
GEORGIUS III. DEI GRATIA, M. B. F. ET. H. REX,
F. D. B., ETLDSR. I. A. T. ET. E.
That is, Georgius Tertius, Dei Gratia, Magna Britanniae,
Franciae et Hiberniae Rex, Fidii Defensor, Brunswicii et
Lunenburgi Dux, Sacri Romani Imperii Archi-Thesaurarius
et Elector. -
In English.
George the 3d, by the Grace of God, King of Great
Britain, France and Ireland, Defender of the Faith, Duke of
Brunswick and Lunenburgh, Arch Treasurer and Elector of
the Holy Roman Empire.
Parador.
I'm neither man, beast, fish, nor bird,
Insect nor reptile none;
Yet live and breathe, tho' (on my word)
My origin was bone:
As soon as you have found my name,
All doubt will disappear;
Then fail not to reveal the same
Unto us without fear.
Answer.
The bone that's meant, if right I hit,
Has often tried men's sharpest wit;
Since with woe from man's side it came,
Woman therefore is its name.
Parador.
I was to-morrow, but am not to-day;
Yet shall be two days past: my name display.
Answer.
Yesterday's past, which once was call'd to-morrow ;
This some perhaps do find unto their sorrow.
.* G ALE’s RECREATIONS
Parador.
Fam’d arborist, display your pow'r,
And shew how I may plant a bow'r
With verdant fir and yew ;
Twelve trees of each I’d fain dispose,
And only eight and twenty rows,
Four trees in each to view.
Answer.
First make a circle, (Plate VI. fig. 3.) which divide into
eight equal parts, and inscribe two geometric Squares, in each
of which draw two diagonals; then draw the lines A B, A C,
& c. from all the angles of both the squares ; after which draw
the parallels, as per figure, and it will answer the conditions of
the problem.
Query.
By what motive is a lady who has several admirers, induced
to place her affections on that man who is the least anxious to
obtain her favour, and disregard him, the disinterestedness and
ardency of whose passion is conspicuous in every part of his
conduct, when from the former nothing but coldness and
indifference, if not an aversion to her, is to be expected after
the marriage-knot is tied ; but from the latter the most affec-
tionate, endearing and inclulgent tenderness, on every emer-
gency, to the latest period of life 2
Answer.
A man who has a real esteem for a lady approaches her
with fear and diffidence, which appears in his whole behaviour:
this, though the greatest proof of real esteem”, the lady, from
a thoughtless gaiety, despises; for whilst a man is indif-
ferent about obliging a lady, he can behave with ease and gaiety
(I might add with assurance); this being more adapted to the
gay disposition of a lady, she is taken with it : the ladies are
certainly more apt to be governed by their own airy inclina-
tions than by their better jydgments.
* “Every passion but fond love
“ Unto its own redress will move ;
“ But that alone the wretch inclines
“To what prevents his own designs;
'G ALE’s RECREATIONS. 223
vº.
{
Makes him lament, and sigh and weep
Disorder'd, tremble, fawn and creep;
Tortures which render him despis'd
Where he endeavours to be priz'd.”
&
*
{ {
& 4
Query.
Why do the generality of mankind incline more to inebri-
ety than sobriety 2
Answer.
All mankind, at some time or other, are involved in care
and trouble; and as drinking plentifully is thought by many to
be an antidote against it, man seizes, with too much eagerness,
the much-loved habit, and frequently custom draws him on
more to inebriety than sobriety.
Query.
Why is every hangman call'd Jack Ketch 3
Answer.
Probably from the dog Harpalus (in English catch or ketch,
as vulgarly written) mentioned by Ovid, and Jack, a word of
derision.
Query.
Why may news be said to be the true and genuine food of
the mind 7
Answer.
That every thing novel pleases the mind, we allow, even
though it is in itself tragical ; variety is also found to be plea-
sing; news is variety, and consequently may be said to be the
genuine food of the soul.
Query.
Which is supremest in woe, a king without the love of
his subjects, or subjects without the love or favour of their
king?
Answer.
When that reciprocal love and affection is broken which
ought to subsist between the prince and people, it is indeed
224 GALE's RECREATIONS.
very difficult to point out which is in the worst state: the
one is filled with fears and apprehensions, and the other is full
of doubt and anxiety. The prince who considers himself as the
common father of his people must undoubtedly wear a crown
of thorns, if his subjects prove froward and disobedient chil-
dren, and therefore will strive to hold their hearts in his bosom ;
but when that fatherly affection is lost, what are the subjects
but wretched orphans, void of the protection they had a right
to expect? They wander up and down despairing and de-
spised, without power of redress.or hope of enjoyment. Oh!
wretched state of both ! But, oh, how blest the state when
kings are served through love, unawed by fear; it is hard to
say however which is the severest state, but I humbly imagine
the subject must be the supremest in woe.
Query.
Tell me, ye sons of freedom, what must be
The only thing to make us all agree.
Answer.
Ye sons of freedom sure must be,
The only thing to make us all agree.
Query.
Whether is love or hatred most prejudicial 3.
Answer.
If taken in a scriptural sense, hatred must certainly be most
prejudicial; but taken politically, love may sometimes be pro-
ductive of more prejudice than hatred.
Query.
Whether is the miser or the spendthrift the greatest enemy
to themselves, and the most hurtful to public society.
Answer.
The injury sustained by a spendthrift is generally confined to
a few individuals; but the miser is superlatively wretchel, be-
ing a professed enemy to God, his neighbour, and himself.
GALE's RECREATIONs. 225
Parador.
When life and breath forsake a body, what doth that body
stand in need of?
Answer.
Both life and breath, when you were born,
Did from your mother go;
"Twas nourishment you needed then,
That you and I both know.
Parador.
One day I saw the sun arise,
I'm sure I saw him set likewise;
But, wonderful! that day,
I vouch again he rose, and 'gain
Beneath the horizon went: explain
How this could be, I pray.
Answer.
In leap year, by statute law,
The intercal'ry day,
And that preceding, reckon'd are
To be but one; I'll lay
A bet, this will the paradox
Sufficiently explain,
For the sun in such a day doth rise,
Set, rise, and set again.
Parador.
Our neighbour Randle's loving wife
Has brought him at one birth,
Three goats and six calves, all with life,
Strange wonder here on earth
Is come to pass! dear people, say
How this could be 2–make no delay.
Answer.
Without stretch of wit,
I have readily hit,
Por Goat sure her name must display
2
2
Ö
G ALE'S RECREATIONS.
If the children were three,
Six legs there must be,
Six calves to those legs must convey.
Query.
As water is a thin fluid, what is the reason that vessels will
contain it that will not contain the thick syrup of sugar,
treacle, &c'.
Answer.
The very small particles of water by capillary attraction
penetrating into the pores of the wood, and there expanding
closely the chinks, they contain the water; but the thick syrup
of treacle, sugar, &c. not entering the pores of wood, con-
sequently does not close the chinks; therefore the vessel will
not contain them.
Query.
There are two letters in the alphabet which always go
together and are never parted; which are they 3
Answer.
Who can miss of the query, but solve it that tries,
When the letters Q U are so plain to their eyes.
Parador.
You may say what you will of a true bosom friend,
If ever it is in their power,
At the risk of their lives, they mischief intend,
And are seeking it every hour.
Answer.
The blessing how great, when possessed of a friend
Who for us his life will expose,
To baffle the schemes our en’mies intend,
And mischief brings on to our foes.
Parador.
Tho' perhaps you'll deny it, it's true I assure you,
Most women are quietest when in a fury.
G ALE's RECREATIONs. 23.
7
Answer.
When in a passion women fly,
And strive to gain the victory;
If overcome, revenge is sought,
In female breasts a dreadful thought?
Unto their chamber they repair,
Their looks, their anger to declare;
In silence then they sit and cry,
Till their revenge they satisfy.
Parador.
A paradox I've made this morn,
My subject is quite new,
I dy’d before that I was born,
Gents, how can this be true :
Answer.
I puzzled was, but found this morn,
That Eve was made, but never born.
Query.
How many kings have been crowned in England since the
Conquest ?
Answer.
James the first was made a muckle king
Of Caledonia's shore ;
The only king in England crown'd
That was a king before.
Query.
Why will the sun be longer in burning white cloth, paper,
&c. with a mirror than any other colour !
Answer.
It is because white bodies have the property of reflecting all
the rays of light, and therefore do not admit the sun to have
such power on them as other colours; for other colours
(black especially) are known to absorb the rays of light; and
therefore the sun has a greater power to destroy them.
228 GALE's RECREATIONs.
Query.
How can number 45 be divided into four such parts, that
if to the first part you add two, from the second part you sub-
tract two, the third part you multiply by two, and the fourth
part you divide by two, that the sum of the addition, the re-
mainder of the subtraction, the product of the multiplication,
and the quotient of the division, be all equal 3
Answer.
The first is 8, to which add two, the sum is 10
2d—12, subtract 2, remainder is - 10
3d— 5, multiplied by 2, product is 10
4th–20, divided by 2, quotient is - 10
45
Query.
Whether is the man of bad morals and great resolution,
or the worthy virtuous man, most fit to rule 2
Answer.
Though the man of bad morals and great resolution may
possibly do some great and good actions, yet his sphere of ac-
tion being unlimited, it is probable he may do many vile and
sinful ones, and such as may prove a snare to both the ruler
and the ruled ; on the contrary, the man whose actions are
bounded by virtue, moves on steadily and uniformly ; his ac-
tions are such as bring honor to himself and happiness to those
winder him ; the worthy virtuous man is therefore most fit to
rule.
Query.
What did money first purchase ?
Answer.
The cave of Machpelah, for a burying place for Sarah, was
the first purchase with money that history informs us of. See
Genesis, chap. 23.
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 229
Parador.
Dear people, my father did lay up for me,
On the day of my birth, just pounds twenty-three:
On each birth-day since for me has lain by,
Twenty-three pounds, or that sum very nigh,
Until I arrive at the age twenty-one,
My fortune's so odd you'll scarce think upon;
When I tell you it comes to the sum as below,"
No more nor no less, how it is pray show.
Answer.
By what is propos'd, Sir, it plainly appears,
That your birth-day arrives only once in four years.
Parador.
I'm no algebraist, but this I do know,
That three eights put together make just twenty-two.
Answer.
Take three eights of the numbert that's given below,
And the quotient you'll find to be just twenty-two.
Query. -
What is the reason that ladies of fashion and quality
prefer winter (the most unpleasant season of the year) before
summer, and why do they dread the approach of the latter
more than the former ?
Answer.
The summer sun, I'm much afraid,
Doth spoil the beauty of the maid;
But winter's cold she needs not fear,
I think this makes the matter clear.
Query.
Will a voluntary submission to temporal punishment make
any atonement for the sin 3 w
* 138 Pounds.
+ 59 two-thirds
X
23() GALE’s RECREATIONS.
Answer.
The bare act of a voluntary submission to to mporal pu-
nishment will not be alone sufficient to atone for the sin; sin-
ere repentance through the atonement of Christ being abso-
lutely necessary for that great purpose.
Query.
What is the cause of those places on fields and commons
of a circular form, vulgarly called the rings of the fairies 2
Answer.
They are generally supposed to proceed from lightning;
the second circle arising from the grass growing more pleu-
tifully where the first grass was burnt up, &c.
Query.
At what time of the year are most cavities open?
Answer.
As soon as harvest is cropt is the time of the year
Most cavities are open, I'll make them appear ;
And if I guess right, and right can remember,
It must be near the end of the mouth September.
Query.
“ Is there not an appointed time to man upon earth '
J O B.
Answer.
The infinite power of the All-wise Creator has fixed, and does
undoubtedly fix, an appointed time for every being of the
diviſie species here on earth : nothing can remain a secret to
him, as the holy Job justly intimates, that there was an ap-
pointed time for him to suffer his afflictions, till called to the
heavenly mansions of eternity.
Query.
Why was the human, and other animal species, created
with two ears and but one tongue?
G ALE’s H E CREATIONS. 231
Answer.
The human, and other animal species, were created with
two ears, that various and opposite sounds should not lose their
stroke or effect : whereas iſ each animal had been furnished
but with one ear, the sounds propagated on the contrary side
of the head would have failed in their effect; dangers armong
all could not so well have been avoided, or other notice so
distinctly conveyed; and music and conversation among the
human kind had fallen short of their present power to delight
and instruct : one tongue is suſlicient to act in obedience to
all the organs of scusatiºn and reflection from the human
species to the brute, and to aid the convey auce of the food of
til animals into the stolnach.
\lankind may infer from their having two ears and but
one tongue, that they should hear inore than they speak.
Query.
Mr. Woolaston says, in his Religion of Nature Delineated,
that all persons living beyond their circumstances at the
expeace of others live a lie: who are those in every state
that live, indulge, and thrive by more palpable imposition :
Answer.
Permicious petty-foggers in a motion, who live by the
plunder of mankind, in stirring up strife, indulge and thrive
by palpable imposition ; and those who live beyond their
lstances, running in debt to support ambition and vanity.
ºngy they are not, and never





232 G ALE’s RECREATIONs.
regular Clergy as among the laity. We are told by attested
revelation, that the Great Creator (whose Word is Truth) has
enjoined our faith to assent to things above our comprehension,
with an intent that, where our reason fails, faith should assist
us in our duties to himself and man; for men may be strictly
moral towards each other by the use of reason, while they re-
main vicious in themselves, by acknowledging no duty to their
Maker; but faith lifts the mind to God, and influences the
thoughts and passions to habits suitable for divine contempla-
tion. Hope (a friend to all, and without which all men would
be miserable) is likewise increased by faith more than by reason
or morality; so that our reason is thus usefully and beneficially
subservient to faith in what we ought to believe with respect
to God and Providence. Faith, not grounded on reason, is su-
perstition, which however, in many different modes, may be
innocent and useful, while it serves to bind the will and the
passions, and direct the mind to God.
Mr. John Cotton, reflecting on the greatness of the Creator,
and his secrets of Providence, to the latter part of this query,
speaks of man's frailty and faith as follows:
God's Acts which are to be—shall human flesh descry?
Or shall proud dust pretend his will to prophecy?
We may prognosticate, as far as fancy roves,
The just in faith shall be bless'd, as the margin proves”.
All shall converted be into the faith of Christ +,
Free from Idolatry—me'er mind the Popish priest t.
Let us hold fast our faith, Death w' ºr it will my c. .




G ALE’s RECREATIONS. 235
The quantity of duration perceived by each being is ac-
cording to the swiftness or slowness of its successions perceived
(i. e. according to the number of successive perceptions), where-
by a superior Being, having as many successions in a day, as
any man has during his whole life, may be said to live that
man's life in a day; and hence men of quick parts and pene-
tration may be said to live more than men of dull faculties in
the same time. And by the same rule, the life-time of a man
is indefinitely greater than the life of a reptile, &c.
Dwelling on a subject of entertainment, by which the at-
tention is diverted from observing succession, makes time ap-
pear shorter than it really is; as does forgetfulness of what is
past. On the other hand, by every moment of succession
counted, when we endure pain, time then appears longer than
it is ; so that an age of pleasure is not so long as a few years of
pain, with respect to the beings that enjoy and suffer them.
The Fternal Now, so called by some authors as the pro-
perty of the Divine Perception, is as incomprehensible as time
without beginning, or as the attribute assigned the Divine Being,
of doing any thing, when it is evident he cannot destroy him-
self, nor yet the succession of time. If time were to be no
more, according to the customary phrase, no thinking being
could them exist, nor time be perceived. Moreover if God
perceives all that ever was, or will be, in one vast idea, as pre-
sent, yet we cannot truly affirm, that he actually saw Christ
upon earth till he caume ; and therefore he must see by suc-
cession through the whole course of nature, though infinitely
superior to the ways of human perception.
Query.
Whether it would not be vastly serviceble to this king-
dom in general to have public registers of debts erected in
every county, as well as in Middlesex, and one part of York-
shire And whether courts for the recovery of small debts
should not likewise become general, as well as in London
and Middlesex, to prevent the imposition of tricking petty-
foggers, bailiffs, and their followers.
Answer.
Public registers of debts in every county would prevent
fraud and extravagance, and inculcate the principles of
honesty and good oeconomy amongst us, as well as put an end
Q36 G ALE’s RECREATIONS.
to the pernicious practice of double and treble mortgages on
the same lands; and guard against lending money on bad
security.
Incumbrances upon most considerable estates in this king-
dom being already known, the discovery thereof can be no
objection to the passing an act for registering debts in every
county, as it would promote the welfare and tranquillity of
the nation; while other political courts of Europe are endea-
vouring to reduce the number of their lawyers, and retrench
their exorbitant fees.
If courts for the recovery of small debts were general, they
would be of universal advantage by their easy expence, speedy
issue, and security of the plaintiff's money not being paid
into the hands of such (vermin of the law, and enemies to
justice and mankind) as commonly withhold the best part
of it.
Query.
How is the scripture doctrine of smiting one cheek, and
turning the other, and giving your cloak to him who takes
vour coat, to be reconciled with the conduct of the Right
Reverend and Reverend Teachers of the age, so tenacious of
their own property, and ready to resent injuries 7 Aud why
should not precept be preferred to example :
Answer.
This doctrine of smiting one cheek, and turning the other
also, was probably first taught in the infancy of christianity, to
propagate the Gospel, and the principles of patience and for-
bearance, among individuals; at a time when converts were
few, and when resentment would have heightened their pu-
nishment from their powerful persecutors; for it never was a
doctrine betwixt different mations, repelling force by force;
and to reconcile this doctrine with the general conduct of the
christian part of the same nations at this day seems to be as
difficult as it would be to prevail with respective individuals,
or those under different governments, to unite in the same
form of worship. If what Mr. Dryden observes be true,
The Priests of all Religions are the same.
We shall find that the teachers are more revengeful and re-
fractory than their hearers. An instance of which appears in
GALE’s RECREATIONS. 237
the news from Paris of the 5th of January, 1750-51. N. S.
A few days ago, an extraordinary council was held at Versailles
on the affairs of the clergy, many of whom shew a perverse
spirit, and insist upon principles and sacred immunities, and
talk as though they were ordained to draw the wealth of the
nation to themselves, and contribute nothing towards its ex-
pence. This is a specimen of the submissive behaviour of the
Catholic priesthood, who, in this point, I confess, outdo those
of our country; for though mo persons living are more te-
nacious of their own private property than the Protestant
clergy, yet they never scruple to pay their proportion of taxes
to the public; and however harsh this text may sound in an
age of rapine and plunder, where property seems so precarious,
the doctrine before us of smiting one cheek, and turning the
other also, was certainly well calculated for the peace and wel-
fare of society in government; and to prevent petty quarrels,
and religious controversies about trifles.
And where example is so rare, the precept should be pre-
ferred as far as it will bear.
Query.
Which of these tradesmen, a Bookseller, Print-seller,
Printer, Copper-Plate Printer, or Publisher, have the most
honesty''
Answer.
Though the employments of Letter-Printer, Bookseller,
Publisher, Plate-Printer, and Print-Seller differ, yet they are
members of the same body, and consequently are possessed in
some degree of the same principles, subject to the same temp-
tations, and tainted with the same crimes: by comparing their
respective artifices, the reader will the better judge of the truth
and justice of our decision with respect to their several in-
tegrities.
The Letter-Printer, originally, had an undoubted title to
the free exercise of all the five branches of business, but as the
number of hands increased, and trade grew more extensive,
they came to be divided into their present different classes:
the Letter-Printer was reduced to a state of dependency, whose
situation with the bookseller is like the Bailiffs with the Petty-
fogger: they must keep their master's secrets, be accessary to
their frauds, and submit to their will and pleasure, or else starve.
23S GAL E'S RECREATIONS.
Self-interest, as well as self-preservation, is implanted in ont
natures, and if one will not do dirty work for gain, another
will.
The Plate Printer has two masters to serve, the Bookseller
and Printseller, who can hardly be supposed to serve both with
integrity. We might as well expect he should be able to serve
God and Mammon at the same time.
The Bookseller and Printseller are the grand corruptors,
who communicate the infection through the whole tribe:
these are wilfully fraudulent; whereas the others are only by
compulsion.
The Bookseller preys upon Authors, as the Printseller does
upon Engravers, whom they pursue as the Dolphins do the
Flying-Fish, either instantly to devour, or to drive them aloft,
that they may drop into their mouths; for if any Author
refuses the price offered him for his copy, he is sure to have his
work run down by the whole society: if, to secure his pro-
perty, he hazards the printing and publishing his own perfor-
mance, the sale of it is prevented ; for such book being sent for
out of the country, all orders are returned ignoramus, and a
jury summoned thereupon to suppress it : they pretend to a
vast fund of learning, but on enquiry you will find if all su-
perficial, consisting in Title Pages; and they generally keep
some poor pedant under their thumb, through whose eyes they
see, and by whose judgement they are determined.
The Printers are the tools they work their wonders withal,
without whom they can perform nothing : into these they
early inculcate the doctrine laid down in the parable of the un-
just steward, and for every hundred sheets they work off, bid
them set down quickly and write fifty; then commend their in-
tegrity, and say they have done wisely. In short, it is hard to
find such a ruling thing as conscience among the fraternity.
All moral duties must truckle under to interest; nor will they
make any scruple of invading the property of a stranger, of a
neighbour, or even their own brethren.
The Publisher is a sort of Bookseller in miniature, but
guilty of far greater extortion: he neither, advances any
money, nor runs the least hazard, and yet is hardly satisfied
with 30l. per cent. per month for vending another's property.
Upon the whole, as we are not able to discover the least
tincture of any one virtue in above one out of twenty Book-
sellers, Printsellers, Letter-Printers, Plate-Printers, and Pub-
GALE’s RECREAT 10 NS 230
lishers, the small share of common honesty to be found in more
than that number, we assign to the Letter-Printers.
N. B. The foregoing is not intended to reflect upon any
of the worthy gentlemen in trade, whom we know to be men
of integrity.
Query.
Whether British authors in general should not seek out
foreign patrons to accept their Dedications, seeing their en-
deavours to promote useful knowledge meet with no encou-
ragement at home !
Answer.
As prudence directs every artificer to send his manufacture
to the best market, I think no author should hesitate a moment
about dedicating his labours to any foreign Maecenas (whether
commoner, peer, prince, or potentate), from whom he has
reason to expect the most cncouragement or reward, whether
he resides in Europe, Asia, Africa, or America.
In the 188th Spectator, it is observed, “That nothing can
occur more monstrous than to see persons of ingenuity ad-
dress their services and performances to men no way addicted
to liberal arts; in which cases, the praise on one hand, and the
patronage on the other, are equally the objects of ridicule.
Dedications to ignorant men are as absurd as any of the
speeches of Bulfinch in the Droll; such an address one is apt
to translate into other words; and when the different parties
are thoroughly considered, the panegyric generally implies no
more than if the author should say to the patron—My very
good lord, you and I can never understand one another, there-
fore I humbly desire we may be intimate friends for the future.
The rich may as well ask to borrow of the poor as the
man of virtue and merit bope for addition to his character
from any but such as himself. He that commends another
engages so much of his own reputation as he gives to that
person commended; and he that has nothing laudable in him-
self is not in ability to be such a surety. The wise Phocion
was so sensible how dangerous it was to be touched with what
the multitude approved, that, upon a general acclamation made
when he was making an oration, he turned to an intelligent
friend that stood near him, and asked, in a surprised manner,
“What slip have I made t”
240 GALE’s RECREATIons.
*
Query.
Would not the licensing of public brothel-houses in Bri.
tain, as well as in other christian countries, be of advantage to
the public, and prevent diseases, rapes, robberies, murders,
and the ruin of many families 2 And whether it would hurt the
Protestant religion more than the Catholic?
Answer.
Public stews permitted in this nation would doubtless be
of service to the government by the revenue arising therefrom,
and would be a means of bringing more subjects into life, and
of preventing the dismal effects of many lewd pernicious prac-
tices; and though they might be looked upon as novel
schemes for the encouragement of debauchery, and destructive
of the Protestant religion (because not habitual as among the
Catholics), yet, if considered under their train of advantages,
superior to the disadvantages attending their toleration, they
are preferable to the present practices, by as much as regulated
vice or passion is superior to a state of abandoned outrage;
farther considering that human infirmities do not admit of a per-
fect cure.
Query.
As in a married state a man is obliged by the law to lay in
prison for debts contracted by his wife without his knowledge
and consent, is it not fit he should have power to imprison her
for his own security, being not able to raise money on a join-
ture but by her own consent And how is matrimony in this
case consistent with reason and equity 2
Answer.
It might be thought incredible for any woman to suffer her
husband to starve in prison, and her children to live in a state
of servility, when it is in her power to prevent both, had we
not daily instances of such barbarity; and when the wife is
the aggressor, and the husband blameless, as it sometimes hap-
pens, the barbarity is still more shocking; and wherein our
laws are greatly defective in not providing a remedy. And a
man's confinement in prison can answer no other end than to
gratify the spleen or revenge of his creditors, who are some-
times his seducers, in hopes of gaining profit by his ruin,
G ALE’s RECREATIONS. * *
reason and equity call aloud for a restraint upon the wife in
cases of jointure, and running her husband in debt: the
marriage institution is not herein blameable; but the evils
attending marriage settlements made previous to the marriage
itself. -
Whenever an unreasonable jointure is made on a moderate
estate, and three or four children happen to be provided for,
experience shews, that such lands are commonly alienated in
the second generation; and I have often wondered, that no
better expedient could be found out for paying insolvents'
debts than by loss of liberty.
Query.
What would have been the religion of the late Archbishop
Tillotson, if he had been born and lived a few years at
Pekin in China, and the rest of his days at Constantinople
in Europe? And which has the best title to salvation, the Jew,
Mahometan, Pagan, Papist, Methodist, Muggletonian, Lu-
theran, Calvinist, Quaker, Presbyterian, Independent, Ana-
baptist, or the followers of the pious Mr. Henly 3
Answer.
Had the great prelate, spoken of, been born at Pekin in
China, and continued there during his minority, doubtless he
would have imbibed the Pagan principles; for the prejudice
of education being so strong, made the Heathen poet observe,
Quo semelest imbota recens servabit odorem
Testa dit).
After which, Mahomet would have worked no more effect
upon him in Turkey than if he had gone from England to
reside there, at the same age, for the rest of his life.
As no religion can entitle a man to salvation but by the
right use of it, men may miscarry by all religions, and therein
one religion not have preference to another, as some cannot
be happy living under any government; but if we compare
religions to governments, by which they are supported for
ends of happiness, we shall find that the reformed christian
religion is as preferable to other religions, as the christian
government supporting it, is preferable to all others. As to
Mr. Orator Henly's piety, it is equivalent to that of his cog-
stant hearers, of a piece with his modesty and truth.
| Y
2.42 G ALE’s RECREATIONs.
Query.
If to Appollo's smiles you've just pretence,
And claim from him your boasted influence,
O tell a doubtful and enquiring fair,
The reason why her sex so open are 2
Why secrets in their breasts no safety find
And why their vows are fleeting as the wind 2
Answer.
Your outward beauties inward thoughts betray,
As men thro' curtains see the breaking day;
But sure, you sometimes keep the vows you make,
And men accuse you by a gross mistake:
Your faults are doubled by your being fair,
White cloth shews spots much larger than they are,
And flaws most deep in brightest gems appear.
Query.
Why are the blacks in Guinea woolly-headed, and with
flat noses, when they are not so in other places !
Answer.
First, in answer to that, why the blacks in Guinea are
woolly-headed ? It is fit to observe, that by the help of the mi-
croscope, it has been found that hair and wool differ only in
bigness, being otherwise made up quite after the same manner,
and every single hair consisting of several other smaller, wrap-
ped up as it were in bark, and that the number of these
minute hairs in wool is less than it is in what we properly call
hair : it remains then only to find out some reason why the
hair of blacks does consist of a less number of these minute
hails than that of other nations, and it may very well be sup-
posed, that this difference proceeds from the smallness of the
pores of the skin, out of which they are bred and receive their
increase. * ...,
Second, as to the flatness of their noses, if they come so
into the world, it may easily be accounted for, by the likeness
we see generally children bear to their parents; but I should
rather be induced to believe, that it being reckoned a piece
of beauty amongst them, they artificially form themselves into
that shape, and that may easily be done in new born infants,
G ALE's RECREATIONS. £43
since what we call the bridge of the nose is then only of a car-
tilaginous, or soft gristly substance.
Query.
You merry sons of god Apollo,
Who this responding bus'ness follow,
And can resolve in such a trice,
Our question's difficult and nice;
Pray tell me what you do opine
Of that same sprite, or thing divine,
Which did in danger often give
Old Socrates a tug by the sleeve 7
And why the daemon did not twitch,
When he espous’d that bitter b–h 2
Answer.
Ingenious Sir, we must confess,
We like your humour and address;
Therefore, without design to flatter,
We'll tell you what we think o' the matter:
That daemon, sprite, or what you please,
Which was so kind to Socrates,
Was wisdom, and right reason join'd,
Which gave sound dictates to his mind:
These only fail'd him when he chose
That fiend Zantippe for his spouse;
Which shews, if matches are the care
Of Heaven, the sage no fiend had there.
Query.
Supposing I have a challenge sent me to fight, and I am
unwilling to do it, since it is against the laws of God and man,
how shall I behave myself so as to save my honour?
. Inswer.
Antiquity presents us with a memorable passage concern-
ing two soldiers in Caesar's army, who, upon a very hot con-
tention, agreed upon this expedient to decide the quarrel,
namely, vigorously to attack the common enemy, and vindicate
their own by their country's honour: the resolution taken,
one of them assaulted the thickest squadrons, and had like to
have saved his reputation at the expence of his liberty; but
Y 2 -
244 G ALE'S RECREATIONs.
the other reviewing the danger of his antagonist, flew after
him with a generous emulation, bravely rescued him from his
surrounding foes, and gloriously overthrew him by a preven-
tion of his overthrow. Apollo is a strange admirer of such
genuine bravery, and therefore pressingly recommends so noble
an experiment.
Query.
Since you are mathematical, and resolve cases belonging to
chance, you will oblige me to let me know whether there is
any odds in playing at even or odd; if there is any, it seems
very odd to me.
Answer.
Though you seem merrily disposed, and to have sent this
question for the sake of a pun, yet there is more in it than
perhaps you imagine, for the greatest number of pieces that
you can grasp, is either an even number or an odd one ; if it
is an even number, then in this number, and all the numbers
inferior to it, there is as many even numbers as odd ones, and
therefore it is equal which is taken ; if the greatest number of
pieces you can grasp is odd, then there is advantage in guessing
odd : for in an odd number, and the inferiors to it, there is
one odd number more than there are even ones; and therefore,
upon the whole, there is an advantage in taking odd preferably
to even. We do not know whether this reason can convince
you, but whether it does or no, we may assure you (to return
pun for pun) that it is even so.
Query.
Why is it that so very few are qualified with just and sub-
lime motions of friendship ! -
Answer. tº
We conceive the chief reason to be, the corruption of our
manners; the generality of people living a life of sense, and
not of reason, of which friendship is the offspring.
Query.
Offspring of Phaebus, sons of Delian sire,
so we iudge you by your parts and fire,
GALE's RECREATIONS. 245
Tell us, why those the vulgar call the wise,
Do wit and witty men so much despise 2
- Answer.
The man of wit, and not of judgement too,
Is justly slighted by the wiser few ;
But when both join and in one center fall,
That man, like thee, commands respect from all.
Query.
Why are some persons so chill, even to shaking, as in an
ague, after eating Your solution will oblige your humble
servant, Iris.
Answer.
The digestive faculty of the stomach attracts so much heat
to it for concoction of the food, that the rest of the body for
a while is left without a sufficient quantity to invigorate the
tendons, &c. to perform their offices; but is a sign of healthful
constitution.
Query.
Learned Apollo, tell me why
So little wool, so great a cry
Answer.
A question taken in answer's stead,
Why such small brains, so great a head
Query.
Why does castration hinder the voice breaking; and if
maturity alters the voice at such an age, why should it not have
the same influence upon women
Answer.
The breaking of the voice is caused by the heat of the
body, which dilates the aspera arteria, or wind-pipe; now
castration diminisheth the heat of the body, and consequently
prevents such an alteration; and the constitution of the female
sex being naturally colder than that of men, preserves their
voices shrill and tunable. . .
Y }
246 GALE's RECREATIONs.
Query.
"Tell me, ye learned offspring of Apollo,
Why after riches avarice does follow,
When the possessor ought by reason just,
With wisdom to employ so great a trust?
Answer.
Wealth with magnetic force attr cts the mind,
To sordid earth ungenerously consign'd :
Thence in proportion to its larger store,
We need not wonder, if it draws the more ;
But tho' this loadstone fix the iron soul,
The golden genius mounts without controul.
Query.
I desire your opinion of that passage in the Common-
Prayer, (viz.) “Give peace in our time, O Lord because
there is none other that fighteth for us but only thou, O God ſ”
for why should we desire peace when He fights for us, and
we own his omnipotence?
Answer.
Since a true and solid peace ought to be the aim of all our
fightings, and is the prosperous issue of a successful war, to
whom should we address ourselves for so important a blessing,
but to that God who fights our battles, and upon whom alone
we can depend for so glorious a conclusion of them?
Query.
In what sense are these words to be expounded in 1 Pet.
4, 6. “For this cause the gospel was preached also to them
that are dead?”
Answer.
The persons here designed were Gentiles, to whom the
gospel was preached as well as to the Jews; and from the
1st. chapter to the Romans, we may clearly see, that the Gen-
tiles were dead in a spiritual sense, dead in trespasses and sin.
GALE’s RECREATIONS, 2.47
Query.
Why when any thing is burnt, is it said the bishop's-foot has
been in it !
Answer.
We presume it is a proverb that took its origin from those
unhappy times, when every thing that went wrong was thought
to have been spoiled by the bishops.
Conumdrums.
i. What is placed before gentlemen's houses, with what
grows in their gardens !
2. What pleases when in the air, and what a horse cannot
abide 2
3. Half a carman and a whole country 3
4. The gift of Heaven and the motion attending it?
5. The half of a private entertainment, and a part of a goose?
6. What Goliah carried to battle, and the head of the nation 7
7. An animal common in Wales, and what is very common
in England after marriage 2
Answer.
Wallflower, larkspur, and likewise a carnation,
Snowdrop, and jonquil, for five gives explanation;
Kingspear and monk's-cap are next two no doubt,
The last one is goat-rue, and now the secret's out.
Query.
Pray which wou'd you choose;
A wit without beauty, or a beauty without wit,
When each is endors'd with a deal of conceit?
Answer.
Were I from these to choose a mate,
The wit I'd love, the beauty hate ;
For in the witty head is sense
Which ever will chase folly thence;
But beauty, with conceited brain,
In folly ever will remain.
248 GAL E'S RECREATIONs.
- Query.
Which deserves the greatest punishment, the soul or the
body, for the committing of sin and which is the most
guilty -
Answer.
The soul of man is a particle of the deity; and when first
infused into the body was so perfect, had such lively characters
of the deity impressed upon it, as were sufficient to enable it
to repel the tempter, maintain its integrity, and obey the in-
junctions of its great original; which the body could not do,
being only its receptacle, a place of residence for the soul
to act in, and taken from the dust; consequently the soul is
more culpable, and justly merits a greater degree of punishment
than the body.
Query.
Whether do those monopolizers who, contrary to law, buy up
corn, &c. with an intent to sell it at an advanced price, or those
who, encouraged by law buy up the same for exportation, con-
tribute the most towards distressing the poor by raising the
price of provisions !
Answer.
Both parties, it is certain, distress the poor greatly; and it
is hard to say which does it the most : now the monopolizers
oft make a scarcity in the midst of plenty, it is true; yet they
help the poor to corn, though at an extravagant price : whereas
when it is exported, it can yield no relief to the poor at any
rate, being quite gone; wherefore I think these last distress
the poor most; for certainly it is better to have corn at any
advanced price than to have none at any rate.
Query.
Whence did the custom first arrive
Of ringing bees unto their hive 3
Answer.
This custom proceeded at first from observing that instinct
in these sagacious insects to return to their hives, when they
are out at labour, at the approach of a storm ; the air at that
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 249
time undergoing a very sensible change in its denseness, they
are undoubtedly apprehensive of the approaching danger, and
immediately repair to their castle of security; the tinkling
of a mortar has somewhat a similar effect on them, as it in
some measure condenses the circumambient air, so far as the
sound extends; but the fugitives then having no place of
retreat, being driven from their hive by the old swarms, are
obliged to seek security on whatever they find any way con-
venient for them.
Query.
Who first found out the Hot-Wells at Bath 7 and how long
since 7
Answer.
The first discovery of the hot-wells appears to be of a very
ancient date. In the king's bath at Bath is the statue of king
Bladud (whom Mr. Cambden calls the soothsayer), with an
inscription under it, importing that he discovered the use of
these baths three hundred years before Christ.
Parador.
It was at my house but the other day,
The following kindred a visit did pay;
Two grandfathers, two grandmothers,
They were the first that came;
Next four sisters, and two mothers,
(Tho' some were blind and lame)
Two husbands and two fathers next,
That happen'd to come there,
Two wives, and then two mothers came,
But did not close the rear;
Two uncles, two aunts, with the rest came to dine,
Four daughters, two sons, to taste of my wine;
Two grand-daughters came along with the rest,
Two nieces, two cousins, dress'd up in their best :
This catalogue of kindred mention'd here
Are only six ; and all from incest clear.
How their kin is grounded I would have you show,
And you'll a favor great on me bestow.
o
5
O
3 A LE'S RECREATIONS.
Answer.
The father and his son married the mother and her daughter:
the father married the daughter; the son married the mother ;
and they had each of them a girl.
Query.
Whether poverty impeacheth or staineth nobility ?
Answer.
Riches are an ornament, not the cause of nobility; and
many times we see more worth under a thread-bare cloak, and
within a thatched cottage, than the richest robe and stateliest
palace. -
Query.
What passion is the most that can
Prevailing be o'er mortal man 7
Answer.
Since whatever way a man's mind is bent, it is influenced
by love, with respect either to good or evil; love is always the
rule of the rest of the passions; hence,
The most prevailing passion that I know,
Is love, the source of all our joy or woeſ
Query.
If a man should throw himself from the top of a high
tower, doth he fall to the ground by attraction, compression,
or gravitation ? -
Answer.
Whatever is projected from the earth, if the body that
projects rests upon the earth, the motion of the earth is com-
municated to it; hence the man's fall is by gravity in parti-
cular; and by compression, gravity, and attraction in con-
junction. - -
Paradow.
A man that was young at threescore and ten,
He gave it me in, and wrote it down then,
GALE's RECREATIONS
2
5
His friend was more old at twenty and two,
(You may think it false, but 'tis certainly true),
Ingenious wits, this secret now unfold,
For old died young, and young he died old.
Answer.
The young was nam'd Old, and the old was nam'd Young,
So a paradox from that odd circumstance sprung.
Query.
What is content?
Answer.
Content is that state of the mind, when it is not only free
from all anxiety and uneasiness; but possesses a serenity, and
even a pleasure in itself, which proceeds from a consciousness
of the rectitude and uprightness of its intentions; for I dare
venture to affirm, that no man with bad intentions ever at that
time experienced real content: on the contrary, while a man
knows that he does, to the utmost of his power and capacity,
acknowledge his present and future dependance on his Creator,
and endeavours at the good of all about him, he cannot be far
from a contented mind: at least, this must be allowed to be
the best method to procure one.
Query.
What is ridicule? and from whence does it spring
Answer.
Ridicule, in matters of literature, is that species of writing
which excites contempt with laughter: whence, in the exa-
mination of such kinds of writing, the mind maturally calls
upon it to aid argument and reason, when its impressions on
the imagination are consistent with the nature of things; but
when it strikes the fancy and affections with fictitious images,
it becomes the instrument of deceit. But however ridicule
may impress the idea of apparent turpitude, or falsehood, in the
imagination, yet still reason remains the supreme judge, or
touchstone of truth.
252 G ALE's RECREATION 9,
Query.
Who first tied the gordian knot ?
Can you tell—or can you not?
And for what reason 7–let me know
And you'll oblige a friend at Stow.
Answer.
Gordion knot, a khot which one Gordius, a Phrygian,
who being raised from the plough to the throne, hanging up
his plough and furniture in the temple, tied up in so very
intricate a manner, that the monarchy of the world was pro-
mised to him that untied it, which Alexander the Great, after
several essays, not undoing, cut with his sword; whence the
reason is evident, that the person who had skill and penetration
sufficient to untie if, should be deemed (after performed)
capable to rule and govern the whole earth, from his great
understanding and judgement, if any such could be found out.
Query.
Who are they that despise what they most do admire
Dear gentlemen, tell me, no more I require.
Answer.
Since it is so, that you are desirous to know
Who despise what they most do admire;
Be it known to your sex, who delight to perplex,
When you've set our affections on fire;
For if you can’t gain us, you then will disdain us;
And rail at us all that you can :
Like the fox by the grapes, are those leaders of apes,
Who rave when they can't get a man |
Query.
Ye witty bards, indulge a youth
To know the under-written truth;
In doing which, you'll give relief:
Pray, how do tears assuage one's grief ?
Answer.
The definition of grief is trouble, sorrow, and vexation of
heart; and that of tears, a drop of water distilled from the
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 253
head, and passing through the eye, &c. now when and where
grief happens, it seizes upon and affects the animal spirits,
which are fluid and belong to the brain; therefore sometimes
when grief happens, it falls with such an heavy pressure upon
the animal spirits as does not admit of, or produce any agi-
tation therein; then the apparent symptoms are nothing but
a heavy groaning, or deep sighing, as of one in Sore affliction,
or misery; but when grief comes with an effervency, so as to
produce an agitation, and thereby a fermentation, of the animal
spirits, it affects some one or more of the animal functions,
(which Dr. Quinsey, in his Lexicon Physico-Medium, says,
the learned Boerhaave defines to be twelve) which causes an
ebullition, whereby the tears are distilled, and flow from the
head through the eyes, as it were the spirits dropping from
the beak of an alembick; and thereby may be said to give
ease in, or assuage grief. A sudden surprise of joy sometimes
inay cause, and be the production of tears, and thereby pre-
vent a syncope, which sometimes happens; but in that case,
it cannot be said to be an easing of grief, &c.
Query.
What methods are most proper for the ladies to adopt to
induce the men to enter into marriage 3
Answer.
The only method is to be virtuous, good natured, and not
too forward; to make the most of prudent affability, free
from the least degree of affectation.
Query.
Whether the marriage act has done good or harm to
the state
Answer,
The restraint under which some must necessarily be laid by
this act of parliament may seem little burdensome to their
minds; but as the great good of a nation depends principally
upon the number of its inhabitants; and as experience daily
proves, that there is no power can bind the profligate and
licentious in a proper degree, it is plain that more hurt than
good has followed from it.
Z.
254 GAL E'S RECREATIONS.
Query.
Why does dress and adulation attract the fair sex more
than known plainness and sincerity ?
Answer.
Dress certainly has a great effect upon female minds, who
are too apt to be pleased with externals; but why it should
be more attractive than honest plainness and sincerity, I know
not (though it is a daily experienced truth), unless we ac-
count for it by the force the different senses have on different
objects; for we often see two ladies who shall be pleased and
displeased with the same object at the same time; and that
object at a distance, I mean a man.
Query.
Who are they that despise what they are known most to
admire
Answer.
Prudes, who affect to hate, like the fox in the fable, what
is out of their reach.
Query.
Why are some sorts of diversions, though extremely
laborious, esteemed pleasure more than business?
Answer.
Business was a task impos'd on man :
Freedom alone was his unbounded plan ;
Pleasure would be painful—his nature such,
And ease a trouble—if he had too much.
Query.
Which is soonest reconciled to his misfortune, a miser
that has lost his gold, or a lover who has lost his flame 3
Answer.
A despairing lover is a very wretched being, but yet there
may be some hopes he will ieturn to himself; other object;
tº entice or friends advise; but the miser, who nakes gold
G ALE'S RECREATIONS. 2.53
his god, having lost it, gives up all comfort, perishes like
him who, the apostle says, dies without hope.
Parador.
Dear Sirs, pray believe me, I'll make it appear,
That the sum of two numbers their difference are,
Answer.
Both latitude” and longitudet,
When on either side they lie,
Will answer well the paradox,
I'm sure you can't deny.
Parador.
B and C own brothers be,
Own brothers to their mother D ;
And uncle to each other are;
Own cousins too 'tis very clear :
Their pedigrees, I pray make out,
Ingenious wits, and clear each doubt.
Answer.
Bem-ammi and Moab, the sons of old Lot,
He (when senseless with wine) on his daughters begot,
Are the brothers, whose pedigree traced, no doubt,
Will infallibly make the affinity out.
Query.
It is said, Britain was discovered to be an island about the
year 90. Who was the dicoverer pray
Answer.
As to the name of Britain, there is no certainty of its
original in history ; that which passed for current in former
times, when most nations pretended to be of Trojan race, was,
that Brutus, the son of Silvius, grand-child of £neas, the
third king of the Trojans, having, after a long voyage, and
many wanderings, fallen upon this island, and conquered the
race of Giants, and having given it the name of Britain, left
the sovereignty to his posterity.
*Different side of the equinoctial.
+ Different side of the first meridian.
7 Q
6 GALE'S RECREATIONS.
Query.
Why do immodest Lawyers wear
Habits of clergy 3 make appear.
Answer.
There is no reason why Lawyers wear the habit or uni-
form of clergy, except from custom ; or that the former
(which indeed is most likely) are administrators of justice, the
latter of truth; and I think might be termed brotherhood.
Query.
Why is the language of a scold
Most moving, Sirs 7 I pray unfold.
And for what reason 7 tell me them,
No more I ask, Sirs, from your pen.
Answer.
The reason why the language of a scold is most nuoving is,
because no man that is in his senses will stay to hear it.
Query. -
What is the cause of certain luminaries, if a cat is stroked
in the dark?
Answer.
The skin of a cat, which mourisheth the hair, is impregnated
with an oily substance; with friction, or rubbing in the dark,
there seem fiery sparkles to proceed therefrom, &c.
Query.
Kind gentlemen, pray clear this doubt,
And tell the man who first found out
The Antipodes; and in what year !
Ingenious wits, this point pray clear.
Answer.
In the year 571 before Christ, Pythagoras of Samos dis-
covered the Antipodes: he was the first among the antients
who assumed the name of philosopher (by way of modesty),
as condemning the pride and arrogance of others who would
be called wise men.
G ALE'S RECREAT HONS. 25
Parador.
To plant a grove, I would dispose
Of fifteen trees in fifteen rows ;
So that each row may three contain,
And now the method pray explain.
Answer.
Thus as you see (Plate 6. fig. 4), you may dispose
Of fifteen trees in fifteen rows :
And in each row are three contain'd,
Adepts, the method I've explain'd.
Query.
What is the true reason, philosophical, mathematical, on
natural, why an egg, with its end placed horizontally against
the palms of the hands, cannot be broken with the greatest
human pressure ?
Answer.
The reason proceeds partly from all three causes mentioned
in the query: 1. The air within it not only supports the
ambient air, but also the two abutted elliptical domes:
2. Those elliptical domes bear a pressure equal to arches (every
way) on this construction, which cannot be forced together
so long as the materials last; therefore, 3dly. The hands being,
of a softer texture than these materials, cannot break it.
Query.
What were crowns originally 3 and who may be said to
have worn the first gold one
Answer.
Crowns are designed to be an ornament, &c. and as such,
I find they were originally used; as may be seen Exodus 25,
5. 11; where a golden crown was to ornament the Ark, &c.
and verse 25, the same ornament for the table, &c. (and per
query) “And who may be said to have worn the first gold
“ one " If we compare the 30th verse of the 29th chap. of
Exodus with the 6th verse of the 29th chap. it will appeal,
that Aaron was the first who wore a gold crown, &c.
Z 3 -
Ž
5
8
GALE’s RECREATIONS.
Query.
Why do haddocks, as well as some other fresh fish, when
hung up in dark places, appear to reflect a strong light 3
Amswer.
Some are of opinion, that the cause of light sought in this
query proceeds from the quantity of phlogiston contained in
this as well as other kinds of phosphoric: and others suppose,
that all bodies no sooner partake of death, but they in-
stantly, in some measure, fall under the state of putrefaction
(though at first umperceivable to our sight, taste, or smell); this
causes in a little time a violent fermentation; and all bodies
under this state, containing lucid particles, will by that means
be discernible in the dark.
Parador.
Nay, prithee say no more, I'll plainly prove,
'Tis happiness to be in debt, or love.
Answer.
In love or in debt, both, or either to be,
Is happiness always to Ben ;
For when I can't pay, I away to the sea,
And enjoy both my pipe and my can.
Query.
Of all human inventions, which may be said to be most
serviceable to mankind?
Answer.
Of all human inventions, I hope you'll allow,
There's none of more service to man than the plough.
Query.
Who is the happy man?
Answer.
The man who keeps the golden mean, s
And calmly steers his bark between
G|A LE'S RECREATIONS. 259
The recks of hope, and gulphs of fear;
Makes piety his only care,
And whose pure life and conscience Saith,
He shall be happy after death.
Parador.
I aftest it for truth,
A mistress that's kind,
Be she ever so ugly,
I beautiful find.
Answer.
Amorensis, 'tis true, three long years I've been blind,
Not the least glimpse of light can I see;
Tho' ugly my mistress appears to your mind,
When kind, she is haudsome to me.
Parador.
'Tis true I protest with an absolute breath,
That what is called life is natural death.
Answer.
When we receive our breath
We enter upon death;
"Tis therefore plain, that we each moment die;
For life and death go hand in hand; and why
Death, tho’ the foe of life, with us was born;
Tho' life so often makes of death a scorn.
Paradov.
How is it, to you I appeal, my friend Ranger,
That the pleasantest life's to be always in danger ?
Answer.
When danger's expected,
And still is neglected,
What pleasure attends on the thought !
The good and the brave
Despise death and the grave,
Tho' certain—so you and I ought.
Q6O
G ALE’s RECREATIONs.
Dangers seen from afar,
Or in sickness or war,
But enliven the flame of the soul;
Virtue cries with delight
'Tis noble to fight,
And pleasant these foes to controul :
Had virtue mo foes,
No not one to oppose,
No passions to conquer below;
Like a fool that stands still,
'Without reason or will,
We could not subsist here you know.
Parador.
Every true wife,
Indeed 'tis true,
Is false; and I can prove it too.
Answer.
How a wife can be false, and at same time be true,
Paradoxical really must be;
They sometimes approve of what sometimes they rue,
And are false to themselves and not thee,
Parador.
I have read (and pray tell me, Sirs, how it can be)
To imprison a debtor is to set him free.
Answer.
If t'imprison a debtor, Sir, sets him quite free;
From bailiffs and duns, sure the meaning must be.
Paradow.
Pray tell me what that man intends
Who asserts that our enemies are our best friends?
Answer.
Our enemies a mirror be,
By which our smallest faults we see,
Eriends seldom so sincere will be.

G ALE'S RECREATIONS. 20 I
Parador.
Let who will love for me,
I ne'er will fight a duel,
No not for any she,
The kindest is most cruel.
Answer.
The harlots in the street,
Most lovingly appear;
If some you chance to meet,
A cruel devil's there.
Parador.
A scholar boasting of his skill,
Was met one day by country Will—
Determin’d now to poze the clown,
Ask'd him how far to yonder town;
If in a right line now it stood,
"Twixt him and yon adjacent wood.
The rustic thinking how’t cou’d be,
Thought in himself I'll puzzle thee;
And said, I little understand,
But hope you'll answer out of hand:
Say two from one can you subtract,
And three remain to be exact 1
The scholar now no more could say,
But walked off, and bid good day,
Hoping some friend will answer find,
To clear the vapours of his mind.
Answer.
A woman delivered of two children.
Parador.
Some say such a thing as a cuckold has been ;
I deny it, A cuckold has never been seen,
Answer.
Some say men are born,
To be cuckolds and horn'd,
But one I yet never could see;
36.2 G ALE'S RECREATIONS.
Therefore why should I,
Believe by the bye,
That such a thing ever can be.
Query.
What are the chemical ingredients in the composition of
a modern physician 2 And what is the method of process for
his extraction 3
Answer.
A good likely young fellow, valet de chambre to some
gentleman who has travelled abroad; make him member of
a druggists' and apothecaries' club in London, where let him
endeavour to get by heart the names of the principal drugs,
medicines, diseases, and technical terms.
When he is well versed in the exercise of the said terms,
and has got the Greek Alphabet by heart, with twelve select
lines of the Schola Salernitana (to avoid breaking Priscian's
head) he must suffer himself to be suspended naked in an
Hippocrates's sleeve, filled with Elixir Salutis up to his chin,
which being filtered, and only himself and the faeces left,
he must repeat, without hesitation, all the said names and
technical terms the whole society shall think proper, and also
the Greek Alphabet, before he is suffered to come out; and for
every Greek letter, or technical term, he misses perfectly pro-
nouncing, he shall receive a smart lick through the flannel on
his posteriors, with a large long liquorice stick, and be obliged
to repeat the same till he says his lesson perfect, to the satis-
faction of the audience.
Then he and the faeces must be suddenly tumbled out
together (by cutting open the bottom of the bag) upon a
blanket, held underneath by four lusty druggists or apothe-
caries, who are to toss him, together with the faeces, till he
begins to grow sick : then let him be wrapt up in dry flan-
nel, put into the shell of a coffin (cautioning him against
dealing death) and carried to Haddock's Bagnio, near Charing
Cross, to be there sweated, and his skin well mundified; where
he may, if he pleases, sleep for that night: this done, he
must be dressed, and carried from thence in a chair to Mon-
mouth-street and Middle-row, Holborn, to be equipped with
a second hand suit of black, a tye wig, large snuff-box, and
short small sword: thence he is to be carried by the same
G ALE’s RECREATIONs. 263
conveyance to Batson's, and the chairmen to receive his left
off cloaths for their fare.
A diploma being next procured him from Edinburgh,
Glasgow, or Leyden, he is to attend on the said society of
druggists and apothecaries, at their next meeting, and deliver
the same, kneeling on a cushion, upon the table, to their pre-
sident for the time being ; who, after reading it aloud, dubs
him doctor, by waving a gold-headed came three times over
his head, and then delivers it into his hands for a present. At
which time, all the members standing up, una voce, must cry
out, Long live the noble Esculapius ! and the president repeat,
by whom the most obstimate and inveterate disorders, whether
acute or chronical, shall quit their latent recesses, tremble at
his sagacious nod, and fly before his awful fiat Proceed to
prosper feel the ladies pulses, dive into family-secrets, in-
sinuate your infallibility, augment your prescriptions, evacuate
our shops, and rarify the people.
opiferque per orbem
Dicor.
N. B. The fees to be paid down on this admission are
twenty guineas to the society, besides the whole expence of
that meeting, in an elegant supper and treat ; for which the
doctor shall be allowed to visit at each of the members' shops
gratis, and ask as many questions about the names and nature
of drugs and medicines, as he chooses—and have ocular de-
nonstration of the same—Likewise shall have liberty to feel
Mamma's or Miss's pulse, to bring his hand amotºg the ladies,
for so small a present as a diamond ring, and thereby making
himself acquainted with the female anatomy and disorders,
he may soon after commence man-midwife, if he pleases.
Query.
God said, “Let there be light, and there was light,” be-
fore the sun was created; whether then light is not a fluid
substance, diffused through space, and other fluid substance,
totally different from the substance of the sun, requiring the
presence of his fiery rays to make it conspicuous, in like
manner as light is conspicuous by the presence of the fiery
'ays of a candle, illustrating air or space in the sum's absence.
And how are the sun's fiery rays (emitting heat and colour
to sensation) which are continually exhausted in immense
204 G ALE’s RECREATIONS.
quantities from that fountain of fire, naturally supplied ? Also
whether colours are real, or only apparent accidents, in respect
of sensation; it being not certainly known, whether the
animals discern colours and objects alike, or in all respects as
they appear to human perception.
Answer.
If all the light were in the sun,
Then in his absence would be none ,
But yet we find, that flame by night,
As well as he, produces light :
Before the sun iſ light was made,
The light from him can't be convey'd :
The fiery particles are such,
As rouse the fluids by a touch ;
So lovers' touches cause surprise,
And make the virgin's blushes rise.
Attraction and repulsion join'd
In the same body we do find ;
The sun attracts from every sphere,
As he repels, when acting near;
Exhausts his vigour and restores,
Like a young rover in amours;
So beauty with a smile invites,
But with a sudden frown affrights.
Apparent colours strike the eye,
More than our sense reality.
To diff'rent senses objects suit,
As well in man as in the brute:
These are suggestions from my quill,
Referr'd to critic Answer's skill.
Query.
What is chance in nature, and what design 7 And how is
the present existence of things governed in respect of both
those distinctions !
Answer.
Design is a faculty of the human mind, by which, ac-
cording to intellectual foresight and volition, things are ex-
ecuted hereafter ; whereas chance or accident are things oc-
curring without any previous perception of the same: and
G ALE'S RECREATIONs. 265
tlings are governed in both these respects by infinite causes,
of which luan comprehends but few.
Query.
An acting cause implying a co-existence of effect, the
Creator bawing no beginning, how conid there be a beginning
to creation, or a time when things were not, or not as they
are now seeing that a necessary general existence of all
tilings, ab origine, under the various mutations of forms, is as
comprehensible as a first necessary absolute existence, endowed
with powers and qualities to create a successive order of ex-
istence in the infinite space And that being all whatsoever
(listinguished by absolute spirit, spirit and matter, or mere
matter) is comprehended in the living and lifeless forms of
substance, variously modified and supported in space; and also,
that original space and substance, existing necessarily, ab atterno,
}ving, to conception, as utterly in capable of annihilation as
alsolute space, and the models of present substantial forms,
perceived existing; the last appearing only subject to mutation
with the same quantity of substance in space, always existing,
And how does living existence appear necessary at all, or that
any being should exist more necessarily than, or before, another.
N. B. Substance is a general signification for material of
unimaterial forms. w
Answer.
The Creator, from the beginning, might create particular
worlds and beings, nearly co-existent with himself, and yet
not create our present systems of things till after a certain
period, during whose eternal existence a succession of new
worlds and beings might decline, and again receive existence,
alternately, according to the nature of succession observed in
plants and animals. 2. The Sceptic's argument, that a general
wise existence of all things might, of itself, as necessarily be
at origine, as an original Infinite Creator, of himself, ab ori-
Sine, to produce them, is thus answered, and confuted.—Taking
with us our conscious perception, we find that all things act,
and are produced by a series of causes, which therefore refer
backward to some first original, which is God. 3. There is
neither absolute space, absolute spirit, absolute matter, nor
absolute any thing, since the original cause, to which all effects
and their causes produced, must refer, is of itself the only ab-
A d
268 GAL E'S RECREATIONS.
solute existence, filling immensity, and supporting all being; so
that it is an absolute impropriety to mention annihilation of
absolute space, and absolute forms of living and lifeless sub-
stance; for though we see forms composed of matter subject
to continual mutation; yet it is not certain that the same
quantity of matter always exists, since the particular substance,
of which matter is constituted, may be varied by the Creator,
so as to be infinitely reduced, or extended in its capacity.—
4. Secing all things that can possibly be, must be, if any ex-
istence can be perceived at all (as it is evident we do perceive)
living existence will thereby appear necessary; and as one being
Inay exist before, or after another, some beings must neces-
sarily exist before, or after others.
Query.
What is the difference betwixt religion and morality?
Answer.
Religion consists in faith, and the observance of certain
ceremonies, or unodes of worshipping a superior being, to
inculcate acts of morality —whereas morality itself is in-
dependent of all religious formis; and, abstracted from all faith,
is productive of human happiness, by its united, and universal
principles of benevolence to society. Hence it appears, that
morality is as the sun, conspicuous to all, and religion as a
lantern to give light in its absence.
- Query.
What is the best method for preventing the frequent
robberies in and about London, and throughout the kingdom
Answer.
The first and best method to prevent frequent robberies in
and about London would be by mending the morals of the
common people; in order to which, they must be disarmed of
gaming, and the pernicious use of drams, whereby the morals
and health of a people are made corrupt; for there is nothing
so base or inhuman, that a prostitute to drams, distracted in
mind and reason, would scruple to commit.
Idleness and gaming are two endeared companions, and
the grand seducers to madness and stupidity, spreading wider
and wider. And by the present practices in vogue (the mis-
G ALE’s RECREATIONS. 207
tress teaching the servant-maid, the master the footman, and
the preacher the people, by precious example), it is difficult
to find a discreet acquaintance uncorrupted with cards and
drams;–for they are all gone astray, and there is none that
doeth good, no not one. -
Dram-drinking, like the p—x, enervates, corrupts, and
destroys the stamina of the human race; as gaming destroys
every great and good quality of the mind; rendering the no-
bility of a nation inferior to the beggars they are placed over
to govern.
Drams, like opiates, or a miser's comfort, assuage pain for
the present; but in the end produce gouts, and torments of
mind insupportable !
Drams and gaming abolished, the next step to ridding the
nation of thieves and robbers would be by encouraging in-
nocent and virtuous amusements; and also finding proper em-
ployment for the lazy, idle, and necessitous.
, Query.
Why should any under the same government stigmatize
others for their country, or place of nativity? And why should
the name of Irishman, or Scotchman, be more odious than
that of Englisman 3 :-
Answer.
National reflections proceed from want of national morals,
for distinguishing the honest man who, according to Mr. Pope,
“ is the noblest work of God,”—let him come from what
corner of the earth he will.
Query.
Which way, and how, might good be expected from a
general naturalization ?
Answer.
The good that might be expected from a general naturali-
zation is from the increase of useful subjects, and consequently
of industry, trade and commerce (Mr. Addison observing
that each subject's life is worth so much per day to his sove-
reign); for the lazy could hardly be expected to stir from home
for advantage, who already have too much neglected their own
A a 2
QöS G ALE’s RECREATIONS.
interest. Pretended friends might hereby find opportunity
of becoming snakes in our bosom.
Query.
How many subjects, possessed of ten thousand pounds per
anutuſ, in land and houses, have we in England, Scotland, and
freiand, respectively 3
Answer.
A great casuist in national affairs, known for expatiating
on his own infallibility, affirms, that there are exactly ten subjects,
and no more, in England, Scotland, and Ireland, possessed
of tel, thousand pounds a year clear of all incumbrances; and
jor flier wºrms, that there are ten times ten that number re-
puted to ºc worth as much, or a great deal Inore.
Query.
Whether assurance and impudence are not often imputed
to merit and strength of spirits
Answer.
Assurance and impudence are considered by some as the
same quality, though they differ as essentially as knowledge
and ignorance,
Query.
How is an offensive adversary in conversation best an-
Swered 3
Answer.
An offensive adversary in conversation is best answered in
terms of respect and friendship; as taking pleasure at all he
says is the only means to prevent flame, and extinguish fire:
sometimes leaving his company muay be the best way to answer
him.
Query.
Whether the reason commands the ruling passion, or the
ruling passion the reason 3 And whether the will exerts itself
as an ally, or despotic ruler, in respect of either ?
GAEE's RECREATIONS. 269
Answer.
Reason commands the ruling passion no other ways than
as a judge and admonisher. As far as the ruling passion and
reason co-operate to one end, our will is determined to act;
but we find the ruling passion so often despotic and powerful
in respect of the reason, that it biasses the will to act against it.
The ruling passion not only seduces the reason to compliance
with the will, but pleads excuses for the urgency of its tyranny
OVC r u S.
Or from a judge turn pleader to persuade
The choice we make, or justify it made.
Pope's Essay on Man.
As appear from the vices and follies more conspicuous than
true probity in the actions of mankind.
Men daily acting against their experience and conviction,
have no remedy but from help implored of the Divine Being;
which shews the necessity and good of religion to mankind.
The will, by which men act in their several stations, right
or wrong, in respect of their present and future connection with
God and their fellow-beings, is neither a firm ally, nor despotic
ruler, but a passive prostitute to both, though commonly a
volunteer in the service of the latter.
The passions, constituting the various, modifications of the
essentials of living beings, are those secret and dreadful sources
from whence the most remarkable actions and events recorded
in history proceed.
Two principles in human nature reign,
Self-love to urge, and reason to restrain;
Nor this a good, nor that a bad we call,
Each works its end, to move or govern all ;
And to their proper operation still,
Ascribe all good to their improper ill.
Self-love, the spring of motion, acts the soul,
Reason's comparing balance rules the whole:
Man but for that, no action could attend,
And, but for this, were active to no end.
Pope's Essay on Man.
For a further account of the reasons and passions, read Ethic,
Epistle II, throughout from this quotation.
A a 3.
270 G ALE'S RECREATIONs.
Query.
Who was he that first gave the name of Pope to the Bishop
of Rome, and no one else
Answer.
Gregory the seventh was the first that commanded the
name of Pope should peculiarly belong to the Bishop of Rome.
and no one else. &-
Parador.
This is truth (tho' the number's even.)
The half of twelve's exactly seven
Answer,
The half of twelve will seven be,
Cut thro' the middle, as you see.*
Query.
A law at Tarentum, as strict as Pope's bull,
Forbids importation of silks and of wool;
A merchant, and one for the law who had voted,
Five hundred fat sheep in his next ship imported.
Sir Gravity Quiddity, where is the flaw,
Is the fault in the merchant, or else in the law "
Answer.
My good Mr. Squa,
The fault's in the law.
The merchant's a knave,
If the truth you will have,
Or he ne'er had thus sneer'd
(When the sheep he had shear'd)
At the laws which were made
For the advantage of trade.
Query.
Whether is the bed most adored by the sluggard, a full
| tankard by tif drunkard, Gr money by the usurer
* W II
ºws---
AI (
G ALE'S RECREATION3. *7
Answer.
The usurer his money he most doth adore ;
He hoards up iris pelf, and he starveth the poor;
Whilst the sluggard will rise, and a penny will give,
The drunkard will spend if, and let the poor live ;
Sº I think that the usurer is the worst of all three:
I have pass'd my opinion;–if so, we agree.
Parador.
Fºgenious artists how may I dispose
Of five and twenty trees in just twelve rows,
That every row five loſty trees may grace,
Explain the scheme, the trees completely place,
Answer.
#s * $ 3. .#
# ºt Y: * #
* * * § *
.# .# } *: #
* * # &- §
Accept this method, if you please,
And like the drawing, plant your trees : .
They'll form a pleasant cool retreat,
And shade you from the summer's heat;
As you sometimes may to them go
When tir'd with bustle, noise and show.
Query.
It is observed, that the kidney bean and convolvulus, with
some other plants, follow the sun's motion in their growth, or
twine round a pole from east to west; whilst on the other
hand hops and honeysuckles, with many others, turn the con-
trary way. Cam this difference be accounted for
Answer.
This difference is one of those operations of nature which
doubtless will never be accounted for; though probably ef-
272 G ALE's RECREAT'ſons.
fected by attraction and repulsion; but in what manner?—We
observe, that the sun-flower generally keeps turning its blossom
towards the sun; we behold with admiration the phaenomena
of the sensitive plant, and venus-fly-trap, but when we would
enquire the cause, our reason is at a stand, and we are left to
lament the circumscribed state of human knowledge.
Query.
I have often observed certain animals exactly resembling
horse-hairs, swimming to and fro in small rivulets; now the
'country people in many places affirm, that they are the hairs
of a horse's tail, animated by lying a considerable time in the
water; and that this has long been the current report appears
from a passage in one of Marvell's poems, where he de-
scribes horses kicking at their tails, which had by a flood been
transformed to leeches. Is this a vulgar error? If so, what are
those animals 3
Answer.
These seem to be the species of worms called by Linnaeus,
Gordius aquaticus pallidus, with black extremities, though I
have seen some thousands of them entirely black; but as he
-says they are bred in clay, it is probable that they change to a
pale colour soon after coming into the water. Merrett, in his
Penax Britannicarum, calls them seta aquaticus, and mentions
the same thing of their being vulgarly taken for animated
horse-hairs: his words are, “Vulgo creditur oriri, ex seta
caudae equinae aquis immersa.” He has not taken notice of
their colour.
Query.
What is the difference between “to loose” and “ to
“unloose 7
Answer.
Sound the s in unloose softly (as in loose morals) and the
mystery will vanish; so then unloose morals will be good
morals, and unloose will signify to be tied.
Query.
What is - the reason that dead bodies sooner rot in a dry
than a moist church-yard :
º, Al. E'S RECREATIONS. 27 3
Answer.
A body will keep longer in moist ground than in dry,
or ause in the former case the air is more excluded than in the
!. . . . . . .
łulte!".
Query.
Are not children naturally ambidextrous !
Answer.
I believe experience teaches us, that when children begin
to make use of their hands, both are used indifferently, which
perhaps would be the case when grown, did they remain in a
state of nature :—the preference given to the right hand was
certainly owing to custom, for it does not seem to depend on
the predominancy of any natural impulse.
Query.
Why does an object, when viewed with a magnifying lens,
seem farther off than when viewed with the Iraked eye
Answer.
It has been a matter of dispute among optical writers,
whether an object when viewed through a magnifying lens
appears farther off, or nearer, than with the naked eye; but
the following experiments, I think, will clear up the point.
1. Bring a small object nearer the eye than the limits of
distiuct vision, then if a lens of a sufficient magnifying power
be properly placed between the eye and object, it will be seen
distinctly ;--here it is evident, that it seen is further off now
viewed through the lens, for before we thought, and which
Was true in fact, that it was too near.
2. 'Take the tube of a common refracting telescope, or
any other tube, in one end of which is fixed a magnifying leus,
thi ough this look at the inside of the tube, and it will appear
Wider and longer according to the magnifying power of the
lens; and the reason is this, -every object seen distinctly
through the lens is magnified in length as well as breadth, and
the efore a small object placed in the tube must seem further
off thai, it would at the same distance, if we viewed with the
Taked eye; consequently, in any case, if we consider the space
between the glass and object as a tube, this experiment suſ-
374 & ALE’s RECREATIONs.
ficiently determines the matter in question. Hence it follows,
that the parts of an object when seen through a magnifying
lens, cannot appear, with respect to each other, in their natural
Situation.
Query.
What is the reason that a body moving forward upon
rollers moves twice as fast as the rollers themselves?
ArtSwer.
When a body moves upon rollers, the diameters of the
rollers become as perpetual radii to the body moved, and the
motion of the body is, as those radii; but the motion of the
rollers is as their perpetual radii, therefore as the former radii
are double of the latter, the motion produced from them must
be so too.
Query.
What are we to understand by the two daughters of the
horse-leach, which cry, “Give, give?” Prov. xxx. 15.
Answer.
According to father Calmet, the horse-leach in this place
signifies lust, its two daughters are avarice and ambition,
which are never satisfied. The septuagint say three daughters,
instead of two. Bochart is of opinion, that the Hebrew word
Halukah, which the septuagint and vulgate translate horse-
leach, signifies destiny; and the two daughters of this destiny
are hell and the grave, which newer say it is enough.
Query.
Is there any practical method that will actually prevent the
growth of human hair, or totally eradicate that already grown?
Answer.
It is not easy to give a satisfactory answer to this Query;
some mention the blood of a bat having been used and recom-
mended as a preventative; and several receipts may be found
in Wecker, Porta, and others.
GALE's RecREA Tross.
º
7
5
Query.
Whether laws have been upon the whole favourable or
detrimental to the propagation of the human species?
Answer.
If all laws were at once to be abrogated, the consequence
would be, that each person would be content with as much
land as he could cultivate; and having no artifieial wants to
satiate, nor luxurious appetites to gratify, a much smaller
quantity of ground would be sufficient for him than at pre-
sent, and therefore there would be much more room for the
multiplication of the species; besides, man being naturally a
more humane and industrious animal, would have much
stronger motives to labour for himself than to take from
another; and there would then be none of those inhuman and
extensive wars which now depopulate whole countries, and
are infinitely more destructive than any little trifling private
murders that might chance to happen if there were no laws;
which murders, &c. never could be more numerous than those
which happen at present, in defiance of all prohibitions to the
contrary; and which indeed must happen, as they are the ūn-
avoidable consequences of the laws themselves: moreover, it
is allowed by the greatest and most strenuous advocates for
legal government, that the poor (which are incomparably the
most numerous) have very little benefit from the laws in ge-
neral ; and therefore it may be affirmed, if not with certainty,
at least with great probability, that laws have upon the whole
been detrimental to the increase of the human species.
Query.
Whether is an impudent, or an hypocritical rogue the most
detestable :
Answer.
Appearance is not always reality; if the laws in general
be good, the hypocritical rogue can have no claim to mérit for
paying only an apparent respect to them, at the time he really
infringes them; if they be bad, he has the additional villany
of giving his sanction to what is evil; besides using them as a
stalking horse to render his knavery more successful. In other
º
*
376 e ALE’s RECREAT ions.
respects, the two rogues are equal, and therefore upon the
whole, the hypocrite is the most to be detested.
Query.
Whether the souls of men departed are privy to our actions,
aud can appear or disappear to human sight !
Answer.
The expectation of a retribution hereafter, to compensate
for the miseries and inequalities on earth, seems to be the grand
argument of those that maintain the opinion of a future state;
but this proves the beasts to have souls as much as it does
man; and if this dogma has not prevailed, it has perhaps been
for no other reason but because beasts have not been able to
maintain a set of clergy. As to the dull mass of legendary
stories about apparitious and ghosts, recorded by priests and
monks, we have no reason to believe a word of it, since it
was their interest to deceive the world; and they bave likewise
solemnly afiirmed and particularized the existence of fairies and
witches, that are now universally acknowledged to be absur-
dities, fit only to impose upon fools, and to be credited by
ideots. However, begging the question, and allowing that there
actually may be such things as ghosts, and that they can appear
and disappear, yet I think we may conſidently affirm, that they
are not privy to our thoughts, nor to such of our actions as
were unknown to them before death ; for on perusing some
hundred speeches made (as they say) by ghosts, I have been
tempted to think, that if ever they had any sense in their lives,
they must have lost it at their deaths; atid that they were
scarcely privy to their own actions, much less to ours, their dis-
courses were so completely stupid.
Query. -
Milton, in his Paradise Regained, says, “ And either
“Tropic now 'gan thunder, and both ends of Heaven.”—
What is meant by both ends of Heaven
Answer.
What can the Poet mean (I do declare)
But certain parts in the celestial sphere;
Either the Poles, or our terrestrial world,
There from the tropics, lightning soon was hurl’d.
G. A LE'S RECREAT I ons.
Q
7
7
Query.
In the account of the destruction of Sodom and Gomorrah,
it is said, that Lot's wife was turned into a pillar of salt. Is this
to be understood literally
Answer.
The expression, “Lot's wife was turned into a pillar of
salt,” is to be understood literally, and according to the very
letter of the text; for the plainest interpretation of scripture
words is always the best ; she looked back disobedient and un-
believing, and struck with the sulphureous fire from Heaven,
was killed, and became a pillar of salt; therefore a lasting
memorial to many generations. Josephus mentions to have
seen it himself, and Mr. Maundrell's guides told him that
some remains of the monument were still extant : and as to
the difficulty of salt continuing undissolved in the open air so
long, it is well known to naturalists, that rocks of salt are as
lasting as any other rocks, may more so, and that houses are
built of them.
Query.
It is well known that fossil shells, petrified fish, and other
marine productions are found in great quantities on the moun-
tains in the inland parts of America. How is this to be ac-
counted for
A mswer.
The general deluge, or earthquakes, or both, might have been
the two great causes mentioned in this phoenomena.
Query.
What is the meaning of the expression, “Protestant flail,”
Sº often used in songs and poems about a century and a half
ago 8
Answer.
This expression seems to mean any instrument in the handº
of a protestant, wherewith to lash and satirise his antagonist,
B b
278 GAL E'S RECREATIONS.
Query.
Old Gobbo, in the Merchant of Venice, uses the foolish oath,
“by gods sontis.” What does he mean by “sontist"
Answer.
Evil genii, or wicked, evil, blameful or hurtful persons;
for the word senticus, used adjectively, signifies wicked, evil,
blameful, hurtful, &c, but substantively a wicked person,
&c. &c.
Query.
From whence does the whiteness of snow proceed 2
Answer.
From the componency of its parts; which though singly trans-
parent, yet must appear white when mixed together; as do the
parts of froth of powerful glass, and other transparent bodies,
whether soft or hard.
Query.
We generally observe, that the mercury in the barometer
stands the highest upon the easterly and north easterly wind.
How is this to be accounted for 2 And why does the rising of
the quicksilver indicate fair weather, and its sinking foul wea-
ther, such as rain, wind, and so forth Q
Answer.
It is proved by experiment, that mercury in the barometer
settles as the barometer is removed upwards ; which is occa-
sioned by a smaller degree of density in the atmosphere. In a
warm climate, the easterly and north easterly winds, mixing
with the air that is more expanded, gives it a greater density,
and the contrary when blowing southerly, which wind conti-
nually blowing generally produces much rain : why the mercu-
ry falls against rain, wind, and so forth, seems to proceed from
similar causes. In fine weather, the clouds are observed to be
situated very high in the air, at other times falling in rain to the
earth, which produces changes in the barometer, in effect the
same as if the barometer was removed upwards or downwards
in the atmosphere.
9 ALE'S RECREATIONS. 279
Query.
From whence came the custom of putting laurel, box, holly,
&c. in churches and houses at Christmas; and what is the
signification thereof
Answer.
When the son of God (according to the prophecy of Zacha-
ry) made his public entry into Jerusalem, the people strewed the
way before him with ever-green palm branches, in token of the
perpetuity and triumph of his kingdom ; hence arose the cus-
tom, and this the signification of adorning our houses aud
churches with ever-greens at Christmas,
Query.
The grasshopper sings all the Summer away,
With his chirping noise —how he makes it I pray :
Answer.
The grasshopper is called in Latin, cicadu, front singing
with a little skin upon his side, against which he rubs the thick
part of his leg, and so makes that noise wherewith he so disturbs
the sleepy haymakers.
Query.
What is the cause of that phaenomenon called the Aurora
Borealis (or northern lights), and why is it now more common
in our climate than formerly 3
Answer.
Electricity seems to be the cause of the northern lights, which
are streams of the electric fluid dispersed through a certain space
of the aerial expanse; and this fluid play now more abouud in
our region than heretofore, or has altered its former, and taken
a new direction.
Query.
How is it, that during a total eclipse of the moon, we can not-
withstanding perceive the moon as a light body, and see her
distinctly, though she is at the same time acknowledged to be
in herself dark, and is eclipsed by the earth's shadow, the diame-
ter of which is so much larger than the moon herself?
B b 2
280 & ALE's RECREATIONS.
Answer.
It lias been proved that the earth is surrounded with a
sphere of air, called the atmosphere, of about 47 miles in
Height, which has such a refractive power, that it turns the
rays of the sun out of their way when it falls upon it, and
makes them enter the conical shadow, which therefore will illu-
minate the moon, as well as other bodies, with a faint light,
and make her visible to the eye when she is even in the midst of
the ea; th’s shadow.
Query.
Has the cicindelo, or glow-worm, a natural power or not to
raise and extinguish its native light, according to the direction
of its will 7
Answer.
The glow-worm has certainly a natural power to raise and
extinguish its native light, but then only to be perceived in the
dark, its skin being a kind of an electrified coat, which in the
dark appears as fire out of the skin of the cicindelo.
Query.
Many people are so strongly fortified against the passions
as not to shed tears for their own misfortunes, nor by sympathy
for the misfortunes of others. Are people in general with this
seeming insensibility void of pity and humanity?
Answer.
When and where grief happens, it seizes upon and affects
the animal spirits, which are fluid, and belong to the brain;
ut sometimes when gric bens it falls with such a heav
but sometimes when grief happens it falls with such a he
pressure upon the animal spirits, as does not admit of, or pro-
duce any agitation therein; then the apparent symptoms are
nothing but a heavy groaning, or deep sighing, as of one in
sore affliction, or misery: in our opinion they have as much
pity and humanity, or more so, than those who shed tears abun-
dantly. -
Query.
Required the reason and custom of having the figures of lions,
goddesses, &c. at the head of ships ?
G ALE'S RECREATIONS, 281
Answer.
The ingenious traveller, Mr. Bruce, tells us, that according
to the Abyssinian historians, the famous Sphinx, which
stands near the Pyramids, is the figure that was at the head
of the Ark, petrified; hence it is probable, the moderns derived
the custom of having the figures of lions, goddesses, &c. at
the head of their ships.
Query.
Ye learned, pray say, who dark myst'ries unfold,
Why razors cut better with hot water than cold 7
Answer.
Every kind of knife or razor is a fine saw, though we
cannot possibly see it with the naked eye; and on all the edges
of those fine polished tools, there clings or sticks a kind of a
resinous or gummy substance, which, when put into warm,
water, is taken off, and makes the razor cut more easily and
freely.
Query.
In common brass-cocks that turn with a key, the liquor
will flow to the top of the key-hole, and although it may be
emptied, it will flow again to the same height and not run over,
although the liquor may at the same time be one or two feet
higher in the cask: required the reason of this.
Answer.
Because the air being a fluid body, presses upwards against
the liquor, and in that hole is much greater pressure downwards
and therefore will prevent its running out. See Martius Philo,
p. 266.
Parador.
My wife and I did disagree,
And for to part we both were free;
She set off east, and I steer'd west,
Believe me, Sirs, it is no jest;
When each had gone miles fifty-three,
Wife was not twenty yards from me;
B b 3
2S2 G A LE'S RECREATIONS,
And tho' it was bad stormy weather,
We all that time travell'd together:
How can this be, pray clear all doubt,
Tell how we made this different rout !
Answer.
On ship board my wife and I did disagree,
I to th’ helm, to th’ other end of the ship walk'd she ;
'Tis true we travell'd fifty miles together
On the same ship, not minding wind nor weather ;
Yet all that time, upon my word and life,
I was not twenty yards from my dear wife.
Parador.
Dick Guzzle in cue, I heard him to Say,
He owed twenty shillings, had not it to pay :
Ye sages in numbers, he'd have you explore,
How that debt shall be paid with nineteen and no more.
Answer.
The one-half, one-third, one-sixth, and one-nineteenth, of 19s
are 9s. 6d. + 6s. 4d. + 3s. 2d. and + 1 S. - 20s. - I l.
Parador.
Ingenious artists, pray dispose
Twenty-four trees in twenty-four rows,
Three trees I’d have in every row,
A pond in the midst I'd have also :
A plan of it I fain would have,
Which makes me for assistance crave.
Answer.
3. ::
# :*: :
:* % A-
} :# $ O § 2; .)
& .
$ $º
\ % *
G ALE'S RECREATIONS.
Q
8
3
A plan here is drawn,
In the scheme it is shewn,
Will suit the curious request;
You may sit if you please,
And view the sweet trees,
Gr fish if it pleases you best.
Parador.
I thrash'd ten quarters of fine wheat,
I eat just thirty pounds of meat,
Besides a calf that weigh’d eight stone—
I eat the whole, pick'd every bone;
Yet more—my appetite to satisfy,
Eat three roast pigs—which made me dry :
Drank sixteen pints of cherry brandy,
Then eat five pounds of sugar candy:
All this I did—all in one day;
lt's true, I assure you, what I say.
Answer.
Near the poles such a wonder as this might appear,
Where one day and one might make up the whole year.
Parador.
A general he had a small army of men,
Which form'd a long square of just twelve times ten;
But still without having his number increas'd,
In twelve equal rows he would have them plac'd;
Just eleven men he would have in every row,
Himself equal distant from each row also,
How he must place them I gladly would know. Ş
Answer.
To place the small army I thought I would venture,
In a dodecagon therefore, and himself in the centre.
Parador, by a Lady.
One summer's evening as I was abroad taking my pleasure,
I heard the voice of somebody behind, calling to me; I turned
back, and saw it was a companion of mine at the distance of
400 yards, wanting to overtake me; we moved each of us 200
2S º
1. G ALE'S RECREATIONs.
yards with our faces towards each other in a direct line, yet we
were still 400 yards asunder.—How can this possibly be 2
Answer.
The lady moved 200 yards backwards with her face towards
her companion's, and her companion 200 yards forwards, with
his face towards her.
Query.
is hope or fear the greatest spur to action ?
Answer.
Hope and fear are the two most predominant passions of the
human mind; the hope of enjoying some good, or the fear of
suffering some evil, is the spring of almost every action we per-
form, and it is difficult to say which is the greatest spur to ac-
tion ; but we rather think hope is, at least it is the most noble
passion of the two.
Query.
What language is the best, impart,
To gain a virgin lover's heart?
Answer.
The language of Cupid's dart
Will win and fix the virgin's heart,
Query.
When, and by whom, was England divided into parishes 3
Answer.
As Mr. Ashton tells us (supposed from his dictionary), that
Alfred divided the kingdom into shires and hundreds ; and by
referring to the said dictionary may be seen who divided the
kingdom into parishes.
Query.
What is the meaning and language of Crom aboo, the motto,
of the Duke of Leinster?
GALE'S RECREATIONs.
Q
S
5
Answer.
Crom aboo, supposed to be an anagram, being an unknown
language, makes Aboo crom by transposition; which, by cor-
ruption, may signify the Abercromby family of Scotland,
from whence might spring the Duke of Leinster's family, and
thence the motto; for Dean Swift discovered, that the Greek
and all other languages may be derived from the Scotch ;
shewing us that the North Britons are part of the original
people.
Query.
Whether the conception of the blessed Virgin Mary on De.
cember 8th, is not placed wrong in the calendar, seeing that the
birth of Christ was on the 25th of that month 2 Or, how is the
time of the conception and birth of Christ reconciled, as fixed
by our ccclesiastical chronologers :
Answer.
Had the conception of Christ been placed on the 25th of
March, or on what is usually called Lady Day, and the birth
of Christ the 25th of December following, about nine months
asunder, between the conception and the birth, according to
what is observed to happen in the production of the human
species (to which nature Christ was translated from the divine
essence), the time of pregnancy would have appeared more
consistent with the other parts of the Gospel; but why the
conception should be placed on the 8th of December, and the
birth on the 25th of December, following or preceding, (who
can tell us which 3) making 17 days, or a year wanting 17 days,
in the time of the pregnancy, our divine legationist, and alterers
of Greek from its original propriety, must resolve, as their pro-
vince of unfolding profound mysteries.
Query.
Whether an invalid (or invalidated) understanding, or weak
body (according to the Scotch phrase), is the more to be
pitied ? or, whether folly or ignorance is the greatest mis-
fortune :
280 ... A LE's RECREATIONS.
Answer.
An invalidated understanding, and a weak body (m the
Scotch phrase), imply the same sort of poor things; and are
therefore alike to be pitied ; like a charity-school teacher, and
a smatterer in mathematics, weak enough, through vanity, to
criticise works of eminence they never understood; like the
Dannonium (as he stiled himself) and library-hall professors,
exoniensis, &c. As to folly, separately considered, it is a
greater misfortune than ignorance by itself, which would often
rest satisfied ; but being stirred up by folly in the same person,
it is prompted to assume a false eminence, which is attended
with contempt, ridicule, and disgrace; and so folly becomes a
greater misfortune than ignorance to the same owner. To be
ignorant and innocent are pitiable ! to be ignorant and vain,
despicable !
Query.
Whether giving a man what he wants, is (in a gram-
matical sense) not taking that want entirely away ? And whe-
ther want of shame, in another sense, may not be given him,
contrary to the sense of taking want of shame away from
him
Answer.
On the subject of lying, Hudibras says to Sidrophel, (He-
roical Epistle, l. 105,) as follows :
Alas, that faculty betrays
Those soonest it designs to raise;
And all your vain renown will spoil,
As guns o'ercharg'd the more lecoil;
Though he that has but impudence,
To all things has a fair pretence;
And put among his wants but sl:ame,
To all the world lie may lay claim.
But all impostors, when they are known,
Are past their labour, and undone.
Giving truth to a person who wants it, is taking so much
of his error away from him that he had before : now sup-
pose you put shame among his wants, (want of truth, ability,
&c.) according to the text, so that shame may be one of his
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 287
wants, and by his possessing impudence, he may then lay claim
to any thing. In this sense, contrary to the former, by giving
him shame among his wants, you furnish him with want of
shame; and he having no shame, you furnish him with a ne-
gative, instead of taking one that he had (want of shaine)
away.
Query.
At a place called Catsgrove, near Reading, in Berks, is to
be seen a natural curiosity, not noticed by Camden in his
description of that county, where are different strata of earth,
and, among the rest, beds of sea sand; from which the work-
men, belonging to a limekiln on that spot, dig up perfect
oysters, firm and unopened, and shew them to travellers.
Without recurring to that general sea for all difficulties of this
sort, Noah's flood, it is required to be known, if the spot where-
on the town stands was ever recorded in history to have
been overflowed by the sea, from an earthquake, or any other
cause !
Answer.
The oysters and other substances dug up at Catsgrove, near
Reading, in Berkshire, are, in my opinion, the consequence
of some subterraneous eruption (as are the variety of strata
in other parts), whereby the sea has shifted its place and
boundary, and left the diversity of sea strata, oysters, and other
marine substances, as they are found and appear from the said
shifting cause, which cause is the change of situation of the
sea, overflowing vast tracks of dry ground, and leaving others
that were covered with sea to unboson, their variety of fossils,
or textures of an earthly substance; or else to be covered with
verdure, as the seeds of vegetables, scattered up and down the
substance of the whole earth, and the impregnating air, took
effect.
Query.
The word rest (meaning the remaining or remainder) is
set down in Dr. Johnson's Dictionary both as a substantive
and as an adjective: it will not stand the test of an adjective,
because it will not be coupled with a known substantive (such
as things) and make sense by such a conjunction, the rest
things being nonsense; and itscarcely appears to be a substantive
QSS G ALE'S RECREATIONS.
for these reasons; 1. because some substantive seems understood
to belong to it which is not named: 2. as it cannot be used
in the singular number as equivalent to remainder, a known
substantive, the rest is, being a solecism ; and lastly, as there
would then be no word that exactly corresponds with the Latin
word teliquus or reliqui. Quere, then, whether it be a sub-
º or an adjective 3 or sometimes one and sometimes the
other ? -
Answer.
The word residue retains the same sense as the word rest, or
remainder ; therefore it certainly is a substantive; and no ad-
jective, like residual.
Query.
Bishop Lowth, among other of his ingenious and critical
remarks on English solecisms, animadverts on the follow-
ing expression:-‘‘Who do you think me to be 7"—and con-
demns it for a fault: he will have us say, “Whom do you
think me to be 7" Now, the question is, whether in this we
are to follow the analogy of the Latin and Greek languages,
which agree in putting the same case before as after the infi-
mitive mood—as, quem credis me esse 1 or whether we are
to examine the merits of the case by a transposition; which is
a good method of explanation, and presents us with this seem-
ingly uncouth expression, Do you think me to be whom 3 In
a word, whether the apposition of cases ought here to predo-
minate over that known rule that neuter verbs require a nomi-
native case after them.
Answer
According to custom, in the English mode of speech, which
is the greatest authority, Bishop Lowth is got into a dilemma
here betwixt the English and Latin customs of speech, where
the English custom, by the rule of transposition, ought to
predominate: Do you think me to be who 2 or, Who do you
think I am 3 somedody or nobody ?
Query.
Upon what part of the terraqueous globe has a ship the least
pressure upon the water.
GALE'S RECREATIONs. 289
Answer.
Any where on the sea, under the equinoctial, or at the
equator; for there the power of gravity is less than at the poles,
where the diameter of the earth's oblate spheroidical figure is
the shortest, and consequently attraction greatest.
Query.
We read in Herodotus (Erato) that when it was objected
to Demaratus, King of Sparta, by his rival Leutychides, that
he was not the son of Ariston, his reputed father, but a sup-
posititious child, he conjured his mother to reveal the truth;
who, in answer, observed to him, that his enemy framed the
objection merely because he was born before the expiration
of ten months; but that the insinuation was suggested by ig-
norance; for women, she remarked, were not always so late
in their delivery; some children having been born at the end
of nine months from their conception, and some even at
seven.—From this story, be it true or false, it appears that a
child of nine months was judged an early visitant in Greece;
at least by the Historian.-Query, Are the women of any
country (particularly in that part of the world) known gene-
rally to exceed that term or not
Answer.
When men lived to a greater age in ancient times, the
time of a woman's pregnancy (to perfect a more durable
pirth) might be greater than at present, nine months. Some
children have been born at the end of seven or eight months
in England, but seldom lived long, or not so long as those born
at their full time; however, nine Calendar months, of thirty
days and a half each, making about two hundred and seventy-
five days, are not much unequal to ten months of twenty-eight
days each, making two hundred and eighty days; so that a
difference of near a month in the time of a woman's preg-
nancy will arise from the different way of reckoning the
time of one month; from whence the mistake of a month in
the time of pregnancy (ten for nine months) by Leutychides,
might proceed.
Most animals (except mankind) have stated seasons for
procreation: the females go with young some a longer,
some a shorter time: mares go from eleven to twelve months;
C c
290 G ALE’s RECREATIONS.
cows and hinds go nine months, the same as women; foxes
and wolves five months; bitches go only seven weeks; cats
nine weeks; and rabbits thirty-one days; most birds are
hatched in twenty-one days; the canary birds, and some
others, are hatched in thirteen or fourteen days; hence there
appears to be endless variety in the time, as well as in the man-
ner, of the generation of animals.
Query.
Ye lovely fair, ye soft enchanting maids,
That love the town, and haunt the rural shades,
Say, if you can, when kissing first arose,
That mark of love, and soft’mer of our woes ;
Say if you can, inform your faithful swains,
And you shall have a hundred for your pains.
Answer.
When Adam first beheld his partner Eve,
Blest with more charms than we can well conceive,
A warmth unusual glow’d within his breast,
He kiss'd his bride, and own'd that he was blest.
Query.
Define the diff'rence of what you call
A conscience that's large, and no conscience at all.
Answer.
A country-woman begg'd a boon
Of a rich Merchant, here well known ;
Who, generous heart 1 quite free to all,
Of packthread handed down a ball,
That measur'd twelve-score yards—to grant—
And bid her take what she might want.
She talk’d—roll'd off—to tire your patience,—
At last said, “Here's enough in conscience.’
The Merchant smil'd,—and said, Let's see
‘What may a woman's conscience be ''
He found it forty yards in all;
If she'd had none, she'd ta'en the ball !
& ALE'S RECREATIONS. 291
Query.
A heavy body being sunk to the bottom of any fluid, will it
require more or less weight than itelf to raise it up !
Answer.
By the laws of Hydrostatics, a less weight than itself will
raise it up ; but in a stagnant or confined fluid, or one that has
a great degree of tenacity, or if the body be in close contact
with the bottom of the containing vessel, &c. it may require
more weight than itself to raise it up.
Query.
Pray give your opinion, how the fishes can respire air in the
sea 7
Answer,
There are many sorts of fish endued with lungs; as whales,
sea-calves, dolphins, with others; and these are generally ob-
served to swim near the surface of the water, and receive pure
air, never remaining long at the bottom ; but in those fishes
that are without lungs, it is presumed the gills perform the office
of lungs; and that the aereal particles are admitted through
the pores into the numerous vessels there inserted, and thence
again expired. -
Query.
When were guineas first coined in England and why were
they so called !
Answer.
In King Charles the Second's time, when Sir Robert Holmes,
of the Isle of Wight, brought gold-dust from the coast of
Guinea, a guinea first received its name from that country.
Query.
If whatever is, is right, in the natural world (accerding to
Mr. Pope's Ethics, in his Essay on Man), and God has formed
nature and her operations in all respects for the best, why is
rain, or elementary weather, prayed for in churches or why
is any thing prayed for by the human species, of defective
judgment (according to the º Socrates), that God would
c 2
292 GAL E'S RECREATIONS.
grant such things as are fit for us, and keep away such things
as are not fit, in respect of particular and general good —
And why are not curses banished all catholic and christian
churches, if God and his Providence can award justice to
criminals without the imprecations bestowed from man's
pitiful, partial, and weak judgment, in this respect; whose
whole irregular race, governed by a lawless will, seems to be
greatly favoured by a gracious and good God, in not being
long ago extirpated from the face of the whole earth, for the
enormous trespasses of the greater part of them, committed
against their maker and one another 2
s
*
Answer.
To pray for rain in churches, or elsewhere, appears to be
the same as to pray for Snow, dry weather, or sunshine, and for
such things as people's famcies, or wrong judgments, or different
views and vain imaginations, suggest to them ; for the ope-
rations of nature are supposed to be universally carried on
every where for the good of the whole; and if it be true, what
Mr. Pope says in his Ethic Epistles, there can be no error in
nature :
In spite of pride, in erring reason's spite,
One truth is clear, whatever is, is right.
To which may be subjoined—
Except man's will, exempt from nature's laws,
In spite of doubt, our good or evil draws.
Persons of the same or different occupations and interests
pray for different elementary weather at the same time and
place; so different armies pray to God for different successes,
or destruction. And how is it consistent for God to oblige
both parties? .
If God's will be done on earth as it is in heaven (prayed for
in the Lord's Prayer in churches), there is little occasion for
other solicitations of the divine power and goodness, since
asking what may be unfit for us will prove a hurt instead of
benefit; as the farmer, in the fable, resigned the weather into
Jupiter's hands again, when he had enjoyed what weather he
asked for, and found his crops worse than his neighbour's.
One part of the Scripture teaches to bless them that curse
you, and pray for them that despitefully use you, libellers, &c.
GALE's RECREATIONS. 293
against the church doctrines of cursing our fellow beings! But .
though the texts of Scripture seem to clash with each other in
different places as the statue laws in different acts of parliament
differ so much as sometimes to require an adjustment (iike a
Hadley's quadrant); yet the divine and human commands, in
general, are reconciled by a general obedience to morality and
religion, and an abstinence from vice and injustice.
The irregularities of man's race require to be put under
laws and government, as is evident from their various and
irregular propensities and inclinations; yet the deviation of
those wills from equity and justice, with respect to their con-
duct towards one another, is such, that sometimes mo force or
punishment, by cutting them off, is able to restrain their
irregularities, and keep them in order.
The infinitely wise Being, permitting men's irregularities
(for experiment or probation), to answer the ends of his
glorious creation, he can dispose of them here, or remove
them from this to another state of being, as he sees best fit.
And since all created beings are within the grasp of the Divine
Power, to do with them the way most suitable to his pleasure,
therefore to submit (by resigning to his providence) is the
right human wisdom.
Yet the race of mankind (corrupted as it is) is certainly
at liberty to ask of God to grant what is fit and good for their
happiness; and, while they ask, to beg that he would avert
or refuse what is against their happiness, or hurtful to them,
though asked.
Query.
Sagacious friends, inform me whence arise
sº 2
Those Northern lights that stream along the skies 2
Answer.
The cause of the Northern lights is from a thin, nitrous,
sulphurous vapour, raised in our atmosphere, considerably
higher than the clouds: this vapour, by fermentation, taking
fire, the explosion of one portion of it kindles the next, so the
flashes (of the Aurora Borealis or Northern lights) succeed one
another, till the whole quantity of vapour within their reach is
set on fire. See Rowning's Natural Philosophy, p. 158.
It is also said, that the Northern lights proceed from the
vapours ascending by exhalation.
* C c 3
294, G A LE'S RECREATIONS.
Query.
What became of the ark of the Lord, containing the two
tables of stone, after being deposited in Soloman's Temple,
as mentioned in the 8th. chapter of the 1st. book of Kings
The Jewish opinion is, that, when the Temple was destroyed,
the earth opened and swallowed it.
Answer.
No doubt but the ark of the Lord was burnt with the
Temple ; which may be a sufficient reason for the extreme
grief of the Jews; for as Josephus emphatically expresses it,
they lifted up their heads and wept.
Query.
Why are those two months, March and October, reputed to
be the best to brew in
Altiswer.
Because in those two months the medium state of the air
between the extremes of heat and cold, is most favourable to
a due carrying on the process of fermentation; on the proper
management of which, it is well known, that the perfection of
malt liquors depend.
Query.
By whom, and about what time, were blisters made of can-
tharides, introduced into medical practice?
Answer.
Blisters made of cantharides were first introduced into
medical practice by Aretaeus, a Greek physician and medical
writer; about 50 years before Christ. See Clerc's History of
Physic.
Query.
Why does the horizon appear to our sight larger than any
part else of the hemisphere
Answer.
Nothing can come within the compass of our eyes so well,
because the earth on plane of the horizon is decorated with
G A L E *
t
S R ECR EAT IONS. 295
trees, herbs, plants and grass, which makes it appear of a fine
azure green, and exactly sui's our sight, better than any
other colours under the creation ; and therefore lets the eyes
comprehend more of the horizon than any part else of the
hemisphere.
Query.
What branch of natural philosophy affords the most con-
vincing arguments of the existence of a Supreme Being 2
Answer.
Astronomy; for it is impossible for any man to look round
him, and view that amazing orb the sun, that loud herald of
his Maker's praise, from whose benign agency nature receives
her beauteous features—the moon, which when the sun goeth
down lights up her silver lamp to bless imankind—those
planetary worlds which run their rapid courses round the Sun—
or those bright spangles with which the empyreum arch is
decorated, but he must be convinced that these are the works
of a Being infinite in power, immense in wisdom, and un-
bounded in goodness.
Query.
What is the reason that the shells of crabs and lobsters on
being boiled turn red
Answer.
The deep purple inclining to blackness is only a superficial
covering on the calcareous earth composing the shells of crabs,
lobsters, &c. and when its density is attenuated by heat in the
action of boiling, the light reflected from the white substance
of the shell is transmitted more copiously through this film, and
gives it the appearance of red, &c.
Query.
Why is King Henry the Eighth always, or generally, drawn
with a cap on, instead of a crown 2
Answer.
Henry the Eighth received from the Pope the title of
Defender of the Faith, for having written against Luther, and
3 () () *
G ALE’s RecR 8 ATIONS.
presented him a Cardinal's cap, in which he is generally
delineated.
Query.
How long has the title of Lord Mayor been given to the
Mayor of London, and on what occasion was it first conferred 2
Answer.
In the history of England it is recorded, that about the year
1381, or 13S2, in the reign of Richard II, when William
Walworth, the then Mayor of London, had slain the rebel
Wat Tyler, the King knighted Walworth, and ordered that the
Mayor of London should ever after bear the title of Lord.
Query.
As black is no colour, and consequently reflects no rays to
impress any colour on the retina of the eye, how comes it that
bodies that are black are as visible as any other object
Answer.
When bodies which are black are placed upon, or sur-
rounded with bodies of any other colour, it is the coloured rays
reflected from such bodies around the margin of the black that
defines its shape.
Query.
Can love exist without jealousy.”
Answer.
Whoever considers that what we love we always set a
high value upon, will not think it an unreasonable consequence
that we should be afraid of losing it; besides, what appears
lovely to us, we are apt to think does so to others, which
would naturally make them endeavour after the possession of
it as well as ourselves, and therefore gives us no small uneasi-
ness for fear of being disappointed: and even supposing the
beloved person to be virtuous and constant, yet a great passion
will be apt to suggest that it is not impossible, but an alteration
may happen, either through some dislike, or by the intervening
of a more worthy object; so that it is contrary to the nature
of love to be free from jealousy before marriage ; but after,
GA LE'S I: ECREATIONS. 297
where the persons are good and generous, it seldom or never
happens.
Query.
What is the origin of heraldry 2 and how remote is its
antiquity 2
Answer.
It seems very difficult to determine how long heraldry has
been in use as it now is, but its origin is of very ancient date:
the earliest account we have is in sacred writ, in the 2d. chap.
of Numbers, when we have an account that each tribe of the
Israelites had their particular standard, and there is no doubt
but each standard had some particular mark or figure, and later
Jewish writers inform us, that these figures were characteristic
of the tribes; Judah had a lion on their standard; Dan a ser-
pent ; Isachar an ass, &c. whether these were of divine ap-
pointment originally, or borrowed from the Egyptians, who
were famous for their hieroglyphics, is not certain 3 but after
that time, standards were used in war, and are to this day, each
regiment having its peculiar standard, or colours; and as these
formerly had figures of birds and beasts, that were thought
emblematical or ominous by the general or leader, the same
figure was engraven on a seal, with which the general or chief
stampt all his orders to his inferior officers, and the descendants
of such chiefs used those figures painted or engraven on their
shields, &c. as a family distinction; and is thus used to this
present day. It may farther be remarked, that the various
tribes of Indians in North Anuerica, to this day use the figure
of some bird or beast to distinguish them from other tribes.
See Captain Carver's Travels.
Query.
Why is the thick part of the leg called the calf?
Answer.
The calf of the leg seems to have had its name from two
cimbric words, cal, stout for large, with respect to the other
parts of the leg, and lef, always beat, or of a bending form
(vid. Goropius Be amus); and from thence the Dutch name
kalf; from this the English is evidently borrowed.
29S GAL E's RECREATIONs.
Query.
When a piece of iron is heated red hot, and immediately
cooled in water, it becomes harder; but if left to cool in the
open air, softer : Can this be accounted for 2
Answer.
When a piece of iron is heated red hot, and immediately
cooled in the open air, its bulk becomes greater, or it occupies
more space, and therefore the particles composing it are at a
greater distance from each other than before, and cousequently
the whole is less compact and softer; but the contrary happens
if cooled in water, for in heating, a great part of the air it
contained is excluded by that operation, on account of its ex-
pansion and rarefaction; then suddenly plunging it in water,
the air is thereby prevented from insinuating itself into the
metal while it cools, and so the particles having more room,
fall nearer together, which evidently must render it of a firmer
texture.
Query.
Whether a practical geometer can execute the first problems
of geometry truest with great or small distances !
Answer.
Problems in plain geometry can be drawn more exactly with
great distances than with small, because all points and lines in-
pretice are of the same breadth, and such breadths will hold a
iess proportion with great than with small distances, and con-
sequently the errors in drawing will be less in using long lines
than short ones. To explain this, suppose the circumference of
a circle, whose diameter is one tenth of an inch, is to be divided
into 1536 equal quarters, by lines drawn from the centre, this
we will suppose to be done by a continual bisection of the
cords; now when we come to the last divisions, we shall find,
that the lines which are to divide the cords will be as broad as
the cords are long, though perhaps the instrument may be as
fine as possible; but this would not be the case if the diameter
was two or three yards.
GALE's RECREATIONs. Q99
Query.
Whence proceeds the saltness of the sea, and is it more so
now than formerly 2
Answer.
According to some naturalists, it is owing to the mines of
salt gem in the bowels of the earth washed down by the rains:
admitting this, the sea must grow continually salter, because
the water raised by evaporation is fresh. On this supposition,
Dr. Halley proposed a theory to determine how long the world
has subsisted ; but as observations have not been made of the
degree of its saltness at distant periods of time, it must be left
to the determination of the curious in future ages.
Query.
Ingenious artists, make appear,
How long since hats first came in wear !
Answer.
Father Daniel relates, that hats became in use in the time
of Charles II. about 1449; but the Dictionaire des Origines,
which is more to be depended upon, tells us, that they were
not worn till the time of Charles VI. when they were used by
the nobility when they rode a hunting.
Query.
If a person breathes upon the blade of a new knife, razor,
&c. the moisture immediately flies off. What is the reason of
this 7
Answer.
Take a razor or knife, and heat it till it is as warm as the
breath, and then the experiment iails; the reason is obvious :
as the breath contains much moisture, when it meets with a
body colder than itself, that moisture is condensed, and this is
the cause why the breath is so discernible in frosty weather.
Now if we breathe upon any fine polished reflecting surface,
colder than the breath, the moisture thereby condensed becomes
a kind of cover, and consequently visible; this cannot be the
case when the body is sufficiet.tly warm, for then no condension
can take place. The evaporation of so very small a quantity
- 300 G ALE'S RECREATIONS.
of moisture must be performed almost suddenly, may be easily
conceived by a comparison with Dr. Halley's experiments, who
found that the common evaporation of water amounts to about
one fifth of an inch per diem; and we may safely affirm, that
the evaporation in question would not exceed that quantity,
were it to continue for the same space of time. This cir-
cumstance must also happen, if we breathe upon bodies not
polished ; but that is the very reason why we do not perceive
rt.
Parador.
One evening as I walk'd to take the air,
I chanc'd to overtake two ladies fair ;
Each by the hand a lovely boy did lead,
To whom, in courteous manner, thus I said :
Ladies, so far oblige me, as to shew,
How near akin these boys are unto you ?
They, smiling, quickly made this dark reply,
Sons to our sons they are, we can't deny:
Though it scents strange, they are our husbands' brothers,
And likewise each is uncle to the other:
They both begot and born in wedlock were,
And we their mothers and grandmothers are ;
Now try if you this mystery can declare.
Answer.
Two widow ladies married were,
Each to the other's son ;
And they both pregnant did appear,
E’er one full year was run ;
The consequence of which did prove,
To each a charming boy :
This did cement their husbands' love,
And added to their joy.
By this event likewise it's plain,
They did commence grandmothers,
And that their husbands did obtain,
Two young deightful brothers.
A brother you may justly cail
Each to the other's father;
Uncles they were reciprocal,
You easily may gather.
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 301
Parador.
Two fav'rite fields near to my dwelling lie,
Their soil the same in depth and quality:
The furthest distance, twenty acres measures;
The nearest ten, but fraught with latent treasures:
For, till'd aiike, this yields me as much grain
As does the first, though full as big again.
Answer.
Because corn and trees always grow perpendicular to the
horizon, an hemispherical bill of twenty acres surface will
bear no more of either than a level field of ten acres surface,
being equal to the horizontai and circular basis which the said
hill stands upon. And no more paies are required to fence
over any hill than would be required to fence over the level
basis of the same, were the hill entirely removed, i. e. both
palings being carried over tile same horizontal direction.
Query.
There is a square piece of land containing 25 acres, de-
signed for the reception of 24 poor men and their governor.
who are each to have a house situated in his own group'd, the
governor's in the center. How many people's iand must
the governor pass through before he gets to the outside of the
whole !
Answer.
Two: for the ground being a square, it will consist of 5 rows,
each 5 acres, as per figure. *

--sº
862 & ALE'S RECREATIONS.
Query.
If a servant sees any ill actions, or ill practices of a man or
his wife one against the other, such as adultery, or the like,
which tend to the ruin of each other—ought not such a
Servant to discover the same to the party injured And if upon
such discovery the man and his wife do part—Which is truly,
properly, and equitably the cause of such separation, the in-
former, or the crime and criminal 2
Answer.
So important a discovery ought never to be made without
mature deliberation ; if not, the advice of a faithful friend ;
for in many circumstances the injured party may be more
happy in the supposed iºnocence of their adulterous mate,
than under the torture of so ungrateful a disclosure : but if
upon a prudent discussion of the matter, you have reason to
conclude, that your discovery will prevent the ruin of one so
heinously abused, you are under a strict obligation of perform-
ing so charitable an office;—and iſ upon so necessary a disco-
very a separation should ensue, tire injured party is the efficient,
the criminai the formal, the informer the instrumental cause of
such a separation.
Qucry.
How old, and from whence is the custom of throwing at
cocks on Shrove Tuesday?
Answer.
There are several different opinions concerning the origin of
this custom ; but we are most inclined to give credit to one
Cranenstein, an old German author, who, speaking of the cus-
toms observed by the Christian nations, gives us the following
account of the original institution of the ceremony:
When the Dames were masters of England, and lorded it
over the natives of the island, the inhabitants of a certain
great city, grown weary of their slavery, had formed a secret
conspiracy to murder their masters in one bloody night, and
twelve men had undertaken to enter the town-house by a
stratagem, and seizing the arms, surprize the guard which kept
i ; at which time their fellows, upon a signal given, were to
come out of their houses, and murder all opposers: but when
6 ALE's RECREATIONS. 303
they were putting it into execution, the unusual crowing and
fluttering of the cocks about the place they attempted to enter
at, discovered their design: upon which the Danes became so
enraged, that they doubled their cruelty, and used them with
more severity than ever. Soon after, they were forced from the
Danish yoke, and to revenge themselves on the cocks for the
misfortune they involved them in, instituted this custom of
knocking them on the head, on Shrove Tuesday, the day on
which it happened. This sport, though at first only practised
in one city, in process of time became a natural divertisement,
and has continued ever since the Danes first lost this island.
Query.
Whether sage of virtue infused be more wholesome than In-
dian-tea!
Answer.
Bohea-tea has the pre-eminence, as corroborating the sto-
mach, helping the concoction of aliments and cholic pains in
the expelling of wind;—green-tea helps the suppression of
urine, in the free excretion of it; which are much more effica-
cious properties than are in sage, &c.
Query.
Why Jesus Christ is said to be of the seed of David, and to
what purpose is the genealogy of Joseph given, when Mary
conceived before she came at him ''
Answer.
To the first question we reply, that Jesus Christ is therefore
said to be of the seed of David, because born of the Virgin
Mary, who proceeded from David by lineal descent.
In answer to the second, we assign the following reasons of
Joseph's genealogy, but founded on this necessary preliminary,
that St. Matthew wrote his gospel primarily for the Jews, to
whom, in the genealogy, he has a peculiar regard.
1. The Jews looked upon Joseph as real father to our
Blessed Lord ; if therefore they have suspected Joseph to have
descended from any other line, this would have prejudiced
their minds against the Gospel dispensation; St. Matthew
therefore, to remove this mighty rock of offence, acquainted
his countrymen, that in case Jesus Christ had been really the
D d Q º
304 G A 1, E'S RECREATIONS.
son of Joseph, he had on that account been of the family and
lineage of 1949id.
Q. St. Matthew, by tracing Joseph's ancestry, informed the
Jews, that as Jesus Christ was naturally the son of David by
his mother's, so he was legally so by his reputed father's side;
and it would be no small satisfaction to them to behold their
Messiah doubly time son of David, both by natural and imputa-
tiye descent.
3. A mother's family was reputed as no family among the
J. w8, and therefore our Lord could be no otherwise inrolled
than under Joseph's pedigree. Very pertinent was it then to
give the Jews to know, that in one sense he would appear as
the son of David in their public registers.
4. Joseph and Maly were both of the same family, and
could not be unknown to the Jews, for whom St. Matthew
wrote ; while therefore he presented them with Joseph's ge-
nealogy, at the same time he acquainted them with that of
Mary's, and he chose to give them Joseph's rather than Mary's,
when either would suffice, in compliance with the received
custom of his country, which (as is said above) made no ac-
count of the mother's family.
5. From the premises we may aver, that St. Matthew de-
duced Joseph's genealogy with design to shew that Jesus Christ
was every way the son of David; that as he came to fulfil all
righteousness, so he would evidence every punctilio of royal de-
rivation.
Query.
When a man upon his trial says, he will be tried by God
and his country, the clerk says, “ Culprit, God send you a
good deliverance :” Pray what is the signification of culprit
Answer.
The Athenians have given some account of this. We are
of opinion, that when the person pleaded not guilty, and put
his sei; upon God and his country for a trial, the clerk pro-
nounced these words, “ Qu'il le paroit," let it appear so : i.e.
Let it appear to God and your country, that you are not guilty
of the crime you stand charged with ; so that culprit appears
to be a corruption of qu'il le paroit.
G ALE'S RECREATIONS. 305
Query.
Whether a person that has compounded with his creditors, is
not so strongly concluded by the above rule as to be incapable
of performing any act of charity acceptable to God, before he
has fully discharged the debts he compounded ?
Answer.
That acts of charity may be acceptable to God, they ought
to be done with all the simplicity and sincerity of heart imagi-
able, out of a just sense of the duty we owe, and the depen-
dance we have upon him, and not from our being struck with
the misery of an object.
In the next place, what is so given ought to be strictly our
own, which a person that has compounded with his creditors
ought not to think so, till he has satisfied all their just demands
upon him ; so that to make his charity acceptable to God, he
must come up to those rules; for though his creditors may
give him a legal discharge for his composition, he can never
be discharged in conscience till he has paid the last farthing;
but divines allow a liberty in small acts of charity, which can
be no damage to creditors, and where we may presume upon
reasonable men.
Query.
Whether persons who murder themselves may possibly be
saved ; and if so, why are they denied christian burial :
Answer.
That those guilty of suicide may be saved, we are ex-
tremely willing to hope, because it is presumed that nothing
but a deprivation of reason could make a christian guilty of
such an action; agreeable to which, is the favourable opinion
our courts of justice entertain in such case, where the person
is generally brought in non compos mentis; and certainly people.
deprived of reason will never be accountable for actions done
contrary to it.
That they were denied christian burial by the law might
be to deter others from such actions, since laws of that nature.
have been always made in terrorem.
D d 3
306 GALE'S RECREATIONS.
Query.
Is it possible for maskind to attain to perfection If noi,
why says out Saviour, “Be ve therefore perfect, as your father
which is in Heaven is perfect :"
Answer.
Sure man can never be so perfect as his Maker, since un-
deniable are those words of illiphaz, “Bello!d, lie pittieth no
trust in his saints; Yea, the heavens are not clean in his sight.”
When therefore our blessel lord commands to be perfect as
our Father which is in leaveu is perfect, he proposes God as
a pattern of perfection, which we should endeavour as accu-
‘ately to imitate as our frail morality will porn in ; and wivie
in this sense we set the Lord always before us, we shoi be daiy
provoked to make nearer advances to the still dislaut object
of our coustant imitation,
Query.
Whether a man can properly be said to take cold !
Answer.
He may properly be said so to do, because the air being
received in full draughts through the mouth into the Aspera
Arte ia, Bronchia and Vesicles of air belongii:g to the lungs,
doth there encounter the blood, rendering it too thick, cold
and claimºy ; whereupon, from the over-cooling of the blood,
proceed coughs, catarrhs, &c.
Query.
How comes gaping to be catching !
Answer.
Gaping or yawning is infectious, because the steams of the
blood being ejected out of the mouth do infect the ambient
air, which being received by the nostrils into another man's
mouth, doth in rºtate the fibres of the hypogastric muscle to open
the mouth to discharge by expiratnet, the unfortunate gust of
air infected with the steams of blood as aſoresaid.
GA, LE'S RECREAT ION3. 307
Query.
Which is most to the advantage of a general, to end a war
gloriously or ilave it coatiniaed ;
Answer.
The word advantage in the query appears to be drest in an
anbiguous mantle : if it is meant that sordid interest wirich
we distinguish by the name of gain, it is undoubtedly that
way the alivantage of a general to colitique the war as long
as possible ; but we believe the quelist would be satisfied if 1 he
glorious ei: ding of a war is not more honourable to a general
1han a coutinued bickering; and to this we answer in the
affirmative ; fºr if the war itself be justifiable, it must cer-
tainly be the highest pitch of merit in a general to watch every
opportunity, and bravely screw the fortunes of his country to
the elevated reight of an illustrious victory. *
Query.
Whether it is not a sin to say those words in the marriage
ceremony, “With my body I thee worship ;” since it is promi-
sing, in the sight of God, to be guilty of idolatry
Answer.
There are two sorts of worship, a religious and a civil worship ;
and as the one signifies that homage which we incommunicably
pay to God; so the other inplies that respect which we pay
to man : hence several magistrates are stiled worshipful ;—
when the man therefore says to the woulan, “I thee worship,”
he means no more than–I thee honour.
Query.
Pray how came crooked men by the title of my lord 3
Answer.
Among several probable accounts of this custom, the
following appears most rational.
in the first year of the reign of king Richard III. commonly
known by the name of Crookt-back, six persons, unhappily
deformed in that part of their bodies, were made lords, as a
reward for several services they had formerly dome the king;
the novelty whereof occasioned the whole nation to make
30S G ALE'S RECREATIONs.
merry with those sort of people, by advising them to go te
court, and receive an honour which nature see;ned to have
designed them for: it is from this, we presume, the mock title
of my lord has been ever since peculiar to such persons.
Query.
I have read in Jude, that Michael contended with the devil
about the body of Moses. Pray inform me of the reason of
their dispute 3
Answer.
It is the opinion of soame, that Moses was translated, like
Elijah, into Heaven, and that the devil contended with Mi-
chael, that he ought not to be thus translated, in that he had
heen guilty of murder in slaying the Egyptian ; but as Moses'
translation has no other dependance than Jewish tradition, it
is contrary to Deuteronomy xxxiv. 5. 6. “So Moses, the
servant of the Lord, died in the land of Moab, according to
the word of the Lord ; and he buried him in a valley in the
land of Moab.” But since it immediately follows, no tian
knoweth of his sepulchre to this day; and the reason why his
sepulchre was hid, was probably, lest the Jews (a people ex-
ceedingly prone to idolatry) should worship the body of so
renowned a law giver; we may therefore not unreasonably
suppose, that the devil would have discovered the concealed
sepulchre, but was prevented by the arch-angel Michael,
whence might arise that memorable contention mentioned by
St. Jude.
- Query.
Which is the most noble employment of a rational being,
love or friendship !
Answer.
Friendship certainly is the most noble employment of a
rational soul: love seems only the diversion of the mind, but
friendship is its business; the first, in some measure, lessens
the dignity of human nature; the latter raises and ennobles
it, even to similitude of the Deity himself, for it gives
us a taste of those joys which are only to be found in his
presence, namely, a mutual desire of pleasing, and raising the
felicity of each other;—but we ought to spend no time in
G ALE'S RECREATIONS. 309
-P-
the proof of this, if we did but rightly consider, that friend-
ship is the child of reason, love but the fondling of the
passious. . . . . . . .
Query.
What is the cause of little white spots which sometimes grow
under the nails of the fingers? and what is the reason they
say they are gifts : -
Answer.
Those little spots are from white glittering particles which
are mixed with red in the blood, and happen to remain there
some time : the reason of their being called gifts is as wise a
one as that of letters, winding-sheets, &c. in the candle.
Query.
Whether in admiring and meditating the lives, histories,
humours, and sayings of men the most excellent, we do not
run the hazard of losing our own natural advantages 3 For
thinking to accord our humours to other men's examples, we
forget or slight all that is our own, and scarcely ever do the
other with a good grace. ,
Auswer.
There is scarcely an excellence but what must be guarded
with wariness and caution; and therefore as imitation is ex-
cellent in its kind, so it must be managed with wonderful cir-
cumspection: too nearly to copy after the sayings of other
persons is to be parrots, and not men; to accommodate our-
selves to their humours in the gross, is to ape, and not imitate;
when therefore we set before us the most eminent examples,
we must not be a servile herd, as the poet expresses it; we must
separate the ore from the dross; we must not suffer any coin
to be current among us, merely because it bears the image of
the person we admire: in the most excellent of men, we must
distinguish, between their virtues and vices, their excellencies
and defects; we must weigh the difference of conditions, of
geniusses, of times, of places, and those other accidental cir-
cumstances which may entirely after the nature of an action ;
we must endeavour accurately to know ourselves, that we may
be thoroughly sensible, whether that be not awkward in us
which is graceful in another; but above all, we must not
re
3 l () G ALE's RECREATIONs.
over-look our own talents, but must crert our faculties in re-
fining, in improving, in inventing: and if we thus prudently
direct our imitation, we shall make good that common simile,
of a dwarf set upon a giant's shoulder.
Query.
Some nieu's spirits are visibly masters over those of others;
the question is, Whether this does proceed from the excellency
of education, or men's diversity of fortunes, or the real priority
of souls 7
Answer.
What propriety there is in the innate faculty of souls, hu-
man reason is incapable of judging ; since whether those facul-
fies be equal or unequal, a difference in the actual exertion of
them may arise from the causes you have mentioned, to which
we may prefix another.
1. That the natural contextures of our bodies may cause
no inconsiderable difference in the actings of our souls is un-
deniably evident from undoubted instances: the capacities of
some have been wonderfully impaired by accidental alterations
in their bodies; and there have not been wanting those who,
though of very eminent endowments, have yet, by some acute
distemper, been unhappily reduced below the very level of
common men; and this is further proved from the different
geniusses in different countries, according to the difference in
the nature of the climates.
2. The difference arising from education is so very palpable
that we need not insist upon it: some men who, for natural
abilities were once looked upon as of a common size, have, by
industrious application, and the best opportunities of improve-
ment, arrived to a quickness of understanding, and been in
great esteem, not only for their studied acquirements, but also
for the uncommon reach of their great capacities.
3. That the difference may arise also from the diversity of
men's fortunes, we have a noted instance in the poet Ovid, who
justly attributes the want of that sprightliness of thought he
had formerly been master of, so conspicuous in his last compo-
sures, to his very unhappy circumstances, which strangely en-
feebles the natural vigour of aspiri: g souls.
UALE's RECREATIONS. 31 1
Query.
Is it not better never to coutract a friendship than to break
it ; and if the uneasiness of the loss of a friend be not greater
than the satisfaction we find in having a friend.
Answer.
Friendship seems to be the supremest felicity of the soul,
as to the conversation in this life, and consequently the
pleasures which arise from it are above expression, where it is
sincere, and placed on a deserving object; the breaking such a
friendship therefore must be the greatest uneasiness that can
happen to any person. But as we ought never to take up a
friendship without the greatest consideration, and perfect
knowledge of one another, so ought we never to break it,
unless the greatest defects appear in the object; for the breaking
such a friendship gives us a double wound, in depriving us of
the good offices we expected from a friend, and arraighing our
judgement which made so ill a choice; therefore the uneasi-
ness of those reflections must be greater than the satisfaction
which such friendship could bring us.
Query.
Why is it, when the mind is oppressed with extreme sorrow,
it often inclines the afflicted person to sleep ; whereas the vital
parts being depressed, it should rather obstruct so peaceful an
exercise :
Answer.
Extreme sorrow has usually the contrary effect: but as it
must be allowed, that it sometimes has the effect you mention,
so these different effects arise from the difference in the consti-
tution ; for as sieep is generally owing to the want of such a
quantity of animal spirits as are sufficient to distend the nerves,
so in most constitutions extreme sorrow so irritates the blood
as to supply the nerves with a large store of animal spirits,
whence consequently proceeds watchfulness ; but in some con-
stitutions the same degree of sorrow has a greater influence on
the nerves to dissipate the animal spirits than on the blood to
occasion proportionable supplies. But as our bodies are not at
all times alike affected, so the same cause may produce different
effects in the very same person at different times.
3
l
Q
f
GALE'S RECREATIONS.
Query.
I have been taught, that if the product of any two factors
be divided by either of those factors, the quotient will be the
other : now if 2 is multiplied into (), the product will be 0,
therefore 0 being divided y 0, the quotient, which seems ab-
surd, will be 2. Again, if infinite be multiplied by 2, the
product will be is finite: therefore infinite being divided by
infinite, the quotient will be 2, which seems as absurd as the
other; pray be so kind as to explain this to me !
Answer.
You have explained it yourself very well, at least you have
proved that it inust of necessity be so, for when the two pre-
mises of an argument are true, the cous-lusion must also be
true; yet as there is some difference between knowing that a
thing is true, and having a clear idea of the truth of it, we
will try whether we can sº explain it as to make you conceive
it clearly. Be pleased therefore to observe, that () is the term
from which all quantities begin ; now imagine that two mobiles
set out from the same term, and that one of them moves with
a velocity double to that with which the second moves, it is
certain, that in all the instants of time, that which moves with
a double velocity has described the double space of the other;
therefore consider what has happened in one minute, and in
half a minute, then in a quº, ter of a minute, and so on, till
you come to the very instant of the beginning, you will have
two progressions, whereof each term of one will be double to
each corresponding term of the other ; therefore the very
beginning of one is double to the beginning of the other, that
is, 0 in one case is double to 0 in the other; now if 0 may be
double to 0, it is no absurdity that () divided by 0 is equal
to 2; likewise, if the proportion be considered the other way,
it is evident, that one infinite will be double to the other,
therefore it is no absurdity, that infinite divided by infinite is
equal to 2.
Query.
Whether we are not obliged to stand when we praise
God; or to be in a stºlicing posture when we sing psalms,
especially since many of the psalms usually sung contain ex-
pressions of prayer and praise; and it being likewise the custom
GALE's RECREATIONS. 3 || 3
to rise and stand, when we sing, Głoria Patri & And further,
whether standing at singing was not customary in the primitive
times '.
Answer. -
In what manner soever we are praising God, stauding no
doubt is the most agreeable posture; and tierefore we sup-
pose the custom of sitting, when the psalms are sung, to have
proceeded from carelessness and inadvertency; though yet
there are many pious and considerate christians who always
stand at so divine an exercise; and this posture is punctually
observed at St. Peter's, Coruhill, introduced, as we imagine,
by the late pious Bishop of St. Asaph ; and that the same-
posture obtained among the primitive Christians we have no
reason to doubt, since they were used to stand at a less devo-
tional employment.
Query.
What natural cause do we assign to that strange disturbance
in the sleep which occasions persons to walk, and perform iu
many cases as if awake 3
Answer.
The animal spirits, running through such passages of the
brain as they find open to their admission, aud consequently
through the same passages they were used to pass, excite
similar sensations in the soul, which disposes us to such actions
in our sleep as, while awake, we were accustomed to perform.
Query. -
What is the sin against the Holy Ghost; it being men-
tioned, but not told what it is 3 -
Answer.
We cannot say, that we are not acquainted with the nature
of this unpardonable sin; since the context gives us so clear a
light into it. The Pharisees had maliciously and obstimately
ascribed that wonderful power of God's holy spirit, whereby
our Lord was enabled to cast out devils, to an impure, to an
infernal agency ; as therefore he reproves their inexcusable
wickedness, so also he denounces an irreversible punishment.
Does it not therefore plainly and naturally follow, from the
E e
\
814. G ALE'S RECREATIONS.
common modes of speech, that so terrible a denunciation has
a particular regard to that sin, that virulent sin of the Pharisees
which gave occasion to it; but since after this our blessed Lord
vouchsafed to promise the same delinquents that important
sign of his resurrection from the dead; since upon the eross
he condescended to implore their pardon at his father's hands;
since we read, that the Holy Ghost was not yet given, that is,
the public dispensation of that blessed Spirit which was not
then commenced ; since St. Peter in some measure excused
their condemning the Lord of life; therefore some learned and
judicious divines have not irrationally concluded, that the
unpardonableness of thus blaspheming the Holy Spirit was not
to take place till the day of Pentecost, till that signal time
when God set as it were his last seal to the doctrine of his
beloved Son, in whom he was well pleased.
Query.
In Gen. I. we find that beasts were made before men ; in
Gen. 2. man seems to have been made before beasts. Your
reconciliation of the matter?
- Answer.
The sacred historian observes the order of time in chapter I.
but treats of things more promiscuously in the 20. When there-
fore it is said, at verse 19, “ Out of the ground the Lord
formed every beast, &c. and brought them unto Adam,” the
meaning is, that he first formed every beast, and after that
Adam was created,—brought them to him.
Query.
Where is Hell situated 7
Answer.
The situation of Hell, or as it is called, a local hell, may
justly be numbered among the secrets of Providence which are
undiscoverable by man.
Query.
Does the punishment of Hell consist of a real fire, or of only
the privation of the sight of God
&ALE’s RECREATIONs. 3] §
Answer.
Though it should not consist of a real fire, it will yet be
more than a bare privation of the sight of God; for a con-
sciousness of sin (however for a season it may be lulled asleep)
is naturally and irrespectively a very exquisite tormentor.
But though we cannot be positively assured, that the holy
pemmen intend any more by the mention they make of fire
than to represent the torments of Hell under the most terrible
resemblances (when yet they may infinitely exceed the images
made use of), so neither can we say, that their expressions are
not literally to be understood, since our bodies, as well as our
souls, will be grievously tormented, which may be so ordered
by Omnipotent displeasure as to be always burning and yet
never burnt,
Parador.
I did exist, and ever shall,
But now I don't exist at all.
Answer.
The" instant that we present call,
Did once exist, now, not at all.
Query.
Suppose one eye to be disposed so as to represent a man with
his heels upwards, and that of the other to remain in its true
posture, I ask, what idea would an intent looking on the man
with both eyes frame in my mind 2
Answer.
The eye that would represent the man with his heels up-
wards, would, or would not, be so disposed as to have the
fibres of its optic nerve so correspondent to the fibres of the
optic nerve of the other eye, as that an object represented by
both may produce but one image in the brain: if the latter,
you would behold a duplicate of the single object; the one in
a right posture, tile other in an inverted one;—that the object
would be represented double, we learn from common obser-
vation ; for when we so press one eye as that the rays emitted
* The least present part of time, flowing equally and continually,
being gone, with other indefinite successions, before we can consider it.
E e 2
316 G ALE’s RECREATIONs.
from an object fall not on the correspondent fibres, each eve
distinctly and separately exhibits the image of it to the per-
ceptive faculty —if the former be supposed, the object would
be represented to us in so indistinct and confused a manner,
that we should be at a loss to know what to make of it. ,
Query.
What is the reason that infants, hardly a week old, smile, no
human object being, in ºneojudicio, capable to induce so merry
a humour?
Answer.
Smiles arise not always from an impression made on the
mind by outward objects, but sometimes from internal causes,
viz. from a perfect state of health, &c. which disposeth the
mind to alacrity, of which smiles are one effect, and may the
rather be expected from children, not only from their never
having suffered under any indisposition, but also from their
not being sensible of the troubles of human life to allay their
matural alacrity.
Query.
Pray your reason, why a cat when she falls, or is thrown
from a house top, or any other place, always alights directly
upon her feet 7 -
Answer.
They are commonly, but not always, observed to light on
their feet; and it is chiefly due to their tail, which they fan the
air witha), whereby the swiftness of their descent is so far
retarded, that they are enabled to prepare themselves in such a
manner for their fall.
Query.
Why religion should make people ill-natured, and persecute
one another? or whether it has not been the occasion of most
of the barbarities in the world !
Answer.
That religion has been the occasion of the most barbarous
and inhuman practices, both the Heathen and the Christian
world afford us undoubted testimonies. That Paganism should
GALE'S RECREATIONs. 317
oblige its proselytes to so cruel a behaviour, we must forbear
to wonder, since the great destroyer, the grand adversary of
mankind, was the object of their worship ; but if it be en-
quired (as we suppose it is by the Querist), why the professors
of christianity, though the Prince of Peace, though that great
preserver of men, be the author and finisher of their faith,
should yet be guilty of such barbarous proceedings, as though
their master came to destroy, and not to save men's lives 3 To
this enquiry, we subjoin a very noted axiom—The best things,
*
*
when corrupted, become the worst.
Query.
The godfathers and godmothers, when an infant is baptized
by a minister of the church of England, solemnly promise
and vow to God, in the name of the said child, or infant,
that he or she shall live, and be perfect from sin all the days
of its life. I think the ordinance of baptism imports thus
much, yet the members of the said churcin generally, in dis-
course, argue against perfection, without, at, or near the point
of death.
Answer.
The godfathers and godmothers do no where in the office
of baptism, promise for the infant a perfect, an un-sinning
obedience: it is true indeed they promise that the child
shall conform to that which, if accurately and punctually
conformed to, it will not fall short of absolute perfection:
but then this conformity they promise is to take its estimation
from the measures of sincerity, and not from the standard of
perfection ; that is, they promise in the child's name, that it
shall sincerely endeavour to comply with the whole law of
God, as far as frail mortality will permit; the promise there-
fore of godfathers and godmothers is to be taken in the same
sense of that excellent petition in the Lord's Prayer, “ Thy
will be done on earth as it is in heaven ;” for it is not sup-
poseable, that men can be as perfect as angels; men encompassed
with dust and ashes as perfect as those disencumbered, those
unbodied spirits;–when therefore we put up that address to
the throne of grace, we no more than implore our Heavenly
Father, that he would enable us to come as near to those pure,
to those spotless beings, as the necessary condition of our
mortality will admit,
E e 3
3 | 8 GALE'S RECREATIONs.
Query.
Why do we throw cold water in a man's face when he
Swooneth 7
Answer.
Cold water thrown into the face, causes a contraction of the
pores, surprizes the spirits, recalls them to their wonted ema-
nations, and restores the blood to its due circulation.
Query.
Say, British youths, who with exalted heads,
Sitting next Pinia on sublime Parnassus,
Receive the laurels due to your great worth,
Why does the swelling Nile, thro' fertile plains,
Which runs tumultuous, overflow its banks :
And with its fat’ming slime rejoice the swain,
Who with his sharpen'd sickle comes to reap
A golden harvest; part, fruit of his care,
Aud partly caus'd by th’ overflowing tide 3
Answer.
When the warm sum from AEthiopian lands,
Remits the fervour, and bids winter reign,
Successive show rs o'er distant mountains smoke,
And falling thence, in rapid torrents roll,
Tearing as thro’ the delug’d lands they fly,
The muddy bottom of up-rooted earth,
And thick'ning with fat soil their growing streams:
Hence 'tis, that cov'ring with rich slime a ground
Which the hot sun had burnt to sand before,
AEgyptian plenty does with Nilus flow,
And by his fall, soon feels a sure decrease.
* Query.
Why does a drunken man see double 7
Answer. -
The fumes of the liquor he is intoxicated with may be
supposed so to disorder his eyes as that the representation of
the object cannot fail upon the correspondent fibres of the
oMic nerves; whence it becomes impossible, that the two.
G ALE's RECREATIONS. - 3 9
fold image exhibited by the two eyes should ever so unite as
to produce but one resemblance in the brain.
Query.
I desire you will please to let me know, what sex the devil
is of 1
Answer.
By his roughness, one would take him to be of the masculine
gender ; but since he so often appears in petticoats, we have
Inore reason to believe him an hermaphrodite.
Query.
Why doth a dog sweat only on the tongue, and not on the
!, in Q -
SR 11) :
Answer.
Our opinion then is, that the dog's tongue doth not sweat,
but we rather suppose the humour dropping from it in their
pantings, to be saliva ; and that the natural constriction, or
straitness of their pores, prevents the perspiration of humours
through their skills.
Query.
Why thunder turns beer, ale, &c. sour; and whether iron
preserves or mot?
Answer.
Thunder is apt to turn beer, ale, &c. sour, by the violent
agitation and new fermentation it causeth in those liquors, by
which their spirituous parts are in a great measure dissipated
or depressed, and their tartarous parts exhaled :-several
grounded, as they pretend, upon experience, will affirm, that
iron hath that peculiar property to prevent that effect; but
others will tell you, that it does it only by reason of its weight
and pressure upon the vessel, and that any other ponderous
body will have the same virtue; which last opinion seems more
probable than the first, and may be confirmed only by repeated
experiments.
320 G ALE’s RECREATIONS.
Query.
Why is the nine of diamonds called the curse of Scotland 2
Answer.
Diamonds, as the ornamental jewels of a regal crown,
imply no more in the above-named proverb than a mark of
royalty, for Scotland's kings for many ages were observed
each ninth to be a tyrant, who by civil wars, and all the fatal
consequences of intestine discord, plunging the divided king-
<!om into strange disorders, gave occasion, in the course of time,
to form the proverb.
Query.
From whence derived the origin of the word Dun ?
Answer.
Some falsely think it comes from French, where dorne:
signifies give me, implying a demand of something due ; but
the true origin of this expression owes its birth to one Joe Dun,
a famous bailiff of the town of Lincoln, so extremely active,
and so dexterous at the management of his rough business,
that it became a proverb, when a man refused to pay his debts,
“Why don't you dun him " That is, why don't you send Dun
to arrest him; hence it grew a custon, and is now as old as
since the days of king Henry VII.
Query.
Why fish, though bred in salt water, are yet fresh 3
Answer.
The solution of the question naturally follows from the
necessary allowance of these undeniable propositions: 1. That
the whole body receives its nourishment from the blood.
2. That the nutriment we take in cannot be secreted into the
blood till rarefied by the heat of the stomach. And 3. That
salt is incapable of such rarefaction.
Query.
Whether water, if drank from youth, would not be more
agreeable to man than any artificial liquors :
G A LE'S RECREATIONs. 32 l
Answer.
The drinking of water may be beneficial to some constitu-
tions, but destructive to others, and more especially to those
who inhabit cold countries; nor do we find it agreeable in
the hottest countries, for there the transpirations are so great,
that the strongest liquors are scarcely powerful enough to sup-
ply the great expence of spirits.
Query.
Acknowledging that all dealings with the devil are abominably
sinful, I desire to know, whether it is lawful to apply to those
who profess fortune-telling.
Answer.
As the having recourse to such pretenders is too epidemical
a distemper, so the solution of the question may be of public
utility; but we may draw a very cogent argument against it,
from your own acknowledgments; for what assurance can you
have that the persons you apply to have no dealings with in-
fernal spirits? and if they themselves imagine, that they have
nothing to do with them, yet you know not but those subtile
agents may have intercourse with them, as it were incognito,
and influence their proceedings, though unknown to them.
To this purpose we would present you with an authentic story:
a gentleman used to busy himself that way, and from the
schemes he had drawn, foretold several events; but perusing his
schemes afterwards, and finding them notoriously false, he was
strangely surprised, that true consequences should follow from
such fallacious premises; whence, fearing the concurrence of
an infernal agency, he wisely bid adieu to that suspected art.
But let us suppose nothing in the case but the rules of art ;
What art or science can acquaint us with the designs of Provi-
dence, with the intention of our all-wise disposer What re-
searches can make us know the mind of the Lord—can qualify
us to become his counsellors And, could human learning
enable us to perform such wonders, what warrant have we to
dive into the secrets of the Almighty, to invade our sovereign's
prerogative, and boldly intrude upon those things which the
Father hath reserved in his own breast, and you know withal,
who has said, “ It is not for you to know the times and sea-
sons; take no thought for the morrow, for the morrow shall
322 G ALE’s RECREATIONS.
take thought for the things of itself; sufficient for the day is
the evil thereof 7" And the same divine person is so far from
allowing you to pry into futurity, that he commands you to
pray only for your daily bread; and since God has forbid you
the desire of knowing what shall be hereafter, you may well
conclude, that it is best for you not to know it; and that such
knowledge, as it is too wonderful for you, so also it is such as
you cannot, without prejudice to yourself, attain to.
Under so unlawful a pretension, we may include palmistry,
physiognomistry, &c. with the unwarrantable proceedings on
St. Agnes’ and other days, which are the unchristian relicts of
Heathenish superstition. Let therefore this useful sentence re-
strain so unjustifiable a practice,—Commit your way unto the
Lord, and he shall bring it to pass.
Query.
What occasions that numbness and pricking pain which
sometimes happen in the hands and feet (commonly called
their limbs asleep), whereby the parts so affected are for some
time rendered incapable of feeling or motion ?
Answer.
That numbness, or pricking pain, generally follows the
compression, or constriction of the parts so affected, whereby
the course of the animal spirits through the nerves is ob-
structed, and consequently the sense of feeling in a great mea-
sure diminished.
Query.
Is a man in point of conscience obliged to marry a woman
whose affection he hath gained, if her father will not give her
the fortune he hath promised, as it is evident he will not in
the case of your humble Querist, who desires to know whe-
ther the breach of his promise doth not disengage me of mine,
the one being so much the cause of the other, that without it,
it had never been,
Answer.
If your contract was conditional, undoubtedly the lady's
father breaking his part of the obligation, must of course
dissolve your own; but if your circumstances will conve-
*iently allow it, it would be but an act of honor and gene-
G ALE'S RECREATIONS. 323
resity to marry, notwithstanding that, the object of your former
courtship; for we find by your confession, you have gained
her love, and in obtaining that, we must believe you have
made other protestations than that you valued her for what
she was to bring you.
Query.
Is there a passage from the nose to the brain by which the
brain may be injured by taking of snuff?
Answer.
That there are passages from the brain to the nostrils is
most certain, viz. the perforations of the Os Cribrosum, through
which the nervous fibres descend; but they are so small, that
snuff powder cannot be intermitted, or ascend through them
to the brain; yet may the overmuch use of such powders so
fur and clog that bone, that the discharge of excrementatious
humours may be hindered, and the brain consequently very
much injured thereby.
Query.
From whence did that saying arise, of nine tailors making
a man 7
Answer.
It happened (it is no great matter in what year) that eight
tailors having finished considerable pieces of work, at a certain
person of quality's house (whose name authors have thought
fit to conceal), and receiving all the money due for the same,
a Virago servant maid of the house, observing them to be but
slender built animals, and in their mathematical postures on
their shop-board, appearing but so many pieces of men, re-
solved to encounter and pillage them on the road : the better
to compass her design, she procured a terrible great black-
pudding, which (having way-laid them) she presented at the
breast of the foremost ; they mistaking this prop of life for an
instrument of death, at least for a blunderbuss, readily yielded
up their money; but she, not contented with that, severely
disciplined them with a cudgel she carried in the other hand,
all which they bore with a philosophical resignation: thus,
eight not being able to deal with one woman, by consequence,
could not make a man; on which account a ninth is added.
824, GALE's RECREATIONS.
It is the opinion of our curious virtuosos, that this want of
courage ariseth from their intmoderate eating of cucumbers,
which too much refrigerates their blood ; however, to their
etermal honour be it spoken, they have been often known to
encounter a sort of canabals, to whose assaults they are often
subject, not fictious, but real man eaters, and that with a lance,
but two inches long, nay, and although they go armed no
farther than their middle finger.
Query. |
Whether the sun goes round the earth, and the earth
stands still ; or whether they both move, and how they
move 7 -
i
Answer.
We agree with the best modern astronomers, that the sun
is an immoveable centre, round which the planets (of which
the earth is one) move by different revolutions, but the figure
which the earth annually describes is not circular, but ellip-
tical ; which is the reason why she does not continue equi-
distant from the sun; but as once a year she travels round the
sun, so in the compass of 24 hours she moves round her own
axis ; whence arise the alternate successions of night and
day. * -
Query.
Why do we sleep better on the right side than on the
left - -
Answer.
Your sleeping better on the right side than on the left is
no general rule; since some sleep as well, or better on the left
than on the right, it being chiefly owing to custom ; but if you
ask why it is more wholesome to sleep on the right side, it may
be answered, that such a posture is most convenient for the
passage of the chyle through the pylorus, or nether orifice
of the stomach, into the guts and clyliferous vessels, and con-
sequently most proper for digestion. , t
Query, by a Lady.
What benefit doth one receive by kissing? and who was the
inventor of it !
G ALE’s RECREATIG N8.
3
J.
5
Answer.
Ah! Madam, if you had ever had a lover, you would not
have required a solution, since there is no dispute but the kisses
of a mutual lover give infinite satisfaction and pleasure, above
description. As to the inventor of it, it is certain nature was
its author, and that it began with the first courtship.
Query.
Whence arose the custom of drinking healths? and why is
the King's drank before the church;
Answer.
The drinking of healths probably took its rise from the
time of the Danes in this island; it being customary with the
Danes, whilst an Englishman was drinking, to take that op-
portunity of stabbing him : the English upon this entered
into combination to be mutual pledges of security for each
other whilst drinking, so drank to each other's health and
preservation; from thence also came the custom of pledging :
the King being head of the church, his health claims
precedence.
Query.
What are the excellencies and prejudices of Coffee?
Answer.
Coffee is a very great desiccative, it comforts the brain,
dries up crudities in the stomach, and through its alcalous
property is wonderfully beneficial in scrophaions and scorbu-
tical habits of body ; nor can we omit its inconveniences
in respect to some particular constitutions, as being subject to
fur the stomach, engender obstructions, and to cause, rather
than cure (as some will have it) splenetical and hypochondriacal
distempers. -
Query.
Why does tickling produce laughter?
Answer.
... Because when tangible impressions pleasantly assault the
fibres, the spirits implanted there are gathered together and
F
$33.6 G ALE's r Ecº E ATIotºs.
delighted; and this sensation is communicated by the nerves
to the common sensory, whence the imagination and praecordia
are in such a manner affected.
Query.
What is the cause of the Cramp 2
Answer.
It is caused by the evil disposition of the animal spirits,
which being burdened with heterogeneous particles, and at
length irritated, attempt an explosion thereof, but being thi:k
and viscous, and consequently more tenacious, are shut up
within the fleshy fibres, and the longer detained in the expan-
Sion ; or it may be imputed to the constriction or ill comfor-
mation of the tendons, whereby the reflux of the spirits from
the muscular fibres is obstructed.
Query.
Whence comes the proverb, As drunk as David's Sow 3
Answer.
David Lloyd, a Welshman, kept an ale-house in the town of
Hereford, and had a kind of monstrous sow, with six legs,
which he showed to customers as a valuable rarity.
This David's wife would often use to make herself quite
drunk, and then lie down to sleep an hour or two, that she
might qualify herself for the performance of her business; but
one day, the house was full, and she could find no other place
to sleep in but the hog-stye, where her husband kept the sow
above named, on clean straw, so she very orderly went in and
fell asleep by her harmonious companion; but the sow no
sooner found the door upon the jar, but out she slipt, and
rambled to a considerable distance from the yard, in joy for
her deliverance.
David had that day some relations come to see him, who
had been against his marrying, and to give them an opinion of
his prudent choice, he took occasion to inform them, he was
sorry, that his wife was abroad, because he would have had
them see her; “ For,” says David, “surely never man was
hetter matched, or met with a more honest, sober wife than 1
am blest in.”
GAL E S R NCREATIONS. 327
They congratulated his good fortune, and were, after a
short time, desired by David to see the greatest wonder of a
sow that ever had been heard of in the world : he led them
to the hog-stye door, and opening it to its full wideness, the
first thing they saw was his good wife, in such a posture and
condition, as upon her starting up, and calling David husband,
gave occasion for a hearty fit of taughter, and the proverb you
have mentioned.
Query.
Doth the law of God, or the law of this land, forbid
cousin germans to marry 7 If so, why is it ever allowed of . If
not, why is it generally said that they never live happily and
prosperously together ?
Answer.
The marriage of cousin germans comes not within the
prohibition prescribed us by our English laws; nor can we
say, that it is forbid by a superior power, since not included in
the catalogue of unlawful marriages, and so fully represented
in Lev. 18. As for the usual saying, that such marriages never
prosper, since it is the vulgar opinion, that the nearness of the
kindred should forbid the banns, the notion therefore may
proceed from hence, namely, that more notice may be taken
of an unprosperous than of a prosperous match ; but however
that be, this must be allowed, that the rule is not without ex-
ception: but after all, we think it more eligible to forbear,
since, as it would be thought generous to pay a deference to
so common an opinion, so it may be accounted discreetly
done not to venture upon the very first remove from so noto-
rious an impiety as that of incest; and therefore, though we
would not impose any restraint upon the couple specified, we
would yet acquaint them, that though, if they marry, they
may do well, yet, if they forbear, they will do better. We
therefore think it more adviseable to refer the case to that
apostolical assertion, “All things are lawful for me, but all
things are not convenient.”
Query.
Was the virgin Mary a perpetual virgin &
F f Q
328 s ALE’s RECREATIONS.
Answer.
The argument drawn from that expression, “ Thy mother
aid thy brethren stand without, &c.”—to disprove her a per-
petual virgin, carries no matter of conviction with it, since
it was customary with the Jews to represent near relations
under the endearing stile of brethren : and yet, had there been
no such custom, they might have been Joseph's children by a
former wife. If to this it be replied, that, as Joseph was the
elder line, so his children were nearer to the crown than Mary's,
and consequently her son could have no title to be king of the
Jews, we answer, that God indeed made a sure oath unto
David, that his seed should sit upon his seat for ever, but never
promised the succession to the elder line; and this reply is
the more confirmed, in that the son of David was to be a spi-
ritual, not a temporal king; in that the prophecy, he shall have
dominion also from sea to sea was to be fulfilled in a mystical
intendment, agreeable to the profession of that very Son of
David, my kingdom is not of this world: and as this is a
conſutation also to that similar objection which may be started
in defence of the other side, namely, that Joseph never knew
his wife, because his children by her must have been preferred
to the Blessed Jesus, as, what has been already said, is equally
a confutation to this objection also ; so we may consider too,
that Joseph might have known his wife without any necessity
of having children by her; that if Mary would have naturally
borne him children, yet since children are a gift that cometh
of the Lord, that God, to whom, as the Jews express it, the
key of the womb belongs, might have purposely restrained her
natural fertility, and, as it were, have said to the blessed Virgin,
thus far (namely to the birth of the Holy Jesus), thus far shalt
thou go and no farther.
Some allege, that those expressions, Joseph knew her not,
till she had brought forth her first born son, plainly intimates,
that he knew her afterwards;–to which others (among whom
is the excellent Bishop Pearson) make, as they think, a very
clear reply, namely, that from parallel expressions in the scrip-
tures it appears, that there is no necessity for such an intimation.
But we beg leave to observe, that in the various instances they
produce, there is not one parallel to the case before us; for if
in them no such intimation presents itself, it is, because there is
an obvious, an apparent reason for it. To give you a specimen.
G|A LE’s R. ECREATIONS. 629
In 1. Sarr. 15. 35, we read, “And Samuel came no more to
see Saul, until the day of his death.” Now, since the passage
signifies, that Samuel came no more to see Saul, as long as he
lived, there is a palpable reason, why it cannot be intiniated,
that he came to see him afterwards; name}y, because it was
impossible he should : whereas no impossibility can be alledged
in Joseph's case. •
Our Lord, say some, is called the first born son of Mary;
and the mention of a first, say they, implies a second ; but this
objection is readily confuted by the scripture usage of the
phrase, as may appear from Exod. 13. 2. “Sanctify to me all
the first-born;" for they who had but one child were from
that command obliged to sanctify him to God.
A learned man concludes it at least improbable that Joseph
should so long cohabit with his wife without the knowledge
of her, since we no where read, that God had enjoined him sö.
severe an abstinence; but to this we answer, that we no where
read, that Joseph was commanded to abstain till she had brought
forth her first-born son ; and therefore the argument proves
too much, since it proves withal, that he did not abstain till
she had brought forth her first-born son : and yet this is con-
trary to the text.
We need not wonder, that the ancients were of opinion,
that Mary was a perpetual virgin, since they exalted virginity
to so high a pitch; nor that Origin was so strenuous a de-
fender of that opinion, since he so grossly misapplied a sentence
of our Lord's concerning virginity; nor that the Romanists
are of the same mind with the ancients, since they look upon
a marriage-state as not sufficiently pure for holy orders.
As we may be ready to conclude, that she remained a virgin,
while we consider her high prerogative as mother of our Lord,
as having been overshadowed by the Holy Ghost; so this con-
sideration is wonderfully enfeebled by these suggestions, namely,
what she was afterwards reflects mothing upon what she was
before ; that marriage is honourable and the bed undefiled;
that that holy state is dignified with being an emblem of
Christ's union with the church.
And thus we have thought it proper to examine the argu-
ments on both sides, and propose the objectious they are liable
to, rather than determine the matter in debate, as thinking it
best to follow the great St. Bassil's advice, and leave so contro-
F f 3
330 G ALE'S RECR EATIONs.
verted a point ad hue sub dudice, since it is of small concern to
the mystery of the redemption. #
- Query.
May, Pilate be accused of consenting to the death of
Christ
Answer.
Can we doubt of this, when the text expressly says, He
delivered him to be crucified ? It is true, indeed, he pronounced
him innocent, but therefore inexcusable, since in the court of
his own conscience he must be thence empleaded of knowingly,
or wilfully shedding innocent blood ; we cannot therefore
sufficiently admire the preposterous behaviour of this unjust
judge, who had the confidence to wash his hands, and declare
himself guiltless of the very blood he was going spill ; but
if the mail was so strangely stupid, (for it is of the nature of
sia to infatuate the sinney) as that Iris heart condemned him
Ilot, God was greater that, his heart, and knew all things; for
vcıigeance overtook him with an unwelcome speed; for Vitel-
lius, governor of Syria, deposed him from his government, aud
sent him to Rome, to answer before Tiberius to the charges
that were laid against him : and though Tiberius died before
lis arrival, yet the guilty wretch received not his pardon from
the new emperor, but was banished by Caligula to Vienna in
Gau) ; where being wearied out with the emperor's perse-
cutious, he became his own executioner, and dispatched him-
Seif. As Judas had done the same before, so the betrayer and
condenimér of our Lord, in compensation as it were, both
betrayed and condemned themselves. He who delivered up
the Son of God, rather than be suspected as not a friend to
Caesar, found an enemy in himself and in Caesar too. That
very method (0 the wonders of an over-ruling Providence )
whereby it was his design to promote his welfare, became un-
fortunately, but justly, the occasion of his falling.
“They, says our Lord to Pilate, who delivered me unto
thee have the greater sin:” whence we have at once Pilate's.
sin plainly intimated to us, and are made acquainted too, that
injustice, when proceeding from spite and malice, is more
criminal than when proceediug from any other cause. And
this may sure engage us to put away the old leaven, the leaven
ºf malice and wickedness, the leaven of the Pharisees, as our
G. A ſ. E's RECREATIONS. 33 1
Saviour calls it, of those very Płiarisees who delivered Christ
to Pilate: to put away that old ieaved, and eat the unleave Bed
bread of sincerity and truth.
Query.
I desire to know the meaning of the third Heavcº,
2. Cor. xii. 2.
Af , , ºf º Aº ‘rººm
At PA Stºë 7".
There is a number frequently made use of to denote a
superiority of degrees: thus ter fºe; i.e., thrice happy, signifies
no more than very happy ; and therefore the third Heaven is
designed by the apostie to express the highest Heaven, the place
where the shechinah, or divine presence, displays itself to the
blessed angels. Not that iron; hence we can gather any thing
of the situation of ii eaven, or a local Heaven, since this may
be no more than a condesceusive accommodation to hºulian
capacity.
Query.
The Chinese give an account for 500 years (or thereabouts)
before our bille: now, if their account be true, our's must
be false, which I am well satisfied in myself it is not, but that
will not do in arguinent ; so I beg the favour of you to help me
Out. - -
Answer.
The Divine Providence, for the confirmation of believers
and the conviction of infidels, has so wisely, (and give us leave
to add) so mercifully contrived the matter, that the Chinese
historians stand self-condemned, and are confuted by them-
selves; and this is observable in remarkable particulars:
1. They speak of a memorable conjunction of the five
planets in one of their signs, while the sun and moon were
also in conjunction, during the reign of their fifth monarch,
Chuenhio; which observation, a celebrated astronomer, by
a nice calculation, has, without danger of being objected to,
placed about 500 years later than the tenor of their relations
does infer. - - -
2. They say also, that in the time of their seventh emperor,
Yao, the winter solstice was about fifty degrees from the place
where it was a few years ago ; whence astronomers acquaint
332 G ALE’s R v CREATIONS.
us, that the phaenomenon (if the observation was accurately
taken), must have necessarily occurred near the forementioned
number of years iater than as represented in their chronology.
We insist not on the argument drawn from the common
period of human life in the reigns of their early monarchs,
since that depends upon a conſparison with scripture history,
whereas we are confuting those who deny the authority of the
bible ; and indeed we have no occasion for the argument,
when furnished with two so indisputable as those above.
To point out the original of the Chinese mistake, it is a
more than probable hypothesis, that they (as did also the
Egyptians) reckoned some ancient collateral princes in a suc-
cessive line; for there are remarkable passages in their histories,
that evince, not only that this observation of a great chro-
nologer has a probable foundation, but also that it is impossible
it should be otherwise.
And how, since those opposers of our accounts do yet plead
for us, and our very enemies (though unwillingly, nay, perhaps
unknowingly) are at peace with us, shall we not believe the
: Criptures with a steady and unshaken mind; and leat iſ, for the
time to come, not to be stantled at seeming difficulties.
Query.
Do Spirits see, or are they blind 2
Answer.
They neither see, nor yet are blind : but then we must
anderstand sight as the natural effects of corporeal sensation ;
for spirits have undoubtedly something analogous to it. But
though we know little of immaterial substances, but by way
of negation, yet we may form some imperfect idea concerning
the object of the question from what metaphysicians acquaint
as of the sensation of seeing; for they tell us (and that very
rationally too), that the eye is but the instrument of sight,
whereas it is the soul that really sees; but as that incomparable
member is the vehicle by which embodied spirits enjoy the
benefit of vision, so in what manner unbodied ones enjoy the
same benefit, we shall ever be at a loss to know, titl disengaged
froin these fleshy tabernacles,
G ALE'S RECREAT loss. 3.33
Query.
Why are the rocks on which Sir Cloudesly, in return from
his successful expedition to Thoulon, was cast away upon,
commonly called the Bishop and his Clerks :
Answer.
A fleet of merchant ships in their return from Spain, about
two hundred years ago, were shipwrecked on those fatal rocks,
annong whose miserable numbers none were saved but three,
Miles Bishop, James and Henry Clerk, preserved miraculously
on a broken mast: it was thence the scene of their misfortune
took the name it hears at present, and has ever siuee that nie-
morable accident vulgarly been known by.
Query.
A. commits a secret murder, for which he flew from justice,
and in his exile comes acquainted with B. who in five or six
years acquaintance, expresses great friendship to A. with signal
and repeated obligations, till within this month, A. for a trifle
highly disobliges B. who is so enraged to find himself so af-
fronted, protests that his misdemeanour to B. shall cost him his
life, for that he will discover the residence of the said A. to the
relations of the deceased, so that A. may be brought to justice.
Now the fact being true, and the relation also impartial,
whether it is a crime in B. to fulfil his protestations; and al-
though it is coherent to the laws of the land, yet in the sight
of the Aimighty, whether it may be proper for men to imagine
it ºpso facto murder, since it is not (tone for the sake of justice,
but to sacrifice A. to the resentments of the other, of what
nature and degree do you think the crime !
Answer.
Since the blood of a murdered person crieth unto God for
vengeance, and, unless pacitied, defileth a land, our ºuty both
to God aud our country lays on us an indispensible obligation
to detect, if in our power, the inhuman actor. Were not B.
previously obliged to make a discovery of A. his protestations
could no way engage him to the pursuit of 'ns revenge, since
nothing can oblige us to an unwarrantable ºctiºn. When
Herod had rashly sworn to what involved him in no small per-
plexity, he site'uu have feared, not his oath as the murderer of
3.34. & ALE'S RECR tº ATIONS.
the innocent, and have penitently bewailed his rashness, in
that he had made perjury become necessary. The best there-
fore, may the only advice we can give B. is to repent of the
protestations he has made with so wicked an intention, to di-
west himself of any revengeful thoughts, to put on the christian
towards his offending brother, and yet at the same time, by a
necessary discovery, to offer him up a sacrifice to his country,
to his God: but if he refuses to make this atonement for
the deceased, he does in a manner, repeat the language of the
Jews, His blood be upon me, and upon my children.
Query.
Why is it common in our church to bit when a chapter is
read out of any evangelist, and yet to stand when the gospel
for the day is read Î
Answer.
It was the custom in the primitive church, to stand when
any thing was read out of the evangelists; and therefore it is
remarked by an ecclesiastial historian as an unprecedented thing
in an Alexandrian bishop, in that he used not to rise at the
reading of the gospels. But why we rise to the gospel for the
day, and not to the second lesson, we presume to be, because
the former is introduced with “Glory be to thee, O Lord!”
which, as being an hymn of praise, is proper to be repeated in
a standing posture.
Query.
I desire to know, why the masculine gender is generally
said to be the more worthy gender, notwithstanding all or most
virtues are of the feminine, by which man seems to have no-
thing to do with virtue 3
Answer.
Though the virtues are of the feminine gender, yet men
being, by their labours, studies and applications, masters of
those virtues, the nasculine gender is more worthy than the
feminine ; the possessor being more worthy than the possessed.
Query.
Why have beasts the faculty of moving their ears, and not
men 7
G ALE's RecREATIONS. 335,
Answer.
Because several beasts have muscles, constituted for that
end, which meu have not, and may be called erectors and
depressors, which move the ears upwards and downwards,
though some beasts want them as well as men.
Query. -
In what respect is Noah called the eighth preacher of right-
teousness, 2. Pet. 2. 5. seeing in the genealogy of the Patriarch,
Gen. 5, he is reckoned the eleventh, inclusively 3
º Answer.
As Noah is not the eleventh, but the tenth, in the genealogy
you mention, so the ordinal eighth in St. Peter is joined to per-
son, not to preacher of righteousness; and relates to the num-
ber of those who were saved in the ark from perishing in the
deluge, as the text evidently shews. But because the stiling of
Noah the eighth person of those that were rescued from the
flood, may seem to denote him the last of the eighth, whereas
he was the first; we must know, that the phrase may always
signify one in eight, or that Noah, with seven more, was saved
from that common calamity,+a propriety of speech to be
found also in prophane authors.
Query.
Why does a seed taken from a flower of one colonr produce
a flower of various colours ?
Answer.
The diversity of colours proceeding only from the different,
either figure or position of those particles which constitute the
surface of a body, by making a different reflection and refrac-
tion of the rays of light falling upon them, to produce a va-
riety of colours in a flower, nothing more is requisite than
that some alteration be made in the situation of those parts,
out of which its superficies is composed; which may be easily
effected by some small difference in its nutritious juice, or by
the ambient air.
Query.
From whence rain first came,
836 GALE'S RECREATIONs.
Answer.
The rain first proceeds from the vapours attracted from the
earth and waters, which meeting together, condense into clouds,
and becoming at length too ponderous to be suspended in the
air, break, and shower down again upon the earth and waters.
- Query.
Whether the howling of a dog under the chamber of a
sick person is any prognostic of the mortality of the patient's
disease. If so, how do you imagine those creatures should be
sensible of it? The Querist was induced to give you this
trouble by some very particular observations.
Answer.
Whether the dog's howling may be a fatal prognostic or
not, we cannot determine; but it is probable, that out of a sense
of sorrow for the sickness or absence of his master, or the
like, that creature may be so disturbed : an eminent instance
whereof may be found in Dr. Lee's Nat. Hist. of a dog, that,
during his master's illness, constantly attended him, and after
the geutleman was expired, and his corpse moved, the dog
every moment entered the room, making a mournful and
whining noise, and prosecuted his researches for several days
through all the rooms in the house, but in vain; then he retired
into his kepnel, where, refusing all manner of sustenance, he
died. A greater sense of sorrow could not be shewn by any
creature whatever.
Query.
Pray demonstrate that rule in specious arithmetic, that to
take away an affirmative quantity is to add a negative, and
to, &c.
Answer.
An affirmative quantity denotes the possession of such a sum,
but a negative quantity implies the absence of it, or a debt of
such a value; as therefore, when from my possession of 100l.
the possession of 60l. is taken away, I am then worth 40l. so
when to my possession of 100l. is added a debt which I must
pay of 60l. I am then worth the same 40l.
& ALE's RECREATIONs. 337ſ
* Query.
Why springs in summer are more cold
Than winter, pray the cause unfold 3
Answer.
Those limpid streams retrieve their heats
From earth's recluse sulphureous seats;
Which winter time preserves entire,
And which in summer time perspire.
Query.
Why is an egg so hard to break the length way, and yet so
easy the other 3 -
Answer.
Because the two ends of the egg are so globular, that the
stress of the pressure declines towards the cohesion of its
parts; which is the reason why an arch will bear more weight
than a flat.
Query.
I desire your opinion of the following passage of scrip-
ture, Luke xxii. 36: “He that hath no sword, let him buy
one;” which seems to contradict the other passage in Matth.
xxvi. 52. “ They that take the sword shall perish with the
sword.”
Answer.
As the latter shews us, that the true spirit of the gospel is
abhorrent of the least tincture of revenge, productive of no
other fruits than the peaceable fruits of righteousness; so the
former is a kind of emblematical command, which hierogly-
phically, as it were, pre-signifies the terrible persecutions that
were approaching, so terrible indeed, that it would be necessary
for the christian to purchase a sword at the expence of his very
garment, would his religion but permit the use of it.
Query.
Whether the invention of Gunpowder has done most good
or hurt, -
G
(y
o
858 GALE'S RECREATIONs.
Answer.
Most good undoubtedly; for as it is very useful on several
accounts, without any mischievous effects attending it, so in
war itself, where it is most destructive, it is rather a preserver
than destroyer of men; since in our modern accounts we meet
not with such proportional numbers slain in battle as we read
of in ancient histories.
Query.
Condescend, I beseech you, to give me your opinion, whether
the violent passion of love, very ill-treated, does not conse-
quently turn to hatred.
Answer.
Not consequently, for it much oftener produces despair; but
we see different effects of that ungovernable passion, according
to the different constitutions of those it seizes.
Query. -
Admit a person to see any inaccessable object situate across
a river not too far off, and wishing to know the exact distance
thereof—Required by what means he may find the same ; he
having no instrument, usual for that purpose, at that time about
him.
Answer.
The line to be measured must not be extravagantly long,
otherwise it will be hard to measure it exactly ; for the least
failure of a just aim, or departure from an upright position,
would make very sensible errors in the measure of a very long
line, especially if the ground is somewhat uneven.
To measure then the line A B (PlateWI. Fig. 5.) accessible
at the extremity A, suppose the breadth of a small river, he
who pretends to measure muststand very straight at the cxtremity
A, and support his chin with a little stick, resting upon one of
the buttons of his coat, so as to keep his head steady in one
position: thus posited, he must pull his hat down upon his
forehead, till the brim of his hat cover from his view the in-
accessible extremity B of the line to be measured A B ; then he
must turn himself to a level uniform piece of ground, and
with the same position of his hat, observe the point of the
GALE’s RECREATIONs. . 839
ground where his view terminates, as C; then measuring with
a line or chain the distance A C, he has the length of the line
proposed, A B. -
Query.
The genuine sense of Gen. vi. 2. “ The sons of God saw
the daughters of men, and that they were fair, and they took
wives of all which they chose.”
Answer.
The sons of God were the children of Seth, who were the
holy seed; and the sons of men were the posterity of Cain,
who were a prophane generation.
340 gale's RECREATIons.
*...'s "... ...”Gh.”0-sm— ***-** * >
APPENDIX.
©ptitg.
There being several things in Optics which are easy to be
wnderstood, and not generally known ; we shall here add a
few, and first of all the
DEFINITIONS.
1. VyhATEVER grants a passage to light is called a
medium.
2. By rays of light are understood its least parts, either suc-
eessive in the same lines, or cotemporary in several lines.
It is clear that light consists of parts both successive and co-
temporary, because in the same place you may stop that which
comes one moment, and let pass that which comes immediately
after : the least sensible part which may be stopped, or suffered
to proceed, is caled a ray of light.
3. Refrangibility is that disposition of a ray of light to be
refracted, or turned out of its course, when it passes out of one
medium into another.
When a ray of light passes out of a rarer medium into a
denser, Sir I. Newton supposes that is is refracted by the
superior attraction of the denser medium, and by that means
drawn out of its course,
çALE's RecREATIons. 341
4. Reflexibility is that disposition of a ray of light to be
reflected, or turned back into the same medium from any other
medium upon whose surface it may fall. 3.
Sir I. Newton supposes that light is not reflected by im-
pinging upon the solid parts of the body, but by some power
of the body which is evenly diffused all over its surface, and
by which it acts upon the ray, and impels it back without im-
mediate contact.
5. Inflection is that disposition of a ray of light to be turned
out of its course when it passes very near to the edges of bodies.
6. The angle of incidence is the angle which the line de-
scribed by the incident ray makes with the perpendicular to the
reflecting or refracting surface at the point of incidence.
7. The angle of reflection or refraction is the angle which
the line described by the reflected or refracted ray makes with
the perpendicular to the reflecting or refracting surface at the
point of incidence. * * • *
S. Any parcel of rays diverging from a point, considered as
separate from the rest, is called a pencil of rays.
9. A lens is a medium bounded by two spherical, or one
plain and one spherical surface; and the line joining the centres,
or which passes perpendicularly through each surface, is called
the axis. -
There are six lenses, a double convex, a double concave, a
plano-convex, a plano-concave, a concave-convex, and a
meniscus. ;
10. The focus of ray is that point from which they diverge,
or to which they converge. -
The focus of parallel rays is called the principal focus.
The suu's light consists of rays of different colours, and
differently refrangible. -
For if the sun's rays be admitted into a dark room through
a small hole in a window, shutter, and be refracted through a
prism, the image is not round, but a long figure with parallel
sides and semicircular ends, the length of which is above five
times its breadth; that end which has suffered the least refrac-
tion is red, and that which has suffered the greatest is violet:
the whole image consists of seven distinct colours, lying in
the following order, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo,
violet; the red is the least refrangible, and the others more in
their order: these are called primary colours, all other colours
being only different combinations of these. Each colour forms
3 &
342 . GALE's recreations.
a distinct image of the sun, which images, in this experiment,
running into each other, make a gradual change of colour in
the image; but if a convex lens be placed before the prism,
each image will be diminished, and by that means they will be
separated, and each rendered distinct. -
If two coloured images be formed with two prisms, and
thrown one upon the other, then if that image be looked at
through a prism, the images will be again separated.
The primary colours cannot be separated into other colours
by any refraction.
For if in the last experiment all the colours but one be
stopped, for instance, the red, and that be again refracted by a
prism, it suffers no alteration in colour. By suffering the
colours to pass in succession, from the red, each preserves its
colour, but the quantity of refraction keeps increasing. The
image of each colour is perfectly circular, which shews that
the light of each colour is refracted regularly without any
dilatation of the rays; it is therefore incompounded, or homo-
geneal. .
If the breadth of each colour in the spectrum formed by the
prism be measured, it will appear that the breadth of the red,
orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, violet, are as the numbers
45, 27, 48, 60, 60, 40, 80, respectively.
If the circumference of a circle be divided into 450, 279,
480, 600, 600, 400, 800, and the respective sectors be painted
red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, violet, and the circle
be turned swiftly, it will appear nearly white; for the ideas
we have from the impression of light remain for a short time,
and thus the colours excite the same sensation as if they all
entered the eye collected together.
If the direct image of the sun through a small hole be re-
ceived upon a screen perpendicular to the rays, and the rays
be then intercepted by a prism, and fall perpendicularly on the
first side, if the distance from the place of the direct image to
the pearest edge of the red and farthest of the violet be mea-
sured, they will be the tangents of the angles of deviation, and
the radius of which is the distance from the point where the
rays emerge to the place of the direct image.
The angle of incidence on the second side of the prism
cqual the refracting angle of the prism, to which add the
deviations of the two extreme colours, and we get the two
angles of refraction, the sines of which will be to the sines of
GALE’s RECREATIONs. 343
incidence as 77 and 78 to 50: hence, if the difference between
77 and 78 be divided in the ratio of the breadth of each colour,
it gives for the sines of refraction, the common sine of inci-
dence, being 50; that is, the sine of incidence: the sine of
refraction of the red rays: : 50: not less than 77, nor greater
than 77 1-8th, the boundary of the red; and the same for the rest.
Candle-light is of the same nature as the light from the sun;
for rays from a candle may be separated into all the dis-
ferent colours, and they lie in the same order as in the light
from the sun. *
The sun's light consists of rays which differ in reflexibility,
and those rays which are most refrangible are most reflexible.
For after forming a coloured image, as before, with a prism,
by turning the prism about its axis, until the rays within it
which, in going out into the air were refracted at its base,
become so oblique to the base as to begin to be totally reflected
thereby, those rays become first reflected which before, at equal
incidences with the rest, had suffered the greatest refraction.
According to Sir I. Newton, the colours of natural bodies
arise from hence, that some reflect one sort of rays, and another
sort more copiously than the rest. . .
For every body looks most splendid in the light of its own
colour, and therefore it reflects that the most copiously : be-
sides, by reflection you cannot change the colour of any sort
of rays; and as bodies are seen by reflection, they must appear
of the colour of those rays which they reflect. This is the
opinion of Sir I. Newton; but Mr. Delaval accounts for the
colours of natural bodies in a manuer different from this. See
the Manchester Memoirs, Vol. II. -
Thin transparent substances, as glass, water, air, &c. exhibit
various colours according to their thickness. -
For a very thin glass bubble, or a bubble of water, will.
appear to have concentric colours: the bubble blown with
water, first made tenacious by dissolving a little soap in it,
continually grows thinner at the top by the subsiding of the
water, the rings of colours dilating slowly, and overspreading
the whele bubble. A convex and coneave lens of nearly the
same curvature being pressed closely together, exhibit rings of
colours about the point where they touch. Between the colours,
there are dark rings, and when the glasses are very much com-
pressed, the central spot is dark. Sir L. Newton, to whens.
344. GALR's RECREATIONs.
we owe all these discoveries, found the thickness of the air
between the glasses where the colours appeared to be as 1, 3,
5, 7, 9, &c. and the thickness where the dark rings appeared
to be as 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, &c. the coloured rings must have
appeared from the reflection of the light, and the dark rings
from the transmission of the light; the rays therefore were
transmitted when the thickness of the air was 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, &c.
and reflected at the thickness 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, &c. Sir I.
Newton therefore supposes, that every ray of light in its
passage through any refracting surface is put into a certain con-
stitution or state, which in the progress of the ray returns at
equal intervals, and disposes the ray at every return to be easily
transmitted through the next refracting surface, and between
the returns to be easily reflected by it. These he calls fits of
easy transmission and reflection.
LIGHT AND HEAT TWO DISTINCT BEINGS.
The following propositions relating to the nature of Fire, and
the following laws of its motion, are taken from Dr. Hil-
dary's Book upon that subject, and are so curious, that a.
wopy of them will, I believe, please many of our readers:
PROPOSITION.
I. Fire is a being which exists in all places, or in every
part of space in the whole universe.
II. Pure fire is a real body, and consists of the most simple,
solid, hard, smooth, and smallest elementary particles of all
matter yet known.
III. Pure fire is one and the same being in all places; or
there is but one species of fire existing in nature. *.
IV. Pure elementary fire penetrates, pervades, rarefies, and
expands all other bodies in the universe, both solid and fluid,
which fall, under the observation of our senses; and this
power is peculiar to fire only, and to no other body that we
yet know of.. -
GALE’s RECREATIONS. 345
V. Pure fire is a body without gravity; and has no more
tendency to any one part of space than it has to any other
part. -
VI. Pure fire exists in a state of equilibrium, and rests in
every part of space, till that state is changed by the motion of
other bodies, or by the directing power of the sun; and those
ceasing to act on it, it restores itself by its repulsive power to
the state of equilibrium and rest again.
L A. W.
I. Fire is attracted and collected by the motion and attrition
of all other bodies.
II. The elementary particles of fire are in a constant state
of repulsion to each other; and the nearer they are brought
to contact, the greater is their repulsive force from each other.
III. Fire is put in motion in parallel right lines, by light
emitted from the sun, and caused to move with force, and
produce heat and more light.
These propositions and laws, the Doctor proves by many
curious experiments as well as arguments; and he concludes,
that fire and light are two different and distinct beings, which
he likewise proves by experiments as well as argument. One
of the former sort of proofs he gives us as follows:
“First, it is evident and universally acknowledged, that the
moon is a body which has no light but what it receives from
the sun.” w
“Then let us place a concave speculum, as that of Villet's,
with which the experiment has been made, opposite to the
moon when she is at the full, in a serene cold might, and the
light which the moon receives from the sun will be reflected
from it upon the speculum, and from thence into its focus,
where a most resplendent and refulgent light will be seen, al-
most equal to that received and reflected by the same speculum
from the sun, only a little paler; then place a thermometer,
which is easily removed by the least degree of heat or fire, as
that of Drebbellius in that refulgent focus, and we shall find that
the air in the thermometer will not be in the least expanded or
moved; and shews, that there is no more fire in that focus
than there was before the resplendent light was collected there,
or was then in the circumambient air, though so great a quart-
346 GALE’s RECREATIONs.
tity of light was in that focus at the same time. This experi-
ment demonstrates, that a great quantity of very bright reful-
gent light may be collected, and can exist alone in a given
space, without any addition of heat, or any increase of the
quantity of fire: it also shews, that this light, which comes
from the sun, is, when thus reflected from the moon, so
changed in its power of acting on fire, that it has totally lost
its power of putting the pre-existing fire in motion in parallel
right lines, and producing heat. The same experiment being
made, though with a much less speculum, within the torrid
zone, where so great a quantity of fire existed in the common
air where the experiment was made, that it caused the mercury
in Farenheit's thermometer to rise as high as 80 degrees; yet the
reflected light from the moon, which was so refulgent in the
focus of that glass speculum, did not in the least act on that
pre-existing fire, so as to put its particles in motion, nor pro-
duce the least increase of fire or heat: hence it is evident,
that as this great light neither acts as fire, nor produces the
same effects which fire does, it consequently is not fire.”
Query,
Why does the sun extinguish a culinary fire, and yet not put
out the flame of a farthing candle? - -
A Answer.
The properties of fire are not yet thoroughly known ; thus
for instance in many of our mines in England: in some, the
miners are obliged to work by the light of a steel wheel striking
against a number of flints, for the flame of a candle would at
once set the whole mine on fire; in other mines, they are
obliged to work by the light of a candle, and a single spark
from a flint and steel would set the mine into a blaze : now
with regard to the question in hand, the blaze of a culinary
fire is of such a nature, that it requires a strong body of air for
its support; but the warm sun beaming in through a window,
rarefies the air, and takes away that fuel (if I may so call it)
which feeds the fire: on the other hand, the flame of a can-
dle is such, that it requires the smallest and evenest quantity of
air to keep it alive; therefore the rarefaction caused by the
beams of the sun can have no power upon it.
G A LE'S RECREATIONS. 347
Query.
It is well known, from repeated observations, that in hot
weather, when the sun has shined for several days successively,
the effect of the burning glass is much weaker than when the
sun shines immediately after a shower. Required the reason of
this phoenomenon.
Answer.
From experience it is well known, that heat exhales from
the earth a prodigious number of sulphureous homogeneous
particles, which by their gravity float in the atmosphere, absorb,
and prevent the incorporating rays from falling parallel, or
with such great coalescence upon the mirror; whence, im-
mediately after a shower, the rain precipitating the sulphureous
particles, purges the air of its absorbing matter, so that the
numerous converging rays fall parallel upon the mirror, and are
driven against the combustible body with an incredible, su-
superlative, inflammable force.
A curious Query by Mr. Newton Bosworth, Peterborough,
taken from Whiting's Mathematical and Philosophical
Delights, No. 9, lately published, and an Answer by Mr.
Gregory.
It has been proved by repeated experiments, that neither
spirits of wine, nor any other inflammable liquor, can be set on
fire by any burning glass yet made use of. How is this curious
phoenomenon to be accounted for 2
Answer.
So long as it was the general received opinion that the sun
was a body of fire, and that the solar rays were hot, it must
appear a very singular phoenomenon, that spirits of wine could
not be set on fire by a burning glass, when the same means
would fuse iron and gold, calcine fossils, and vitrify tiles and
pumice stones. I know not what methods have been hitherto
made use of to account for this, nor can I readily conceive
how it can be done satisfactorily, without according to the
opinions lately proposed concerning the uature of the sun.
Several weighty arguments have been offered by Dr. Herschel
and others, to shew that in all probability the sun is but little
hotter than the earth we inhabit, and that of course, the rays
348 t GALE's RECREATIons.
which are emitted from him (or more probably from his at-
mosphere) are not hot: they produce heat, only when acting
upon some peculiar kinds of matter, as the collision of flint and
steel produce fire, though neither of them are hot. * 9
Bodies are more heated from the action of the sun's rays, in
proportion as they are more dense, or as they are more rough;
they are also more heated in proportion as their colour deviates
from white; and the more opaque bodies are, the more they are
affected by this method of producing heat. -
Perfectly white and perfectly transparent substances have
very little, if any, heat produced in them by the action of the
Sun's rays. These observations are the result of repeated ex-
periments; but to account for the different dispositions of va-
rious substances (as deduced from these experiments) is a task
that cannot very readily be performed, without a further ac-
quaintance with the arcana of nature than has yet fallen to the
lot of short-sighted mortals. k
The Great Architect has, we may be assured, for wise
purposes, given to different substances different qualities and
powers, and with this we perhaps ought to rest satisfied, until
the time arrives when his people shall, separated from this veil
of mortality, view him, and the grand plan of all his works,
as designed from etermity, with enlarged faculties, rapture in-
describabie, and gratitude unbounded".
AN ESSAY ON THE AURORA BOREALIS.
Suppose the earth a great magnet.—That magnetic effluvia
are constantly issuing in great quantities from its North Pole,
and that these move from the north to the southward in the
direction of what is called the magnetic meridian ; that these
effluvia are of a martial or ferrugineous nature, nothing being
magnetical but a substance of that kind, and vice versa.
* But may not the reason be this, viz. the focus falling upon one
point or particle of the fluid that immediately quits its station for
another, and so keeps in a continual state of agitation, still flying
from the centre of the surface in all diſſections; consequently, that
centre will be the hottest particle in the fluid, and must undoubtedly
kindle, if it were not for the state of perturbation the fluid was now
got into, which will resemble a fluid in a state of boiling; this I pre-
sume may be the reason why; for a fluid, though it may be inflamma-
ble, yet put into a vessel over the fire, will never kindle withoºt
boiling. *
GALE’s RECREATIONS. 340
Iron and sulphur, even in their gross bodies, mixed with a
little water, are exceedingly apt to take fire, much more so, when
highly subtilized and attenuated.—The hot mineral waters
probably arise from this, and so many volcanos. All chemists
know with what eagerness sulphur acts upon iron. Several
volcanos, or burning mountains, having been discovered of
late years in and about the north-polar regions, which cast up
sulphureous vapours to an immense height: there are springs
near them the hottest in the world, their heat even equalling
that of boiling water.—May not those sulphureous vapours,
blended with the magnetic or ferruginous effluvia, catch fire
and fulgurate 7
The vapour or fume of iron dissolved in spirit of vitriol is
most readily set on fire.-May not the magnetic effluvia give
them a kind of magnetic direction; we see in fact, the lucid
columns, or radiating flashes, of the Aurora Borealis, almost
always shot off from the north to the south, correspondent in a
great measure to the magnetic meridian.-And I have con-
stantly observed the corona, concourse, or concentration, if {
may so call it, of these lucid rays near the zenith so much to
the east of it, as answered nearly to the western declination
of the common magnetic needle; that is, a straight line, drawn
from one to the other, would be nearly in the direction of the
magnetic meridian :-I think I never observed the corona to
the westward of it:-what seems not a little to confirm this
notion is, that during the appearance of a considerably great
and vivid northern light, the magnetic needle suffers very great
agitations; caused, probably, by the colluctation and explosion
of the sulphureous and magnetic effluvia. This is more par-
ticularly observed in Sweden and the north parts of Europe, as
being near the source of these effluvia.
But further, as we scarcely ever see an Aurora Borealis, but
when the wind blows from some point or other between the
east and west of the northern semi-circle; this also may help
to drive the sulphureous coruscating vapours southward;
and when the wind is very strong from E. N. E. or W. N. W.
it may not a little alter their magnetic direction, or current.
I have several times ºbserved, when a strong north-easterly
wind hath blown, some faint appearances of a northern light
here and there, and abundance of small, lucid, coruseating
nubiculae scattered up and down the hemisphere, now suddenly
appearing, then disappearing, so that I imagined the wind had
Il h
350 G ALE'S RECREATIONs.
dispersed the fund of luminous vapours; for we see such lucid,
vibrating, broken, small clouds after the grand explosion, and
at the end of a common Aurora Borealis;–may frequently
such small, bright, flashing clouds are seen up and down the
heavens, without any other appearance of an Aurora Borealis,
the lucid vapours being then but in small quantities, and much
scattered; but it is remarkable, that these little, flitting lumi-
mous clouds seemed always in a vibrating, tremulous motion,
and moving very fast from north to south, though sometimes
there was little or no wind :-these mebiculae were so extremely
thin, that, even stars of the third and fourth magnitude were
seen through them.
Those northern lights are seen vastly more frequent, more
bright, more beautiful, and variously coloured, in the northern
parts of Europe than here; and here much more than to the
southward ; because in the polar regions, the magnetic effluvia
are vastly more strong and copious, and the neighbouring
volcanos send up immense quantities of sulphureous vapours
(which cannot but rise very high in such a dense, cold at-
mosphere), and these, as it were, fernetting with one another,
catch fire.—In Sicily, and the surrounding seas, they see lu-
minous appearances, very near resembling those of the Aurora
Borealis, when Vesuvius or Etna burn, and these rays are
commonly of various colours, as those of the northern lights,
viz. red, yellow, greenish, crimson, & c. possibly both the one
and the other are tinged by some mineral substance from the
volcanos; for though globules of rain may refract light of
different colours, there seems to be nothing in the matter of
an Aurora Borealis that is apt to do it :—hesides, it is unques-
tionable, that the Aurora Shines by its own light, and not from
the sun, as well as the lights of Vesuvius.
We well know, that different minerals will tinge flame of
different colours :—may not then the diversity of colours of an
Aurora be another argument that it arises from the exhalations
of volcanos: the Sulphureous Yapours of volcanos are shot
up to an inconceivable height (sometimes even great stones
are thrown up from them to four or five hundred feet, and the
ashes vastly higher, so as oftentimes to be carried by the wind
fifty or a hundred miles, may, leagues), so high indeed, that
they may retain very little gravity, their centripetal force con-
tinually decreasing as their distance from the earth increases,
and their centrifugal will be much increased by their re-
G ALE's RECREATIONs. 35 I
volving about the axis of the earth in a very large circle.
But further, sulphureous vapours have a kind of vis centri-
fuga, and will rise in vacuo, whereas all other vapours sink.
It is certain, the fumes of gunpowder will rise to the top of
a tall exhausted receiver, and even prove lucid, though the
gunpowder itself doth not flash.--Thus, the vapours over
Vesuvius are sometimes very lucid, though the crater-magnet
at the time actually belched out flame: we know that sul-
phureous vapours are sometimes carried to an astonishing
height, and collected into vast bodies of inflammable matter,
far above the gross terrestrial atmosphere.—The great Dr.
Halley, from very just observations, estimated the meteor of
the 19th of March, 1718-19, (which cast such an amazing
brightness, and made such a very loud explosion), to be very
near seventy miles perpendicular above the surface of the
earth; whence it was seen over a great part of Europe at the
same time: now if such a great body of sulphureous vapours
as this could be sustained at the very top of our atmosphere,
or even in the aether above it, how much higher may we sup-
pose the mere subtile vapour of the lumen boreale to be car-
ried ?—This will account for the great height and distance
some of the northern lights are seen at, without having recourse
to M. Mairan's zodiacal light, or Professor Eulet's repulsion
of the sum beams. It is possible these vapours, when carried
to such a vast height, and in a medium so exceeding rare, may
actually become lucid, especially when mixed with a therial
nitre, as the fumes of gunpowder mount and shine in vacuo :
indeed this phoenomenon of the gunpowder suggests to me
that a highly subtilized aerial nitre always enters the compo-
sition of an Aurora (for it is every where diffused throughout
the whole atmosphere), and nothing is more like the vivid
pearl-coloured flashes of an Aurora than a defiagration of
mitre and sulphur; and the flame may be tinged with red,
green, yellow, &c., by the addition of different minerals:
certainly mitre, sulphur, and iron, are greatly disposed to in-
flame and coruscate.—The arctic regions abound with nitre.
The northern lights are vastly more frequent in cold seasons,
when the atmosphere is greatly stocked with nitre.—It is scarcely
to be doubted, but that common lightning abounds with all
these principles: hence may arise another conjecture, that
as lightning is certainly of an electrical nature, so possibly may
be the nature of an Aurora :-the incredible swiftness of its
H in Q
3.59 G ALE’s RECREATIONS.
flashes, and the instantaneous propagation of its coruscations
through all the northern parts of the hemisphere, seem to favour
such a thought.—May not the luminosity be conveyed on the
anagnetic effiuvia, as the electric on the iron wire But this is,
I fear, indulging too far in whimsey. The accounts we have
had from Iceland, Greenland, and other places within the arctic
circle, by the whale fishers, and others, that have been given by
the Jesuits, &c. who travelled to the N. E. parts of China and
'Tartary, assure us, that there are several volcanos in these parts,
Some of which have broken out within these few years.--Is it
not then the fresh eruptions of some of these volcanos that
have produced the northern lights so common of late years?
Before this present century began, it is certain they did not
appear for many years even in Sweden, Norway, and Lapland,
or at least very seldom ; whereas M. Morpertius says, they are
now almost constant in these countries during the winter
months.-Is it not then the more frequent and violent eruptions
of these volcanos that make the Aurora Borealis more com-
mon and more illustrious ' And is it not the cessation of these
eruptions that puts a stop to these luminous phoenomena, as
we know they cease for weeks, for months, for years; and
that too when all other circumstances seem to favour their
productions' r
They appear vastly more frequent and great in the most
northern countries, as they lie near the source of the magnetic
effluvia and sulphureous vapours. Doth not an appearance
of a kind of these nocturnal lights and coruscations in Sicily,
&c. on the eruption of Vesuvius, and sometimes merely from
the sulphureous exhalations issuing from it, without actual
flames, seem to confirm this opinion ;-moreover it is not
altogether improbable, that sulphureous exhalations from more
southern volcanos, swimming on the top of the atmosphere,
and revolving with the earth round its axis, may be carried
towards the poles, and contribute somewhat to the formation
of an Aurora. Persons acquainted with natural history and
philosophy will readily see on what principles I have advanced
this theory.
G ALE’s RECREATIONs. 353
REMARKABLE PROPERTIES OF NUMBERS,
©CŞ2s_-
J., Twice any number is equal to the sum of any two
numbers equally distant therefrom, the one so much the
greater, and the other so much less than that number. As
twice 9 is equal to 8 and 10, 7 and 11, 6 and 12, 5 and
13, 4 and 14, 3 and 15, 2 and 16, 1 and 17 ; for if
n=given number, and a = the number less the greater, then
m-1 =less, and n + 1 =greater, whose sum is =2n, or double
the number.
2. Only 2 and 2 whole numbers have their product and
sum alike; though there are infinite broken numbers having
that property.
3. The numbers 5 and 6 are called circular numbers;
because, like the circle, terminating where it begins, these
numbers multiplied by themselves ever so often always end
in the same number: 5 by 5 make 25, and that product
multiplied by 5 makes 125. So, 6 by 6 make 36, and 6 times
which make 216.
4. Any number divided by 9 will leave the same remain-
der as the sum of its figures divided by 9 ; consequently so
will any number composed of the same figures transposed,
and the sum of its figures divided by 9; thus 654 divided
by 9 leaves 6 for a remainder ; so will 6 -– 5 + 4 = 15, divided
by 9 , leave 6 also, and so will 645, 564, 546, 456, and
465, and the sum of any three figures so divided by 9, leave the
Same remainder.
5. If any number is divided by 9, the sum of its figures
is also divisible by 9; consequently so will any number
composed of its figures transposed, and its sum, be divisible
by 9 ; by which means many numbers divisible by 9
may be quickly found : thus 135, 153, 3 15, 351, 5 13 531,
by transposition are divisible by 9.-N. B. The property
proves multiplication by casting away the nines ; and di-
vision and extraction of the square root are proved in the
same manner, by adding the mines cast away in the re-
mainders.
H h 3
GAL E'S RECREATIONs.
6. Any number divided by 3, will leave the same remain-
der as the sum of its figures divided by 3, consequently so
will any number composed of the same figures transposed,
and the sum of its figures divided by 3:—thus 257 divided
by 3, leaves 2 remaining; and 2+5+7=14, divided by 3,
leaves 2 remaining also.
7. If any number is divisible by 3, the sum of its
figures will be also divisible by 3; consequently so will
any number of the same figures transposed, and the sum
of its figures being divisible by 3:-thus 123, 132, 213, 231,
312, 321, by transposition, and the sum of any three figures,
are all divisible by 3.
8. Any odd square number added to half I less than that
number squared, the sum will be a square number :—thus
9 added to half (0–1) S, or 4 squared=16, will be 25, a
square number; also any square number added to half I
less than that number squared, the sum will be a square
number; but will be a broken square number when the
square number taken is an even number; for a a 4- a a-1
a 4–2 aa 4–1 a 4 + 2 aa -- 1
squared - , is a square
2 4 4.
(/2 + 1 I 5 289
whose root is— hence 16+ — squared=
Q 4. 4.
17
whose root is —.
2
O. Any even number and its half squared, and I added
together, the sum will be a square number:-thus 8
added to (its half square) 16 and 1 make 25, a square
number. Also any number and its half squared, and 1
added together, will be a square; but will be a broken
square number when the first number is taken odd ; for
(! (12. (12 + 4, a +- 4
a + –squared, - + 1 =––, whose root is
2 4. 4.
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 355
tº -- 92 7 49 81
: thus, 7 + – squared, - + 1 = —, whose root
2 2 4. 4.
9
1S —,
O
10. The property of 3, 4 and 5 (or twice three, &c.
those numbers), are such that they will completely form a
right-angled triangle. N. B. This property is of use among
artificers, surveyors, &c. for adjusting their squares by a
right angle, where the sides 3 and 4 meet. Lines or cords
may be used of those lengths, or double, triple, &c. to lay
down a right-angled triangle.
11. The number 11 multiplied by 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
will end and begin with the like numbers, 22, 33, 44,
55, &c. -
12. The numbers 220 and 284 have the aliquot parts
of one number equal to the other number: thus the
aliquot parts of 220 are I 10, 55, 44, 22, 20, 11, 10, 5,
4, 2, 1, making 284; and the aliquot parts of 284 are 142,
71, 4, 2, 1, making 220.
13. Perfect numbers are those whose aliquot parts in
one sum are equal to those numbers: as 6 is the first
perfect number, whose half 3, third 2, and sixth 1, in one
sum make 6; the next perfect number is 28, whose half
14, fourth 7, seventh 4, fourteenth 2, and twenty-eighth 1,
in one sum make 28. Perfect numbers are so few, that
between I and 1000000000000, with 12 places of cyphers,
there are only these, viz. 6, 28, 496, S128, 139816,
2006 128, 33550336, 536S545.28, 85898.69056, 137438691328,
alternately ending in 6 and 8. The 20th perfect number
is 1511 172745155376893 1328, consisting of 23 figures.
The general rule to find perfect numbers
is this : 2n into 2n + 1 — I is a perfect number ; where
2n + 1 — 1 must be a prime number, and n = 1, 2, 4, 6,
8, 10, 12, &c. the 1st, 2d, 3d, 4th, 5th & c. perfect num-
ber in succession;–hence the value of n, for any perfect
356 GALE'S RECREATIONS.
number according to its place will always be equal to the
number of the place less one doubled : thus the value of n
for the 20th perfect number will be (20–1 = 19 doubled)
= 38 ; for the 3d perfect number 3–1 =2 doubled, =4=n,
&c. whence the perfect number as above.
N. B. If it be any odd number above one, then 2n + 1–1,
(above expressed) will be a composite, and no prime
number.
A SPORTIVE PROBLEM.
To find the number of pieces of money any person holds
in the right or left hand, first holding as many pieces in one
hand as the other.
Bid the person holding the equal number of pieces in both
hands, take a given number (possible) from the number of
pieces held in one hand, and put them to the number of pieces
held in the other hand; then bid the same person take as
many pieces out of that hand into which the said given
number of pieces were just put, as remained in the hand
whence those pieces were taken, and put them back into the
same hand : then there will be left in the other hand, exactly
twice the given number of pieces that were first taken out of
the contrary hand.
DEMONSTRATION.
Let w = No. pieces held in each hand, and n the given
No. (less than w) to be taken out of one hand, and put
into the other (suppose from the pieces in the left, and put
them into the right hand), then there will be a-m pieces
in the left, and a + n pieces in the right hand : now
taking a n, the pieces in the left, out of a + n pieces in
the right hand, and there will remain r + n—a + n =
2 m pieces in the right hand; being exactly double the
number of pieces first taken out of the contrary, or left
hand.
GALE'S RECREATIONS. 35
7
ANOTHER.
Out of a common pack of fifty-two cards, let part be
distributed into several distinct parcels or heaps in the manner
following; upon the lowest card of every heap, let as
many others be laid as are sufficient to make up its number
twelve, as if four be the number of the lowest card, let
eight others be laid upon it; if five, let seven; if a, let
twelve — a, &c. It is required, having given the number
of heaps, which we shall call m, as also the number of cards
still remaining in the dealer's hand, which we shall call r,
to find the sum of the numbers of all the bottom cards put
together.
SOLUTION.
Let a, b, c, &c. express the number of the bottom cards
in the several heaps; then will 12 — a express the num-
ber of all the cards lying upon the bottom card of the
first heap; that is, the number of all the cards of the first
heap, except the lowest, will be 12—a ; therefore 13—a
will be the number of all the cards in the first heap ; for
the same reason 13—b will be the number of all the cards
in the second heap; and 13—c the number of all those in
the third, and so on; therefore the number of all the cards
in all the heaps will be 13 + n – a – b–c, &c. make
a + b + c, &c. (or the sum of the number of all the
bottom cards) = a, and then we shall have the number of
all the cards drawn out into heaps = 13 n—a ; but
these together with r, the number of cards undrawn out,
make up the whole pack 52, therefore a + 52 =
13 m + r ; therefore w = 13 n— 52 -- r ; but 52 = 13
+ 4; therefore 13 m— 52 = 13 + n— 4 ; therefore
a = 13 + n — 4 + r ; in words thus: from the number
of heaps subtract four; multiply the rest by thirteen; and
this product added to the number of cards still remaining
in the dealer's hand, will give the sum of the numbers of
3,5S GALE'S RECREATIONs.
all the bottom cards put together; as for example, let there
be three heaps, and thirty cards remaining ; now 4 sub-
tracted from three leaves–1; this multiplied by 13 gives
-13, and this product added to 30, the number of cards
ºng. gives 17 for the sum of the numbers of all the bottom
Call ClS,
4 more universal Theorem is as follows:
Let tº be the number of heaps as before, p the number
9f cards in a pack; let as many cards be laid upon the
lowest of every heap as are sufficient to make up its num-
ber 7; and lastly, let r be the number of remaining cards
as before ; and the sum of the numbers of all the bottom
cards will be found to be q + 1 + n + r –p.
IMPORTANT QUERIES.
1. The writers on Fluxions say, that if any quantity is a
maximum, or minimum, that quantity being multiplied or di-
vided by any known quantity, the product or quotient will be
also a maximum or minimum:-then if any known quantity
be added to or subtracted from it, will the sum or difference
be also a maximum or minimum ?
Answer.
Fluxions, deduced from an indefinitely or infinitely small
increase or decrease of finite quantities, are nothing but the
finite ratios of the indefinitely or infinitely small quantities
by which the said finite quantities are inereased or decreased
according to a given condition :-now when any compound
variable quantity is gradually increased or decreased, on certain
conditions, till it becomes a maximum or minimum (as may be
the case when constant are compounded with variable quan-
tities, in an expression) its fluxion or variation will be nothing
in respect of the fluxion of its simple variable quantity:
it having then neither increase or decrease in those circum-
stances.
GAL E'S RECREATIONS. 359
Proposition.
But in all cases of variation, if contemporary variable quan-
tities be equal to each other, or in a given ratio, their fluxions
will be also equal, or in a given ratio; and the contrary; there-
fore multiplying or dividing any compound variable quantity
(having a naximum or minimum, or not) by a given constant
quantity, its fluxion will have the same ratio to the fluxion
of the simple variable quantity multiplied or divided by the
same constant quantity.
Thus the fluxions of a w and r, a a a and a r, or
& J.' J. Q ºr
and — are 2 aa to a, 2 arr to ar, and — to —
(Z (!, (I. (l,
respectively, all in the same ratio; being the same, had air
been a maximum or minimum ; as are likewise the fluxions
of art + b, and ar + b, or arr — b, and ar—b, respectively;
and the same fluxion of any value (and therefore of 0 value
when its fluent is a maximum or minimum) may have an
infinite number of fluents, as the fluent of a fluxion may be
a, a + r, b + æ, a -g, a - b, a -- c, &c. consequently as
the product or quantity of a maximum or minimum in quantity
on certain conditions, is also a maximum or niinimum, so like-
wise a given addition on subtraction, in quantity, to and
from that given product or quantity (being a maximum
or minimum, on certain conditions) will be a maximum or
minimum also ; making no alteration in the property of given
conditions.
WHAT is SPACE
- Artswer.
Time is to duration as place is to space or expansion:
they are so much of those beundless oceans of etermity
and immensity as is set out and distinguished from the
rest ; and so are made use of to denote the position of
finite beings in respect of one to another in some infinite
oceans of duration and space ;- each of these have a
36O GALE'S RECREATIONS.
twofold acceptation; first, time in general is taken for
so much of finite duration as is co-existent with the uni-
verse, and measured out by the motion of its great bodies:
thus it is used in the phrases before all time, and when
time shall be no more. Place is likewise taken for that
portion of infinite space possessed by the material world;
though this might more properly be called extension.
Within these two are confined the particular time, or
duration, extension, or place of all corporeal beings.
Secondly, time is sometimes applied to parts of that infinite
duration that were not really measured out by real exist-
ence; but such as we upon occasion do suppose equal to
certain lengths of measured time, as in the Julian period,
which makes an excursion of 764 years beyond the cre-
ation. Thus we may speak of place or distance in the
great Iname, wherein I can conceive a space equal to or
capable of receiving a body of any assigned dimensions. See
Lock's Human Understanding. The extent of the visible uni-
verse, which we know, on the lowest computation, must be
nearly that of a cube of 1,400,000,000,000 miles diameter,
which contains near 3,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,000,
OOO,000,000, i. e. 3 sextillions, or three millions of millions
of millions of miilions of millions of millions of cubical miles.
An amazing space this as to any power of imagination
scarcely to be distinguished from infinite space itself! But
since the vast visible system of the universe is that with which
we are alone concerned, and such as even wearies and amazes
our faculties, when we attempt So much as to imagine its
immensity, I shall wade no farther into that unfathomable abyss
of infinite extramundane space; the nicer consideration of
which, like that of infinite duration or eternity, is evidently
too large for our finite thoughts; and does ever more astonish
and confound than profit and edify mankind ; and no wonder,
since it is highly probable that both of them, as to their inmost
nature and largest extent, are alone knowable by that High
and Lofty One who inhabits Eternity.
G ALE’s RECREATIONS. 361
Many have been the objections to Sir Isaac Newton, as
if he represented infinite space as an attribute of the Deity:
his words are, “He continues always, and is present every
“ where; and by existing always and every where, he
constitutes duration and space.” But this is saying no more
than that space and duration do not necessarily exist; because
God is essentially and necessarily present in them. This
appears from the words inimediately preceding. God is
eternal and infinite ; omnipotent and omniscient; i. e. he
continues from eternity to eternity; and is present from
infinity to infinity; he governs all things, and knows all
things which are done, or can be known: he is not etermity
and infinity, but eternal and infinite : he is not duration and
space, but has duration of existence, and is present; which
last words are so clearly expressive of his meaning, that I
am at a loss to conceive how they could be misunderstood :
he accounts for the necessary existence of space in a way
the most worthy of the Deity.
Suppose a clock has three hands on its dial plate, one of
which goes round in seven days, another in 29 days, 12 hours,
44 minutes, 1 second, and 45 thirds, and the third in 365 days,
5 hours, and 49 minutes.— If all these hands are set together
at any given point of the dial plate, Query, how many years,
months, days, hours, minutes, seconds, and thirds of time
must revolve, before all the hands can meet together again
at the same point : the meaning of which may be, if a new
moon happens at any given time, viz. in a given month, and
day of the month, at a given hour and minute, and on a given
week day, how long will it be before a new moon happens again,
at the same given time, viz. month, day, hour, &c. on the same
given week day, according to the given mean or equal motion ?
{ i
GALE’s RECREATIONs.
Answer.
Stands. Times of Revol. Third. Dif, thirds.
d. h. m. s. th:
A 7 O O O O 36288000
B 29 12 44 1 4.5 153086.505 || 1 16708505
C 365 5 40 O O 18934.16400 17403298.95
Time. Rev. Time. A
As B : 1 :: A : — B performs in A time.
5
Rev.–as und. Time. Rev.–as und. Time.
A A A B
And 1– — : A : : ] : when
B A = B — A,
A and B first meet. 1 — —
B
General Rule.
The product of the times of any two revolutions of two
revolving bodies, moving uniformly, divided by the difference
of those times, will give the precise time of the next meeting
of those bodies, after setting out together, and moving the
same way.
A B
Now
being the next time of A and B meeting
B — A
to C's time of making one revolution ; therefore a time
A B
must be found when a number of
will be equal
B—A
to some other number of C's time, in ratio of A B to B–
A - C, to be found in lowest terms. Or when B–A - C
A B
side of the ratio, in lowest terms, k = A B side
B — A
of the ratio, in lowest terms, x C = A B - C. This
happens when the time is the least dividend to the times of
G ALE'S RECREATIONS. 363
revolution to A, B, C, when those three hands meet. And
so universally the least time of any number of hands meeting
after setting out together, and moving the same way, will
be a time which is the least dividend to the times of the several
and respective revolutions of those hands.
A B 36288000 × 153086.505
Hence - thirds = 9
B — A 11679S505
days, 4 hours, 11 minutes, 44 seconds, 39 thirds
1 1 S47 105
——, precisely, when A and B first meet. And
11670S505
the least dividend to 36288000, 153086505, and
18934.16400 thirds (each two reduced to lowest terms
multiplied together, and that product multiplied into their
greatest common measure) will be 15 × 240 × 10080 -
525,049 × 1 I & 927797 = 1947S350745.277830400, to
a third = (because 15 × 240 = 60 × 60, and 10080 =
24 × 60 × 7) 7 - 52594 × 11 × 927797 days =
10287 1979836 Julian years, and 82 days precisely,
required.
N. B. The foregoing is the least time when a mean, few
or full moon can happen again at the same point of time
in the same week day, and also at the same point of time
(beginning, middle, or end) of a solar year; when the sun
and moon have precisely the same place, as at first setting
out together.

WN
ū.i
ºfºº º
77 / ſº- SS y cºs
º
|
b. *- &
**: § *
PRINTED BY J. W., H., PAYNE, NORWICH.
F LATE. I.
Zºº, / / 2.3. Zºº / 73
Zºp
A/ //, /ic //, ºr
1/7: 71% ºf 7 c z/////77//
// w/ / 17%//l/ / / / –
./i/ a77 &///// a7//
/ ſ/z lºg º oſ//7/1%


PLATE. II
|-+-+-+-Hi,****|-|-
||| S. Hìł º 4||
T º}ſaeº, ，]]~
jiſ| * T
}}| / S†††?H. •
|+†† º.jiſ&
|-|-|| > |\ſ）|----+----
«*,\| \,+ſ^<)
|||| № Ī##| |_|_|_| ~
|ſihJi]] ~ || ~
<ſſ=►►►|-
\,ķ|| || S.�++•#||-
Qſiiſ|MÑJ]]~
&Ų||\ &Miſº§§
|----4-|-|-| --NI ‘J
Nº（)ș
||||/* } * #| 5
NºŲ}， *<�_|_
ȚIȚIM#NĮLAf{J
¡¡¡¡ N [[]]ſ•|| || .
�\ſ_]Miſſ | … jiji º
|-º +
||\| *， 'jſ'] º [[]]
{{！$（'ºŲºffſ Q
N^JHì|#\*J
�!--*#H|| K ||II]]>
-|-|-|* →
|SMiſſº s††） s
çR#<!--！>Iſi &
†; †}{f}，ſtº,

|F LATE.III.
s \ \ \
Aºo. 2 x \\| | | | |
&. , - Y, \ }, n
Aº. 26.5. \\
º
*}}#}}
#! #||
:







PLATE. IV.
2ht-
a Wº,
/ 3.5 *
*
o:7 Ab
Zºy
§.
\}\|）
×

PLAT). \,
A'o. 1. Z. 136.
Zºz. 2. / 166 (*#j=>
| ſº tº
º
º &_gº. É º
#########, gº ſº
tº Fºº, ########
É#
*######


Tº LATE. VI.
Bººlººlºſſºſºlſ|{{Tºlºlºſſilſº
ETTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTE=LIUTTTTTTTTTTTTºrre
* . A <\ ºilºft
HT |ſiſſilſ
IIITILITIETIETITIIHiſtinitiitiitiitiitºr





\
i
l
;
}

*:::::::: * ~ **, 3-smrt-º-º-º-º-º-º-º:
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN
TTTTTTTTTT"
3 9015 02437 5563
*
*~~~